407 MM CH95 PDF

BHT-407-MM-10
CHAPTER 95 — INSTRUMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number
INSTRUMENT SYSTEM AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
95-1 Instrument System and Integrated Avionics System

— General Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)..................... 95-00-00 23
SECTION I: INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-2 Instrument System (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................... 95-00-00 25

95-3 Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) . 95-00-00 25
95-4 Instrument Panel — Removal ........................................... 95-00-00 27
95-5 Instrument Panel — Cleaning ........................................... 95-00-00 32
95-6 Instrument Panel — Inspection......................................... 95-00-00 32
95-7 Instrument Panel — Repair............................................... 95-00-00 32
95-8 Instrument Panel — Installation ........................................ 95-00-00 32
95-9 Shroud Assembly (S/N 53000 Through 54299)........................ 95-00-00 36
95-10 Shroud Assembly — Removal .......................................... 95-00-00 36
95-11 Shroud Assembly — Cleaning .......................................... 95-00-00 38
95-12 Shroud Assembly — Inspection ........................................ 95-00-00 38
95-13 Shroud Assembly — Repair.............................................. 95-00-00 38
95-14 Shroud Assembly — Installation ....................................... 95-00-00 39
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-15 Flight Instrument System — Description

(S/N 53000 Through 54299) .......................................................... 95-00-00 41
95-16 Pitot-static System — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 41
95-17 Pitot Tube — Removal...................................................... 95-00-00 41
95-18 Pitot Tube — Installation................................................... 95-00-00 44
95-19 Static Port — Removal...................................................... 95-00-00 44
95-20 Static Port — Installation................................................... 95-00-00 46
95-21 Pitot-static System — Cleaning ........................................ 95-00-00 48
95-22 Pitot-static System — Inspection ...................................... 95-00-00 48
95-23 Pitot-static Heating System — Operational Check ........... 95-00-00 49
95-24 Pitot-static System — Leak Check.................................... 95-00-00 49
95-25 Flight Instruments — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..... 95-00-00 51
95-26 Airspeed Indicator — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 51
95-27 Airspeed Indicator — Functional Check............................ 95-00-00 53
95-28 Airspeed indicator — Removal ......................................... 95-00-00 56
95-29 Airspeed Indicator — Installation ...................................... 95-00-00 58
95-30 Altimeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .............. 95-00-00 59
95-31 Altimeter — Functional Check .......................................... 95-00-00 59
95-32 Altimeter Indicator — Removal ......................................... 95-00-00 64
95-33 Altimeter indicator — Installation ...................................... 95-00-00 66
95-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 1
BHT-407-MM-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

95-34 Encoding Altimeter (ATC Transponder Kit) — Description

(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 66
95-35 Encoding Altimeter — Removal ........................................ 95-00-00 67
95-36 Encoding Altimeter — Installation ..................................... 95-00-00 70
95-37 Vertical Speed Indicator — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 71
95-38 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) — Functional Check ......... 95-00-00 71
95-39 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) — Removal....................... 95-00-00 75
95-40 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) — Installation.................... 95-00-00 76
NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-41 Navigation Instruments (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .................... 95-00-00 79

95-42 Magnetic Compass — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 79
95-43 Magnetic Compass — Calibration
(Compass Rose Method) .................................................. 95-00-00 79
95-44 Magnetic Compass — Calibration
(Sight Compass Method) .................................................. 95-00-00 82
95-45 Inclinometer — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)......... 95-00-00 85
95-46 Directional Gyroscope (Flight Instruments Kit)
— Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................. 95-00-00 87
95-47 Directional Gyroscope (DG) — Operational Check .......... 95-00-00 87
95-48 Directional Gyroscope (DG) — Removal .......................... 95-00-00 87
95-49 Directional Gyroscope (DG) — Installation ....................... 95-00-00 89
95-50 Attitude Indicator (Optional Kit) — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 89
95-51 Attitude Indicator — Operational Check............................ 95-00-00 92
95-52 Attitude Indicator — Removal ........................................... 95-00-00 92
95-53 Attitude Indicator — Installation ........................................ 95-00-00 94
95-54 Turn and Slip Indicator (Flight Instruments Kit)
95-55 Turn and Slip Indicator — Operational Check .................. 95-00-00 97
95-56 Turn and Slip Indicator — Removal .................................. 95-00-00 97
95-57 Turn and Slip Indicator — Installation ............................... 95-00-00 99
PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-58 Propulsion Instruments (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .................... 95-00-00 101
95-59 Propulsion Instruments — Standard Practices
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 101
95-60 Electrostatic Sensitive Equipment
— Standard Practices ....................................................... 95-00-00 101
95-61 Propulsion Instruments — Removal ................................. 95-00-00 101
95-62 Propulsion Instruments — Installation .............................. 95-00-00 102
95-63 Propulsion Instruments — Exceedance Monitoring
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 104
95-00-00
Page 2 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
BHT-407-MM-10

95-64 Propulsion Instruments — Procedure to View

Exceedances .................................................................... 95-00-00 104A
95-65 Propulsion Instruments — Battery
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 105
95-66 Propulsion Instruments Built-in Test (BIT) — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 105
95-67 Power-on Built-in Test (BIT).............................................. 95-00-00 105
95-68 Commanded Built-in Test (BIT) ........................................ 95-00-00 105
95-69 Propulsion Instruments — Exceedance Data
Retrieval/Viewing/Erasing/Indicator Clock Set
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 105
95-70 Propulsion Instruments — Exceedance Data Retrieval
Using EPMPLUS for DOS and
Windows 95, 98, and ME .................................................. 95-00-00 106
95-71 Propulsion Instruments — Real-time Clock Set Using
EPMPLUS for DOS and Windows 95, 98, and ME ........... 95-00-00 110
95-72 Propulsion Instruments — Exceedance Data Retrieval
and Real Time Clock Set Using PIMS for
Windows 2000, NT, ME, XP, Vista, and Windows 7......... 95-00-00 110
95-73 Engine Torque Indication System — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 111
95-74 Engine Torque Indication System — Range Markings ..... 95-00-00 111
95-75 Engine Torque Indication System — Exceedances.......... 95-00-00 111
95-76 Engine Torque Indication System — Relationship
Between Torque Indicator and FADEC System................ 95-00-00 114
95-77 Engine Torque Indication System Transducer
— Description ................................................................... 95-00-00 114
95-78 Engine Torque Indication System — Operation................ 95-00-00 114
95-79 Engine Torque Indication System — Operational Check.. 95-00-00 117
95-80 Engine Torque Indication System — Functional Check.... 95-00-00 117
95-81 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Removal ............ 95-00-00 123
95-82 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Installation ......... 95-00-00 123
95-83 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Bleeding ............ 95-00-00 125
95-84 Measured Gas Temperature Indication System
95-85 MGT Indication System — Range Markings..................... 95-00-00 127
95-86 MGT Indication System — Exceedances ......................... 95-00-00 127
95-87 MGT Indication System Thermocouples — Description ... 95-00-00 130
95-88 MGT Indication System Thermocouples — Operation ..... 95-00-00 130
95-89 MGT Indication System — Operational Check ................. 95-00-00 131
95-90 MGT Indicator — Functional Check — Normal Mode....... 95-00-00 131
95-91 MGT Indicator — Functional Check — Start Mode........... 95-00-00 138
95-92 MGT Indicator — Functional Check — Resistance
Check of Wiring................................................................. 95-00-00 141
95-93 MGT Thermocouple Loop — Resistance Check .............. 95-00-00 142
95-94 Thermocouple Harness — Removal/Installation............... 95-00-00 142
95-95 Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indication System
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-96 NG Indication System — Range Markings ....................... 95-00-00 144

95-97 NG Indication System — Exceedances ............................ 95-00-00 144
95-98 NG Indication System Pickup — Description.................... 95-00-00 146
95-99 NG Indication System — Operation.................................. 95-00-00 146
95-100 NG Indication System — Operational Check.................... 95-00-00 147
95-101 NG Indication System — Functional Check...................... 95-00-00 151
95-102 NG (N1) Magnetic Pickup — Removal/Installation ........... 95-00-00 153
95-103 Dual Tachometer Indication System — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 153
95-104 Dual Tachometer System — Range Markings.................. 95-00-00 155
95-105 Dual Tachometer Indication System, NR Monopole
Sensor — Description ....................................................... 95-00-00 158
95-106 Dual Tachometer Indication System, NP (N2) Speed
Pickup — Description........................................................ 95-00-00 158
95-107 Dual Tachometer Indication System — Operation............ 95-00-00 159
95-108 Dual Tachometer Indicator — Removal............................ 95-00-00 160
95-109 Dual Tachometer Indicator — Installation......................... 95-00-00 160
95-110 Dual Tachometer Indication System
— Operational Check........................................................ 95-00-00 160
95-111 Dual Tachometer Indication System
— Functional Check.......................................................... 95-00-00 165
95-112 NR Monopole Sensor — Removal.................................... 95-00-00 170
95-113 NR Monopole Sensor — Installation................................. 95-00-00 170
95-114 NP (N2) Monopole Sensor — Removal/Installation.......... 95-00-00 172
95-115 Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System
— Range Markings ........................................................... 95-00-00 175
95-117 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Description ............... 95-00-00 176
95-118 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Description .................... 95-00-00 176
95-119 Engine Oil Pressure Indication System — Operation ....... 95-00-00 176
95-120 Engine Oil Temperature Indication System
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 177
— Power Requirements.................................................... 95-00-00 178
95-122 Engine Oil Temperature Indication System
95-123 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Functional Check .......... 95-00-00 180
95-124 Engine Oil Pressure Indication System
95-125 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal........................ 95-00-00 181
95-126 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Installation..................... 95-00-00 181
95-127 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal ................... 95-00-00 183
95-128 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Installation ................ 95-00-00 184
95-129 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Bleeding ................... 95-00-00 186
95-130 Transmission Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-131 XMSN Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System

— Range Markings ........................................................... 95-00-00 189
95-132 Transmission Oil Pressure Indication System
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 189
95-133 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Description ..... 95-00-00 190
95-134 Transmission Oil Temperature Indication System
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 190
95-135 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Description .......... 95-00-00 191
95-136 Transmission Oil Temperature Indicator
95-137 Transmission Oil Temperature Probe
95-138 Transmission Oil Pressure Indication
95-139 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal.............. 95-00-00 194
95-140 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Installation........... 95-00-00 196
95-141 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal ......... 95-00-00 196
95-142 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Installation ...... 95-00-00 197
95-143 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer Line — Bleeding . 95-00-00 199
FUEL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-144 Fuel Pressure Instrument System (S/N 53000 Through 54299).... 95-00-00 201
95-145 Fuel Pressure Indication System — Description (S/N 53000
Through 54299) ........................................................................ 95-00-00 201
95-145A Fuel Pressure Indicator — Removal and Installation ........ 95-00-00 201
95-146 Fuel Pressure Indication System — Range Markings ...... 95-00-00 201
95-147 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Description ......................... 95-00-00 201
95-148 Fuel Pressure Indication System — Operation................. 95-00-00 201
95-149 Fuel Pressure Indication System — Functional Check ..... 95-00-00 201
95-150 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal............................. 95-00-00 205
95-151 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Installation.......................... 95-00-00 205
95-152 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 207
95-153 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Component Replacement
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 207
95-154 Fuel Quantity Indicator — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 207
95-154A Fuel Quantity Indicator — Removal and Installation......... 95-00-00 209
95-155 Fuel Probes — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ......... 95-00-00 211
95-156 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 211
95-157 Fuel Signal Conditioner, Fuel Low Level Circuits
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 212
95-158 Low Level Detection Power-up Built-in Test (BIT) ............ 95-00-00 212
95-159 Low Level Detection Forward Fuel Probe (1A3)
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 212
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-160 Fuel Signal Conditioner Quantity Circuits, Built-in

Test (BIT) — Operation..................................................... 95-00-00 212
95-161 Fuel Signal Conditioner Unit — Removal ......................... 95-00-00 213
95-162 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Installation.............................. 95-00-00 215
95-163 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Operation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 215
95-164 Fuel Probes — Operation ................................................. 95-00-00 215
95-165 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Operation ............................... 95-00-00 215
95-166 Fuel Density Compensation — Operation ........................ 95-00-00 216
95-167 Forward Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation ........................ 95-00-00 216
95-168 Auxiliary Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation........................ 95-00-00 216
95-169 Fuel Quantity Indicator — Operational Check
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 216
95-170 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Operational Check
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 220
95-171 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Calibration
Procedure ......................................................................... 95-00-00 220
95-172 Low Level Function of Forward Fuel Cell Probe No. 3
— Operational Check (S/N 53000 Through 54299).................. 95-00-00 225
95-173 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Test Set
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 225
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-174 Miscellaneous Instruments (S/N 53000 Through 54299)............... 95-00-00 231

95-175 Ammeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299).............. 95-00-00 231
95-176 Shunt Resistor — Description........................................... 95-00-00 231
95-177 Ammeter Indication System — Operation......................... 95-00-00 232
95-177A Ammeter Indicator — Removal and Installation................ 95-00-00 232
95-178 Ammeter Indication System — Operational Check........... 95-00-00 232
95-179 Shunt Resistor — Removal............................................... 95-00-00 237
95-180 Shunt Resistor — Installation............................................ 95-00-00 237
95-181 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 241
95-182 Clock — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................... 95-00-00 241
95-183 Clock Battery Replacement .............................................. 95-00-00 241
95-184 Clock Test Mode ............................................................... 95-00-00 241
95-185 Clock Universal Time (UT) Set ......................................... 95-00-00 241
95-186 Clock Local Time (LT) Set ................................................ 95-00-00 244
95-187 Clock Flight Time (FT) Alarm Set...................................... 95-00-00 244
95-188 Clock Flight Time Alarm Display ....................................... 95-00-00 244
95-189 Clock Display Selection (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .............. 95-00-00 245
95-190 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Display — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 245
95-191 Volts Display — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)........ 95-00-00 245
95-192 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Operational Check
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................................................... 95-00-00 245
95-193 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Removal ............................. 95-00-00 248
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-194 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Installation .......................... 95-00-00 248

95-195 Hourmeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........... 95-00-00 252
95-196 Hourmeter — Removal ..................................................... 95-00-00 252
95-197 Hourmeter — Installation .................................................. 95-00-00 252
95-198 Hourmeter — Operational Check...................................... 95-00-00 252
SECTION II: INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-199 Garmin G1000H Integrated Avionic System — Operational and

Supplemental Maintenance Information
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ........................................................ 95-00-00 259
95-200 Integrated Avionics System — General
95-201 Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)..... 95-00-00 266
95-202 Instrument Panel — Removal................................................... 95-00-00 266
95-203 Instrument Panel — Cleaning................................................... 95-00-00 269
95-204 Instrument Panel — Inspection................................................. 95-00-00 269
95-205 Instrument Panel — Repair ...................................................... 95-00-00 269
95-206 Instrument Panel — Installation................................................ 95-00-00 269
95-207 Glareshield Assembly (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)..................... 95-00-00 270
95-208 Glareshield Assembly — Removal ........................................... 95-00-00 272
95-209 Glareshield Assembly — Cleaning ........................................... 95-00-00 272
95-210 Glareshield Assembly — Inspection ......................................... 95-00-00 272
95-211 Glareshield Assembly — Repair............................................... 95-00-00 272
95-212 Glareshield Assembly — Installation ........................................ 95-00-00 273
95-213 Shroud Assembly (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ........................... 95-00-00 273
95-214 Shroud Assembly — Removal.................................................. 95-00-00 273
95-215 Shroud Assembly — Cleaning.................................................. 95-00-00 278
95-216 Shroud Assembly — Inspection................................................ 95-00-00 278
95-217 Shroud Assembly — Repair ..................................................... 95-00-00 279
95-218 Shroud Assembly — Installation............................................... 95-00-00 280
95-219 Instrument Panel Mounted Components
95-220 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display
(MFD) (GDU 1040H) — Removal............................................. 95-00-00 282
(MFD) (GDU 1040H) — Cleaning............................................. 95-00-00 284
(MFD) (GDU 1040H) — Inspection........................................... 95-00-00 284
(MFD) (GDU 1040H) — Installation.......................................... 95-00-00 284
95-224 Master Warning/Caution Pushbutton Assembly (3150S1)
— Removal ............................................................................... 95-00-00 286
— Cleaning ............................................................................... 95-00-00 286
— Inspection............................................................................. 95-00-00 286
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10


— Installation ............................................................................ 95-00-00 286
95-228 RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly (3160S2) — Removal .... 95-00-00 288
95-229 RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly (3160S2) — Cleaning .... 95-00-00 290
95-230 RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly (3160S2) — Inspection.. 95-00-00 290
95-231 RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly (3160S2)
— Installation ............................................................................ 95-00-00 290
95-232 FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) — Removal ................................ 95-00-00 290
95-233 FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) — Cleaning ................................ 95-00-00 291
95-234 FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) — Inspection .............................. 95-00-00 291
95-235 FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) — Installation ............................. 95-00-00 291
95-236 Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) — Removal ................................... 95-00-00 293
95-237 Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) — Cleaning ................................... 95-00-00 293
95-238 Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) — Inspection ................................. 95-00-00 293
95-239 Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) — Installation ................................ 95-00-00 293
95-240 DU Backup, Fuel Quantity, FADEC Overspeed Test, Pedal
Stop Test, Fire Test, and Float Test Pushbutton Switches
— Removal ............................................................................... 95-00-00 295
— Cleaning ............................................................................... 95-00-00 297
— Inspection............................................................................. 95-00-00 297
— Installation ............................................................................ 95-00-00 297
95-244 Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS-H) — Removal...... 95-00-00 298
95-245 Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS-H) — Cleaning...... 95-00-00 300
95-246 Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS-H) — Inspection.... 95-00-00 300
95-247 Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS-H) — Installation... 95-00-00 300
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-248 Pitot-static System — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) .. 95-00-00 301
95-249 Pitot Tube — Removal.............................................................. 95-00-00 301
95-250 Pitot Tube — Cleaning.............................................................. 95-00-00 305
95-251 Pitot Tube — Inspection ........................................................... 95-00-00 305
95-252 Pitot Tube — Installation........................................................... 95-00-00 305
95-253 Static Port — Removal ............................................................. 95-00-00 306
95-254 Static Port — Cleaning ............................................................. 95-00-00 306
95-255 Static Port — Inspection ........................................................... 95-00-00 306
95-256 Static Port — Installation .......................................................... 95-00-00 308
95-257 Pitot-static System — Cleaning ................................................ 95-00-00 308
95-258 Pitot-static System — Inspection .............................................. 95-00-00 309
95-259 Pitot-static Heating System — Operational Check ................... 95-00-00 309
95-260 Pitot-static System — Leak Check
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ................................................... 95-00-00 310
95-00-00
Page 8 Rev. 35 10 DEC 2012 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
BHT-407-MM-10

AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-261 Air Data Computer System (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)............. 95-00-00 313
95-262 Air Data Computer (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) .................... 95-00-00 313
95-263 Outside Air Temperature Probe
95-264 Configuration Module (Air Data Computer (GDC 74H))
95-265 Barometric and Pitot Instruments on the Primary Flight Display
95-266 Air Data Computer System — Operation
95-267 Air Data Computer System — Component Replacement......... 95-00-00 316
95-268 Air Data Computer (GDC 74H) — Removal ............................. 95-00-00 316
95-269 Air Data Computer — Cleaning ................................................ 95-00-00 318
95-270 Air Data Computer — Inspection .............................................. 95-00-00 318
95-271 Air Data Computer (GDC 74H) — Installation .......................... 95-00-00 318
95-272 Airspeed Indications — Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
Standby Airspeed Indicator — Operational Check ................... 95-00-00 319
95-273 Velocity Not to Exceed (VNE) — Operational Check ............... 95-00-00 321
95-274 Altitude Indications — Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
Standby Altimeter — Operational Check .................................. 95-00-00 322
95-275 Vertical Speed Indications — Primary Flight Display (PFD)
— Operational Check ............................................................... 95-00-00 325
— Removal ............................................................................... 95-00-00 326
— Cleaning ............................................................................... 95-00-00 328
— Inspection............................................................................. 95-00-00 328
— Installation ............................................................................ 95-00-00 328
95-280 Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59) — Removal .......... 95-00-00 329
95-281 Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59) — Cleaning .......... 95-00-00 329
95-282 Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59) — Inspection ........ 95-00-00 329
95-283 Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59) — Installation ....... 95-00-00 329
95-284 Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59)
STANDBY INSTRUMENTS (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-285 Standby Instruments (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)

— Description ................................................................................ 95-00-00 333
95-286 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Description
95-287 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Removal................................... 95-00-00 333
95-288 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Cleaning................................... 95-00-00 336
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-289 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Inspection................................. 95-00-00 336

95-290 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Installation................................ 95-00-00 336
95-291 Standby Altimeter — Description
95-292 Standby Altimeter Indicator — Removal................................... 95-00-00 341
95-293 Standby Altimeter Indicator — Cleaning................................... 95-00-00 343
95-294 Standby Altimeter Indicator — Inspection................................. 95-00-00 343
95-295 Standby Altimeter Indicator — Installation................................ 95-00-00 343
95-296 Magnetic Compass — Description
95-297 Magnetic Compass — Calibration (Compass Rose Method) ... 95-00-00 344
95-298 Magnetic Compass — Calibration (Sight Compass Method) ... 95-00-00 348
INTEGRATED FLIGHT DISPLAY SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-299 Flight Instrument System — Integrated Displays

95-300 Airspeed Indicator (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ..................... 95-00-00 353
95-301 Attitude Indicator (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ....................... 95-00-00 357
95-302 Altimeter (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) .................................... 95-00-00 357
95-303 Radar Altimeter (RA 4500) (Optional Kit)
95-304 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)... 95-00-00 360
95-305 Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath Indicators
95-306 Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications
95-307 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
95-308 Transponder Mode (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).................... 95-00-00 364
95-309 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Indication
95-310 Wind Data Indication (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ................. 95-00-00 364
95-311 Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and Dual Tachometer
95-312 PFD Annunciators and Alerting Features
95-313 Integrated Avionics and Display System
95-314 Integrated Avionics Units .......................................................... 95-00-00 367
95-315 Display Units............................................................................. 95-00-00 369
95-316 Airframe and Engine System Processor (GEA 71H) ................ 95-00-00 369
95-317 Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) ........................................ 95-00-00 369
95-318 Configuration Modules.............................................................. 95-00-00 370
95-319 Miscellaneous Status Pages on the Multi-Function Display
and Primary Flight Display........................................................ 95-00-00 370
95-320 Integrated Avionics and Display System — Operation .................. 95-00-00 370
95-321 Integrated Avionics and Display system — Redundancy ......... 95-00-00 371
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-322 Integrated Avionics and Display System

— Component Replacement .................................................... 95-00-00 373
95-323 Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA 63H) — Removal....................... 95-00-00 373
95-324 Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA 63H) — Cleaning....................... 95-00-00 373
95-325 Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA 63H) — Inspection..................... 95-00-00 375
95-326 Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA 63H) — Installation.................... 95-00-00 375
95-327 Display Units — Removal ......................................................... 95-00-00 376
95-328 Display Units — Cleaning ......................................................... 95-00-00 376
95-329 Display Units — Inspection....................................................... 95-00-00 376
95-330 Display Units — Installation ...................................................... 95-00-00 376
95-331 Configuration Module (Primary Flight Display (PFD))
— Removal ............................................................................... 95-00-00 376
— Cleaning ............................................................................... 95-00-00 378
— Inspection............................................................................. 95-00-00 378
— Installation ............................................................................ 95-00-00 378
95-335 Airframe and Engine System Processor (GEA 71H)
— Removal ............................................................................... 95-00-00 379
— Cleaning ............................................................................... 95-00-00 379
— Inspection............................................................................. 95-00-00 381
— Installation ............................................................................ 95-00-00 381
95-339 Configuration Module (Airframe and Engine System
Processor) — Removal............................................................. 95-00-00 382
Processor) — Cleaning............................................................. 95-00-00 382
Processor) — Inspection .......................................................... 95-00-00 384
Processor) — Installation.......................................................... 95-00-00 384
95-343 Backshell Thermocouple (Airframe and Engine System
Processor) — Replacement...................................................... 95-00-00 384
95-344 Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) — Removal .................... 95-00-00 385
95-345 Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) — Cleaning .................... 95-00-00 385
95-346 Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) — Inspection .................. 95-00-00 385
95-347 Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) — Installation ................. 95-00-00 387
95-348 Information, Maintenance and Configuration Page Navigation,
Software and Configuration Loading, Database Subscriptions,
and System Troubleshooting ......................................................... 95-00-00 387
95-349 Multi-Function Display (MFD) Page Group Navigation............. 95-00-00 387
95-350 Bell Maintenance Pages (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)................. 95-00-00 396
95-351 FAULTS (ENG/ECU FAULTS) — Bell Maintenance Page....... 95-00-00 396
95-352 DATA STATUS (ENG/ECU DATA & STATUS)
— Bell Maintenance Page ........................................................ 95-00-00 396
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-353 EXCEEDANCES & CHIP HISTORY

— Bell Maintenance Page ........................................................ 95-00-00 396
95-354 POWER CHECK HISTORY — Bell Maintenance Page ........... 95-00-00 397
95-355 Accessing the Bell Maintenance Pages on the Multi-Function
Display (MFD)........................................................................... 95-00-00 397
95-356 Saving the Data Displayed on the Bell Maintenance Pages,
Information Pages, and Screen Displays.................................. 95-00-00 398
95-357 Recording of Flight Data Information ................................ 95-00-00 398
95-358 Clearing History From the Bell Maintenance Pages ................. 95-00-00 399
95-359 Configuration Page Group Navigation ...................................... 95-00-00 406
95-360 Requirements To Load Software and Configuration Files Into
the G1000H System (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ....................... 95-00-00 416
95-361 Procedure To Create a Main Software Loader Image SD
Card .......................................................................................... 95-00-00 416
95-362 Basic Initial G1000H Software Loading Procedure................... 95-00-00 419
95-363 G1000H Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) Replacement
— Software Loading Procedure................................................ 95-00-00 421
(MFD) (GDU 1040H) Software and Configuration Loading
Procedure ................................................................................. 95-00-00 421
95-365 Primary Flight Display (PFD) (GDU 1040H) Software and
Configuration Loading Procedure ............................................. 95-00-00 421
95-366 Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H) Software and
Configuration Loading Procedure ............................................. 95-00-00 424
95-367 Integrated Avionics Units No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H)
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure....................... 95-00-00 426
95-368 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) Software and Configuration
Loading Procedure ................................................................... 95-00-00 428
95-369 Attitude and Heading Reference System (GRS 77H) and
Magnetometer (GMU 44) Software and Configuration
95-370 Air Data Computer (GDC 74H) Software and Configuration
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure....................... 95-00-00 433
95-372 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) Software and Configuration
95-373 Optional Kits Software and Configuration Loading
Procedure ................................................................................. 95-00-00 436
95-374 Kit Installation Software and Configuration Loading
Procedure ................................................................................. 95-00-00 436
95-375 Kit Removal Software and Configuration Procedure ................ 95-00-00 438
95-376 Navigation Databases — Subscription and Update Loading
Procedures ............................................................................... 95-00-00 440
95-377 Garmin G1000H Integrated Avionics System
— Troubleshooting ................................................................... 95-00-00 440
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM (EIS) (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-378 Engine Indicating System (EIS) (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)...... 95-00-00 441
95-379 Power Situation Indicator (PSI) (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ...... 95-00-00 441
95-380 PSI — Power Indicator Section ................................................ 95-00-00 441
95-381 PSI — Power Parameter Digital Readouts ............................... 95-00-00 445
95-382 PSI — Dual Tachometer Section.............................................. 95-00-00 446
95-383 PSI — Engine Start................................................................... 95-00-00 446
95-384 PSI — 5-Minute Takeoff Zone Timer ........................................ 95-00-00 448
95-385 PSI — Engine Data Source Annunciation and Miscompare
Monitoring ................................................................................. 95-00-00 448
95-386 Power Situation Indicator (PSI) — Torque, MGT, and NG
Power Indicator Section — Operational Check ........................ 95-00-00 450
95-387 PSI — Engine Torque (Q) Data Inputs and Exceedance
Monitoring (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)....................................... 95-00-00 453
95-388 Engine Torque Indication System — Relationship Between
Torque Indicator and FADEC System ...................................... 95-00-00 456
95-389 Engine Torque Indication System Transducer — Description .. 95-00-00 456
95-390 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Removal.................... 95-00-00 458
95-391 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Installation................. 95-00-00 458
95-392 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Bleeding .................... 95-00-00 458
95-393 PSI — Torque (Q) Indication — Operational Check ................. 95-00-00 460
95-394 PSI — Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Data Inputs and
Exceedance Monitoring (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).................. 95-00-00 462
95-395 MGT Indication System Thermocouples — Description ........... 95-00-00 465
95-396 Thermocouple Harness — Removal/Installation ...................... 95-00-00 465
95-397 MGT Thermocouple Loop — Resistance Check ...................... 95-00-00 465
95-398 PSI — Measured Gas Temperature (MGT)
95-399 PSI — Gas Producer (NG) Data Inputs and Exceedance
95-400 NG (N1) Magnetic Pickup — Description ................................. 95-00-00 470
95-401 NG (N1) Magnetic Pickup — Removal/Installation ................... 95-00-00 470
95-402 PSI — Gas Producer (NG) — Operational Check .................... 95-00-00 471
95-403 PSI — Power Turbine (NP) Data Inputs and Exceedance
95-404 NP (N2) Speed Pickup — Description ...................................... 95-00-00 475
95-405 NP (N2) Magnetic Pickup — Removal/Installation ................... 95-00-00 475
95-406 PSI — Power Turbine RPM NP (N2) — Operational Check..... 95-00-00 476
95-407 PSI — Main Rotor (NR) Data Inputs and Exceedance
95-408 NR Monopole Sensor — Description........................................ 95-00-00 478
95-409 NR Monopole Sensor — Removal............................................ 95-00-00 480
95-410 NR Monopole Sensor — Installation......................................... 95-00-00 480
95-411 PSI — Rotor RPM (NR) — Operational Check......................... 95-00-00 482
95-412 EIS — Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication............... 95-00-00 484
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-413 Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication System

— Range Markings ................................................................... 95-00-00 487
95-414 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Description ....................... 95-00-00 488
95-415 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Description............................ 95-00-00 489
95-416 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal................................ 95-00-00 490
95-417 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Installation............................. 95-00-00 490
95-418 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Functional Check .................. 95-00-00 492
95-419 Engine Oil Temperature — Operational Check ........................ 95-00-00 492
95-420 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal........................... 95-00-00 493
95-421 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Installation........................ 95-00-00 493
95-422 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Bleeding ........................... 95-00-00 495
95-423 Engine Oil Pressure — Operational Check .............................. 95-00-00 496
95-424 EIS — Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication
95-425 EIS — Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature
Indication System — Range Markings...................................... 95-00-00 497
95-426 Transmission Oil Pressure Indication System — Operation..... 95-00-00 500
95-427 Transmission Oil Temperature Indication System
— Operation ............................................................................. 95-00-00 501
95-428 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal ..................... 95-00-00 502
95-429 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Installation .................. 95-00-00 502
95-430 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Functional Check........ 95-00-00 504
95-431 Transmission Oil Temperature — Operational Check .............. 95-00-00 504
95-432 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal................. 95-00-00 505
95-433 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Installation.............. 95-00-00 507
95-434 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer Line — Bleeding ......... 95-00-00 507
95-435 Transmission Oil Pressure — Operational Check .................... 95-00-00 508
95-436 EIS — Amperage Indication (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ........... 95-00-00 509
95-437 Shunt Resistor — Description................................................... 95-00-00 511
95-438 Shunt Resistor — Removal ...................................................... 95-00-00 511
95-439 Shunt Resistor — Installation ................................................... 95-00-00 513
95-440 Ammeter Indication System — Operational Check .................. 95-00-00 513
95-441 EIS — Voltage Indication (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............... 95-00-00 515
95-442 Voltage Indication — Operational Check.................................. 95-00-00 515
95-443 EIS — Fuel Quantity Indication (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ...... 95-00-00 516
95-444 Fuel Quantity Gauging System (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) . 95-00-00 519
95-445 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Component Replacement
95-446 Fuel Probes — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ....... 95-00-00 520
95-447 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Description
95-448 Fuel Signal Conditioner, Fuel Low Level Circuits
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 521
95-449 Low Level Detection Power-up Built-in Test (BIT) ............ 95-00-00 521
95-450 Low Level Detection Forward Fuel Probe (1A3)
— Operation...................................................................... 95-00-00 521
95-451 Fuel Signal Conditioner Quantity Circuits, Built-in
Test (BIT) — Operation..................................................... 95-00-00 521
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-452 Fuel Signal Conditioner Unit — Removal ......................... 95-00-00 522

95-453 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Installation.............................. 95-00-00 524
95-454 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Operation
95-455 Fuel Probes — Operation ................................................. 95-00-00 524
95-456 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Operation ............................... 95-00-00 524
95-457 Fuel Density Compensation — Operation ........................ 95-00-00 525
95-458 Forward Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation ........................ 95-00-00 525
95-459 Auxiliary Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation........................ 95-00-00 525
95-460 Fuel Quantity Gauging System
— Calibration Procedure................................................... 95-00-00 525
95-461 Fuel Quantity Indication — Functional Check........................... 95-00-00 528
95-462 Fuel Quantity (Empty Tank) — Functional Check .................... 95-00-00 528
95-463 Low Level Function of Forward Fuel Cell Probe No. 3
— Operational Check (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)................ 95-00-00 529
95-464 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Test Set
95-465 EIS — Fuel Pressure Indication (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ..... 95-00-00 534
95-466 Fuel Pressure Indication — Range Markings ........................... 95-00-00 534
95-467 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Description................................. 95-00-00 534
95-468 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal .................................... 95-00-00 537
95-469 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Installation ................................. 95-00-00 537
95-470 Fuel Pressure Indication System — Functional Check............. 95-00-00 538
95-471 EIS — Fuel Flow Indication (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............ 95-00-00 540
95-472 Fuel Flow Indication — Operational Check .............................. 95-00-00 540
FIGURES
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-1 Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................... 26

95-2 Instrument Panel — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ...... 28
95-3 Shroud Assembly — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..... 37
95-4 Pitot-static System — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)......................... 42
95-5 Pitot-static System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ......... 43
95-6 Pitot Tube — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)................. 45
95-7 Static Port — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)................. 47
95-8 Airspeed Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299).......................... 52
95-9 Airspeed Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .......... 54
95-10 Airspeed Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .... 57
95-11 Altimeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................................ 60
95-12 Altimeter — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ......................... 61
95-13 Altimeter — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................... 65
95-14 Encoding Altimeter — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ......... 68
95-15 Encoding Altimeter — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ... 69
95-16 Vertical Speed Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................ 72
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-17 Vertical Speed Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) . 73
95-18 Vertical Speed Indicator — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 77
95-19 Magnetic Compass — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)........................ 80
95-20 Compass Rose Method — Diagram (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ..................... 81
95-21 Sighting Compass Method — Diagram (S/N 53000 Through 54299)................. 84
95-22 Inclinometer — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................................... 86
95-23 Directional Gyroscope Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .... 88
95-24 Direction Gyroscope — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 90
95-25 Attitude Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)............................ 91
95-26 Attitude Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............ 93
95-27 Attitude Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ...... 95
95-28 Turn and Slip Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .................. 96
95-29 Turn and Slip Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ... 98
95-30 Turn and Slip Indicator — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 100
95-31 Propulsion Instruments — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 103
95-32 Engine Torque Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................ 112
95-33 Engine Torque Indication System — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 113
95-34 Engine Torque Indication System — Trouble No. 1
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 118
95-35 Engine Toque Indication System — Trouble No.
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) .............................................................................. 119
95-36 Engine Torque Indication System — Trouble No. 3
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 120
95-37 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 124
95-38 Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Indicator — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 126
95-39 MGT Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299).. 128
95-40 MGT Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............. 132
95-43 NG Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .................................. 143
95-44 NG Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .... 145
95-45 NG Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................ 148
95-48 Dual Tachometer — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................... 154
95-49 Dual Tachometer System — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 156
95-50 Dual Tachometer Indicator — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 161
95-51 Dual Tachometer Indication System — Trouble No. 1
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 163
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number

(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 164
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 166
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 167
95-55 NR Monopole Sensor — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 171
95-56 Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure Indicator — Description

(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 173
95-57 Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 174
95-58 Functional Check Setup for the Engine Oil Temperature Indicator
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 179
95-59 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 182
95-60 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 185
95-61 Transmission Oil Temperature/Pressure Indicator — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 187
95-62 Transmission Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System
— Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................................ 188
95-63 Functional Check Setup for Transmission Oil Temperature Indicator
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 192
95-64 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 195
95-65 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 198
95-66 Fuel Pressure Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................. 202
95-67 Fuel Pressure Indication System — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 203
95-68 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 206
95-69 Fuel Quantity Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .................. 208
95-70 Fuel Quantity Indication System — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 210
95-71 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 214
95-72 Fuel Quantity Indicator — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)............... 217
95-75 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299).. 221
95-76 Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Trouble No. 2 (S/N 53000 Through 54299).. 222
95-77 Fuel Quantity Gauging System Test Set (S/N 53000 Through 54299)............... 226
95-78 Low Level Function of Forward Fuel Cell Probe No. 3 — Trouble No. 1
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 227
95-79 Ammeter Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ......................... 233
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-80 Ammeter Indication System — Simplified Schematic

(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 234
95-81 Ammeter Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)....... 235
95-85 Shunt Resistor — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299).......... 240
95-86 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............. 242
95-87 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 243
95-88 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299).......... 246
95-92 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Removal and Installation
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 251
95-93 Hourmeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)...................................... 253
95-94 Hourmeter — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................ 254
95-95 Hourmeter — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299).................................. 256
95-98 Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).......................... 260
95-99 G1000H Integrated Avionics System — Primary Component Locations
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............................................................................. 262
95-100 G1000H Integrated Avionics System — Architecture Overview
95-101 Instrument Panel Assembly — Removal and Installation
95-102 Glareshield Assembly — Removal and Installation
95-103 Shroud Assembly — Removal and Installation
95-104 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD)
(GDU 1040H) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ......... 283
95-105 Master Warning/Caution Pushbutton Assembly (3150S1) — Removal and
Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ........................................................... 287
95-106 RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly — Removal and Installation
95-107 FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) — Removal and Installation
95-108 Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) — Removal and Installation
95-109 DU Backup, Fuel Quantity, FADEC Overspeed Test, Pedal Stop Test,
Fire Test, and Float Test Pushbutton Switches — Removal and Installation
95-110 Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS-H) — Removal and Installation
95-111 Pitot-static System — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ....................... 302
95-112 Pitot-static System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)........ 303
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-113 Pitot Tube — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............... 304
95-114 Static Ports — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............. 307
95-115 Air Data Computer System — Simplified Schematic
95-116 Air Data Computer (GDC 74H) — Removal and Installation
95-117 Configuration Module (Air Data Computer (GDC 74H)) — Removal and
95-118 Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59) — Removal and Installation
95-119 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).......... 334
95-120 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Simplified Schematic
95-121 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Removal and Installation
95-122 Standby Altimeter — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ........................ 339
95-123 Standby Altimeter — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ......... 340
95-124 Standby Altimeter Indicator — Removal and Installation
95-125 Magnetic Compass — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ...................... 345
95-126 Compass Rose Method — Diagram (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).................... 347
95-127 Sighting Compass Method — Diagram (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............... 350
95-128 Primary Flight Display (PFD) (Default) — Description
95-129 Additional PFD Information — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).......... 355
95-130 Airspeed Indicator — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)........................ 356
95-131 Attitude Indicator — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).......................... 358
95-132 Altimeter — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)....................................... 359
95-133 Vertical Speed and Vertical Deviation Indication — Description
95-134 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD) — Description
95-135 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) — Description
95-136 Outside Air Temperature Indication — Description
95-137 Wind Data Indication — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).................... 366
95-138 Integrated Avionics and Display System — Simplified Schematic
95-139 Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA 63H) — Removal and Installation
95-140 Configuration Module (Primary Flight Display (PFD)) — Removal and
95-141 Airframe and Engine System Processor (GEA 71H) — Removal and
Installation........................................................................................................... 380
95-142 Configuration Module (Airframe and Engine System Processor) — Removal
and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) .................................................... 383
95-143 Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) — Removal and Installation
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-144 MFD Page Group Navigation.............................................................................. 389

95-145 Bell Maintenance Pages — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) .............. 400
95-146 Configuration Page Group Navigation ................................................................ 408
95-147 Propulsion Instrument Displays — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ... 442
95-148 Engine Page and Reversionary Mode Displays — Description
95-149 Power Situation Indicator (PSI) — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent).... 444
95-150 PSI — Dual Tachometer Section — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent). 447
95-151 PSI — Engine Data Source Annunciation and Miscompare Monitoring
— Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)...................................................... 449
95-152 PSI — Torque Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-153 Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
95-154 PSI — MGT Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-155 PSI — NG Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-156 PSI — NP Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-157 PSI — NR Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-158 NR Monopole Sensor — Removal and Installation
95-159 EIS — Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication — Description
95-160 Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication System — Simplified
Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)............................................................ 486
95-161 Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation
95-162 Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
95-163 EIS — Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication — Description
95-164 EIS — Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication System
— Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ...................................... 499
95-165 Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation
95-166 Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
95-167 EIS — Amperage and Voltage Indications — Description
95-168 EIS — Amperage and Voltage Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-169 Shunt Resistor — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)........ 514
95-170 EIS — Fuel Indications — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ................ 517
95-171 EIS — Fuel Quantity Indication System — Simplified Schematic
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-172 Fuel Signal Conditioner — Removal and Installation

95-173 Fuel Quantity Gauging System Test Set (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............. 531
95-174 Low Level Function of Forward Fuel Cell Probe No. 3 — Trouble No. 1
95-175 EIS — Fuel Pressure and Fuel Flow Indication System — Simplified
Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)............................................................ 535
95-176 Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation
TABLES
Table Page
Number Title Number
95-1 Propulsion Instruments/Connectors.................................................................... 102

95-2 Engine Torque (TRQ) Scale — Range Marking ................................................. 111
95-3 Engine Torque Indication .................................................................................... 115
95-4 Relationship Between Engine Torque Indicator and FADEC System................. 115
95-5 Torque Indication Versus Oil Pressure ............................................................... 116
95-6 MGT Scale — Range Marking (Indicator 407-375-001-101/-103) ...................... 127
95-7 MGT Scale — Range Marking (Indicator 407-375-001-105 and Subsequent) ... 127
95-8 MGT Exceedances — During Engine Start (Indicator 407-375-001-101/-103) .. 129
95-9 MGT Exceedances — During Engine Start (Indicator 407-375-001-105 and
Subsequent)........................................................................................................ 129
95-10 MGT Exceedances — During Normal Engine Operation
(Indicator 407-375-001-101/-103) ....................................................................... 129
95-11 MGT Exceedances — During Normal Engine Operation
(Indicator 407-375-001-105 and Subsequent) .................................................... 130
95-12 MGT Indication Versus Input Signal ................................................................... 130
95-13 NG Indicator Scale — Range Markings .............................................................. 144
95-14 NG Indicator — Exceedances............................................................................. 144
95-15 NG Scale Indication Versus Input Signal ............................................................ 146
95-16 Rotor RPM (NR) Scale — Range Marking.......................................................... 155
95-17 Power Turbine (NP) Scale — Range Marking .................................................... 155
95-18 NR Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input ..................................................... 158
95-19 NP Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input ..................................................... 159
95-20 NP Test ............................................................................................................... 168
95-21 NR Test............................................................................................................... 169
95-22 Engine Oil Pressure PSI Scale — Range Marking ............................................. 175
95-23 Engine Oil Temperature °C Scale — Range Marking......................................... 175
95-24 ENG PSI Scale Indication Versus Input Signal................................................... 176
95-25 Engine Oil Temperature Versus Resistance....................................................... 177
95-26 XMSN Oil Pressure PSI Scale — Range Marking .............................................. 189
95-27 XMSN Oil Temperature °C Scale — Range Marking.......................................... 189
95-28 Transmission Oil Pressure Indication Versus Input Signal ................................. 189
95-29 Transmission Oil Temperature Indication Versus Input Signal ........................... 190
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TABLES (CONT)
Table Page
Number Title Number
95-30 Fuel Pressure PSI Scale — Range Marking....................................................... 201

95-31 Test Points for Fuel Pressure Indication System ................................................ 204
95-32 Quantity Indication Versus Input Signal From the Signal Conditioner ................ 209
95-33 Fuel Signal Conditioner Fault Codes — Description........................................... 211
95-34 Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds .................................................. 224
95-35 Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds (Including Auxiliary Fuel Tank). 225
95-36 Ammeter 407-375-007-101 Indications Versus Input Voltage ............................ 231
95-37 Ammeter 407-375-007-103 Indication Versus Input Voltage .............................. 232
95-38 Inoperative Items Following GIA 63H NO.1, GIA 63H NO. 2 or
GEA 71H Failure................................................................................................. 372
95-39 Engine Torque Exceedance Monitoring.............................................................. 455
95-40 Relationship Between Engine Torque Indication and FADEC System ............... 456
95-41 Torque Indication Versus Oil Pressure ............................................................... 457
95-42 MGT Exceedance Monitoring — During Start..................................................... 464
95-43 MGT Exceedance Monitoring — During Normal Operation................................ 464
95-44 MGT Indication Versus Input Signal ................................................................... 465
95-45 GAS PRODUCER (NG) Exceedance Monitoring ............................................... 468A
95-46 NG Limit Versus OAT Above 10,000 Feet Pressure Altitude.............................. 470
95-47 NG Scale Indication Versus Input Signal ............................................................ 471
95-48 Power Turbine (NP) Exceedance Monitoring...................................................... 475
95-49 NP Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input ..................................................... 476
95-50 NR Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input ..................................................... 478
95-51 Engine Oil Pressure PSI Indication — Range Marking....................................... 487
95-52 Engine Oil Temperature °C Indication — Range Marking .................................. 487
95-53 ENG OIL PSI Indication Versus Input Signal ...................................................... 488
95-54 Engine Oil Temperature Versus Resistance....................................................... 489
95-55 Transmission Oil Pressure PSI Indication — Range Marking............................. 497
95-56 Transmission Oil Temperature °C Indication — Range Marking ........................ 497
95-57 Transmission Oil Pressure Indication Versus Input Signal ................................. 500
95-58 Transmission Oil Temperature Indication Versus Input Signal ........................... 501
95-59 Ammeter Indication Versus Input Voltage........................................................... 511
95-60 Voltage Indication — Range Marking ................................................................. 515
95-61 Quantity Indication Versus Input Signal From the Signal Conditioner ................ 519
95-62 Fuel Signal Conditioner Fault Codes — Description........................................... 520
95-63 Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds .................................................. 527
95-64 Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds (Including Auxiliary Fuel Tank). 527
95-65 Fuel Signal Conditioner BIT Status Window ....................................................... 529
95-66 Fuel Pressure PSI Indication — Range Marking ................................................ 534
95-67 Test Points for Fuel Pressure Indication ............................................................. 539
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
INSTRUMENT SYSTEM AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
95-1. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM AND • General Troubleshooting

INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM —
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 • Miscellaneous Electrical Components —
THROUGH 54299) Maintenance Practices
This chapter provides the data necessary to • Semiconductor Devices

understand the operation of the instrument systems
and to perform the necessary maintenance steps. • Control Panels
Information is provided for 407 helicopters S/N 53000 • Circuit Breakers

through 54299 as well as for 407GX helicopters S/N
54300 and subsequent with the Garmin G1000H
integrated avionics system installed. • Electrical Load Analysis
Due to the differences in the instrumentation systems, • Electrical and Electronic Components,
this chapter has been divided into two separate Reference Designator/Description/Location —
sections. Section 1 covers 407 helicopters S/N 53000 Reference Table and Location Figure
through 54299 and Section 2 covers 407GX
helicopters S/N 54300 and subsequent. Refer to the • Circuit, Wires, and Cable Harness —
table of contents at the beginning of the chapter to Designations
identify the serial number range of helicopter that you
are working on as well as the specific content that you Simplified electrical schematics are used throughout
are looking for. the chapter to help clarify system or circuit operation.
To make the schematics easier to follow and
This chapter describes each system under its own understand, all wire numbers and certain intermediate
section. It provides the operator with the information connectors are not shown. The schematics are to be
necessary to maintain the serviceability of the specific used in conjunction with the system operational
instrument system. descriptions. All block diagrams and internal views of
the components are simplified and do not show the
In addition to the information provided in this chapter, accurate operation of the components. For detailed
refer to Chapter 96 for information on the following: wiring diagram information, refer to Chapter 98.
• Electrical Safety and Hazards All of the electrical simplified schematics in this
chapter show the electrical equipment in the static
• Safety Practices — General position. All of the block diagrams and internal views
of components are simplified representations and do
• Standard Practices — Electrical Maintenance not necessarily reflect the actual internal workings.
or Repairs The static position is specified as follows:
• Standard Practices — Electrical Work in • No electrical power is applied

Confined Spaces
• Switches and relays are shown in the off or
• Standard Practices — After Electrical de-energized position
Maintenance or Repairs
• The pressure switches are shown with no
• Miscellaneous Electrical Tools pressure applied
• Operational Checks, Functional Checks, and • The temperature switches are shown at the
Troubleshooting Charts temperature of 59°F (15°C)
95-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 23
BHT-407-MM-10
For the specific electrical wiring maintenance

NOTE information and procedures, refer to the Electrical
If you install Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT) Standard Practices Manual (BHT-ELEC-SPM), which
optional equipment for the first time, do this provides the data necessary to repair and replace the
in accordance with the instructions wires, cables, or the electrical components to the
provided in the applicable Installation standards of performance and quality as specified by
Instruction (II). Follow the instructions Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT).
provided in this chapter for any subsequent
installation.
95-00-00
Page 24 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
BHT-407-MM-10
SECTION I: INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-2. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (S/N 53000 • Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indication
THROUGH 54299) system
The instrument system for 407 helicopters S/N 53000 • Gas producer (NG) indication system
through 54299 (Figure 95-1) includes the systems that
follow: • Dual tachometer (NP/NR) system
1. Flight instrument system. The basic flight • Engine oil temperature and pressure
instrument system includes a pitot-static system and indication system
the instruments that follow:
• Transmission oil temperature and pressure
• Airspeed indicator indication system
• Altimeter 6. Fuel system instrument system. The fuel system

instrument system includes the instrument systems
that follow:
• Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator (IVSI)
• Inclinometer • Fuel pressure indication system
2. The flight instrument system can also include an • Fuel quantity gauging system
optional flight instrument kit (BHT-407-II-15). The flight
instrument kit includes the additional flight and 7. Miscellaneous instrument system. The
navigation instruments that follow: miscellaneous instrument system includes the
instruments systems that follow:
• Directional Gyroscope (DG) indicator
• Ammeter
• Attitude indicator/artificial horizon indicator
• Clock/Outside Air Temperature (OAT)/
• Turn and slip indicator (the turn and slip volts indication system
indicator replaces the inclinometer)
• Hourmeter
3. Optional flight instruments. The optional flight
instruments also include an encoding altimeter kit All of the instruments, except for the magnetic
(BHT-407-II-16). compass and the engine hourmeter, are installed on
the instrument panel.
4. Navigation instrument system. The basic
navigation instrument system includes a magnetic 95-3. INSTRUMENT PANEL —
compass. Additional information on -705 kit navigation DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH
instruments is located in Chapter 97. 54299)
The instrument panel (Figure 95-1) is installed at an

5. Propulsion instrument system. The propulsion
angle of 5°. The instrument panel contains all of the
instrument system includes the instrument systems
flight, propulsion, fuel system, and miscellaneous
that follow:
instruments (except the hourmeter). The magnetic
compass is installed on a bracket on the right side of
• Torque (Q) indication system the flight compartment.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4 3 16
L
PU
L
2 MIN TURN FOR
QUICK
T
E
R E C
13 14 15
12
FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
1
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEET
L 150 I H 100 FEET
4 1000
C N O 9 1000
0 FEET
1
3 10
D S R
2 40 T N
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E M 299
SELECT CONTROL 12 120 1010
S C U
KNOTS H
T
K
T 7
DAVTRON E
100 60
6 4
11 3 8
80 5 2
20 7
6
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0
~C X 100
4 0 10 120
10 1 2
X 10 0
NP 5 1000 FT 3
20 PER MIN PEDAL STOP
110 UP PTT
0
4 ENGAGED
30 DOWN
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5
6 7 8
9 90 % RPM 40 NAV
R
3 6 GPS
7 5 10 80 50
2 4 70 60
8 3
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
10
FWD TANK
FADEC 12
15 15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
8 15
XMSN ENG
OIL FADEC
6
10
OIL ~C 10
PSI ~C PSI MODE ON
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 FUEL
2 5
AUTO VALVE
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0 0 0 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL
9
8 7 6 5
1. Altimeter 10. MGT indicator

2. Vertical speed indicator 11. Fuel pressure/ammeter indicator
3. Turn and bank indicator (kit) 12. Clock/OAT/Volts indicator
4. Directional gyroscope (kit) 13. Engine torque indicator
5. Dual tachometer 14. Airspeed indicator
6. NG indicator 15. Inclinometer
7. Engine oil temperature/pressure indicator 16. Artificial horizon indicator (kit)
8. Fuel quantity indicator
9. Transmission oil temperature/pressure indicator
407_MM_95_0001
Figure 95-1. Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-4. Instrument Panel — Removal

CAUTION
MATERIALS REQUIRED
HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D
P RA C T I C ES F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). FAILURE TO OBEY
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
INSTRUMENTS.
WARNING CAUTION
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MAKE SURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR C O N N E C T O R S A R E P R O P E R LY
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC LABELED BEFORE THEY ARE
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). DISC ONNE CTED. THIS WILL MA KE
SURE THAT THEY ARE CONNECTED TO
THE CORRECT INSTRUMENT DURING
NOTE THE I N S TA L L AT I O N OF THE
Remove components only to the extent INSTRUMENT PANEL.
necessary to perform the required
g. Disconnect the electrical connectors (10P1
maintenance.
and 22P1) (14 and 23) from the instrument panel
disconnect connectors (10J1 and 22J1) (16 and 17).
1. Remove the instrument panel (7, Figure 95-2) as
follows: h. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on
the open connectors (10P1 and 22P1) (14 and 23) and
a. Disconnect the battery and external DC power instrument panel disconnect connectors (10J1 and
from the helicopter. 22J1) (16 and 17).
i. Disconnect the applicable flight and

b. As applicable, remove the shroud assembly navigation instrument electrical connectors that follow:
(paragraph 95-10) or remove the upper cover of the
shroud assembly with the attaching screws and
• Electrical connector (4M3P1) from the artificial
washers.
horizon indicator (4M3)
c. Remove the bolt (3) and the washer (4) from • Electrical connector (4M4P1) from the
the instrument panel (7). directional gyro indicator (4M4) or connectors
(3400DS1P1 and 3400DS1P2) from the
d. Remove the screw (24) and the washer (25) horizontal situation indicator (3400DS1)
from the instrument panel (7).
• Electrical connector (3427DS1P1) from the
encoding altimeter (3427DS1)
e. Remove the screws (5) and the washers (6)
from the instrument panel (7). • Electrical connector (4M6P1) from the
Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator (IVSI)
f. Carefully tilt the instrument panel (7). (4M6)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1 2
SEE DETAIL A
19 20
4
3
21 22
18
4 PLACES
17 SEE DETAIL B
25 6
16
24 5
37
23
7
14
9
38
11
12
11
10 8
10
13 SEE DETAIL D
15
10 SEE DETAIL C
10
9
DETAIL A
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407_MM_95_0002a
Figure 95-2. Instrument Panel — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
26
30
27
31
28
32 34
29
35
33
36
DETAIL B DETAIL C DETAIL D

S/N 53000 THROUGH 53569, S/N 53570 THROUGH 53613
53614 AND SUBSEQUENT
1. Electrical connector (4DS1P1) 20. Cable assembly

2. Caution/Warning/Advisory panel (4DS1) 21. Pitot line
3. Bolt 22. Static line
4. Washer 23. Electrical connector (22P1)
5. Screw 24. Screw
6. Washer 25. Washer
7. Instrument panel 26. Nut
8. Pin 27. Lockwasher
9. Screw 28. Washer
10. Washer 29. Ground stud (ND470)
11. Lockwasher 30. Nut
12. Nut 31. Washer
13. Ground strap 32. Clamp
14. Electrical connector (10P1) 33. Screw
15. Bracket 34. Clamp
16. Electrical connector (10J1) 35. Washer
17. Electrical connector (22J1) 36. Screw
18. Pin 37. Eyebolt
19. Cotter pin 38. Bracket
LOCKWIRE (C-508)
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407_MM_95_0002b
Figure 95-2. Instrument Panel — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299) (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• Electrical connector (4M7P1) from the turn • Electrical connector (1M1P1) from the fuel
and slip indicator (4M7) quantity indicator (1M1)
• Electrical connector (3406DS1P1) from the • Electrical connector (1M3P1) from the
Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) indicator transmission oil temperature/pressure
(3406DS1) indicator (1M3)
• Electrical connector (2303DS1P1) from the • Electrical connector (1M8P1) from the engine
VOR indicator (2303DS1) torque indicator (1M8)
• Electrical connector (1M4P1) from the

j. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on
Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indicator
the instrument and electrical connector.
(1M4)
• Electrical connector (1M5P1) from the gas

CAUTION producer (NG) indicator (1M5)
• Electrical connector 1M2P1 from the engine

HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN oil pressure/temperature indicator (1M2)
A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D
P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C • Electrical connectors (1M6P1 and 1M6P2)
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT from the dual tachometer indicator (1M6)
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). THE PROPULSION,
FUEL SYSTEM, AND THE AMMETER l. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on
INSTRUMENTS ARE SENSITIVE TO the propulsion system instrument connectors.
ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY m. Disconnect the electrical connector (4DS1P1)
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E (1) from the caution/warning/advisory panel (4DS1)(2).
INSTRUMENTS. n. Disconnect the pitot line (21) and the static
line (22) from the elbow fittings on the bracket (38).
Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on all of
the open fittings.
CAUTION
NOTE
MAKE SURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL
Make sure that the electrical wires are
C O N N E C T O R S A R E P R O P E R LY
properly labeled before they are
LABELLED BEFORE THEY ARE
disconnected. This will ensure that they are
DISCONNECTED. THIS WILL ENSURE
properly connected to the ground stud
THAT THEY ARE CONNECTED TO THE
(ND470) (29) during the installation of the
CORRECT INSTRUMENT DURING THE
instrument panel (7).
INSTALLATION OF THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL. o. At ground stud (ND470) (29), remove the nut
(26), lockwasher (27), washer (28), and grounding
k. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the wires from the stud.
propulsion system instruments that follow:
p. At one end of the ground strap (13), remove
• Electrical connector (4M5P1) from the clock/ the screw (9), washers (10), lockwasher (11), and nut
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)/volts indicator (12) from its mounting bracket (15).
(4M5)
q. For helicopters S/N 53000 through 53569 and
• Electrical connector (2M1P1) from the fuel S/N 53614 and subsequent, remove the nut (30),
pressure/ammeter indicator (2M1) washer (31), clamp (32), and screw (33).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
r. For helicopters S/N 53570 through 53613 • Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) indicator
remove the screw (36), washer (35), and clamp (34). (3406DS1) (Chapter 97)
s. While supporting the instrument panel (7), • VHF Omni Directional Range (VOR) indicator
remove the cotter pin (19) and the pin (18) from the (2303DS1) (Chapter 97)
cable assembly (20) and eyebolt (37). Discard the
cotter pin. 5. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the
applicable flight and navigation instrument electrical
t. While supporting the instrument panel (7), connectors.
remove the lockwire at the ends of the instrument
panel hinge pin (8). Remove the pin.
u. Carefully remove the instrument panel (7). CAUTION
2. If required, remove the shock mounts

(Chapter 53). HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN
3. If required, remove the caution/warning/ advisory P RA C T I C ES F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C
panel (4DS1) (2) (Chapter 96). SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). THE PROPULSION,
FUEL SYSTEM, AND THE AMMETER
INSTRUMENTS ARE SENSITIVE TO
CAUTION ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY
HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D INSTRUMENTS.
P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT 6. If required, remove the applicable propulsion
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). FAILURE TO OBEY system instruments from the instrument panel (7) as
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY follows:
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE • Clock/Outside Air Temperature (OAT)/volts
INSTRUMENTS. indicator (4M5) (paragraph 95-193)
4. If required, remove the applicable flight and
navigation instruments from the instrument panel as • Fuel pressure/ammeter indicator (2M1)
follows: (paragraph 95-61)
• Fuel quantity indicator (1M1) (paragraph

• Attitude indicator (4M3) (paragraph 95-52)
95-61)
• Directional Gyroscope (DG) (4M4) (paragraph
95-48) or horizontal situation indicator • Transmission oil temperature/pressure
(3400DS1) (Chapter 97) indicator (1M3) (paragraph 95-61)
• Encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (paragraph • Engine torque indicator (1M8) (paragraph

95-35) 95-61)
• Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator (IVSI) • Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indicator
(4M6) (paragraph 95-39) (1M4) (paragraph 95-61)
• Turn and slip indicator (4M7) (paragraph • Gas producer (NG) indicator (1M5)
95-56) (paragraph 95-61)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• Engine oil temperature/pressure indicator • Condition of the nutplates

(1M2) (paragraph 95-61)
Replace the instrument panel (7) as required.
• Dual tachometer indicator (1M6) (paragraph
95-61) Visually examine all the attaching hardware for wear,
damage, and corrosion damage. Replace as required.
7. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on
the propulsion system instruments. 95-7. Instrument Panel — Repair
8. If required, remove the FADEC mode switch

(1S18) (paragraph 95-232). MATERIALS REQUIRED
9. If required, remove the pedal stop switch Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
(6540DS1) (Chapter 96).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
10. If required, remove the remaining switches and C-204 Epoxy Polyamide
electrical items from the instrument panel (7) in Primer
accordance with the miscellaneous electrical practices
(Chapter 96). C-245 1 Polyurethane Coating
NOTE:
95-5. Instrument Panel — Cleaning
1 Use color code 36307 per FED-STD-595.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
1. If the paint on the instrument panel (7,
Figure 95-2) is damaged or partially removed, apply
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
one coat of epoxy polyamide primer (C-204) and two
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE coats of polyurethane coating (C-245) to the area
(BHT-ALL-SPM, Chapter 4).
C-305 Aliphatic Naphtha
2. Reapply missing or damaged decals and
C-516 Clean Cloth placards (Chapter 11).
1. Clean the instrument panel (7, Figure 95-2) with a 95-8. Instrument Panel — Installation
clean cloth (C-516) moistened with aliphatic naphtha
(C-305).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
2. Dry the instrument panel (7) with a clean cloth
(C-516). Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
95-6. Instrument Panel — Inspection
C-508 Lockwire
1. Visually examine the instrument panel (7,
Figure 95-2) for the following:
1. If required, install the shock mounts (Chapter 53).
• Cracks, damage, and corrosion to the
instrument panel
WARNING
• Condition of the paint; touch up any damaged
area(s) (paragraph 95-7)
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Loose or missing rivets WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
CAUTION
CAUTION HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN

HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D (BHT-ELEC-SPM). FAILURE TO OBEY
P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). THE PROPULSION, E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
FUEL SYSTEM, AND THE AMMETER INSTRUMENTS.
INSTRUMENTS ARE SENSITIVE TO
ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY 3. If required, install the applicable flight and
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY navigation instruments on the instrument panel as
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E follows:
INSTRUMENTS. • Attitude indicator (4M3) (paragraph 95-53)
2. If required, install the applicable propulsion • Directional Gyroscope (DG) (4M4) (paragraph
system instruments on the instrument panel (7, 95-49) or horizontal situation indicator
Figure 95-6) as follows: (3400DS1) (Chapter 97)
• Encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (paragraph

• Clock/Outside Air Temperature (OAT)/volts
95-36)
indicator (4M5) (paragraph 95-194)
• Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator (IVSI)
• The fuel pressure/ammeter indicator (2M1) (4M6) (paragraph 95-40)
(paragraph 95-62)
• Turn and slip indicator (4M7) (paragraph
• The fuel quantity indicator (1M1) (paragraph 95-57)
95-62)
• Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) indicator
• The transmission oil temperature/pressure (3406DS1) (Chapter 97)
indicator (1M3) (paragraph 95-62)
• VHF Omni Directional Range (VOR) indicator
(2303DS1) (Chapter 97)
• The engine torque indicator (1M8) (paragraph
95-62)
4. If required, install the FADEC mode switch (1S18)
(paragraph 95-235).
• Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indicator
(1M4) (paragraph 95-62)
5. If required, install the pedal stop switch
(6540DS1) (Chapter 96).
• Gas producer (NG) indicator (1M5)
(paragraph 95-62)
6. If previously removed, install all of the remaining
switches, as applicable, on the instrument panel (7) in
• Engine oil temperature/pressure indicator accordance with the miscellaneous electrical practices
(1M2) (paragraph 95-62) (Chapter 96).
• Dual tachometer indicator (1M6) (paragraph 7. If required, install the caution/warning/ advisory
95-62) panel (4DS1) (2) (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Install the instrument panel (7) as follows: h. At ground stud (ND470) (29), position the
terminals of the ground wires on the stud and install
a. Put the instrument panel (7) in position on the the washer (28), lockwasher (27), and nut (26).
support structure mounting hinge. Tighten the nut.
b. While supporting the instrument panel (7),

install the pin (8) into the mounting hinges of the
structure and instrument panel. CAUTION
c. Install lockwire (C-508) at both ends of the

pin (8). MAKE SURE TO CONNECT THE STATIC
A N D T H E P I T O T L I N E S AT T H E
d. While supporting the instrument panel (7), CORRECT LOCATION. IF THEY ARE
connect the cable assembly (20) to the eyebolt (37) NOT CONNECTED TO THE CORRECT
with the pin (18) and a new cotter pin (19). LOCATION, DAMAGE TO THE AIRSPEED
I N D I C AT O R , A LT I M E T E R , AND
INSTANTANEOUS VERTICAL SPEED
NOTE INDICATOR WILL OCCUR.
Make sure the mating surfaces of the
ground strap (13) and its mounting bracket i. Connect the pitot line (21) and the static line
(15) are clean and free of corrosion. If (22) to their mating fittings on the bracket (38). Tighten
required, prepare the mating surfaces for the lines to the mating fittings.
electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8). j. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs and
connect the electrical connectors (10P1 and 22P1) (14
e. Install the loose end of the ground strap (13), and 23) to their mating instrument panel electrical
to its mounting bracket (15) with the screw (9), connectors (10J1 and 22J1) (16 and 17).
washers (10), lockwasher (11), and nut (12) as
applicable. Tighten the nut.
f. For helicopters S/N 53000 through 53569 and CAUTION

S/N 53614 and subsequent, install the screw (33),
clamp (32), washer (31), and nut (30). Tighten the nut.
HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN
g. For helicopters S/N 53570 through 53613, A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D
install the screw (36), washer (35), and clamp (34). P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C
Tighten the screw. SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). FAILURE TO OBEY
NOTE THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY
Locate the previously identified ground E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
wires associated with ground stud (ND470) INSTRUMENTS.
(29), which were labeled during the
instrument panel removal procedure.
CAUTION
NOTE
Make sure the mating surfaces of the
ground stud (ND470) (29), the attaching MAKE SURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL
ground wire terminals, and the attaching C O N N E C T O R S A R E P R O P E R LY
hardware are clean and free of corrosion. If INSTALLED ON THE THE CORRECT
required, prepare the mating surfaces for INSTRUMENT DURING THE
electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM, INSTALLATION OF THE INSTRUMENT
Chapter 8). PANEL.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
k. Connect the applicable flight and navigation INSTALLATION OF THE INSTRUMENT

instrument electrical connectors that follow: PANEL.
• Electrical connector (4M3P1) to the artificial l. Connect the electrical connectors to the
horizon indicator (4M3) propulsion system instruments that follow:
• Electrical connector (4M4P1) to the directional • Electrical connector (4M5P1) to the clock/
gyro indicator (4M4) or connectors Outside Air Temperature (OAT)/volts indicator
(3400DS1P1 and 3400DS1P2) to the (4M5)
horizontal situation indicator (3400DS1)
• Electrical connector (2M1P1) to the fuel
• Electrical connector (3427DS1P1) to the pressure/ammeter indicator (2M1)
encoding altimeter (3427DS1)
• Electrical connector (1M1P1) to the fuel
• Electrical connector (4M6P1) to the quantity indicator (1M1)
Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator (IVSI)
(4M6) • Electrical connector (1M3P1) to the
transmission oil temperature/pressure
• Electrical connector (4M7P1) to the turn and indicator (1M3)
slip indicator (4M7)
• Electrical connector (1M8P1) to the engine
• Electrical connector (3406DS1P1) to the torque indicator (1M8)
Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) indicator
(3406DS1) • Electrical connector (1M4P1) to the Measured
Gas Temperature (MGT) indicator (1M4)
• Electrical connector (2303DS1P1) to the VOR
indicator (2303DS1) • Electrical connector (1M5P1) to the gas
producer (NG) indicator (1M5)
CAUTION • Electrical connector 1M2P1 to the engine oil

pressure/temperature indicator (1M2)
HANDLE THE INSTRUMENTS IN • Electrical connectors (1M6P1 and 1M6P2) to

A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D the dual tachometer indicator (1M6)
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT m. Connect the electrical connector (4DS1P1) (1)
(BHT-ELEC-SPM). THE PROPULSION, to the caution/warning/advisory panel (4DS1) (2).
FUEL SYSTEM, AND THE AMMETER
INSTRUMENTS ARE SENSITIVE TO n. Tilt the instrument panel (7) back into its
ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY upright position.
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E o. Install the screws (5) and the washers (6) on
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE the instrument panel (7). Do not tighten the screws at
INSTRUMENTS. this time.
p. Install the screw (24) and the washer (25) on

CAUTION the instrument panel (7). Do not tighten the screw at
this time.
MAKE SURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL q. Install the bolt (3) and the washer (4) on the
C O N N E C T O R S A R E P R O P E R LY instrument panel (7).
INSTALLED ON THE CORRECT
INSTRUMENT DURING THE r. Tighten the screws (5 and 24) and the bolt (3).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
s. If applicable, install the shroud assembly 2. Remove the left and right vent control cable
(paragraph 95-14) or install the upper cover of the (Chapter 21).
shroud assembly with the attaching screws and
washers. 3. Remove the screws (3, Figure 95-3) and the
washers (4) from the upper cover (9).
t. Connect the battery or the external DC power
to the helicopter. 4. Remove the screws (1) and the washers (2) from
the upper cover (9).
9. Make sure all systems are operational (Chapter
95, Chapter 96, and Chapter 97). 5. Remove the screw (5) and the washer (6) from
the upper cover (9).
10. Do a pitot-static system leak check (paragraph
95-24). 6. Remove the upper cover (9) from the shroud
assembly (15).
95-9. SHROUD ASSEMBLY (S/N 53000

THROUGH 54299) 7. Remove the screws (13) and the washers (14)
The shroud assembly (Figure 95-2) encloses the flight

instruments and components behind the instrument 8. Remove the screw (8) and the washer (7) from
the instrument panel (12).
panel assembly. The shroud assembly is located
between the instrument panel and the battery
compartment aft bulkhead. The shroud assembly 9. Remove the bolt (11) and the washer (10) from
consists of an acrylic PVC lower left and right shroud the instrument panel (12).
and an aluminum upper shroud which is riveted
together. A removable upper aluminum cover is also 10. Carefully tilt the instrument panel (12) down.
provided and secured with screws and washers.
11. Remove the screws (16) and the washers (17)
95-10. Shroud Assembly — Removal from the shroud assembly (15).

WARNING from the shroud assembly (15).
13. Remove the screws (20) and the washer (21)

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS from the shroud assembly (15).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
CAUTION
NOTE
DO NOT MAKE CONTACT WITH THE
Remove components only to the extent
WINDSHIELDS OR THE INSTRUMENT
necessary to perform the required PA NE L DU RING RE MOV AL OF THE
maintenance. S H R O U D A S S E M B L Y. O T H E R W I S E
DAMAGE MAY OCCUR.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter. 14. Carefully remove the shroud assembly (15).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Screw 12. Instrument panel

2. Washer 13. Screw
3. Screw 14. Washer
4. Washer 15. Shroud assembly
5. Screw 16. Screw
7. Washer 18. Screw
8. Screw 19. Washer
9. Upper cover 20. Screw
11. Bolt 22. Grommet
23. Vent button
SEE DETAIL A
9
3 3 PLACES
4
GLARESHIELD
ASSEMBLY
5
10
22 6 11
23
2 PLACES
20 21
7
8
1
2 PLACES 2
19
18 23
14 4 PLACES
2 PLACES 13
12
17
16 10 PLACES
15
DETAIL A
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407_MM_95_0097
Figure 95-3. Shroud Assembly — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-11. Shroud Assembly — Cleaning • Loose or missing rivets
• Condition of the grommet (22); replace as

MATERIALS REQUIRED required (paragraph 95-13)
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. Replace or repair the shroud assembly (15) as
required (paragraph 95-13).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
2. Visually examine the upper cover (9) for the
C-305 Aliphatic Naphtha following:
C-516 Clean Cloth
• Cracks, wear, damage, and corrosion
1. Clean the shroud assembly (15, Figure 95-2) with • Broken mesh on vent buttons (23)
a clean cloth (C-516) moistened with aliphatic naphtha
(C-305).
2. Clean the upper cover (9) with a clean cloth Replace the upper cover (9) as required.
(C-516) moistened with aliphatic naphtha (C-305).
3. Visually examine all the attaching hardware for
3. Dry the parts with filtered compressed air and a wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion damage.
clean cloth (C-516). Replace as required.
95-12. Shroud Assembly — Inspection 95-13. Shroud Assembly — Repair
NOTE
MATERIALS REQUIRED
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
component has been removed from the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is C-204 Epoxy Polyamide
installed on the helicopter. Primer
C-245 1 Polyurethane coating

NOTE
C-301 Adhesive
Contact Product Support Engineering for
information on wear and damage limits NOTE:
applicable to structural parts but not
contained in this chapter or in the 1 Use color code 37038 per FED-STD-595.
BHT-ALL-SRM.
1. Visually examine the shroud assembly (15, NOTE

For information on the structural repair of
damaged components and repair limits not
• Cracks, wear, damage, and corrosion contained in this chapter or in the
BHT-ALL-SRM, contact product support
• Broken mesh on vent buttons (23) engineering.
• Condition of the paint; touch up any damaged 1. If there is evidence of damage to the shroud
area(s) (paragraph 95-13) assembly (15, Figure 95-2), refer to the
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
BHT-ALL-SRM, Chapter 3 for information on the 4. Install the screws (16) and the washers (17) on
applicable repair. the shroud assembly (15). Do not tighten the screws at
this time.
2. If required, prepare surfaces and bond a new

5. Tilt the instrument panel (12) into its upright
grommet (22) onto the part with adhesive (C-301) per
position.
the instructions for polycarbonate parts
6. Install the bolt (11) and the washer (10) on the
instrument panel (12). Do not tighten the bolt at this
3. If the paint on the upper cover (9) and/or shroud time.
assembly (15) are damaged or partially removed,
apply one coat of epoxy polyamide primer (C-204) and 7. Install the screw (8) and the washer (7) on the
two coats of polyurethane coating (C-245) to the area instrument panel (12). Do not tighten the screw at this
BHT-ALL-SPM, Chapter 4. time.
8. Install the screws (13) and the washers (14) on

95-14. Shroud Assembly — Installation
the instrument panel (12). Do not tighten the screws at
this time.
WARNING 9. Put the upper cover (9) in position on the shroud

assembly (15).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 10. Install the screw (5) and the washer (6) on the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR upper cover (9). Do not tighten the screw at this time
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 11. Install the screws (1) and the washers (2) on the
upper cover (9). Do not tighten the screws at this time.
CAUTION 12. Install the screws (3) and the washers (4) on the
upper cover (9). Do not tighten the screws at this time.
DO NOT MAKE CONTACT WITH THE

WINDSHIELDS OR THE INSTRUMENT NOTE
PANEL DURING INSTALLATION OF THE Make sure that the fit between the shroud
S H R O U D A S S E M B L Y. O T H E R W I S E assembly (15), instrument panel (12), and
DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. upper cover (9) is properly aligned prior to
tightening the screws.
1. Put the shroud assembly (15, Figure 95-2) in
13. Tighten the screws (16, 13, 18, 8, and 20).
position between the instrument panel (12) and the
battery compartment aft bulkhead.
14. Tighten the bolt (11).
2. Install the screws (20) and the washers (21) on 15. Tighten the screws (1, 3, and 5).
the shroud assembly (15). Do not tighten the screws at
this time.
16. Install the left and right vent control cables
(Chapter 21).
3. Install the screws (18) and the washers (19) on
the shroud assembly (15). Do not tighten the screws at 17. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
this time. helicopter.
95-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 39/40
BHT-407-MM-10
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-15. FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — formation. For additional information on the heated
DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH pitot tube and static ports, refer to Chapter 96.
54299)
95-17. Pitot Tube — Removal
The basic flight instrument system includes a
pitot-static system, airspeed indicator, altimeter,
inclinometer, and vertical speed indicator. An optional MATERIALS REQUIRED
flight instrument kit (BHT-407-II-15) includes a turn
and slip indicator that replaces the inclinometer, as Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
well as a directional gyroscope and artificial horizon
indicator (Figure 95-1). An optional encoding altimeter NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
kit (BHT-407-II-16) can be installed with the Air Traffic
Control (ATC) transponder kit (Chapter 97). The C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
encoding altimeter replaces the basic altimeter.
95-16. PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM — DESCRIPTION

WARNING
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
NOTE OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following information is applicable to
407 helicopters S/N 53000 through 53399
Post ASB 407-99-33 and S/N 53400
through 54299.
The pitot-static system consists of a pitot tube and two WARNING

static ports, and their related tube assemblies
(Figure 95-4). The pitot tube is installed on a support
assembly installed at FS 1.00, on the right side of the DO NOT TOUCH THE PITOT TUBE
helicopter centerline. The pitot tube collects the ram WHEN IT IS HO T. MA KE S URE T HE
air from the outside of the helicopter. The ram air is ELECTRICAL POWER IS REMO VED
then supplied through the related tube assemblies to FROM THE PITOT TUBE. BEFORE THE
the airspeed indicator and the Pedal Restrictor Control REMOVAL PROCEDURE, ALLOW THE
Unit (PRCU). PITOT TUBE TO BECOME COLD. A HOT
PITOT TUBE CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
The static ports are installed on the left and right sides BURNS.
of the fuselage at FS 36.95. The static ports collect the
atmospheric pressure that surrounds the helicopter. NOTE
The atmospheric pressure is supplied through the
related tube assemblies to the airspeed indicator, Remove components only to the extent
altimeter, vertical speed indicator, and PRCU. necessary to perform the required
maintenance.
A static drain and pitot drain are connected to their
related tube assemblies and installed on the
from the helicopter.
under-belly of the helicopter. The drains are installed
to drain any water or other contaminants from the pitot
and static tube assemblies. 2. On the overhead panel, set the PITOT HEATER
switch circuit breaker (4CB2) to OFF.
The pitot tube and static ports are electrically heated
by internal elements (Figure 95-5) to prevent ice 3. Remove the access panel to the landing light bay.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ALTIMETER
VERTICAL SPEED
INDICATOR
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
SEE DETAIL A 8
5 9
7
8
PITOT PEDAL RESTRICTOR

LINE CONTROL UNIT
(PRCU) 1
7
8
6
STATIC
LINE
3 9
4 9 2
7
1. Pitot tube
2. Static port
3. Pitot drain
1 4. Static drain
5. Static drain
DETAIL A 6. Pitot tube disconnect
7. Flexible tube
8. Aluminum tube
9. Plug
NOTE
1 For helicopters S/N 53000 through 53399 post ASB 407-99-33 and S/N 53400 through 54299.
Figure 95-4. Pitot-static System — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
C.B. PANEL
PITOT
STATIC HEATER
4CB2
7.5
28VDC
BUS
PILOT STATIC
PORT HTR
LCTN-RHS NOSE
STA 37.00
4HR2
TEMP
CONTROLLER
4HR3
COPILOT STATIC
PORT HTR
LCTN-LHS NOSE
STA 37.00
TEMP
CONTROLLER
PITOT HEATER
4HR1
4HR1P1
A
B
407_MM_95_0004
Figure 95-5. Pitot-static System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. On the overhead panel, set the PITOT HEATER

CAUTION switch circuit breaker to OFF.
3. Connect the electrical connector (3, Figure 95-6)

INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428)
to the pitot tube (4).
ON THE OPEN ENDS OF THE TUBE
ASSEMBLIES TO PREVENT
C O N TA M I N AT I O N B Y F O R E I G N 4. Remove the previously installed caps and/or
OBJECTS. CONTAMINATION OF THE plugs.
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS. 5. Install the pitot tube (4) on the support assembly.
4. Disconnect the union (5, Figure 95-6) of the pitot 6. Connect the union (5) of the pitot tube (4) to the
tube (4) from the tube assembly (7). Install caps and/ union of the tube assembly (7) for the pitot pressure.
or plugs (C-428) on the open ends of the pitot tube
and tube assembly.
7. Attach the pitot tube (4) to the support assembly
(6) with screws (1) and lockwashers (2). Tighten the
5. Remove the screws (1) and lockwashers (2) that
screws.
attach the pitot tube (4) to its support assembly (6).
8. Install the access window for the landing light.

6. Carefully pull the pitot tube (4) from its support
assembly (6).
9. Do a leak check of the pitot-static system
(paragraph 95-24).
7. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the
pitot tube (4).
10. Do an operational check of the pitot tube and
8. Remove the pitot tube (4). static port heating system. (paragraph 95-23).
95-18. Pitot Tube — Installation 95-19. Static Port — Removal
MATERIALS REQUIRED
WARNING
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
NOTE WARNING
When you install a new pitot tube, do not
install the sleeve assembly that is supplied
with it. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
from the helicopter. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Screw
2. Lockwasher
3. Electrical connector 7
4. Pitot tube
5. Union
6. Support assembly
7. Tube assembly 6
2
1
407_MM_95_0115
Figure 95-6. Pitot Tube — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Disconnect the power wire of the temperature

WARNING controller (13) at the splice.
6. Remove the two screws (10), washers (11), and

DO NOT TOUCH THE STATIC PORTS nuts (12) that attach the temperature controller (13) to
WHEN THEY ARE HOT. MAKE SURE THE the mounting bracket (15).
ELECT RICAL POWER IS REMO VED
FROM THE STATIC PORTS. BEFORE 95-20. Static Port — Installation
THE REMOVAL PROCEDURE, ALLOW
THE STATIC PORTS TO BECOME COLD.
A H O T S TAT I C P O RT C A N C A U S E WARNING
SERIOUS BURNS.

CAUTION WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
ON THE OPEN END OF THE STATIC 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
LINE TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION BY from the helicopter.
FOREIGN OBJECTS. CONTAMINATION
OF THE PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM CAN 2. On the overhead panel, set the PITOT HEATER
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE FLIGHT switch circuit breaker (4CB2) to OFF.
INSTRUMENTS.
3. Install the heated static vent assembly (6,
Figure 95-7) on the structure with a shim (7). Peel the
NOTE
shim as required so the heated static vent assembly
Remove components only to the extent protrudes 0.000 to 0.020 inch (0.00 to 0.50 mm)
necessary to perform the required beyond the outside skin.
maintenance.
4. Remove the previously installed caps and/or
1. Disconnect the static line (1, Figure 95-7) from plugs.
the elbow (3). Remove the insert (2) and install the
caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the open lines and 5. Install the two packings (5) on the bolt (4).
fittings.
6. Insert the bolt (4) into the elbow (3).
2. Remove the bolt (4) and the two packings (5)
from the elbow (3). 7. Tighten the bolt (4) into the heated static vent (6).
3. Remove the heated static vent (6) and the 8. Install an insert (2) in the static line connector.
shim (7). Connect the static line (1) to the elbow (3).
4. Remove the screw (8) and the washers (9 and 9. Install the temperature controller (13) on the
14) to disconnect the ground wire (WHITE) and the mounting bracket (15). Install the two screws (10),
shield from the ground stud (ND261 left side, ND262 washers (11), and nuts (12) that attach the
right side). temperature controller.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1 SEE DETAIL A
4
2
5
7
5
3
DETAIL B
10
SEE DETAIL B
13
11
14
12
15
9 DETAIL A
(LEFT SIDE SHOWN,
8
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)
1. Static line 6. Heated static vent 11. Washer

2. Insert 7. Shim 12. Nut
3. Elbow 8. Screw 13. Temperature controller
4. Bolt 9. Washer 14. Washer
5. Packing 10. Screw 15. Mounting bracket
Figure 95-7. Static Port — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• Pedal Restrictor Control Unit (PRCU)

NOTE
Refer to the pitot-static heaters and flight 3. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the
instrument system wiring diagram open ports of all the instruments.
(Chapter 98) for wire termination
information.
10. If required, prepare the mating surfaces of the CAUTION

wire terminal ends and termination points for electrical
bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
U S E O N LY D RY F I LT E R E D A I R TO
CLEAN LINES OF THE PITOT-STATIC
11. Connect the power wire (BLACK) of the
SYSTEM. OTHERWISE, UNWANTED
temperature controller to helicopter wire H7D20 with a
MATERIAL COULD CONTAMINATE THE
splice. Connect the shield of the BLACK and WHITE
LINES AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
wires to the shield of wire H7D20 (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
INSTRUMENTS.
Chapter 4).
4. Blow dry filtered compressed air into the open
12. Install the screw (8) and the washers (9 and 14) ends of the pitot and static lines.
to connect the ground wire (WHITE) and the shield to
the ground stud (ND261 left side, ND262 right side). 5. Make sure there is no blockage or obstruction of
Tighten the screw. the flow at the static drain (4) and pitot drain (3) ports,
with no evidence of contamination or water.
(paragraph 95-24). 6. Install the plugs (9) on the static drain (4) and
pitot drain (3) ports.
static port heating system. (paragraph 95-23). 7. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from the
instruments.
95-21. Pitot-static System — Cleaning
8. Connect all the previously disconnected static
and/or pitot lines to the following instruments:
MATERIALS REQUIRED
• Altimeter
• Vertical speed indicator
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• Airspeed indicator
• PRCU
1. Remove the plugs (9, Figure 95-4) from the static
drain (4) and pitot drain (3) ports. Drain collected
(paragraph 95-24).
water, if any.
95-22. Pitot-static System — Inspection

2. Disconnect the static and/or pitot lines from the
following instruments, as applicable:
1. Examine all of the lines and unions for correct
tightness (Figure 95-4).
• Altimeter
2. Visually examine all of the pitot-static tube
• Vertical speed indicator assemblies. Make sure that they are correctly
attached and that there is no sign of chaffing, wear, or
• Airspeed indicator other damage.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Visually examine the pitot tube (1) and the left 95-24. Pitot-static System — Leak Check
and right static ports (2). Make sure that there is no
obstruction or damage.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
95-23. Pitot-static Heating System — Operational
Check
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static

WARNING Equivalent Tester
33410S-70-4 or Universal Test Adapter

Equivalent
D O N O T T O U C H T H E H E AT E D
SURFACES OF THE PITOT TUBE OR
STATIC PORTS. TO PREVENT BURNS,
ONLY PUT YOUR HANDS NEAR THE
CAUTION
S U R FA C E S T O D O A C H E C K F O R
HEATER OPERATION.
D U R I N G T H E P I TO T- S TAT I C L E A K
NOTE C HE C K , DO NO T O P E N A L I NE O R
REMOVE A FITTING FROM THE VENT
Refer to the pitot-static heaters and flight SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE
instrument system wiring diagram INSTRUMENTS. FOLLOW THE TEST
(Chapter 98) for wire termination E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S
information. INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION
OF THE TEST SET AND VALVES. DO
1. If applicable, remove the pitot tube cover. NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE VALVES.
2. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the

external DC power to the helicopter. CAUTION
3. On the overhead panel, set the circuit breaker TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST
switch (4CB2) to PITOT HEATER. SET. THE HELICOPTER INSTRUMENTS
ARE EASILY PEG GED AND CAN BE
4. Make sure that the surface temperatures of the DAMAGED BY IMPROPER
pitot tube and both static ports increase. MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET.
5. Set the PITOT HEATER circuit breaker switch

(4CB2) to OFF. CAUTION
6. Make sure that the surface temperatures of the DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC
pitot tube and both static ports begin to cool. SYSTEM HEATERS WHILE THE TEST
SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO
THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND
7. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR.
external DC power from the helicopter.
1. On the pitot-static tester, open the two vent
8. Return the helicopter to the standard valves. This lets the pressure in the pitot-static tester
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After become equal with the ambient pressure. Close all of
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). the five valves on the pitot-static tester.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Connect the pitot hose and the pitot tube adapter

of the pitot-static tester to the pitot tube. Make sure
CAUTION
that the connections are tight and free of leaks.
3. Connect the static hose and the static port THE VALVES ON THE FIELD TEST SET
adapter of the pitot-static tester to the left static port. ARE SENSITIVE. ADJUST THEM
Make sure that the connections are tight and free of SLOWLY AND CAREFULLY. INCORRECT
leaks. ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE ALTIMETER
4. Seal the right static port with removable tape. AND THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR IN THE
Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is HELICOPTER.
free of leaks.
10. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent
5. Make sure that all of the connections are tight valve for the pitot pressure to approximately 1/4 turn.
and free of leaks.
11. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source
6. On the pitot-static tester, set the barometric dial of valve for the pitot pressure. Slowly close the vent
the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). Write valve for the pitot pressure.
down the altitude shown on the altimeter of the test
set. 12. Keep the source valve of the pitot pressure open
until the airspeed indicator on the pitot-static tester
7. Set the barometric dial of the altimeter to shows 120 knots.
29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars).
13. At 120 knots, close the source valve for the pitot
RESULT: pressure. Gently tap on the bezel of the airspeed
indicator on the pitot-static tester and on the
• The altimeter shows the same altitude as the instrument panel.
test set altimeter within 20 feet.
RESULT:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• The two airspeed indicators show 120
• If the altimeter on the instrument panel does ±4 knots.
not show the altitude within the tolerance of
20 feet, replace the altimeter. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NOTE • If the airspeed indicator on the instrument

panel does not show the airspeed within the
You may need to add pressure in the tank tolerance of 120 ±4 knots, replace the
during the test. airspeed indicator.
8. On the pitot-static tester, pump the pitot pressure 14. Keep the source valve for the pitot pressure
handle until the pressure dial shows 50 inches HG closed for 5 minutes.
(107 kPa).
15. After 5 minutes, read the airspeed on the

NOTE airspeed indicator on the field pitot-static tester and on
You may need to add vacuum in the tank
during the test.
RESULT:
9. On the pitot-static tester, pump the static pressure
(vacuum) handle until the vacuum dial shows • The two airspeed indicators do not show a
20 inches HG (68 kPa). decrease in airspeed of more than 10 knots.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION: AGL. at 1000 feet AGL, close the source valve and the
vent valve for the vacuum. Gently tap on the bezel of
the altimeter on the pitot-static tester and the altimeter
• If the airspeed has decreased by more than
on the instrument panel.
10 knots, examine the components associated
with the pitot pressure to find leaks. If you
detect a leak at a tube connection, tighten the RESULT:
connection or replace the part that leaks. If
you detect a leak from an instrument case,
replace that instrument. • Make sure that the altimeter shows the same
altitude as the pitot-static tester altimeter
within 20 feet.
valve for the pitot pressure. Make sure the airspeed
indicators slowly go back to their minimum value CORRECTIVE ACTION:
(0 knots).
• If the altimeter on the instrument panel does
not show the altitude within the tolerance of
17. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source
20 feet, replace the altimeter.
valve for the vacuum. Make sure that the altimeter and
the airspeed indicator show an increase. Make sure
that the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) shows a 21. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent
positive rate (climb). valve for the vacuum. Make sure the altimeter slowly
goes back to the local pressure altitude.
18. When the airspeed indicator shows 120 knots,
close the source valve for the vacuum and the vent 22. Slowly open the vent valve for the pressure.
valve for the pressure. Write down the altitude shown Make sure the airspeed indicators slowly go back to
on the altimeter of the pitot-static tester and of the their minimum value (0 knots).
instrument panel.
23. With the pressure and the vacuum stabilized,

19. After 1 minute, gently tap on the bezel of the disconnect the hoses of the pitot-static tester from the
altimeter on the pitot-static tester and the altimeter on helicopter. Remove the tape from the right static port.
95-25. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS —

RESULT: DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH
54299)
• Make sure that the two altimeters do not show
a decrease of altitude of more than 100 feet. The flight instruments include an airspeed indicator,
altimeter, inclinometer, and vertical speed indicator.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
95-26. AIRSPEED INDICATOR — DESCRIPTION
• If the altitude has decreased by more than (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
100 feet, examine the components associated
with the static pressure to find leaks. If you
The airspeed indicator (Figure 95-8) is installed in the
detect a leak at a tube connection, tighten the
top center of the instrument panel. The airspeed
indicator gives an indication of the helicopter airspeed
you detect a leak from an instrument case,
in knots. The airspeed indicator has a bellows
replace that instrument.
assembly, set of gears, pointer, and dial. The set of
gears are restrained by a spring. The spring causes
20. On the pitot-static tester, slowly adjust the source the pointer to go back to zero when there is no
valve and the vent valve for the vacuum until the pressure in the bellows. A sealed case contains all of
altimeter on the pitot-static tester shows 1000 feet the components of the airspeed indicator.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1 2
(TYPICAL)
1. Airspeed indicator dial

2. Pointer
3. Red-white line (max autorotation speed)
4. Green arc
5. VNE red line (140 knots)
407_MM_95_0116
Figure 95-8. Airspeed Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
407 helicopters S/N 53000 through 53399 NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Post ASB 407-99-33 and S/N 53400
through 54299. 33410S-70-4 or Universal Test Adapter
Equivalent
The scale of the airspeed indicator is marked with
graduations at every 5 knots from 20 to 165 knots.
Range markings are painted on the dial. The green
range marking is from 0 to 140 knots. A red/white line
CAUTION
is painted at 100 knots to show the maximum
autorotation speed. A red line is painted at 140 knots
to show the never exceed speed (VNE).
C HE C K , DO NO T O P E N A L I NE O R
The airspeed indicator is fully mechanical and can
SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE
operate without electrical power. The bellows
INSTRUMENTS. FOLLOW THE TEST
assembly is mechanically attached to the set of gears.
The set of gears move the pointer on the dial of the E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S
airspeed indicator. Pitot pressure from the pitot tube is INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION
supplied to the inside of the bellows assembly. As the OF THE TEST SET AND VALVES. DO
pitot pressure increases, the bellows assembly NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE VALVES.
expands. The expansion of the bellows assembly
causes the gears to move the pointer to show an
increase of airspeed. As the pitot pressure decreases,
the bellows assembly retracts. The retraction of the CAUTION
bellows assembly causes the gears to move the
pointer to show a decrease of airspeed (Figure 95-9).
TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST
SET. THE HELICOPTER INSTRUMENTS
Static pressure from the static ports is supplied to the
case of the airspeed indicator. The static pressure is
around the bellows assembly. The static pressure is DAMAGED BY IMPROPER
used to compensate for the variation of the density of MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET.
the air at various altitudes.
The only electrical power necessary is for the 5 VDC CAUTION

of the integral lighting. The lighting system supplies
the electrical power to the integral lighting
(Chapter 96). DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC
SYSTEM HEATERS WHILE THE TEST
For the simplified schematic of the airspeed indicator, SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO
refer to Figure 95-9. THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND
95-27. Airspeed Indicator — Functional Check
valves. This lets the pressure in the pitot-static tester
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED become equal with the ambient pressure. Close all of
the five valves on the pitot-static tester.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Equivalent Tester
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SET OF AIRSPEED INSTRUMENT

PITOT GEARS POINTER GLASS
PRESSURE
BELLOWS AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
STATIC
DIAL
PRESSURE
(TYPICAL)
SEALED INSTRUMENT CASE
407_MM_95_0117
Figure 95-9. Airspeed Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Connect the static hose and the static port 11. Keep the source valve of the pitot pressure open
adapter of the pitot-static tester to the left static port. until the airspeed indicator on the pitot-static tester
Make sure that the connections are tight and free of shows the desired airspeed from the following list. At
leaks. the desired airspeed, close the source valve for the
pitot pressure. Gently tap on the bezel of the
4. Seal the right static port with removable tape. pitot-static tester airspeed indicator and make sure it
Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is shows the selected airspeed within the tolerances.
free of leaks. Gently tap the airspeed indicator on the instrument
panel and read the shown airspeed.
5. Make sure that all of the connections are tight
and free of leaks. • 20 knots ±1.5
6. On the pitot-static tester, set the barometric dial of • 60 knots ±1.5

the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). Write
down the altitude shown on the altimeter. • 80 knots ±1.5
• 100 knots ±3.75

NOTE
You may need to add pressure in the tank • 120 knots ±3.75
during the test.
• 140 knots ±3.75
7. On the pitot-static tester, pump the pitot pressure
handle until the pressure dial shows 50 inches HG RESULT:
(107 kPa).
• The airspeed indicator shows the selected
airspeed within the tolerance.
NOTE
You may need to add vacuum in the tank CORRECTIVE ACTION:
during the test.
• If the airspeed indicator does not show the
8. On the pitot-static tester, pump the static pressure airspeed within the tolerance, replace the
(vacuum) handle until the vacuum dial shows airspeed indicator.
20 inches HG (68 kPa).
12. At 140 knots, keep the source valve for the pitot
pressure closed for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes, read
the airspeed indicators.
CAUTION
RESULT:
THE VALVES ON THE FIELD TEST SET
ARE SENSITIVE. ADJUST THEM • Make sure the two airspeed indicators do not
SLOWLY AND CAREFULLY. INCORRECT show a decrease in airspeed of more than
ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN 10 knots.
AND TO THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR IN CORRECTIVE ACTION:
THE HELICOPTER.
• If the airspeed has decreased by more than
9. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent 10 knots, examine the components associated
valve for the pitot pressure to approximately 1/4 turn. with the pitot pressure to find leaks. If you
10. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source connection or replace the part that leaks. If
valve for the pitot pressure. Slowly close the vent you detect a leak from the airspeed case,
valve for the pitot pressure. replace the airspeed indicator.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
13. On the test set, slowly open the vent valve for the 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
pitot pressure until the test set airspeed indicator from the helicopter.
shows 0 knots. Make sure the airspeed indicators
slowly go back to their minimum value (0 knots).
2. Remove the upper cover on top of the shroud
assembly (paragraph 95-10).
14. On the test set, slowly open the vent valve for the
vacuum. Make sure the test set altimeter slowly goes
3. Remove the bolt (3, Figure 95-2) and the washer
back to the local pressure altitude.
(4) from the instrument panel (7).

4. Remove the screw (24) and the washer (25) from
disconnect the hoses of the test set from the
helicopter. Remove the tape from the right static port.
16. Return the helicopter to the standard 5. Remove the screws (5) and the washers (6) from
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After the instrument panel (7).
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
6. Carefully tilt the instrument panel (7) down.
95-28. Airspeed indicator — Removal
7. Identify and disconnect the wires from the in-line
electrical connectors (1M9P1 and 1M9P2) (11 and 12,
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED Figure 95-10) with the insertion/extraction tool
(M81969/16-04) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 8. Put protective tape on the exposed end of the

electrical connectors and contacts.
M81969/16-04 Insertion/Extraction
Tool
9. Disconnect the tube assembly (pitot) (1) from the
nipple (2) at the pitot port of the airspeed indicator
(1M9) (3).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 10. Disconnect the tube assembly (4) and tube
assembly (static) (5) from the tee and adapter
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE assembly (6) at the static port side of the airspeed
indicator (1M9) (3).
11. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on all
pitot and static open ports.
WARNING
12. Remove the screws (10) from the instrument
panel (13).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 13. Remove the airspeed indicator (1M9) (3) from the
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC instrument panel (13).
14. If you replace the airspeed indicator (1M9) (3), do
NOTE as follows:
necessary to perform the required a. Remove the nipple (2) from the airspeed
maintenance. indicator (1M9) (3).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
11 TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
PU
L
5
12
80
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
2
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
1 33 N
30 N 33 3
6
FWD TANK
30
3
6
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
6 OIL ~C 10 OIL ~C 10 MODE
12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
5 3
9
4 8 1
1. Tube assembly (pitot)

2. Nipple
3. Airspeed indicator (1M9)
4. Tube assembly
5. Tube assembly (static)
6. Tee and adapter assembly
7. Packing
8. Adapter
9. Nut
10. Screw
11. Electrical connector (1M9P1)
13. Instrument panel
NOTE
1 Apply tape (C-596) 10
to tapered thread.
13
S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299
407_MM_95_0009_c01
Figure 95-10. Airspeed Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
b. Remove the adapter (8) from the tee and c. Install tape (C-596) on the threads of the
adapter assembly (6) and the airspeed indicator (1M9) nipple (2). Install the nipple into the pitot port of the
(3). Discard the packing (7). airspeed indicator (1M9) (3). Tighten the nipple.
c. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on d. Install a new packing (7) on the adapter (8).
all pitot and static open ports.
e. Install tape (C-596) on the threads of the
d. Remove the nuts (9) from the airspeed adapter (8). Install the adapter (8) into the static port of
indicator (1M9) (3). the airspeed indicator (1M9) (3). Tighten the adapter.
95-29. Airspeed Indicator — Installation f. Install the tee and adapter assembly (6) on the
adapter (8). Tighten the tee.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 2. Put the airspeed indicator (1M9) (3) in position at
the back of instrument panel (13).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 3. Install the screws (10). Tighten the screws.

Tool 4. Connect the tube assembly (4) and the tube
assembly (static) (5) to the tee and adapter assembly
(6). Tighten the fittings.
MATERIALS REQUIRED 5. Connect the tube assembly (pitot) (1) to the

nipple (2). Tighten the fitting.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 6. Remove the protective tape from the electrical

leads.
C-596 Tape
NOTE
Refer to the instruments and panel light
WARNING system (S/N 53000 Through 54299) wiring
diagram (Chapter 98) for correct installation
of the wires and contacts.
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 7. Insert the contacts of the wires to the in-line
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC electrical connectors (1M9P1 and 1M9P2) (11 and 12)
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). with the insertion/extraction tool (M81969/16-04)
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
1. If the airspeed indicator (1M9) (3, Figure 95-10)
has been replaced, do as follows:
8. Carefully put the instrument panel (13) in its
upright position.
a. Install the nuts (9) on the airspeed indicator
(1M9) (3).
9. Install the screws (5, Figure 95-2) and the
washers (6) on the instrument panel (7). Tighten the
b. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
screws.
all static and pitot ports.
10. Install the screw (24) and the washer (25) on the
NOTE instrument panel (7). Tighten the screw.
When you install the tape (C-596) on the
nipple (2) or the adapter (8), make sure that 11. Install the bolt (3) and the washer (4) on the
no tape is left on the chamfer. instrument panel (7). Tighten the bolt.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
12. Install the upper cover on top of the shroud 2. Pressure altitude. This is the altitude read from
assembly (paragraph 95-14). the altimeter when it is set to 29.92 inch HG (1013
millibars) (standard barometric pressure).
13. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
helicopter. 3. Density altitude. This is the pressure altitude
corrected for non-standard temperature.
14. Make sure the light is working on the airspeed
indicator (1M9) (3, Figure 95-10). 4. True altitude. This is the exact height above
mean sea level.
(paragraph 95-24). 5. Absolute altitude. This is the actual height above
the earth surface.
95-30. ALTIMETER — DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299) The bezel of the altimeter has a 5 VDC integral
lighting. The lighting system supplies the 5 VDC
The altimeter (Figure 95-11) is installed in the upper (Chapter 96).
right corner of the instrument panel. The altimeter
gives an indication of the helicopter altitude in feet.
For the simplified schematic of the altimeter, refer to
The altimeter has an aneroid capsule, a set of gears,
three pointers, and a dial. A sealed case contains all of Figure 95-12.
the components of the altimeter. The position of the
three pointers on the dial shows the altitude of the 95-31. Altimeter — Functional Check
helicopter.
The aneroid capsule moves the three pointers of the SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
altimeter through the set of gears. The aneroid
capsule is sealed with an internal reference pressure
of 29.92 inches HG at 15°C (50°F). Static pressure is NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
supplied from the static ports into the case of the
altimeter. As the helicopter altitude increases, the 1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static
static pressure decreases and causes the aneroid Equivalent Tester
capsule to expand. As the aneroid capsule expands,
the set of gears moves the pointers to show an 33410S-70-4 or Universal Test Adapter
increase in altitude. As the helicopter altitude Equivalent
decreases, the static pressure increases and causes
the aneroid capsule to retract. As the aneroid capsule
retracts, the set of gears moves the pointers to show a
decrease in altitude (Figure 95-12).
CAUTION
The altimeter is set by the barometric setting scale and
knob. The altimeter has two setting windows, one in
inches of mercury (inch HG), the other in millibars
(mb).
Altitude definitions are as follows: INSTRUMENTS. FOLLOW THE TEST
E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S
1. Indicated altitude. This is the altitude read directly INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION
from the altimeter when it is set to the current OF THE TEST SET AND VALVES. DO
barometric pressure. NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE VALVES.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2
1
7
3
(TYPICAL)
5
4
1. Pointer (10000th of feet)

3. Scale (in Hg)
4. Long pointer (100th of feet)
5. Barometric adjustment knob
6. Altimeter dial
7. Scale (in millibars)
407_MM_95_0010
Figure 95-11. Altimeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ANEROID SET OF GEARS ALTIMETER

CAPSULE BAROMETRIC DIAL
CORRECTION INSTRUMENT
DIFFERENTIAL GLASS
ALTITUDE
STATIC POINTERS
PRESSURE
BARO
SET
SCALE BARO
SET
KNOB
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-12. Altimeter — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
CAUTION
• If the altimeter on the instrument panel does
not show the altitude within the tolerance,
TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST replace the altimeter.
ARE EASILY PEGG ED AND CAN BE NOTE
DAMAGED BY IMPROPER
MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET. You may need to add pressure in the tank
during the test.
8. On the pitot-static tester, pump the pitot pressure

CAUTION handle until the pressure dial shows 50 inches HG
(107 kPa).
DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC
SYSTEM HEATERS WHILE THE TEST NOTE
THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND You may need to add vacuum in the tank
PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR. during the test.
1. On the pitot-static tester, open the two vent 9. On the pitot-static tester, pump the static pressure
valves. This lets the pressure in the pitot-static tester (vacuum) handle until the vacuum dial shows
to become equal with the ambient pressure. Close all 20 inches HG (68 kPa).
of the five valves on the pitot-static tester.

CAUTION
of the test set to the pitot tube. Make sure that the
connections are tight and free of leaks.
3. Connect the static hose and the static port ARE SENSITIVE. ADJUST THEM
adapter of the test set to the left static port. Make sure SLOWLY AND CAREFULLY. INCORRECT
that the connections are tight and free of leaks. ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
4. Seal the right static port with removable tape. AND TO THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR IN
Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is THE HELICOPTER.
free of leaks.
5. Make sure that all of the connections are tight CAUTION

and free of leaks.
6. On the pitot-static tester, set the barometric dial of SET THE VALVES ON THE FIELD TEST
the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). Write SET SLOWLY AND AT THE SAME TIME.
down the altitude shown on the altimeter. THIS PREVENTS TO O MUCH
DI F F E RE NT IA L P RE S S UR E I N T HE
AIRSPEED INDICATOR. INCORRECT
7. Set the barometric dial of the altimeter to ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). CA U SE TO O MU CH D IF F ER E NT I A L
PRESSURE AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO
RESULT: THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR.
• The altimeter shows the same altitude as the 10. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent
test set altimeter within 20 feet. valve for the pitot pressure to approximately 1/4 turn.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
11. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source 14. When the altimeter shows 12,000 feet, close the
valve for the pitot pressure. Slowly close the vent source valve for the vacuum. Write down the altitude
valve for the pitot pressure. shown on the altimeter of the pitot-static tester and of
12. Keep the source valve of the pitot pressure open
until the airspeed indicator on the pitot-static tester 15. After 1 minute, gently tap on the bezel of the
shows 120 knots. At 120 knots, close the source valve altimeter on the pitot-static tester and the altimeter on
for the pitot pressure. the instrument panel.
13. Keep the source valve of the static pressure open RESULT:
until the altimeter on the pitot-static tester shows the
altitudes from the following list. At the desired altitude, • The altimeters do not show a decrease of
close the source valve for the static pressure. Gently altitude of more than 100 feet.
tap on the bezel of the pitot-static tester altimeter and
make sure it shows the selected altitude within the CORRECTIVE ACTION:
tolerances. Gently tap the altimeter on the instrument
panel and read the shown altitude. • If the altitude has decreased by more than
• -1000 feet ±20
• 0 feet ±20 you detect a leak from the altimeter case,
replace the altimeter.
• 500 feet ±20
• 1000 feet ±20

CAUTION
• 1500 feet ±25
• 2000 feet ±30 ARE SENSITIVE. ADJUST THEM
SLOWLY AND CAREFULLY. INCORRECT
• 3000 feet ±30 ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
• 4000 feet ±35 AND TO THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR IN
THE HELICOPTER.
• 6000 feet ±40
• 8000 feet ±60 CAUTION
• 10,000 feet ±80

SET THE VALVES ON THE FIELD TEST
• 12,000 feet ±90 SET SLOWLY AND AT THE SAME TIME.
THIS PREVENTS TO O MUCH
RESULT: DI F F E RE NT IA L P RE S S UR E I N T HE
AIRSPEED INDICATOR. INCORRECT
ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
• The altimeter shows the selected altitude
CA U SE TO O MU CH D IF F ER E NT I A L
within the tolerance.
THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the altimeter does not show the altitude valve for the pitot pressure until the pitot-static tester
within the tolerance, replace the altimeter. airspeed indicator shows 0 knots. Make sure the
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
airspeed indicators slowly go back to their minimum 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
value (0 knots). from the helicopter.
17. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent 2. Remove the upper cover on top of the shroud
valve for the vacuum. Make sure the altimeter slowly assembly (paragraph 95-10).
goes back to the local pressure altitude.
3. Remove the bolt (3, Figure 95-2) and the washer
(4) from the instrument panel (7).
disconnect the hoses of the pitot-static tester from the
helicopter. Remove the tape from the right static port. 4. Remove the screw (24) and the washer (25) from
19. Return the helicopter to the standard

configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After 5. Remove the screws (5) and the washers (6) from
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). the instrument panel (7).
6. Carefully tilt the instrument panel (7) down.

95-32. Altimeter Indicator — Removal
7. Identify and disconnect the wires from the in-line

electrical connectors (3427DS1P1 and 3427DS1P2)
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED (6 and 7, Figure 95-13) with the insertion/extraction
tool (M81969/16-04) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
8. Put protective tape on the exposed ends of all the
M81969/16-04 Insertion/Extraction electrical connectors (3427DS1P1 and 3427DS1P2)
Tool (6 and 7) and contacts.
9. Disconnect the tube assembly (static) (1) from

the adapter (2).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
10. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on all of
the open fittings and lines.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
11. Remove the screws (5) from the instrument panel
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs (8).
12. Remove the altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3)

WARNING
13. If you replace the altimeter indicator (3427DS1)
(3), do as follows:
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC a. Remove the adapter (2) from the altimeter
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). indicator (3427DS1) (3).
b. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on

NOTE altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3).
necessary to perform the required c. Remove the nuts (4) from the altimeter
maintenance. indicator (3427DS1) (3).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS 20
6
9 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
1 2

2. Adapter
3. Altimeter indicator (3427DS1)
4. Nut
5. Screw
5
6. Electrical connector (3427DS1P1)
8. Instrument panel
NOTE
1 Apply tape (C-596)
to tapered thread.
S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299
407_MM_95_0012
Figure 95-13. Altimeter — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-33. Altimeter indicator — Installation 4. Connect the tube assembly (static) (1) to the
adapter (2). Tighten the fitting of the tube assembly.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 5. Remove the protective tape from the electrical
connectors (3427DS1P1 and 3427DS1P2) (6 and 7)
and the contacts.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
M81969/16-04 Insertion/Extraction NOTE

Tool
Refer to the instruments and panel light
system (S/N 53000 Through 54299) wiring
diagram (Chapter 98) for correct installation
MATERIALS REQUIRED of the wires and contacts.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 6. Connect the wires to the in-line electrical
connectors (3427DS1P1 and 3427DS1P2) (6 and 7)
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE with the insertion/extraction tool (M81969/16-04)
C-596 Tape
upright position.
WARNING
8. Install the screws (5, Figure 95-2) and the
washers (6) on the instrument panel (7). Tighten the
screws.
9. Install the screw (24) and the washer (25) on the
instrument panel (7). Tighten the screw.
1. If the altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3, 10. Install the bolt (3) and the washer (4) on the
Figure 95-13) has been replaced, do as follows: instrument panel (7). Tighten the bolt.
a. Install the nuts (4) on the altimeter indicator 11. Install the upper cover on top of the shroud
(3427DS1) (3). assembly (paragraph 95-14).
b. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from 12. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3). helicopter.
13. Make sure the instrument light is working on the

NOTE altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3, Figure 95-13)
When you install the tape (C-596) on the (Chapter 96).
adapter (2), make sure no tape is left on the
chamfer. 14. Do a leak check of the pitot-static system
(paragraph 95-24).
c. Install tape (C-596) on the threads of the
adapter (2). Install the adapter into the port of the 95-34. ENCODING ALTIMETER (ATC
altimeter Indicator (3427DS1) (3). Tighten the adapter. TRANSPONDER KIT) — DESCRIPTION
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
2. Put the altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3) in
position at the back of instrument panel (8). The encoding altimeter may be installed in place of the
regular altimeter as part of the optional encoding
3. Install the screws (5). Tighten the screws. altimeter kit (BHT-407-II-16). The encoding altimeter is
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
used in conjunction with the ATC transponder kit MATERIALS REQUIRED

(Chapter 97). The encoding altimeter provides an
indication of the helicopter altitude in feet. The Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
encoding altimeter has an aneroid capsule, a set of
gears, three pointers, and a dial. The encoding NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
altimeter also contains an electronic encoding module.
The electronic encoding module has an encoding disc, C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
light emitting diodes, and light sensitive diode. A
sealed case contains all of the components of the
altimeter. The position of the three pointers on the dial WARNING
shows the altitude of the helicopter. For the simplified
schematic of the encoding altimeter, refer to
Figure 95-14.
The aneroid capsule moves the three pointers of the NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
altimeter through the set of gears. The aneroid EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
of 29.92 inches HG at 15°C (50°F). Static pressure is
supplied from the static ports into the case of the NOTE
altimeter. As the helicopter altitude increases, the This procedure provides information to
static pressure decreases and causes the aneroid remove encoding altimeters
capsule to expand. As the aneroid capsule expands, 214-175-278-101 and
the set of gears moves the pointers to show an 3A65.22.20F.05.1.RB as installed per
increase in altitude. As the helicopter altitude BHT-407-II-16.
the aneroid capsule to retract. As the aneroid capsule
retracts, the set of gears moves the pointers to show a NOTE
decrease in altitude. The altimeter is set by the Remove components only to the extent
barometric setting scale and knob. necessary to perform the required
maintenance.
The set of gears also moves the encoding disc of the
electronic encoding module. The electronic encoding 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
module supplies coded pulses to the transponder to from the helicopter.
provide the altitude of the helicopter. The series of
code pulses are used by the ATC transponder system
to transmit the helicopter altitude to the ATC ground 2. Remove the upper cover on top of the shroud
stations. assembly (paragraph 95-10).
The bezel of the encoding altimeter indicator has a 3. Remove the bolt (3, Figure 95-2) and the washer
5 VDC integral lighting. The lighting system supplies (4) from the instrument panel (7).
the 5 VDC (Chapter 96).
4. Remove the screw (24) and the washer (25) from
95-35. Encoding Altimeter — Removal the instrument panel (7).
5. Remove the screws (5) and the washers (6) from

MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 6. Carefully tilt the instrument panel (7) down.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 7. Remove the electrical connector (3427DS1P1)

(6, Figure 95-15) from the encoding altimeter
(3427DS1) (3).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

DIFFERENTIAL GLASS
ALTITUDE
STATIC POINTERS
PRESSURE
ALT
ENCDG
28
VDC
ATC ENCODER
TRANSPONDER DISK
SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
BARO
SET
KNOB
(TYPICAL)
407_MM_95_0013
Figure 95-14. Encoding Altimeter — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1 01 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
6
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
1 FUEL CAPACITY
BASIC 869 LBS
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
FUEL QTY
1
0
QTY LBS
X100
12
11
10
9 2
1
0
RPM
% X 10
11
AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
KING
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
2
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
OIL C 10 PSI OIL C 10 MODE
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST 5 5 S 15 FUEL
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358
MAN
THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION.
3 4

2. Adapter
3. Altimeter (encoding) (3427DS1)
7 4. Nut
5. Screw
7. Instrument panel
Figure 95-15. Encoding Altimeter — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Put caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the electrical

NOTE
connector (3427DS1P1) (6) and the encoding
altimeter (3427DS1) (3). This procedure provides information to
install encoding altimeters
9. Disconnect the tube assembly (static) (1) from 214-175-278-101 and
the adapter (2 or 8). 3A65.22.20F.05.1.RB as installed per
BHT-407-II-16.
10. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on all of
1. If the encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (3,
the open fittings and lines.
Figure 95-15) has been replaced, do as follows:
11. Remove the screws (5) from the instrument panel

a. Install the nuts (4) on the encoding altimeter
(11).
(3427DS1) (3).
12. Remove the encoding altimeter indicator b. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
(3427DS1) (3) from the instrument panel (8). the encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (3).
13. If you replace the encoding altimeter indicator

(3427DS1) (3), do as follows: NOTE
When you install the tape (C-596) on the
a. For encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (3) adapter (2 or 10), make sure no tape is left
214-175-278-101, remove the adapter (2). on the chamfer.
b. For encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (3) c. Install tape (C-596) on the threads of the
3A65.22.20F.05.1.RB, remove the adapter (8) and the adapter (2 or 10).
adapter (10). Discard the packings (7 and 9).
d. Install the adapter (2) into encoding altimeter
c. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on (3427DS1) (3) 214-175-278-101. Tighten the adapter.
the encoding altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3) and
tube assembly (static) (1). e. Install the adapter (10) into encoding altimeter
(3427DS1) (3) 3A65.22.20F.05.1.RB. Tighten the
d. Remove the nuts (4) from the encoding adapter. Install the packings (7 and 9) on the adapter
altimeter (3427DS1) (3). (8) and install into the adapter (10). Tighten the
adapter.
95-36. Encoding Altimeter — Installation
2. Put the encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (3) in
position at the back of instrument panel (11).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
3. Install the screws (5). Tighten the screws.
4. Install the tube assembly (static) (1) to the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE adapter (2 or 10). Tighten the fitting of the tube
assembly.
C-596 Tape
5. Connect the electrical connector (3427DS1P1)
(6) to the encoding altimeter indicator (3427DS1) (3).
WARNING
upright position.
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 7. Install the screws (5, Figure 95-2) and the
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC washers (6) on the instrument panel (7). Tighten the
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). screws.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Install the screw (24) and the washer (25) on the For the simplified schematic of the VSI, refer to
instrument panel (7). Tighten the screw. Figure 95-17.
9. Install the bolt (3) and the washer (4) on the 95-38. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) —
instrument panel (7). Tighten the bolt. Functional Check
10. Install the upper cover on top of the shroud

assembly (paragraph 95-14).
11. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
helicopter. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
12. Make sure the instrument light is working on the 1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static
encoding altimeter (3427DS1) (3, Figure 95-15) Equivalent Tester
(Chapter 96).
13. Do a leak check of the pitot-static system Equivalent
(paragraph 95-24).
14. Do an operational check of the transponder

system (Chapter 97). CAUTION
95-37. VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR —

DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH
54299)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) (Figure 95-16)
provides an indication of the helicopter rate of climb
E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S
and descent in feet per minute. The VSI contains a
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION
pointer, scale, diaphragm, calibrated diffuser, and a
mechanical linkage. All of the components of the VSI
NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE VALVES.
are inside an airtight case (Figure 95-17).
Static pressure is supplied to the VSI through the static

system. The static pressure enters the diaphragm. At CAUTION
the same time, the static pressure enters the airtight
case of the VSI through the diffuser. The diffuser
causes the static pressure to enter the VSI case at a TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST
slower rate than in the diaphragm. SET. THE HELICOPTER INSTRUMENTS
During a climb, the static pressure inside the case is DAMAGED BY IMPROPER
greater than the static pressure in the diaphragm. This MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET.
positive differential pressure causes the diaphragm to
retract. The retraction of the diaphragm is transmitted
to the pointer to cause it to show a vertical speed on
the UP scale. CAUTION
During a descent, the static pressure inside the case is

less than the static pressure in the diaphragm. This DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC
negative differential pressure causes the diaphragm to SYSTEM HEATERS WHILE THE TEST
expand. The expansion of the diaphragm is SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO
transmitted to the pointer to cause it to show a vertical THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND
speed on the DOWN scale. PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1 01 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90 % RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 MAN
(TYPICAL)
3
2
1. UP scale
2. DOWN scale
3. NULL adjustment screw
4. Pointer
Figure 95-16. Vertical Speed Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ANEROID INSTRUMENT
CAPSULE DIAL
INSTRUMENT
GLASS
SET OF GEARS
STATIC
PRESSURE POINTER
RESTRICTED
STATIC
PRESSURE NULL
DIFFUSER POSITION
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-17. Vertical Speed Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
valves. This lets the pressure in the pitot-static tester
to become equal with the ambient pressure. Close all You may need to add vacuum in the tank
of the five valves on the pitot-static tester. during the test.
2. Connect the pitot hose and the pitot tube adapter 10. On the pitot-static tester, pump the static pressure
of the pitot-static tester to the pitot tube. Make sure (vacuum) handle until the vacuum dial shows
that the connections are tight and free of leaks. 20 inches HG (68 kPa).
3. Connect the static hose and the static port

adapter of the pitot-static tester to the left static port. CAUTION
Make sure that the connections are tight and free of
leaks.
4. Seal the right static port with removable tape. ARE SENSITIVE. ADJUST THEM
Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is SLOWLY AND CAREFULLY. INCORRECT
free of leaks. ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
5. Make sure that all of the connections are tight AND TO THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR IN
and free of leaks. THE HELICOPTER.
6. On the instrument panel, examine the pointer of

the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI). CAUTION
RESULT:
SET THE VALVES ON THE FIELD TEST
• The pointer of the VSI shows a speed of 0 feet SET SLOWLY AND AT THE SAME TIME.
per minute. THIS PREVENTS TO O MUCH
DI F F E RE NT IA L P RE S S UR E I N T HE
CORRECTIVE ACTION: AIRSPEED INDICATOR. INCORRECT
ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES CAN
CA U SE TO O MU CH D IF F ER E NT I A L
• If the VSI pointer does not show a speed of
0 feet per minute, adjust the pointer with the
THE AIRSPEED INDICATOR.
null adjustment screw on the lower left corner
of the VSI. If the pointer cannot be adjusted to
0 feet per minute, replace the VSI.
valve for the pitot pressure to approximately 1/4 turn.
7. On the pitot-static tester, set the barometric dial of
the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). Write 12. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source
down the altitude shown on the altimeter. valve for the pitot pressure. Slowly close the vent
valve for the pitot pressure.
8. Set the barometric dial of the test set altimeter to
29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). 13. Keep the source valve of the pitot pressure open
shows 120 knots. At 120 knots, close the source valve
NOTE for the pitot pressure.
You may need to add pressure in the tank
during the test.
NOTE
9. On the pitot-static tester, pump the pitot pressure Monitor the VSI on the instrument panel at
handle until the pressure dial shows 50 inches HG the same time as the VSI on the pitot-static
(107 kPa). tester.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
14. On the pitot-static tester, open the source valve CORRECTIVE ACTION:
for the vacuum to obtain a positive speed (climb) of
1000 feet per minute. Keep the static pressure until • If the VSI does not show a negative speed
the test set altimeter shows 2000 feet. (descent) of 1000 feet per minute, replace the
VSI.
RESULT:
• Make sure that the VSI shows a positive valve for the vacuum. Make sure the test set altimeter
speed (climb) of 1000 feet per minute. slowly goes back to the local pressure altitude.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 19. Slowly open the vent valve for the pressure.
Make sure the airspeed indicators slowly go back to
their minimum value (0 knots).
• If the VSI does not show a positive speed
(climb) of 1000 feet per minute, replace the
VSI. 20. With the pressure and the vacuum stabilized,
15. When the altimeter shows 2000 feet, close the
source valve for the vacuum.
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
16. After 1 minute, gently tap on the bezel of the Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
pitot-static tester altimeter and the instrument panel
altimeter.
95-39. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) — Removal
RESULT:
MATERIALS REQUIRED
• The altimeters do not show a decrease of
altitude of more than 100 feet. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the altitude has decreased by more than
detect a leak at a tube connection, tighten the WARNING
you detect a leak from the VSI case, replace
the VSI. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
17. On the pitot-static tester, slowly adjust the vent NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
valve for the vacuum until the VSI on the pitot-static EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
tester shows a negative speed (descent) of 1000 feet
per minute. Keep the static pressure until the NOTE
pitot-static tester altimeter shows 0 feet.
RESULT: maintenance.
• Make sure that the VSI shows a negative 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
speed (descent) of 1000 feet per minute. from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. On the instrument panel, remove the screws and

washers that attach the instrument panel
(Figure 95-2). WARNING
3. Loosen the Dzus fasteners that secure the cover

of the shroud assembly to the top of the glareshield. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
4. At the instrument panel, remove the bolt and NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
washer that attach the instrument panel. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
5. Tilt the instrument panel. 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
CAUTION 2. Install the packing (3, Figure 95-18) and the

reducer (2) on the static port of the Vertical Speed
Indicator (VSI) (4M6) (4).
INSTALL A CAP ON THE OPEN END OF
T H E S TAT I C P O R T A N D L I N E T O 3. Install tape (C-596) on the threads of the
P R E V E N T C O N TA M I N AT I O N B Y reducer (2).
FOREIGN OBJECTS. CONTAMINATION
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE VSI.
4. Install the VSI (4M6) (4) into its location on the
6. Disconnect and remove the static tube assembly instrument panel.
(static) (1, Figure 95-18) from the static port of the
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) (4M6) (4).
5. Install the screws (6) and nuts (5) that attach the
VSI (4M6) (4) to the instrument panel.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector (4M6P1) (7).
8. Remove the screws (6) and nuts (5) that attach 6. Connect the tube assembly (static) (1) to the
the VSI (4M6) (4) to the instrument panel. static port of the VSI (4M6) (4). Connect the electrical
connector (7) (4M6P1).
9. Remove the VSI (4M6) (4) from the instrument
panel. 7. Carefully put the instrument panel in its upright
position.
10. Remove the reducer (2) and packing (3) from the
static port of the airspeed indicator.
8. Install the bolt and washer that attach the
95-40. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) — instrument panel (Figure 95-2).
Installation
9. Install the screws and washers that attach the
instrument panel.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
10. Tighten the Dzus fasteners that secure the cover
of the shroud assembly to the top of the glareshield.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-596 Tape
(paragraph 95-24).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1 01 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
1
2
3 5
4

2. Reducer
8 3. Packing
4. Vertical speed indicator (4M6)
5. Nut
6. Screw
8. Instrument panel
Figure 95-18. Vertical Speed Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-41. NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS (S/N • Magnetic card does not move freely
53000 THROUGH 54299)
2. Before you start the calibration procedure make
The only navigation instrument installed as standard sure of the following conditions:
equipment is a magnetic compass. An optional
directional gyroscope kit and an attitude indicator kit a. All of the magnetic material and equipment in
can be installed. the helicopter are in their normal flight positions.
95-42. MAGNETIC COMPASS — DESCRIPTION b. The controls and levers are in their normal
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299) flight positions.
The magnetic compass (Figure 95-19) is installed on a
c. All the persons near or in the helicopter have
bracket in the right side of the forward cabin. The
no magnetic material on them.
magnetic compass gives an indication of the heading
of the helicopter in relation to the magnetic north. The
d. All vehicles, ground power units, other
magnetic compass has a magnetic card, which is
helicopters, and aircraft are moved away from the
installed on a pivot assembly, and a lubber line. The
compass rose.
case of the magnetic compass contains all the
components. The case is sealed and it is filled with
damping fluid. The lubber line is attached to the case e. The location for the compass calibration must
at the face of the magnetic compass. The lubber line be at least 300 feet (90 m) away from electrical power
gives a reference line of the helicopter longitudinal cables or communication cables installed above or
axis. below ground.
The magnetic card aligns itself with the magnetic field f. The location for the compass calibration must
of the earth. As the helicopter turns, the case turns be at least 600 feet (180 m) away from large objects
around the magnetic card. The position of the lubber such as buildings, railroad tracks, high voltage
line on the magnetic card shows the heading of the transmission lines, or direct current cables.
helicopter.
g. A magnetic survey must be performed on the
A compensator is installed in the lower part of the compass swing area in accordance with local aviation
case. The compensator has two permanent magnets. regulations. Additional surveys must be carried out
The compensator is used to correct the deviation after any changes, major construction, or new
errors caused by the magnetic interference within the installations within 600 feet (180 m) of the compass
helicopter. swing area.
95-43. Magnetic Compass — Calibration 3. On the magnetic compass, loosen the cover to
(Compass Rose Method) access the compensator.
1. Examine the magnetic compass for the 4. Install the towing wheels on the helicopter skid
conditions that follow. If any of these conditions are (Chapter 9).
present, replace the magnetic compass:
5. Tow the helicopter to a compass rose
• Level of the damping fluid is low
(Chapter 9).
• Glass on the face of the magnetic compass
has a crack 6. Attach the right skid of the helicopter to the
compass rose with a holding fixture (Figure 95-20).
• Magnetic card has too much oscillation
7. Install the extension arm to the tow bar
• Magnetic card is not level (Chapter 9).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIAPHRAGM COMPASS LUBBER INSTRUMENT

CARD LINE GLASS
PIVOT
ASSEMBLY
COMPASS MAGNETS COMPENSATOR

FLUID MAGNETS
COMPENSATOR
Figure 95-19. Magnetic Compass — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ALIGNMENT
LINE
SE
SW
GROUND HANDLING
WHEELS
W
E
COMPASS ROSE
HOLDING FIXTURE
CENTER
NW
NE
N TOW BAR TOW TRUCK
TOW BAR EXTENSION ARM
Figure 95-20. Compass Rose Method — Diagram (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Move the helicopter to the magnetic north (N) 15. Read the heading on the compass and note any
heading. error.
16. On the compass compensator, adjust the N-S

CAUTION screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.
17. Move the helicopter to the magnetic west (W)

A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE heading.
HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
18. Read the heading on the compass and note any
9. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1, Section 2) error.
and following warmup, roll the throttle to the FLY
position. 19. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W
screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.
CAUTION
CAUTION
DO NOT ENERGIZE THE LANDING
LIGHTS, THE PITOT TUBE, AND THE THE MAXIMUM VALUE FOR AN ERROR
STATIC PORTS HEATERS. FAILURE TO IS ±10°. IF AN ERROR VALUE EXCEEDS
OBEY THIS PRECAUTION MAY RESULT ±10°, DO THE C A L I B R AT I O N
IN AN OVE RHEAT CO NDITION AND PROCEDURE AGAIN. IF THE ERROR
DAMAGE. VA L U E C A N N O T B E D E C R E A S E D ,
TROUBLESHOOT THE COMPASS.
10. Energize all the electrical/avionics equipment
used during flight. Simulate the actual flight conditions
20. Move the helicopter through every 30° magnetic
to the extent practical during the compass calibration.
heading. Write all error values on a new correction
Make sure the landing lights, the pitot tube, and static
card. Write the serial number of the compass on the
port heaters are set to the OFF position.
back of the correction card.
NOTE 21. On the magnetic compass, install the cover of the

All of the adjustments of the screws on the compensator.
compass compensator must be made with
a non-metallic screwdriver. The compass 22. Shut down the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1).
should be lightly tapped after each
adjustment and be allowed time to settle
before a reading is taken. 23. Install the correction card in the holder on the
magnetic compass.
screw until the compass reads accurately north (N). 95-44. Magnetic Compass — Calibration (Sight
Compass Method)
12. Move the helicopter to the magnetic east (E)
heading.
13. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W
screw until the compass reads accurately east (E).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
14. Move the helicopter to the magnetic south (S)
1234F or Equivalent Sight Compass
heading.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Examine the magnetic compass for the 4. Install the towing wheels on the helicopter skid
conditions that follow. If any of these conditions are (Chapter 9).
5. Tow the helicopter to the location for the
• Level of the damping fluid is low calibration (Chapter 9).

has a crack 6. Install the extension arm to the tow bar
(Chapter 9).
• Magnetic card oscillates too much
7. Use the sighting compass as follows:
• Magnetic card is not level
• Magnetic card does not move freely a. To determine the heading of the helicopter, the
sighting compass must be held as level as possible.
The person that uses the sighting compass must look
2. Before you start the calibration procedure, make
through the sighting lens to the centre line of the
sure of the conditions that follow:
helicopter.
a. All of the magnetic material and equipment in
the helicopter are installed in their normal flight b. Take a reading of the heading after a sufficient
positions. amount of time for the compass card to stabilize. Read
the heading 3 times to make sure of a proper
b. The controls and levers are in their normal indication of the heading.
flight positions.
c. The person that uses the sighting compass
c. All the persons near or in the helicopter have must stand directly in front of the helicopter. The
no magnetic material on them. person must align the sighting compass directly in line
with the helicopter centre line. The person reads the
d. All vehicles, ground power units, and heading on the sighting compass and finds any errors
helicopters are moved away from the compass rose. of the helicopter heading. Move the helicopter to
correct any error of the helicopter heading.
e. The location for the compass calibration must
be at least 300 feet (90 m) away from electrical power d. At every heading, compare the heading of the
cables or communication cables installed above or magnetic compass indication and the indication of the
below ground. sighting compass. Write down any error shown on the
magnetic compass indication.
f. The location for the compass calibration must
be at least 600 feet (180 m) away from large objects
such as buildings, railroads tracks, high voltage
transmission lines, or direct current cables. CAUTION
g. The location for the compass calibration is

level. THE PERSON WHO USES THE
SIGHTING CO MPASS MUS T STAND
h. A magnetic survey must be performed on the D I R E C T LY I N F R O N T O F T H E
compass swing area in accordance with local aviation HELICOPTER AT A MINIMUM DISTANCE
regulations. Additional surveys must be carried out OF 30 FEET (9.15 M). A DISTANCE OF
after any changes, major construction, or new 50 FEET (15.25 M) OR MORE IS
installations within 600 feet (180 m) of the compass RECOMMENDED.
swing area.
8. Move the helicopter to the magnetic north (N)
3. On the magnetic compass, loosen the cover to heading. Make sure of the helicopter heading with the
access the compensator. sighting compass (Figure 95-21).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GROUND HANDLING WHEELS
TOW TRUCK
TOW BAR
LINE OF VISION
SIGHTING LENS
SIGHTING COMPASS
TECHNICIAN
Figure 95-21. Sighting Compass Method — Diagram (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

error.
CAUTION

A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. 17. Move the helicopter to the magnetic west (W)
heading. Make sure of the helicopter heading with the
9. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1, Section 2) sighting compass.
position.
error.
CAUTION 19. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W

screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.

LIGHTS, THE PITOT TUBE, AND THE
STATIC PORTS HEATERS. FAILURE TO CAUTION
OBEY THIS PRECAUTION WILL RESULT
IN AN OV ERHEAT CO NDITION AND
DAMAGE. THE MAXIMUM VALUE FOR AN ERROR
IS ±10°. IF AN ERROR VALUE EXCEEDS
10. Energize all the electrical/avionics equipment ±10°, DO THE C A L I B R AT I O N
used during flight. Simulate the actual flight conditions PROCEDURE AGAIN. IF THE ERROR
to the extent practical during the compass calibration. VA L U E C A N N O T B E D E C R E A S E D ,
Make sure the landing lights, the pitot tube, and static TROUBLESHOOT THE COMPASS.
port heaters are set to the OFF position.
20. Move the helicopter through every 30° magnetic
heading. Make sure of every heading of the helicopter
NOTE with the sighting compass. Write all error values on a
new correction card. Write the serial number of the
Make all of the adjustments of the screws
compass on the back of the correction card.
on the compensator with a non-metallic
screwdriver. Tap the compass lightly after
each adjustment. Allow time for the 21. On the magnetic compass, install the cover of the
compass to settle before you take a compensator.
reading.
22. Shut down the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1).
screw until the compass reads accurately north (N).
23. Install the correction card in the holder on the
magnetic compass.
95-45. INCLINOMETER — DESCRIPTION
sighting compass.
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
13. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W The inclinometer (Figure 95-22) is installed in the
screw until the compass reads accurately east (E). upper right hand part of the instrument panel. The
inclinometer gives an indication of the directional
14. Move the helicopter to the magnetic south (S) balance of the helicopter. The inclinometer is a curved
heading. Make sure of the helicopter with the sighting glass tube that is filled with a clear liquid and it holds a
compass. black ball made of glass.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1 01 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80
5
3 8
20 7
6
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
4 2
(TYPICAL)
1. Inclinometer light
2. Inclinometer
3. Index lines
4. Glass ball
Figure 95-22. Inclinometer — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
If the helicopter is in a slip or a skid, the ball of the a. The compass card of the DG shows an
inclinometer will move off centre. oscillation at startup and becomes stable within
3 minutes.
A 28 VDC light is installed on the inclinometer. The
lighting system supplies and controls the 28 VDC to b. The compass card does not continuously
the light (Chapter 96). rotate and does not drift.
95-46. DIRECTIONAL GYROSCOPE (FLIGHT c. No loud noises (that indicate a damaged

INSTRUMENTS KIT) — DESCRIPTION bearing or metal friction) are heard during the startup.
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
d. The flag with the red bars goes out of view
The Directional Gyroscope (DG) (Figure 95-23) within 3 minutes.
installation includes, the DG instrument, a circuit
breaker, and related wiring. The DG instrument (4M6)
4. Set the DG heading to match the magnetic
is installed in the instrument panel. The 5 amps DG
compass and make sure the compass card of the DG
IND (4CB6) toggle circuit breaker is installed on the
does not rotate or drift for 10 minutes.
overhead panel.
The DG heading is set with the knob, located at the 5. Set the DG INSTR (4CB6) circuit breaker switch
lower left corner of the face of the instrument, to the to OFF.
correct magnetic heading.
6. Set the BATT switch to OFF, or remove the
The electrical power for the gyroscope is supplied by a external DC power from the helicopter.
power supply in the instrument. The power supply
supplies AC voltage to drive the gyroscope. The input
of the power supply is 28 VDC from the DG IND
(4CB6) circuit breaker on the overhead panel. A red
bar warning flag, which shows on the dial face,
provides an alert that the power supply has failed or
that the 28 VDC is not supplied to the instrument. 95-48. Directional Gyroscope (DG) — Removal
The DG indicator has an integral light system. The

28 VDC light system of the helicopter supplies and WARNING
controls the power to the integral lights of the indicator
(Chapter 96).
95-47. Directional Gyroscope (DG) — WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
Operational Check NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
1. Set the BATT switch to ON, or connect the
external DC power to the helicopter. NOTE
2. Set the DG INSTR (4CB6) circuit breaker switch necessary to perform the required
to DG. maintenance.
3. On the Directional Gyroscope (DG) indicator, 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
make sure of the conditions that follow: from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1 01 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 1 2
4 0 10 10
120
NP 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 GPS
7 5 10 80 50
2 4 70 60
8 3
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
POWER WARNING
INDICATOR
AIRCRAFT
SYMBOL
KNOB
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-23. Directional Gyroscope Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
CAUTION

WA I T 1 0 M I N U T E S F O R T H E from the helicopter.
GYROSCOPE TO COME TO A
COMPLETE STOP PRIOR TO TILTING
2. Install the DG indicator (4M4) (2, Figure 95-24) in
T H E I N S T R U M E N T PA N E L A N D
RE M O V I NG T HE D G IN S T R UM E N T. its location on the instrument panel (4).
FAILURE TO OBEY THIS PRECAUTION
M AY R E S U LT I N D A M A G E TO T H E 3. Attach the DG indicator (4M4) (2) to the
GYROSCOPE OF THE DG. instrument panel (4) with the screws (3).
2. At the instrument panel, remove the screws and

washers that attach the instrument panel 4. Connect the electrical connector (4M4P1) (1) to
(Figure 95-2). the receptacle of the DG indicator (4M4) (2).
3. Loosen the Dzus fasteners that attach the cover 5. Carefully put the instrument panel (4) in position.
of the shroud assembly to the instrument panel.
4. At the instrument panel, remove the bolt and 6. Install the bolt and washer that attach the
washer that attach the instrument panel. instrument panel (Figure 95-2).
5. Tilt the instrument panel. 7. Install the screws and washers that attach the
instrument panel.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector (4M4P1) (1,
Figure 95-24) from the DG indicator (4M4) (2). 8. Install the three screws and washers that secure
the cover of the shroud assembly to the top of the
7. Hold the DG indicator and remove the screws (3) glareshield.
that attach the DG indicator to the instrument
panel (4).
9. Do an operational check of the DG indicator
(paragraph 95-47).
CAUTION
95-50. ATTITUDE INDICATOR (OPTIONAL KIT) —
HANDLE THE DG INDICATOR 54299)
CAREFULLY TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE
GYROSCOPE. The attitude indicator (Figure 95-25) installation
includes an attitude indicator, a circuit breaker, and
8. Remove the DG indicator. related wiring. The attitude indicator is installed on the
instrument panel, on the right side of the torque (TRQ)
95-49. Directional Gyroscope (DG) — Installation indicator (inclinometer location on the basic
helicopter). The ATT FLIGHT INSTR (4CB3) circuit
breaker is installed on the overhead panel.
WARNING
The attitude indicator is a precise gyroscopic
instrument primarily designed to give a visual
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS indication of the pitch and roll attitude of the helicopter
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR in relation to the earth.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 1 2
4 0 10 10
120
NP 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 GPS
7 5 10 80 50
2 4 70 60
8 3
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
1
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN

4 2. DG Indicator (4M4)
3. Screw
4. Instrument panel
Figure 95-24. Direction Gyroscope — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 10 10
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
POWER OFF
FLAG
ROLL INDEX
ROLL SCALE
PITCH SCALE
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
TRIM KNOB
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-25. Attitude Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
In order to achieve the desired attitude indication, the 3. On the attitude indicator, make sure of the
instrument must establish and maintain a stabilized conditions that follow:
datum reference perpendicular to the earth. This is
accomplished by a universally mounted, self erecting, a. The roll and pitch scales show an oscillation at
high speed rotor, which develops sufficient momentum startup and become stable within 3 minutes.
to overcome normal bearing friction and thus becomes
stable relative to space. This stability, known as rigidity
b. The pitch scale does not continuously rotate
in space, resists small forces that attempt to displace
and does not excessively drift.
the axis of rotation, and consequently, its position in
space.
c. No loud noises (that indicate a damaged
bearing or metal friction) are heard during the startup.
The visual presentation displays pitch and roll
information by means of a small symbolic airplane and
a horizon pointer bar, which is mounted so that it will d. The pitch scale is level within 3 minutes.
remain parallel to the true horizon regardless of the
helicopter attitude. e. The roll scale is centered within 3 minutes.
Angular movements of the helicopter in roll are 4. Pull the PULL TO CAGE knob on the attitude
indicated by means of a roll index and circular dial ring indicator. Make sure that the indicator is caged with
that is graduated in both primary and secondary the pitch and the roll scales.
markings. The degree of bank is indicated by the
position of the roll index to the dial ring. 5. Release the PULL TO CAGE knob.
The functional center of the instrument is an

6. Let the attitude indicator operate for 10 minutes.
accurately balanced, high speed rotor that is mounted
Make sure that the attitude indication is stable.
on precision bearings inside an enclosed rotor
housing. The rotor housing is suspended from
bearings mounted in the gimbal assembly and is free 7. Set the FLIGHT INSTR ATT (4CB3) circuit
to pivot up to ±85° in pitch. In turn, the gimbal breaker switch to OFF.
assembly is suspended from bearings in the rear of
the instrument so that the overall assembly has 8. Set the BATT switch to OFF, or remove the
complete roll freedom about the instrument external DC power from the helicopter.
longitudinal axis.
The rotor is driven by a 400 Hz AC power, which is configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
generated inside the instrument from the 28 VDC Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
supplied from the helicopter electrical system.
The warning flag indicates unusable gyro information. 95-52. Attitude Indicator — Removal
The attitude indicator has an integral light system. The

5 VDC light system of the helicopter supplies and WARNING
controls the power to the integral lights of the indicator
(Chapter 96). Figure 95-25 shows the attitude
indicator and Figure 95-26 shows its simplified OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
schematic. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
95-51. Attitude Indicator — Operational Check EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
1. Set the BATT switch to ON, or connect the

external DC power to the helicopter. NOTE
2. Set the FLIGHT INSTR ATT (4CB3) circuit necessary to perform the required
breaker switch to ATT. maintenance.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FLAG ROLL SCALE

M
INSTRUMENT
GLASS
FLIGHT INSTR DG
2 0
28 VDC 10
BUS POWER
SUPPLY
2 0
PITCH SCALE
GYROSCOPE
AIRCRAFT
SYMBOL
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
PITCH TRIM KNOB
(TYPICAL)
407_MM_95_0025
Figure 95-26. Attitude Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 95-53. Attitude Indicator — Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
WA I T 1 0 M I N U T E S F O R T H E
GYROSCOPE TO COME TO A EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
COMPLETE STOP PRIOR TO TILTING
T H E I N S T R U M E N T PA N E L A N D 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
REMOVING THE ATTITUDE INDICATOR. from the helicopter.
FAILURE TO OBEY THIS PRECAUTION
M AY R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E 2. Install the attitude indicator (4M3) (2,
G Y R O S C O P E O F T H E AT T I T U D E Figure 95-27) into its location on the instrument
INDICATOR. panel (4).
2. On the instrument panel, remove the screws and 3. Attach the attitude indicator (4M3) (2) to the
washers that attach the instrument panel instrument panel (4) with screws (3).
(Figure 95-2).
4. Connect the electrical connector (4M3P1) (1) to
3. Loosen the Dzus fasteners that secure the cover the receptacle of the attitude indicator (4M3) (2).
5. Carefully put the instrument panel (4) in position.
4. At the instrument panel, remove the bolt and
washer that attach the instrument panel. 6. Install the bolt and washer that attach the
instrument panel (Figure 95-2).
5. Tilt the instrument panel.

instrument panel.
Figure 95-27) from the attitude indicator (4M3) (2). 8. Tighten the Dzus fasteners that secure the cover
7. Hold the attitude indicator and remove the screws
(3) that attach the attitude indicator to the instrument 9. Do an operational check of the attitude indicator
panel (4). (paragraph 95-51).
95-54. TURN AND SLIP INDICATOR (FLIGHT

INSTRUMENTS KIT) — DESCRIPTION
CAUTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
HANDLE THE ATTITUDE INDICATOR The turn and slip indicator (Figure 95-28) installation
includes a turn and slip indicator, a circuit breaker, and
CAREFULLY TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE
associated wiring. The turn and slip indicator is
GYROSCOPE. installed on the instrument panel, below the vertical
speed indicator. The FLIGHT INSTR TURN (4CB4)
8. Remove the attitude indicator (4M3) (2). circuit breaker is installed on the overhead panel.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN

4
2. Attitude Indicator (4M3)
3. Screw
4. Instrument panel
Figure 95-27. Attitude Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEET
L 150 I H 10 0
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEET
D S R 10 00
FEE
2 40 T N 10 00
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 15 FUEL
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
ON/OFF FLAG
POINTER
INCLINOMETER
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-28. Turn and Slip Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The turn and slip indicator gives an indication of the 6. Return the helicopter to the standard
helicopter rate of turn and rate of bank. The rate of configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
turn is measured by a restrained vertical gyroscope. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
The gyroscope is attached to the turn pointer. When
the helicopter is in a turn, the gyroscope moves the
pointer to indicate the direction and the rate of the 95-56. Turn and Slip Indicator — Removal
turn. A full deflection of the pointer shows a 2-minute
turn.
The lower part of the indicator dial has an inclinometer.
The inclinometer gives an indication of the directional
balance of the helicopter. The inclinometer is a curved NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
glass tube that is filled with a clear liquid and it holds a
black ball made of glass.
Tool
If the helicopter is in a slip or skid, the ball will move off

the center.
WARNING
The turn and slip indicator has an integral light system.
The 5 VDC light system of the helicopter supplies and
controls the power to the integral lights of the indicator OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Chapter 96). WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
For the simplified schematic of the turn and slip EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
indicator, refer to Figure 95-29.
NOTE
95-55. Turn and Slip Indicator — Operational
Check Remove components only to the extent
maintenance.
external DC power to the helicopter.
2. Set the FLIGHT INSTR TURN (4CB4) circuit
breaker switch to TURN.
3. On the turn and slip indicator, make sure of the CAUTION

conditions that follow:
WA I T 1 0 M I N U T E S F O R T H E
a. The OFF flag goes out of view within 3 GYR OSCO PE TO COME TO A
minutes. COMPLETE STOP PRIOR TO TILTING
T H E I N S T R U M E N T PA N E L A N D
b. No loud noises (which indicate a damaged REMOVING THE TURN AND SLIP
bearing or metal friction), are heard during the startup. INDICATOR. FAILURE TO OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE
TO THE GYROSCOPE OF THE TURN
4. Set the FLIGHT INSTR TURN (4CB4) circuit AND SLIP INDICATOR.
breaker switch to OFF.
5. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the washers that attach the instrument panel
external DC power from the helicopter. (Figure 95-2).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FLAG TURN
M OFF POINTER
INSTRUMENT
GLASS
FLIGHT INSTR TURN

28 VDC 10
BUS POWER
SUPPLY
SLIP
RESTRAINING GYROSCOPE INDICATOR
SPRING
(TYPICAL)
407_MM_95_0028
Figure 95-29. Turn and Slip Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. At the instrument panel, remove the bolt and

washer that attach the instrument panel. WARNING

of the shroud assembly to the top of the glareshield. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
5. Tilt the instrument panel. NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
Figure 95-30) from the turn and slip indicator (4M7) 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
(7). from the helicopter.
7. With the use of the insertion/extraction tool 2. Install the turn and slip indicator (4M7) (7,
(M81969/16-04), disconnect the two integral lighting Figure 95-30) into its location on the instrument panel
wire splices (4) and contacts (3). (8).
8. Hold the turn and slip indicator (4M7) (7) and 3. Attach the turn and slip indicator (7) to the
remove the screws (5) and nuts (6) that attach the turn instrument panel (8) with screws (5) and nuts (6).
and slip indicator to the instrument panel (8).
the receptacle of the turn and slip indicator (4M7) (7).
CAUTION 5. With the use of the insertion/extraction tool

(M81969/16-04), connect the two integral lighting wire
splices (4) and contacts (3).
HANDLE THE TURN AND SLIP
IND IC ATO R CA RE FUL LY TO AVOI D
DAMAGES TO THE GYROSCOPE. 6. Carefully put the instrument panel (8) in position.
9. Remove the turn and slip indicator (4M7) (7). 7. Install the bolt and washer that attach the
instrument panel (Figure 95-2).
95-57. Turn and Slip Indicator — Installation
instrument panel.
9. Tighten the three Dzus fasteners that secure the
cover of the shroud assembly to the top of the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE glareshield.
10. Do an operational check of the turn and slip
Tool
indicator (paragraph 95-55).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
3
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8
2
15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
7
6
1

2. Lighting wire
3. Contacts
8 4. Splices
5. Screw
6. Nut
7. Turn and slip indicator (4M7)
8. Instrument panel
407_MM_95_0029
Figure 95-30. Turn and Slip Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-58. PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS 2. Install an antistatic cover on the connector.

(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
3. Store the indicator in an approved container.
The propulsion instruments provide an indication of
the performance of the systems related to the power 95-61. Propulsion Instruments — Removal
plant. The propulsion instruments include the
instruments that follow:
MATERIALS REQUIRED
• Dual tachometer (1M6)
• Engine torque indicator (1M8)
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• Measured gas temperature indicator (1M4)
• Gas producer (NG) tachometer (1M5)
• Engine oil pressure and temperature indicator

WARNING
(1M2)
• Transmission oil pressure and temperature

indicator (1M3)
95-59. PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS —
STANDARD PRACTICES (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299)
The standard practices that follow are applicable to all CAUTION

of the instruments of the propulsion group.
95-60. Electrostatic Sensitive Equipment — PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING

Standard Practices E LE C T R ICA L CO N NE C TO RS M AK E
SURE THAT THE CONNECTORS ARE
Certain components used in the propulsion PROPERLY LABELLED. CONNECTORS
instruments are sensitive to, and can be damaged by, ARE NOT KEYED TO PREVENT
the discharge of static electricity. C O N N E C T I O N TO T H E W R O N G
INDICATOR.
The static damage level for components may not be
felt by a person. When damage by static electricity is NOTE
suspected, do a complete functional check of the
This procedure is also used for removal of
instrument.
the fuel quantity indicator (1M1) and the
fuel pressure/ammeter indicator (2M1).
When sensitive components are handled, protective
measures must be taken to prevent damage, which
could result in failure or degradation of the function of NOTE
the component. Remove components only to the extent
When handling a propulsion instrument, take the maintenance.
precautions that follow:
1. Do not touch the electrical pins of the connector. from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

washers that attach the instrument panel Table 95-1. Propulsion Instruments/Connectors
(Figure 95-2).
INSTRUMENT CONNECTOR
of the shroud assembly to the top of the glareshield. Engine Oil Press/Temp 1M2P1
Indicator (1M2)
4. At the instrument panel, remove the bolt and XMSN Oil Press/Temp 1M2P1
washer that attach the instrument panel. Indicator (1M3)
5. Tilt the instrument panel. MGT Indicator (1M4) 1M4P1

NG Indicator (1M5) 1M5P1
Dual Tachometer (1M6) 1M6P1, 1M6P2

CAUTION
Engine Torque (1M8) 1M8P1
HANDLE THE CONNECTORS AND THE Fuel Quantity Indicator (1M1) 1M1P1
RECEPTACLE OF THE INSTRUMENTS IN
Fuel Pressure/Ammeter 2M1P1
Indicator (2M1)
S E N S I T I V E E Q U I P M E N T. T H E S E
INSTRUMENTS ARE SENSITIVE TO 7. Hold the instrument to be removed.
THESE PRECAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO THE R E L AT E D 8. Remove the screws (1, Figure 95-31) and nuts
INSTRUMENT. (2) that attach the instrument (3).
6. Disconnect the required electrical connector from

the propulsion instrument to be removed, as shown in 9. Carefully remove the instrument (3) from the
Table 95-1. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the instrument panel (5).
electrical receptacle of the instrument and on the
electrical connector. 95-62. Propulsion Instruments — Installation
WARNING

CAUTION
CONNECTORS ARE NOT KEYED TO

PREVENT CONNECTION TO THE
WRONG INDICATOR. VERIFY PROPER
CONNECTOR BEFORE CONNECTING
TO INDICATOR.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1
% X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
OIL C 10 PSI OIL C 10 24 MODE ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
1. Screw
2. Nut
3. Instrument 3
5. Instrument panel
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-31. Propulsion Instruments — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NOTE NOTE
This procedure is also used for installation As applicable to the fuel quantity indicator
of the fuel quantity indicator (1M1) and the (1M1), do a fuel quantity gauging system
fuel pressure/ammeter (2M1). calibration procedure (paragraph 95-171).
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 9. Do an operational check of the applicable
from the helicopter. instrument system after installation.
2. Carefully put the instrument into its position on 95-63. PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS —
the instrument panel. EXCEEDANCE MONITORING (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299)
3. Install the screws (1, Figure 95-31) and nuts (2)
that attach the instrument (3) to the instrument The Torque (Q), Measured Gas Temperature (MGT),
panel (5). and Gas Producer (NG) indicators are programmed to
show if an exceedance occurs. An exceedance
indication signifies that a maintenance action may be
necessary.
CAUTION
NOTE
HANDLE THE CONNECTORS AND THE Exceedance monitoring helps to find the
RECEPTACLE OF THE INSTRUMENTS IN necessary maintenance action. Only the
A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D person in command of the helicopter at the
P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C time of the occurrence can tell if the
S E N S I T I V E E Q U I P M E N T. T H E S E occurrence exceeds the permitted
INSTRUMENTS ARE SENSITIVE TO operating limits.
THESE PRECAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN Some instruments have a built-in Non-volatile Memory
DAMAGE TO THE R E L AT E D (NVM) that permits them to store up to 50
INSTRUMENT. exceedances. The date, duration, and peak value of
each exceedance is kept in memory. When more than
4. Remove the caps and/or plugs from the electrical 50 exceedances occur, the first of the 50 exceedances
receptacle of the instrument and the electrical is deleted to make place for the new exceedance. As
connector to be installed. Connect the related stated previously, the propulsion instruments that
electrical connector to the propulsion instrument as follow can record exceedances:
shown in the Table 95-1.
• Torque
5. Make sure the bond resistance between the
instrument (3) and the instrument panel (5) meets • MGT
Class R-II electrical bonding requirements
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). • NG
6. At the instrument panel (Figure 95-2), install the To tell the pilot that an exceedance is about to occur,
screws and washers that attach the instrument panel. the analog display of the indicator flashes as an
advisory message. The value at which an advisory
message occurs is an advisory point. Advisory points
7. At the instrument panel, install the bolt and are programmed in the microprocessor of the
washer that attach the instrument panel. indicator. An indicator that flashes tells the pilot that
the helicopter is close to exceeding an operating limit.
8. Tighten the fasteners that secure the upper cover Refer to the specific instrument section of this manual
of the shroud assembly to the top of the glareshield for the values of these advisory points and
(Figure 95-3). exceedances.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
When an advisory message is shown, the instrument from the NVM with a computer. Refer to paragraph
supplies a ground signal that causes the CHECK 95-69 for data on how to remove exceedances from
INSTR annunciator on the caution/warning/advisory the NVM.
panel to come on. If the pilot makes the necessary
control inputs and reduces the indication of the As torque, MGT, and NG exceedances will also be
instrument below the advisory point, the advisory recorded by the FADEC ECU, these exceedances
message stops. No exceedance is recorded. may be viewed and erased following required
maintenance actions. Refer to the Rolls-Royce
When the indication of the instrument is above the 250-C47B Operation and Maintenance Manual,
exceedance point, an exceedance is recorded. When Publication CSP 21001, for information to install the
an exceedance is about to be recorded, the instrument maintenance terminal.
causes the CHECK INSTR annunciator to come on. In
addition, when an exceedance is recorded, the letter E
To determine required maintenance actions following a
is shown at the left digit on the digital display.
recorded exceedance, Bell Helicopter Textron and
Rolls-Royce agreed that the helicopter cockpit gauges
The pilot pushes the INSTR CHECK button on the
would be used for NG, MGT, and Torque (Q)
instrument panel to acknowledge and see the peak
exceedances and the FADEC ECU would be used for
value of the exceedance. The exceedance is shown
NP overspeed exceedances.
for a maximum of 11 seconds (less if the button is
pushed for a shorter period of time). The other
indicators that have exceedances in memory also 95-64. Propulsion Instruments — Procedure to
display their last exceedances. After the exceedance View Exceedances
is shown, the letter E goes out of view. The letter E is
not shown again until the power is removed from the If an indicator has an exceedance recorded in
indicator and the indicator is energized again. The last Non-volatile Memory (NVM), the indicator will display
exceedance continues to be shown each time the an E in the most left hand digit of the digital display.
indicator is energized until the exceedance(s) are Any exceedances recorded in the NVM of the indicator
removed from the NVM. Exceedances are removed can be retrieved as follows:
95-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 104A/104B
BHT-407-MM-10
1. All exceedances recorded in NVM can be 95-67. Power-on Built-in Test (BIT)
downloaded to a personal computer (paragraph
95-69). The power-on Built-in Test (BIT) starts when power is
applied to the instrument. The power-on BIT does an
integrity check of the electronic components of the
2. Only the last exceedance value can be viewed as indicator. On all indicators during this BIT, except for
follows: the dual tachometer, all of the Liquid Crystal Displays
(LCDs) on the analog single bar display come on and
a. Turn power on to the instrument. show the maximum scale. On the torque, MGT, and
NG indicators, the digital display flashes and the letter
E comes on. Any failure found during the BIT for these
b. After the power up Built-in Test (BIT) check is specific indicators is written to their respective
completed and the E is displayed, push and hold the Non-volatile Memory (NVM). Refer to paragraph 95-69
INSTR CHECK button on the instrument panel. The for the procedure to retrieve the failure codes for each
value displayed will be the last exceedance value indicator.
recorded. It will display for a maximum of 11 seconds,
or less if the button is held for a period less than
11 seconds. After displaying the value, the E will NOTE
disappear and the indicator will return to displaying The NR and NP needles of the AHLERS
normal operational values. dual tachometer indicator do not move or
self-test during the power-on BIT check.
c. To display the exceedance value again, the The AHLERS dual tachometer indicator is
power must be turned off and then turned back on. tested by pushing the LCD TEST switch
(1S15), which is indicated by full scale
deflection of the NR and NP needles.
95-65. PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS — Faults in the AHLERS dual tachometer will
BATTERY (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299) be identified by no pointer movement when
pushing the LCD TEST switch.
All indicators that record exceedances must have a
data source available to date stamp the exceedance. On the dual tachometer indicator, the individual rotor
Therefore, these indicators have an internal lithium (R) and turbine (T) pointers are driven to indicate their
battery. The battery can only be changed by an respective upper red line limits, if no faults are
approved overhaul shop. The date is set in the detected. If faults are detected, the pointer movement
microprocessor at the time of manufacture. The date does not occur. The BIT causes these indications for
can be reset at any time by using a computer and the approximately 6 to 8 seconds. After that time, the
software described in paragraph 95-71 or paragraph indicators go back to their normal indication.
95-72.
95-68. Commanded Built-in Test (BIT)
The life of the battery is estimated to be 10 years. If The commanded Built-in Test (BIT) starts when the
the battery goes dead, only the date function is LCD TEST switch (1S15) is pushed and performs a
affected. The indicator will continue to operate and check of all of the LCDs. On all indicators during this
record exceedances without the date stamp. BIT, all of the LCDs on the analog single bar display
come on and show the maximum scale. In addition,
95-66. PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS BUILT-IN the rotor (R) and turbine (T) pointers on the dual
TEST (BIT) — DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 tachometer are driven to their respective upper limits.
THROUGH 54299)
95-69. PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS —
EXCEEDANCE DATA RETRIEVAL/
All of the propulsion instruments have a Built-in Test
VIEWING/ERASING/INDICATOR CLOCK
(BIT) capability.
SET (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
The two possible BIT functions are the power-on BIT The torque indicator, MGT indicator, and NG indicator
and the commanded BIT. are connected to an RS-485 maintenance bus. The
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
RS-485 maintenance bus provides access to the Instrument Maintenance Software User’s Guide is also
memory of these instruments to retrieve and erase available to assist with the installation and any
exceedance data. The RS-485 maintenance bus also troubleshooting that may be required. Procedures to
provides access to the real time clock of these three download the PIMS software and User’s Guide are
instruments, to set the time of the clock. This is done provided in paragraph 95-72.
with the use of a laptop computer and software. The
laptop computer is connected to the MAINTENANCE Additionally, the M407 PIMS software will not function
PORT — INSTRUMENTS receptacle of the RS-485 on Windows 95, Windows 98, or ME formats. If
maintenance bus with a special cable assembly. operators wish to use Windows 95, Windows 98, or
ME formats, they must continue to use the EPMPLUS
The first release of torque, MGT, and NG indicator software for these Windows formats. As mentioned
download software was created for use with DOS, previously, the EPMPLUS software will run
Windows 95, and Windows 98 formats. This software under all Windows formats if the RS485/232 converter
is identified as EPMPLUS. Procedures to load and use P/N 485SD9R is used.
the EPMPLUS software are provided in paragraph
95-70. Since the 2004 timeframe, all new helicopter deliveries
receive both the EPMPLUS and PIMS software via a
Changes to the Windows Operating Systems (OS) CD or DVD. Operators may download either software
since the original release of the EPMPLUS software version and the PIMS User’s Guide from the Bell
as well as hardware issues with the older RS485/232 Helicopter Web site at http://www.bellcustomer.com/
converters P/N 485LP9R, caused the EPMPLUS software.cfm.
software not to function with Windows 2000, NT, ME,
XP, Vista, and Windows 7 formats (IL 407-04-77). If you experience any difficulties with either version of
the propulsion instrument maintenance software,
A replacement RS485/232 converter P/N 485SD9R, contact Product Support Engineering for assistance.
with integrated “handshaking” capabilities that allows
the EPMPLUS software to function under all 95-70. Propulsion Instruments — Exceedance
Windows formats, is available. The older Data Retrieval Using EPMPLUS for DOS
converter P/N 485LP9R did not have the and Windows 95, 98, and ME
“handshaking” capabilities built into the converter. The
“handshaking” capabilities were dependent on the
interface software, which was the root cause of the SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
EPMPLUS software not functioning with the newer
Windows formats. Based on this, it is recommended
that RS485/232 converter P/N 485SD9R be utilized. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
The converter may be acquired through any Bell
Helicopter Supply Center. IBM  or Compatible Computer (PC)
To improve download capabilities, Bell Helicopter DOS (Any Version) Disc Operating System
provides Propulsion Instrument Maintenance Software (DOS)
(PIMS) 407-770-002-101 as the latest and preferred
download software version for use with Windows 407-275-001-103, Cable Assembly
2000, NT, ME, XP, VISTA, and Windows 7 formats. (Superseded by
With its enhanced user interface, PIMS allows the user 407-275-001-107)
to download exceedances as well as view and modify
Software EPM Plus
the real time clock settings of the three propulsion
(Requires Approximately
instruments equipped with parameter storage and
60 Kilobytes of Disc
modification (i.e. torque, MGT, and NG). PIMS also
Space)
uses the RS485/232 converter P/N 485SD9R, with
integrated “handshaking” capabilities.
NOTE
The PIMS software has a self-installing executable
(*.exe) file that will install the software to a location on Although the following information
the operator’s computer. A M407 Propulsion concerning the EPMPLUS propulsion
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
instruments maintenance software is to that drive and sub-directory prior to

provided, it is recommended that the PIMS typing EPMPLUS.
propulsion instruments maintenance
software (paragraph 95-72) be used. 10. Insert the software disc into the drive A of the
laptop computer.
To download the EPMPLUS propulsion
instruments maintenance software, go to 11. At the PC DOS prompt (C:), type 'a:' and push
http://www.bellcustomer.com/software.cfm. ENTER.
1. Connect the cable assembly to the serial port of 12. At the 'A:' prompt, type 'EPMPLUS' and push
the laptop computer. ENTER.
2. At the left side of the pedestal, remove the cap RESULT:

from the ENG INSTR connector.
• The license agreement message comes on
3. Connect the end of the cable assembly to the the screen of the computer.
ENG INSTR connector.
NOTE
4. On the overhead panel, close the circuit breakers
that follow: If this is the first time this software has been
used, the first screen to display will be
'SELECT INDICATORS TO BE ACTIVE
• ENGINE INSTR TRQ (1CB25) ON THE 485 DOWNLOAD BUS'.
Otherwise, the screen displayed is 'ENTER
• ENGINE INSTR MGT (1CB10) LETTER CORRESPONDING TO
DESIRED FUNCTION Enter choice:'.
• ENGINE INSTR NG (1CB22)
13. Push ENTER.
5. Connect 28 VDC external power to the helicopter.
RESULT:
6. Set the switch of the laptop computer to the ON
position. • The menu display that follows comes on:
'ENTER LETTER CORRESPONDING TO
DESIRED FUNCTION Enter choice:'.
7. At the PC DOS prompt (C:), type 'time' and push
ENTER.
14. Type 'a' and push ENTER (to select the indicators
that are active).
RESULT:
RESULT:
• The current time of the computer clock is
shown.
• The display 'SELECT INDICATORS TO BE
ACTIVE ON THE 485 DOWNLOAD BUS'
8. If the current time is correct, push ENTER. comes on with a list of indicators.
9. If the current time is not correct, type the correct 15. Use the up and down arrows of the computer
time (for example: 09:03:00) and push ENTER. keyboard to move the cursor to a specific indicator.
NOTE NOTE
The procedure that follows assumes that Do not add other indicators than MGT, NG,
the download software EPMPLUS is and torque with an 'X' selection. The other
located in the drive A of the computer. If the indicators do not have data that can be
software is located elsewhere, then change retrieved and they are not connected to the
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
485 download bus. If you select 'X' for RESULT:

these indicators, the program will show an
error message since it will not find the • The screen that follows comes on: 'Enter
requested data in the related instrument(s). filename you wish to view or print or 'DIR' for a
directory of available EXC files. Hit RETURN
16. Select an indicator by typing an X in the square for default filename. Hit space return to Quit'.
brackets. Select the desired indicators from MGT, NG,
and torque only. b. If you know the filename you want to view,
type the filename and push ENTER.
17. Deselect any other indicator by hitting the
computer keyboard spacebar to blank the space inside RESULT:
the square brackets.
• The file comes on the screen.
18. Press ENTER to save the indicator selections
and exit this screen. c. If you do not know the name of the file, type
'DIR' and push ENTER to see a list of exceedance
RESULT: files available.
• The main menu display that follows comes on: d. Take a note of the filename you want to view
'ENTER LETTER CORRESPONDING TO and push any key to exit the screen and to go back to
DESIRED FUNCTION'. the previous screen ('enter filename you wish to
view....').
19. Type 'C' and push ENTER (to select a COM port).
e. Type the filename and push ENTER. In
addition to any exceedances recorded, the file will also
RESULT:
show any internal failure of the indicators by reporting
the BIT status as follows:
• The menu display that follows comes on:
'SELECT COM PORT TO USE FOR 485 BUS
• 2 -Set if EEPROM failure is detected
INTERFACE. Press 1 to use COM 1 or 2 for
COM 2. Enter choice:'.
• 1 -Set if RAM failure is detected
NOTE • 0 -Set if ROM failure is detected

The procedure that follows assumes that
the serial port connected to the cable is 22. To print a stored exceedance file, do the steps
designated as COM 1 by the computer. Use that follow:
the COM 2 serial port if it is required with
the computer being used. a. If the message 'HIT ANY KEY TO RETURN
TO MAIN MENU' is on the display, push any key to
exit the display and go back to the main menu.
NOTE
Once the serial port has been selected, the b. At the main menu screen, type 'P' and push
selection will not be required unless the ENTER.
serial port setting needs to be changed.
RESULT:
20. Type '1' and push ENTER.
• This display comes on: 'Enter filename you
21. To view a stored exceedance download file, do wish to view or print or 'DIR' for a directory of
the steps that follow: available EXC files. Push RETURN to quit'.
a. Type 'V' on the menu display and push c. If you know the name of the file to print, type
ENTER. the filename and push ENTER.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
RESULT: RESULT:
• When the file is printed, the message 'HIT • When the download of the exceedance data is
ANY KEY TO RETURN TO MAIN MENU' completed, the computer goes back to the
comes on the screen. screen 'ENTER LETTER CORRESPONDING
TO DESIRED FUNCTION'.
d. If you do not know the name of the file, type
'DIR' and push ENTER to see a list of exceedance 25. Erase the exceedances data as follows:
files available.
26. To erase the exceedance memory of indicators,
e. Take a note of the filename you want to print do the steps that follow:
and push any key to exit the screen and go back to the
previous screen ('enter filename you wish to view or
print...'). a. At the main menu display, type 'E' and push
ENTER.
f. Type the filename and push ENTER.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• This display comes on: 'ARE YOU SURE
• When the file is printed, the message 'HIT YOU WANT TO ERASE THE INDICATORS
ANY KEY TO RETURN TO MAIN MENU' EXCEEDANCES MEMORY OF THE
comes on the screen. SELECTED INDICATORS? HIT 'Y' TO
ERASE OR ANY OTHER KEY TO EXIT'.
23. Download the exceedance data as follows:
NOTE
NOTE Once the exceedances have been erased
The default filename is programmed to be from the memory, they cannot be retrieved.
the date on the computer at the time of the Be sure to download the exceedances to a
download (Date: Sept. 1, 1995 becomes file before you erase the information if you
file 950901.EXC). want to keep a record of the exceedance(s)
in memory. The indicator will continue to
24. To download the exceedance data from the NG, indicate the letter E and the last
MGT, and TORQUE indicators, do the steps that exceedance value recorded if the memory
follow: is not erased.
b. To erase the exceedances, push 'Y'.

a. At the main menu screen, type 'D' and push
ENTER.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• When the erase function is completed, the
• The display that follows comes on: 'Input computer goes back to the display 'ENTER
destination file for EEPROM download. LETTER CORRESPONDING TO DESIRED
Filename extension of EXC is added FUNCTION'.
automatically, or hit 'RETURN' for default
filename '(last filename).EXC'. Push 'SPACE' c. If it is not required to erase the exceedances
and 'RETURN' to exit without downloading. memory of the set indicators, type any key other than
'Y'.
NOTE RESULT:
To exit without downloading, push SPACE
and RETURN. • The computer goes back to the display
'ENTER LETTER CORRESPONDING TO
b. Type the filename and push ENTER. DESIRED FUNCTION'.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
27. Quit the EPMPLUS program as follows: 3. If the time is correct, push RETURN. If the time is
not correct, push any key to go back to DOS and set
a. If it is required to quit the program, type 'Q' to the date and time of the computer.
use the option 'Q to quit' on the menu display.
RESULT:
b. At the 'A:' prompt, type 'C:' and push ENTER.
• When the time set of the indicators is
c. Remove the maintenance software disc from completed, the main menu display comes on.
the drive A of the computer.
4. Quit the EPMPLUS program as per paragraph
d. Set the switch on the laptop computer to OFF. 95-70, step 27.
e. Disconnect the cable assembly from the ENG 95-72. Propulsion Instruments — Exceedance
INSTR connector and the laptop computer. Data Retrieval and Real Time Clock Set
Using PIMS for Windows 2000, NT, ME, XP,
f. Install the cap on the ENG INSTR connector. Vista, and Windows 7
Make sure the cap is correctly installed and tightened.
95-71. Propulsion Instruments — Real-time SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED

Clock Set Using EPMPLUS for DOS and
Windows 95, 98, and ME
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NOTE IBM  or Compatible Computer (PC)

Although the following information 407-275-001-107 Cable Assembly
concerning the EPMPLUS propulsion
instruments maintenance software is 407-770-002-101 Propulsion Instrument
provided, it is recommended that the PIMS Maintenance Software
propulsion instruments maintenance (PIMS)
software (paragraph 95-72) be used.
Propulsion Instrument Maintenance Software (PIMS)

NOTE 407-770-002-101 is the latest and preferred download
Make sure that the date and time of the software version for use with Windows 2000, NT, ME,
computer are correctly set. Set the date XP, Vista, and Windows 7 formats. With its enhanced
and time if they are not correctly set. user interface, PIMS allows the user to download
exceedances as well as view and modify the real time
clock settings of the three propulsion instruments
1. Set the equipment as per the setup procedure in
equipped with parameter storage and modification
paragraph 95-70.
(i.e., torque, MGT, and NG).
2. At the menu display of the EPMPLUS software, PIMS also uses the RS485/232 converter P/N
type 'S' to set the real time clocks of the indicators. 485SD9R, with integrated “handshaking” capabilities,
which is included with cable assembly
RESULT: 407-275-001-107.
• The display that follows come on: 'This The PIMS software has a self-installing executable
program uses the PC. The current time (*.exe) file that will install the software to a location on
reported by DOS is DATE: 'mm/dd/yy' TIME: the operator’s computer. A M407 Propulsion
'hh/mm/ss'. If this is correct, hit RETURN to Instrument Maintenance Software User’s Guide is also
continue or hit any other key to exit the available to assist with the installation and any
program and fix the date and time'. troubleshooting that may be required.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
To obtain the software and User’s Guide, it may be Table 95-2. Engine Torque (TRQ) Scale — Range
downloaded at http://www.bellcustomer.com/ Marking
software.cfm.
MARKING RANGE (TRQ) DEFINITION
If you experience any difficulties with the PIMS Green Arc 0 to 95% Continuous
software, contact Product Support Engineering for Operation
assistance.
Yellow Arc 93.5 to 100% 5-minute
Takeoff
95-73. ENGINE TORQUE INDICATION SYSTEM —
DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH Red Line 100% Maximum
54299)
The 100% maximum on the torque instrument
represents 674 horsepower at the engine output shaft.
The engine torque system has one engine torque
This output is divided on the helicopter between the
indicator (Figure 95-32) and two engine torque
tail rotor drive system and the main rotor drive system.
pressure transducers. Both transducers are fed oil This division of horsepower is done automatically in
pressure from the engine torquemeter pressure flight, depending on the power requirements of the
sensing port on the engine. One transducer supplies different drivetrain systems. The 674 horsepower limit
the electrical signal to the FADEC/ ECU. Refer to the is the maximum allowed in the total drivetrain system.
Rolls-Royce 250 C47B Series Operation and
Maintenance Manual for the description, operation,
The 93.5% on the torque instrument represents
and installation/removal of this transducer. The other
630 horsepower. This is the maximum limit allowed on
transducer provides input to the torque indicator on the
a continuous basis on the engine gearbox. The
instrument panel. The engine torque indicator (1M8)
5-minute limit between 93.5% (630 horsepower) and
gives an indication of the torque at the main output
100% (674 horsepower) represents a 5-minute limit on
shaft of the engine. The torque indicator is made up of the engine gearbox in this range of power. The torque
a dial and electronic components in an recorded by the indicator is at the engine gearbox.
environmentally sealed case. Therefore, 630 horsepower at the indicator represents
630 horsepower at the engine gearbox.
The dial of the torque indicator has a scale that shows
torque in % X 10. The range of the scale is from 0 to 95-75. Engine Torque Indication System —
120% torque. Exceedances
The torque indicator microprocessor is

The dial has a single bar LCD display and a digital
pre-programmed with specific torque values, which
display. The LCD display is along the TRQ % X 10
causes the digital and analog displays to flash. When
scale and it operates as a pointer. The segments of
the indicator flashes, it will also trigger a switch that
the LCD display come on in a clockwise order from 0
provides a ground at pin 21 to turn on the check
to 120%. The position of the last segment to come on
instrument (CHECK INSTR) annunciator on the
along the scale shows TRQ % X 10. The digital display
caution/warning/advisory panel. The torque values
shows the TRQ % in a four digit format. The digital
have been selected with the intentions that follow:
display shows dashes (- - - - -) when the indication is
above the maximum of the scale.
• There is a torque limitation of 5 minutes
between 93.5 and 100%. To give the pilot
For the simplified schematic of the engine torque notice that he is approaching the end of the
indication system, refer to Figure 95-33. 5-minute limit, the indicator begins to flash
when 30 seconds remain in the 5-minute time
period.
95-74. Engine Torque Indication System —
Range Markings
• There is a red line at 100% representing the
maximum torque allowed. When the pilot
The range marking for the TRQ scale is shown in exceeds 100%, the indicator immediately
Table 95-2. begins to flash.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1
% X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
(TYPICAL)
3
2
1. TRQ indicator dial

2. Digital display
3. Single bar LCD display
4. Green arc
5. Yellow arc
6. Red line
Figure 95-32. Engine Torque Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-33. Engine Torque Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• There is an engine gearbox limit at or above horsepower. This oil pressure output is fed to both the
105.4%. When the pilot exceeds 100%, the engine and airframe transducers. The engine
indicator flashes immediately. However, after transducer data gives input to the FADEC/ECU for the
10 seconds above 105.4%, the indicator operation of the FADEC system. For a description of
indicates that an exceedance has occurred this system, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250 C47B Series
and begins to record the exceedance in NVM. Operation and Maintenance Manual. The strain gauge
At this time the indicator stops flashing. circuit of the airframe transducer receives an excitation
voltage of 10 VDC from the torque indicator. The oil
• There is a transmission inspection limit at or pressure output supplied by the engine torquemeter
above 110%. When the pilot exceeds 100%, pressure sensing port changes the strain gauge bridge
the indicator flashes immediately. Any in the airframe transducer. This changes the signal
exceedance above 110% is immediately sent to the torque indicator. The torque indicator
recorded in the NVM. The indicator stops displays a percentage of torque corresponding to the
flashing after 10 seconds above 105.4%. input signal.
The torque indicator displays an advisory and records

NOTE
an exceedance, as shown in Table 95-3.
95-76. Engine Torque Indication System — 407 helicopters S/N 53000 through 53399
Relationship Between Torque Indicator Post ASB 407-99-33 and S/N 53400
and FADEC System through 54299.
Although the torque indicator and the FADEC system The relationship of the engine oil pressure at the
both are driven by the engine oil pressure from the torquemeter pressure sensing port, the transducer
engine torquemeter sensing port on the engine signal, and the torque indicator is shown in Table 95-5.
gearbox, the interpretation of what represents 100% is The relationship of oil pressure to indicated torque is a
different between the torque indicator and the FADEC. straight line relationship.
When evaluating an engine overtorque situation
(Rolls-Royce Maintenance Manual), the following The output signal of the signal conditioner is supplied
information will be valuable in relating the torque to the Analog to Digital (A/D) converter. The A/D
indication system to the relevant engine values. The converter changes the analog signal from the signal
relationship between the torque indicator system and conditioner to a digital signal. The digital signal is sent
the FADEC system is shown in Table 95-4. For to the processor. The processor controls the operation
additional information and conversion formulas, refer of the torque indicator with the operation parameters of
to Recorded Exceedances/Conversion Factors in the software program in the Random Access Memory
Chapter 76. (RAM). The exceedance values are also programmed
in the indicator RAM.
95-77. Engine Torque Indication System
Transducer — Description The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the power
supply of the electronic circuit. The 28 VDC is supplied
The engine torque transducer is mounted in the through the ENGINE INSTR TRQ (1CB25) circuit
transmission compartment on the left side of the breaker on the overhead panel. Three fluorescent
forward firewall. The transducer has a pressure green lights are mounted behind the dial face of the
diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge. torque indicator. The LCDs of the torque indicator do
not normally allow the light to pass through them. With
95-78. Engine Torque Indication System — input to the torque indicator, the torque indicator turns
Operation each LCD segment clear. This allows the green light to
shine through, illuminating each segment. The green
The engine torquemeter pressure sensing port gives a lights are controlled in intensity depending on the input
specific oil pressure output for a specific shaft from the 5 VDC lighting circuit.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-3. Engine Torque Indication
TORQUE (%) INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
93.6 to 100 Begins to flash after 270 seconds Not Recorded

(4.5 minutes). Flashes
continuously after this time has
elapsed.
100.1 to 105.3 Begins to flash immediately and Not Recorded

flashes continuously as long as in
this range.
105.4 to 110 Begins to flash continuously. Recorded after 10 seconds

Flashes for 10 seconds, then
stops flashing.
110.1 and Above Flashes prior to reaching 110.1%, Recorded Immediately

but stops flashing at 110.1% or
above.
Table 95-4. Relationship Between Engine Torque Indicator and FADEC System
TORQUE FADEC TORQUE HORSEPOWER ENGINE OIL

FOOT-POUNDS
INDICATOR (%) (%) (HP) PRESSURE (PSI)
113.75 107.88 766 637 103.9

105.35 100.00 710 590 96.3
100.00 94.92 674 560 91.4
93.57 88.73 630 524 85.5
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-5. Torque Indication Versus Oil Pressure
ENGINE TORQUEMETER INPUT SIGNAL FROM

SHAFT HORSEPOWER TORQUE INDICATOR
PRESSURE SENSING TRANSDUCER TO
(SHP) (%)
PORT (PSI) INDICATOR (MV) (%)
811.2 108 85.80 ±0.3 118.2 ±2
752.5 102 81.01 ±0.3 111.6 ±2
741.4 100.5 79.85 ±0.3 110.0 ±2

737.4 100 79.41 ±0.3 109.4 ±2
722.7 98 77.81 ±0.3 107.2 ±2
709.7 96.24 76.44 ±0.3 105.3 ±2
685.8 93 73.89 ±0.3 101.8 ±2

674.0 91.4 72.45 ±0.3 100.0 ±2
663.7 90 71.38 ±0.5 98.5 ±2
648.6 88 69.78 ±0.5 96.3 ±2

630.2 85.5 67.75 ±0.5 93.5 ±2
589.9 80 63.43 ±0.5 87.5 ±2
516.2 70 55.55 ±1 76.6 ±2
442.5 60 47.60 ±1 65.6 ±2
368.7 50 39.72 ±1 54.7 ±2
295.0 40 31.85 ±1 43.8 ±2
221.1 30 23.90 ±1 32.8 ±2
147.5 20 16.02 ±1 21.9 ±2
73.7 10 8.06 ±1 10.9 ±2
- 0 - ±4.7
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-79. Engine Torque Indication System — CORRECTIVE ACTION:

Operational Check
• If the LCDs do not come on and, digits and
NOTE decimals do not come on, refer to Trouble
No. 3 (Figure 95-36).
To view exceedances recorded in the NVM
with a computer, refer to paragraph 95-69.
1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the external DC power from the helicopter.
2. Close the ENGINE INSTR TRQ (1CB25) circuit configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
breaker. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
RESULT: 95-80. Engine Torque Indication System —

Functional Check
• All LCDs come on.
• All digits and decimals are displayed.

• After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator will end the
power-on BIT and return to the normal NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
indication of 0%. The first LCD segment will
be lit to indicate that the indication is 2311F or Equivalent Barfield Pressure
operating. Tester, 0 to 300 PSI
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
The operational check that follows is intended to make
sure that the advisories and exceedances
• If the LCDs do not come on, refer to Trouble
programmed into the indicator are operating correctly.
No. 1 (Figure 95-34).
The check also makes sure that the exceedance
display and INSTR CHECK test button operate
• If all digits and decimals do not show, refer to correctly This check also makes sure that the torque
Trouble No. 2 (Figure 95-35). indicator is accurate within the allowable tolerances.
• If the indicator does not return to the normal

indication after 6 to 8 seconds, replace the
indicator. CAUTION
3. Push the LCD TEST switch on the instrument

panel. TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE
AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING
RESULT: GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF
B AT T E RY P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
ELECTRICAL LOADS AND TEST TIME
• All LCDs come on. TO A MINIMUM.

• After 6 to 8 seconds the indicator will end the

commanded BIT and return to the normal 2. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
indication of 0%. INSTR TRQ (1CB25) circuit breaker.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-34. Engine Torque Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-35. Engine Toque Indication System — Trouble No. 2 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-36. Engine Torque Indication System — Trouble No. 3 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
15. On the caution/warning/advisory panel, make

sure the CHECK INSTR annunciator comes on
CAUTION
immediately.
MAK E S URE T HAT THE OIL IN THE 16. On the engine torque indicator, make sure that
PRESSURE TESTER IS COMPATIBLE the LCD display and the digital display immediately
WITH THE ENGINE OIL. FAILURE TO start to flash and flash continuously.
I N T H E C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E 17. Slowly decrease the pressure to 80 PSI.
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
18. On the engine torque indicator, make sure that
3. Disconnect the oil pressure line from the airframe the single bar and the digital display show 87.5 ±2%.
mounted torque pressure transducer (1B7).

4. Attach the pressure tester to the input port of the sure that the CHECK INSTR annunciator goes off.
transducer (1B7). Locate the pressure tester as close
to the same height (Waterline) as the transducer to
minimize any potential errors caused by oil in the line 20. Make sure the LCD display and the digital display
between the tester and the transducer. stop flashing.
5. Slowly increase the pressure of the pressure NOTE

tester to 88 PSI.
The procedure that follows causes the
indicator to show an E on the digital display.
6. On the engine torque indicator, make sure the This E will continue to show each time the
LCD display and the digital display read 96.3 ±2%. indicator is powered, until the related
exceedance is erased from the NVM with a
7. On the caution/warning/advisory panel, make software program (paragraph 95-69).
sure the CHECK INSTR annunciator comes on after
270 seconds (4 minutes and 30 seconds). 21. Slowly increase the pressure to 98 PSI.

8. Make sure the LCD display and the digital display
the single bar and the digital display show 107.2 ±2%.
flash continuously.
23. Make sure that the LCD display and that the
9. Slowly decrease the pressure to 80 PSI.
digital display immediately start to flash and they flash
for approximately 10 seconds.
the LCD display and the digital display read 87.5 ±2%. 24. Make sure the CHECK INSTR annunciator on the
caution/warning/advisory panel comes on.
sure that the CHECK INSTR annunciator goes off. 25. Make sure that after 10 seconds, the E shows on
the digital display.
stop flashing. 26. Slowly decrease the pressure to 80 PSI.
13. Slowly increase the pressure to 93 PSI. 27. On the engine torque indicator, make sure that
the single bar and the digital display show 87.5 ±2%.
the LCD display and the digital display show 101.8 28. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
±2%. INSTR CHECK switch.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
29. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital 39. Make sure that the CHECK INSTR annunciator
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 22 comes on the caution/warning/advisory panel.
(107.2 ±2%).
40. Make sure that the E immediately comes on the
30. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR digital display.
TRQ circuit breaker. Make sure that the instrument
goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered.
41. Slowly decrease the pressure to 80 PSI.
NOTE
Open the circuit breaker for a minimum of the single bar and the digital display show 87.5 ±2%.
10 seconds to ensure that the delay
circuitry within the instrument is exceeded
43. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
to trigger an instrument reset.
INSTR CHECK switch.
31. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
INSTR TRQ circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is 44. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital
completed, make sure that the E on the digital display displays show the exceedance recorded in step 37
comes on. (111.6 ±2%).

INSTR CHECK switch. NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show
33. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 22 CHECK switch is held for less than
(107.2 ±2%). 11 seconds, the letter E and the
exceedance will be displayed for the length
of time the switch is pressed.
NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show 45. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR CHECK switch.
CHECK switch is held for less than
11 seconds, the letter E and the
exceedance show for the length of time the
the LCD display and the digital display show 87.5 ±2%
switch is pressed.
as in step 42. Make sure the E does not show on the
34. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes off.
CHECK switch.
NOTE
the LCD display and the digital display show 87.5 ±2% Open the circuit breaker for a minimum of
as in step 27. Make sure the E does not show on the 10 seconds to ensure that the delay
digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes off. circuitry within the instrument is exceeded
36. Slowly increase the pressure to 102 PSI.
47. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR
37. On the engine torque indicator, make sure that TRQ circuit breaker. Make sure the instrument goes
LCD display and the digital display show 111.6 ±2%. blank, indicating that it is no longer powered.
38. Make sure that the LCD display and the digital 48. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
display immediately start to flash as the torque passes INSTR TRQ circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
through 105.4 to 110.1% and stops flashing when the completed, make sure that the E comes on the digital
torque reaches 111.6%. display.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
49. On the instrument panel, push and hold the 95-81. Engine Torque Pressure Transducer —
INSTR CHECK switch. Removal
50. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital

displays show the exceedance recorded in step 37 WARNING
(111.6 ±2%).

NOTE WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
The letter E and the exceedance will show NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
exceedance will be displayed for the length NOTE
of time the switch is pressed. Remove components only to the extent
51. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR maintenance.
CHECK switch.
52. On the engine torque indicator, make sure that from the helicopter.
the single bar and the digital display return to 87.5
±2%. Make sure the E is no longer displayed.
2. Get access to the left side of the forward firewall
FS 155.00 of the transmission compartment. Locate
53. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2,
TRQ (1CB25) circuit breaker. Figure 95-37.
54. Disconnect the pressure tester from the input port 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1B7P1) (1)
of the transducer (1B7). from the engine torque pressure transducer
(1B7P1) (2).
55. Connect the oil pressure line to the airframe
mounted torque pressure transducer (1B7). 4. Remove the engine torque pressure transducer
(1B7P1) (2) from the tee fitting (4).
56. Clear any exceedances from the NVM of the
indicator (paragraph 95-69). 5. Remove the preformed packing (3) from the
engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2).
57. With reference to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B
Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication
95-82. Engine Torque Pressure Transducer —
CSP 21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear
Installation
the Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all
Engine History from the FADEC ECU.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
58. Remove the external DC power from the
helicopter.
59. Return the helicopter to the standard NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-052 Contact Enhancer
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
1. Electrical connector (1B7P1)

1 2. Engine torque pressure
transducer (1B7) FIREWALL
3. Preformed packing
4. Tee fitting FS 155.00
5. Tee fitting cap
DETAIL A
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-37. Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TYPE OF OIL THAT IS USED IN THE

WARNING HELICOPTER ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF
YOU DO NOT USE THE SAME TYPE OF
OIL, YOU WILL CONTAMINATE THE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 2. Attach the pressure tester to the engine oil
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). pressure line.

from the helicopter. 3. Loosen the tee fitting cap installed on the forward
firewall before the transducer.
2. Install the preformed packing (3, Figure 95-37) on
the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2). 4. Apply pressure slowly so the line will be filled with
oil. Continue to force oil into the line until a steady flow
3. Get access to the left side of the forward firewall without air bubbles is established at the tee fitting cap.
FS 155.00 of the transmission compartment.
5. When steady flow is established, tighten the tee

4. Install the engine torque pressure transducer fitting cap.
(1B7) (2) on the tee fitting (4).
6. Release the pressure in the pressure tester.

NOTE Disconnect the pressure tester from the engine oil
It is recommended to apply contact pressure line.
enhancer (C-052) to the electrical
connectors per TB 407-08-81.
NOTE
5. Connect the electrical connector (1B7P1) (1) to Keep the engine oil pressure line elevated
the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7P1) (2).
while attaching to the engine gearbox to
minimize the oil loss from the line.
95-83. Engine Torque Pressure Transducer —
Bleeding
7. Connect the engine oil pressure line to the engine
torquemeter pressure sensing port.
95-84. MEASURED GAS TEMPERATURE

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE INDICATION SYSTEM — DESCRIPTION
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
2311F or Equivalent Barfield Pressure
Tester, 0 to 300 PSI
The Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indication
1. Disconnect the engine oil pressure line at the system (Figure 95-38) has an MGT indicator and a
engine torquemeter pressure sensing port. thermocouple loop. The MGT indicator indicates the
temperature of the exhaust gas of the engine. The
MGT indicator includes a dial and electronic
components in a sealed case.
CAUTION
The dial of the MGT indicator has a scale that shows
MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE MGT°C X 100. The range of the scale is from 0 to
TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME 1000°C.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
7 90
6 9
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
5 6
7 7
8 8
1
4
3
(TYPICAL)
P/N 407-375-001-101/-103 P/N 407-375-001-105

AND SUBSEQUENT
1. MGT indicator dial

2. Digital display
3. Single bar LCD
4. Green arc
5. Yellow arc
6. Red line
7. Red triangle
8. Red dot
407_MM_95_0037
Figure 95-38. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The dial has a single bar LCD display and a digital For the simplified schematic of the MGT indication
display. The LCD display is along the MGT°C X 100 system, refer to Figure 95-39.
scale and it operates as a pointer. The segments of the
LCD display come on in a clockwise order from 0 to 95-85. MGT Indication System — Range Markings
1000°C. The position of the last segment to come on
along the scale shows the MGT°C X 100. The digital The range marking for the MGT scale is shown in
display shows the MGT°C in a four digit format. If the Table 95-6 and Table 95-7.
readings are above the scale of the indicator, the digital
display shows dashes (- - - - -).
Table 95-6. MGT Scale — Range Marking (Indicator 407-375-001-101/-103)
MARKING RANGE (°C) DEFINITION
Green Arc 100 to 727 Continuous Operation
Yellow Arc 727 to 779 5-minute Takeoff
Red Line 779 Maximum for Takeoff
Red Triangle 826 Beginning of 10-second Range for

Starting
Red Dot 927 Maximum for Start and Shutdown

1-second Maximum
Table 95-7. MGT Scale — Range Marking (Indicator 407-375-001-105 and Subsequent)
Yellow Arc 727 to 779 5-minute Takeoff
Red Line 779 Maximum for Takeoff
Red Triangle 843 Beginning of 10-second Range for

Starting
Red Dot 927 Maximum for Start and Shutdown

1-second Maximum
95-86. MGT Indication System — Exceedances 21 to turn on the INSTR CHECK annunciator on the
caution/warning/advisory panel. The MGT indicator
The advisory and exceedance values are programmed displays an advisory and records an exceedance
in the RAM of the indicator. The MGT indicator during an engine start, as shown in Table 95-8 and
microprocessor is programmed with specific measured Table 95-9. The MGT indicator displays an advisory
gas temperature values, which cause the digital and and records an exceedance during normal operation,
analog displays to flash. When the indicator flashes, it as shown in Table 95-10 and Table 95-11.
also triggers a switch, which provides a ground at pin
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-39. MGT Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-8. MGT Exceedances — During Engine Start (Indicator 407-375-001-101/-103)
MGT (°C) INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
826 to 926 Begins to flash after 6 seconds. Recorded after 10 seconds.

Stops flashing after 10 seconds.
926.1 to 927.9 Begins to flash prior to reaching Recorded after 1 second.

926.1°C, but stops flashing at
926.1°C and above.
928 and above Begins to flash prior to reaching Recorded immediately.

928°C, but stops flashing at
928°C or above.
Table 95-9. MGT Exceedances — During Engine Start (Indicator 407-375-001-105 and Subsequent)
843 to 926 Begins to flash after 6 seconds. Recorded after 10 seconds.

Stops flashing after 10 seconds.
926.1 to 927.9 Begins to flash prior to reaching Recorded after 1 second.

926.1°C and above.
928 and above Begins to flash prior to reaching Recorded immediately.

928°C, but stops flashing at
928°C or above.
Table 95-10. MGT Exceedances — During Normal Engine Operation (Indicator 407-375-001-101/-103)
727.1 to 779.0 Begins to flash after 270 seconds. Recorded after 300 seconds
Stops flashing after 300 seconds (5 minutes).
(5 minutes).
779.1 to 826.0 Begins to flash immediately and Recorded after 12 seconds.
stops flashing after 12 seconds.
826.1 and above Begins to flash prior to reaching Recorded immediately.

826.1°C or above.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-11. MGT Exceedances — During Normal Engine Operation (Indicator 407-375-001-105 and
Subsequent)
727.1 to 779.0 Begins to flash after 270 seconds. Recorded after 300 seconds
Stops flashing after 300 seconds (5 minutes).
(5 minutes).
779.1 to 905.0 Begins to flash immediately and Recorded after 12 seconds.

stops flashing after 12 seconds.
905.1°C or above.
The indicator operates with start limits when a ground

signal is supplied to the start mode input of the MGT Table 95-12. MGT Indication Versus Input Signal
indicator. The ground signal is supplied from a set of
closed contacts of the FADEC/START relay (1K3). INDICATION (°C) INPUT SIGNAL (MV)
100 4.10 ±0.62

95-87. MGT Indication System Thermocouples —
Description 200 8.14 ±0.62
300 12.21 ±0.62

Four alumel-chromel thermocouples are mounted on
400 16.40 ±0.62
the engine. Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250 C47B Series
Operation and Maintenance manual for the 500 20.64 ±0.21
maintenance and removal/installation procedures for
600 24.90 ±0.21
the thermocouple harness. Each thermocouple probe
generates a DC voltage that is directly proportional to 700 29.13 ±0.21
the gas temperature that it senses. The
779 32.41 ±0.21
thermocouples and the thermocouple harness provide
an average of the four voltages that is representative 800 33.28 ±0.21
of the turbine outlet temperature of the gases as they
826 34.34 ±0.21
go out of the gas producer turbine of the engine. The
MGT indicator receives its signal input from this 900 37.33 ±0.21
thermocouple harness.
927 38.40 ±0.21
95-88. MGT Indication System Thermocouples — 999 41.23 ±0.21

Operation
The thermocouple signal is supplied to the signal
conditioner. The signal conditioner amplifies and filters
The millivolt output of the thermocouple harness is
the signal. The signal conditioner then supplies the
supplied to the signal conditioner of the MGT indicator
analog data to the Analog to Digital (A/D) converter.
through an alumel-chromel cable and has a rated The A/D converter changes the amplitude of the signal
resistance value. The scale indication of the indicator to a digital format. The processor controls the
in relation to the input signal from the thermocouples is operation of the indicator with the operation
shown in Table 95-12. parameters of the software program in the Random
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Access Memory (RAM). The exceedance values are • If the indicator does not return to the normal
also programmed in the RAM of the indicator. indication after 6 to 8 seconds, replace the
indicator.
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the
electronic components of the indicator. The 28 VDC is 4. Push the LCD TEST switch on the instrument
supplied through the ENGINE INSTR MGT (1CB10) panel.
circuit breaker on the overhead panel. Three
fluorescent green lights are mounted behind the dial RESULT:
face of the MGT indicator. The LCDs of the MGT
indicator do not normally allow the light to pass • All the LCDs come on.
through them. With input to the MGT indicator, the
MGT indicator turns each LCD segment clear. This • All the digits and decimals are displayed.
allows the green light to shine through, illuminating
each segment. The green lights are controlled in • After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator ends the
intensity depending on the input from the 5 VDC commanded BIT and returns to the ambient
lighting circuit. engine temperature.
95-89. MGT Indication System — Operational CORRECTIVE ACTION:

Check
• If the LCDs do not come on and the digits and
decimals do not display, refer to Trouble No. 3
NOTE
(Figure 95-42).
To view exceedances recorded in the NVM
using a computer, refer to paragraph 95-69. 5. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
external DC power to the helicopter. 6. Return the helicopter to the standard
2. Close the ENGINE INSTR MGT (1CB10) circuit Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
breaker.
95-90. MGT Indicator — Functional Check —
3. The MGT indicator does a power-on BIT, as Normal Mode
follows:
RESULT: SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
• All LCDs come on. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• All digits and decimals are displayed. TT-1000A Turbine Temperature

or Equivalent Indicating System Test
• After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator ends the Set
power-on BIT and returns to the ambient
engine temperature.
CAUTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the LCDs do not come on, refer to Trouble F O L L O W T H E M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S

No. 1 (Figure 95-40). INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION
O F T H E T E S T S E T. O T H E R W I S E ,
• If all the digits and decimals do not display, DAMAGE TO THE TEST EQUIPMENT OR
refer to Trouble No. 2 (Figure 95-41). INDICATOR CAN OCCUR.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-40. MGT Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
displays stop flashing and the E shows on the digital

display.
CAUTION
10. Set the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to 700°C.
TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE
AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING 11. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF INSTR CHECK switch.
B AT T E R Y P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
ELECTRICAL LOADS AND TEST TIME 12. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital
TO A MINIMUM. displays show the exceedance recorded in step 8
(727.1 to 779°C).
2. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR NOTE

MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker. The letter E and the exceedance will show
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR
3. In the engine compartment, on thermocouple CHECK switch is held for less than
terminal board (1TB1), disconnect the wire E9AALML 11 seconds, the letter E and the
GRN from terminal A. Disconnect the wire exceedance show for the length of time the
E9ACHROM WHT from terminal C. switch is pressed.
13. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR

4. Connect the black lead of the test set to wire
CHECK switch.
E9AALML GRN.
14. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the

5. Connect the red lead of the test set to wire LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C
E9ACHROM WHT. reading, as in step 10. Make sure the E does not show
on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes
6. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE off.
INSTR MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker.
7. After the power-on BIT is completed by the MGT circuit breaker. Make sure that the instrument
indicator, make sure that LCD and digital display read goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered.
ambient engine temperature.
NOTE
NOTE Open the circuit breaker for a minimum of
The procedure that follows causes the 10 seconds to ensure that the delay
indicator to show an E on the digital display. circuitry within the instrument is exceeded
This E will continue to show each time the to trigger an instrument reset.
indicator is powered, until the related
exceedance is erased from the NVM with 16. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
the use of a software program (paragraph INSTR MGT circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
95-69). completed, make sure that the E on the digital display
comes on.
8. On the test set, set the TEMP ADJ knob to a test
setting between 727.1 and 779°C. 17. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
INSTR CHECK switch.
begin to flash after 270 seconds and that the CHECK 18. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital
INSTR annunciator on the caution/warning/advisory displays show the exceedance recorded in step 8
panel comes on. Make sure that after 300 seconds the (727.1 to 779°C).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show switch is pressed.
CHECK switch is held for less than 27. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
11 seconds, the letter E and the CHECK switch.
switch is pressed. 28. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the
LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C
19. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR reading, as in step 24. Make sure the E does not show
CHECK switch. on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes
off.
LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C 29. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR
reading, as in step 10. Make sure the E does not show MGT circuit breaker. Make sure that the instrument
on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered.
off.
NOTE
NOTE
Open the circuit breaker for a minimum of
The procedure that follows causes the 10 seconds to ensure that the delay
indicator to show an E on the digital display. circuitry within the instrument is exceeded
This E will continue to show each time the to trigger an instrument reset.
indicator is powered, until the related
exceedance is erased from the NVM with 30. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
the use of a software program (paragraph INSTR MGT circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
95-69). completed, make sure that the E on the digital display
comes on.
21. Slowly increase the TEMP ADJ knob setting to
780°C.
INSTR CHECK switch.
LCD and the digital display reads 780°C.
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 22
23. Make sure the LCD and the digital display start to
(780°C).
flash immediately and that they stop flashing after
12 seconds. Make sure that the E shows on the digital
display after 12 seconds. NOTE
25. On the instrument panel, push and hold the 11 seconds, the letter E and the
INSTR CHECK switch. exceedance show for the length of time the
switch is pressed.
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 22 33. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
(780°C). CHECK switch.

NOTE
LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C
The letter E and the exceedance will show reading, as in step 24. Make sure the E does not show
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes
CHECK switch is held for less than off.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
35. Test for immediate exceedance above 905.1°C. exceedance show for the length of time the
switch is pressed.
NOTE 42. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR

The procedure that follows causes the CHECK switch.
indicator to show an E on the digital display.
This E will continue to show each time the 43. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the
indicator is powered, until the related LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C
exceedance is erased from the NVM with reading, as in step 39. Make sure the E does not show
the use of a software program (paragraph on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes
95-69). off.
NOTE 44. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR

MGT circuit breaker. Make sure that the instrument
For MGT indicators 407-375-001-105 and goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered.
subsequent, set the temperature in step 36
to 906°C. Make sure that the time spent
between 779 and 905°C does not exceed NOTE
12 seconds.
36. Slowly increase the TEMP ADJ knob setting to 10 seconds to ensure that the delay
827°C. Make sure that the time spent between 779.1 circuitry within the instrument is exceeded
and 826°C does not exceed 12 seconds. to trigger an instrument reset.

37. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the INSTR MGT circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
LCD and the digital display read 827°C (906°C for completed, make sure that the E on the digital display
MGT indicators 407-375-001-105 and subsequent). comes on.
38. Make sure that the LCD display and the digital 46. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
display start to flash as soon as the temperature INSTR CHECK switch.
passes through 779.1°C and that CHECK INSTR
annunciator on the caution/warning/advisory panel
comes on. Make sure that the E shows on the
displays show the 827°C (906°C for MGT indicators
digital display as soon as the temperature passes
407-375-001- 105 and subsequent) exceedance
through 826.1°C (905.1°C for MGT indicators
recorded in step 37.
407-375-001-105 and subsequent).
39. Set the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to 700°C. NOTE
40. On the instrument panel, push and hold the for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR
INSTR CHECK switch. CHECK switch is held for less than
41. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital exceedance show for the length of time the
displays show the 827°C (906°C for MGT indicators switch is pressed.
407-375-001-105 and subsequent) exceedance
recorded in step 37. 48. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
CHECK switch.
NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR reading, as in step 39. Make sure the E does not show
CHECK switch is held for less than on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR
11 seconds, the letter E and the annunciator goes off.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
50. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR 1. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker. external DC power.
51. In the engine compartment, disconnect the black 2. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR
lead of the test set from wire E9AALML GRN. MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker.
Disconnect the red lead of the test set from wire
E9ACHROM WHT. 3. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple
terminal board (1TB1), disconnect the wire E9AALML
52. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple GRN from terminal A. Disconnect the wire
terminal board (1TB1), connect the wire E9AALML E9ACHROM WHT from terminal C.
GRN to terminal A. Connect the wire E9ACHROM
WHT to terminal C.
4. Connect the black lead of the test set to wire
E9AALML GRN.
53. Clear any exceedances from the NVM of the
5. Connect the red lead of the test set to wire
E9ACHROM WHT.
CSP 21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear 6. Remove the FADEC/START relay (1K3) from its
the Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all socket (Chapter 96). Connect a jumper from C1 to C2.
Engine History from the FADEC ECU. This put the MGT indicator into start mode.

helicopter. CAUTION

configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y
95-91. MGT Indicator — Functional Check — DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS
Start Mode USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND
TEST TIME TO A MINIMUM.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 7. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 8. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE

INSTR MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker.
TT-1000A Turbine Temperature
or Equivalent Indicating System Test
Set 9. After the power-on BIT is completed by the
indicator, make sure that the LCD and digital display
read ambient engine temperature.
CAUTION
NOTE
USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT indicator to show an E on the digital display.
DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE This E will continue to show each time the
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y indicator is powered, until the related
DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS exceedance is erased from the NVM with
USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND the use of a software program (paragraph
TEST TIME TO A MINIMUM. 95-69).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
For the MGT indicators 407-375-001-105
and subsequent, set the temperature in 18. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
step 10 between 843 and 926°C. INSTR MGT circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
completed, make sure that the E on the digital display
10. On the test set, set the TEMP ADJ knob to a test comes on.
setting between 826 and 926°C.
11. Make sure the LCD display and the digital display INSTR CHECK switch.
begin to flash after 6 seconds and that the CHECK
INSTR annunciator on the caution/warning/advisory 20. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital
panel comes on. Make sure that after 10 seconds the displays show the 826 to 926°C exceedance recorded
displays stop flashing and the E shows in the digital in step 10 (843 to 926°C for MGT indicators
display. 407-375-001-105 and subsequent).
NOTE
13. On the instrument panel, push and hold the The letter E and the exceedance will show
INSTR CHECK switch. for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR
displays show the 826 to 926°C exceedance recorded
switch is pressed.
in step 10 (843 to 926°C for MGT indicators
407-375-001-105 and subsequent). 21. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
CHECK switch.
NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR reading, as in step 12. Make sure the E does not show
CHECK switch is held for less than on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR
11 seconds, the letter E and the annunciator goes off.
switch is pressed.
NOTE
CHECK switch.
indicator to display an E on the digital
display. This E will continue to show each
16. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the time the indicator is powered, until the
LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C related exceedance is erased from the
reading, as in step 12. Make sure the E does not show NVM with the use of a software program
on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes (paragraph 95-69).
off.
23. Slowly increase the TEMP ADJ knob setting to
17. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR 927°C.
goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered. 24. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the
LCD and the digital display reads 927°C.
NOTE
25. Make sure the LCD and the digital display start to
Open the circuit breaker for a minimum of flash immediately. Make sure that the E shows on the
10 seconds to ensure that the delay digital display after 1 second.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
26. Reduce the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to

NOTE
700°C.
INSTR CHECK switch.
28. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital switch is pressed.
(927°C). 35. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
CHECK switch.
NOTE 36. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the
LCD display and the digital display return to the
reading 700 °C, as in step 26. Make sure the E does
not show on the digital display and that the CHECK
INSTR annunciator goes off.
switch is pressed. NOTE
29. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR The procedure that follows causes the
CHECK switch. indicator to display an E on the digital
display. This E will continue to be displayed
each time the indicator is powered, until the
30. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the related exceedance is erased from the
LCD display and the digital display return to the 700°C NVM using a software program (paragraph
reading, as in step 26. Make sure the E does not show 95-69).
on the digital display and that the CHECK INSTR goes
off. 37. Slowly increase the TEMP ADJ knob setting to
928 °C.
MGT circuit breaker. Make sure that the instrument 38. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the
goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered. LCD and the digital display read 928 °C.
39. Make sure that the E shows on the digital display

NOTE as soon as the temperature reaches 928 °C.
40. Reduce the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to
10 seconds to ensure that the delay
700 °C.
32. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE INSTR CHECK switch.
INSTR MGT circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
completed, make sure that the E on the digital display 42. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital
comes on. displays show the exceedance recorded in step 37.
(928 °C).

INSTR CHECK switch. NOTE
34. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 23 CHECK switch is held for less than
(927°C). 11 seconds, the letter E and the
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
exceedance show for the length of time the 51. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR
switch is pressed. MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker.

52. In the engine compartment, disconnect the black
CHECK switch.
lead of the test set from wire E9AALML GRN.
Disconnect the red lead of the test set from wire
44. On the engine MGT indicator, make sure that the E9ACHROM WHT.
reading 700°C, as in step 40. Make sure the E does
not show on the digital display and that the CHECK 53. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple
INSTR goes off. terminal board (1TB1), connect the wire E9AALML
GRN to terminal A. Connect the wire E9ACHROM
WHT to terminal C.
goes blank, indicating that it is no longer powered. 54. Remove the jumper between C1 and C2. Install
the FADEC/START relay (1K3) in its socket
(Chapter 96).
NOTE
Open the circuit breaker for a minimum of 55. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
10 seconds to ensure that the delay INSTR MGT (1CB10) circuit breaker.
to trigger an instrument reset. 56. Clear any exceedances from the NVM of the
INSTR MGT circuit breaker. After the power-up BIT is
completed, make sure that the E on the digital display 57. With reference to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B
comes on. Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication
CSP 21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear
the Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all
INSTR CHECK switch.

(928 °C).
NOTE Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR 95-92. MGT Indicator — Functional Check —
CHECK switch is held for less than Resistance Check of Wiring
switch is pressed.
CHECK switch. 2. Make sure that the connector (1P1) of the
thermocouple harness is connected to engine
disconnect connector (1J1).
reading 700°C, as in step 40. Make sure the E does 3. Make sure that the FADEC/ECU thermocouple
not show on the digital display and that the CHECK harness is disconnected from pin A and pin C of the
INSTR annunciator goes off. thermocouple terminal board (1TB1).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4. Make sure that the thermocouple harness is 2. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple
correctly connected at pin A and pin C of the terminal board (1TB1), disconnect the wires E9AALML
thermocouple terminal board (1TB1). GRN and ALML from the terminal A. Disconnect the
wires E9ACHROM and CHROM from the terminal C.
5. Tilt the instrument panel down to gain access to

the MGT indicator (1M4). 3. Connect a lead of the test set to terminal A.
Connect the other lead of the test set to terminal C.
6. Disconnect the connector (1M4P1) from the MGT

indicator (1M4). 4. On the test set, follow the manufacturer's
instructions and set the test set to check resistance.
7. Measure the resistance between pin 4 and pin 11

5. Make sure that the resistance of the
of connector (1M4P1).
thermocouple loop is between 0.26 and 0.38 ohms.
RESULT: 6. In the engine compartment, disconnect the leads

of the test set from terminal A and terminal C of the
• Resistance is between 5 and 20 ohms. thermocouple terminal board (1TB1).
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 7. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple

terminal board (1TB1), connect the wires E9AALML
GRN and ALML to terminal A. Connect the wires
• If the resistance is not between 5 and E9ACHROM and CHROM to terminal C. Make sure
20 ohms, do the resistance check of the that the wires are correctly installed. Make sure the
thermocouple loop (paragraph 95-93). Repair/ nuts of the terminal board are correctly tightened.
replace the wiring or the components
including the thermocouple harness.
8. Connect the connector (1M4P1) to the MGT Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
indicator (1M4) and reposition and secure the
instrument panel in its upright position.
95-94. Thermocouple Harness — Removal/
Installation
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series Operation
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). and Maintenance Manual for the removal and
installation of the thermocouple harness.
95-93. MGT Thermocouple Loop — Resistance
Check 95-95. GAS PRODUCER TACHOMETER (NG)
INDICATION SYSTEM — DESCRIPTION
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
The NG indicator (Figure 95-43) shows the

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) of the gas producer.
The NG indicator is made of a dial and electronic
TT-1000A or Turbine Temperature components in a sealed case.
Equivalent Indicating System Test
Set
The dial of the NG indicator has a scale that shows
RPM% X 10. The range of the scale is from 0 to 110%
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power RPM. If the readings are above the scale of the
from the helicopter. indicator, the digital display will show dashes (- - - - -).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL
A
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90 % RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 MAN
(TYPICAL)
3
1. NG indicator dial
2. Digital display
4. Green arc
5. Red line
6. Red triangle
Figure 95-43. NG Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The dial has a single bar LCD display and a digital 95-96. NG Indication System — Range Markings
display. The LCD display is along the RPM% X 10
scale and it operates as a pointer. The segments of The range marking for the NG scale is shown in
the LCD display come on in a clockwise order from 0 Table 95-13.
to 110%. The position of the last segment to come on
along the scale shows the NG RPM% X 10. The digital
display shows the NG RPM% in a four digit format.
For the simplified schematic of the NG indication

system, refer to Figure 95-44.
Table 95-13. NG Indicator Scale — Range Markings
MARKING RANGE (NG) (%) DEFINITION
Red Line 105 Maximum
Red Triangle 106 Maximum Transient, 10 seconds
95-97. NG Indication System — Exceedances flash. When the indicator flashes, it also triggers a
switch, which gives a ground at pin 21, and the
The advisory and exceedance values are programmed CHECK INSTR annunciator on the caution/warning/
in the RAM of the indicator. The NG indicator advisory panel comes on. The NG indicator displays
microprocessor is programmed with specific NG an advisory and records an exceedance as shown in
values that cause the digital and analog displays to Table 95-14.
Table 95-14. NG Indicator — Exceedances
RPM (%) INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
105.1 to 106.0 Starts to flash immediately. Stops Recorded after 10 seconds.

flashing after 10 seconds.
106.1, but stops flashing at 106.1
and above.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-44. NG Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-98. NG Indication System Pickup — through the FADEC/ECU even if it is not powered. The
Description NG indicator converts the alternating voltage to
specific percentage N1 speed. Refer to the
The N1 speed pickup consists of a magnetic sensor Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series Operation and
mounted in the engine gearbox near the centrifugal Maintenance Manual for maintenance and removal/
breather idler gear, which is part of the gas producer installation instructions.
geartrain. As the gears pass by the sensor, a change in
the magnetic field is converted into an alternating The coil between pin A and pin B provides the primary
voltage. The frequency of the alternating voltage input for use by the FADEC/ECU.
increases as the gear RPM increases.
95-99. NG Indication System — Operation
The pickup has two coils that output the same signal.
The coil between pin C and pin D provides the only The NG indicator receives its input signal from the N1
input to the instrument through the FADEC/ECU. This pickup. The NG scale indication in relation to the input
coil also provides the secondary input for use by the signal from the N1 pickup is shown in the Table 95-15.
FADEC/ECU. The signal from the pickup is supplied
Table 95-15. NG Scale Indication Versus Input Signal
INDICATION INPUT FREQUENCY NOMINAL SIGNAL VOLTAGE

(%) (HZ) (PEAK TO PEAK)
5 893 0.6
10 1785 1.2
20 3670 2.4
30 5355 3.6
50 8925 6.0
60 10,710 7.2
63 11,246 7.6
70 12,495 8.4
80 14,280 9.6
90 16,065 10.8
100 17,850 12.0
105 18,743 12.6

105.6 18,850 12.6
106 18,921 12.7
107 19,099 13.0

110 19,635 13.2
120 21,420 14.4
130 23,205 15.6
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The input signal from the N1 pickup is supplied to the RESULT:

signal conditioner. The output of the signal conditioner
is sent to the Analog to Digital (A/D) converter where • All LCDs come on.
the analog signal is converted to a digital signal. The
digital signal is then sent to the processor. The
processor controls the operation of the indicator from
the operation parameters of the software program in
its memory. • After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator ends the
power-on BIT and return to the normal
indication of 0%.
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the
electronic components of the indicator. The 28 VDC is
supplied through the ENGINE INSTR NG (1CB24) CORRECTIVE ACTION:
circuit breaker on the overhead panel. Three
fluorescent green lights are mounted behind the dial • If the LCDs do not come on, refer to Trouble
face of the NG indicator. The LCDs of the NG indicator No. 1 (Figure 95-45).
do not normally allow the light to pass through them.
With input to the NG indicator, the NG indicator turns • If all the digits and decimals do not show, refer
each LCD segment clear. This allows the green light to to Trouble No. 2 (Figure 95-46).
shine through illuminating each segment. The green
lights are controlled in intensity depending on the input
from the 5 VDC lighting circuit. • If indicator does not return to the normal
indicator.
When the FADEC/ECU is operating in manual mode,
the engine out warning system in the FADEC/ECU is
inoperative. When the FADEC/ECU switch is placed in 3. Push the LCD TEST switch on the instrument
panel.
the manual mode, an alternate ground circuit is
provided for the engine out warning horn through the
FADEC/ECU switch and the NG indicator. Pin 13 of RESULT:
the NG indicator is normally closed to ground. This
contact will open when the N1 pickup signal is • All LCDs come on.
9818 Hz or above (55% NG or above). Therefore, with
the FADEC/ ECU in the manual mode, if the NG
• All digits and decimals are shown.
indicator drops below 55%, the engine out horn will
operate.
• After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator ends the
commanded BIT and returns to the normal
95-100. NG Indication System — Operational
indication of 0%.
Check
4. If the LCDs do not come on and digits and

NOTE decimals do not show, refer to Trouble No. 3
To view exceedances recorded in the NVM (Figure 95-47).
with a computer, refer to paragraph 95-69.
1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the external DC power from the helicopter.
2. Close the ENG INSTR NG (1CB24) circuit configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
breaker. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-45. NG Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-101. NG Indication System — Functional between AUTO and MANUAL or the power
Check to the FACE/ECU is turned back on.
3. In the engine compartment, disconnect the

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED connector from the ENG 1 GAS PROD (N1) MAG
pickup.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 4. Connect the positive lead of the audio oscillator to

pin C of the ENG 1 GAS PROD (N1) MAG connector.
1110 or Equivalent Boonton Audio Connect the negative lead of the audio oscillator to the
Oscillator pin D of the ENG 1 GAS PROD (N1) MAG connector.
NOTE
The functional check that follows makes CAUTION
sure that the advisories and exceedances
programmed into the indicator operate
USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
correctly. The check also makes sure that
DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE
the exceedance display and instrument
check test button operate correctly.
DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS
USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND
NG (1CB24) and ENGINE CONTROLS FADEC
(1CB16) circuit breakers.
INSTR NG (1CB24) and ENGINE CONTROLS
FADEC (1CB16) circuit breakers.
CAUTION
NOTE
HANDLE THE WIRES TO THE indicator to show an E on the digital display.
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE This E will continue to show each time the
INSTRUMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH indicator is powered until the related
S TA N D A R D PRACTICES FOR exceedance is erased from the NVM with
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE the use of a software program (paragraph
EQUIPMENT. THE NG INDICATOR AND 95-69).
THE FADEC/ECU ARE SENSITIVE TO
ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY 7. Set the audio oscillator as follows:
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E S E
• Waveform: SINE
COMPONENTS.
• Amplitude: 12.6 volts peak-to-peak
NOTE
Disconnecting the N1 MAG pickup will • Frequency: 18,850 Hz
result in a FADEC DEGRADE being
displayed on the caution/warning/advisory 8. On the NG indicator, make sure that the LCD and
panel by the FADEC/ECU. The fault will digital display show 105.6% RPM. Make sure that the
disappear when the N1 MAG pickup is LCD display flashes immediately and that the letter E
reconnected and the FADEC/ECU is cycled comes on the digital display after 10 seconds.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. On the caution/warning/advisory panel, make 19. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
sure the CHECK INSTR annunciator comes on. CHECK switch.
10. Set the audio oscillator to 8925 Hz and set the 20. Set the audio oscillator frequency to 19,099 Hz
amplitude to 6.0 volts peak to peak. Make sure that the and set the amplitude to 13 volts peak to peak.
NG indicator shows 50%.
21. On the NG indicator, make sure that the LCD and
11. On the instrument panel, push and hold the digital displays show 107% RPM. Make sure that the
INSTR CHECK switch. letter E on the digital display comes on immediately
(does not flash).
NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show sure the CHECK INSTR annunciator comes on.
11 seconds, the letter E and the 23. Set the audio oscillator to 8925 Hz and set the
exceedance will show for the length of time amplitude to 6.0 volts peak to peak. Make sure that
the switch is pushed. NG indicator shows 50%.
12. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital 24. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 8 INSTR CHECK switch.
(105.6%)
13. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR NOTE

CHECK switch. The letter E and the exceedance will show
14. On the NG indicator, make sure that the LCD and CHECK switch is held for less than
digital displays show 50% RPM, as in step 10. Make 11 seconds, the letter E and the
sure that the CHECK INSTR annunciator goes off. exceedance will show for the length of time
the switch is pushed.
NG (1CB24) circuit breaker. 25. On the indicator, make sure the LCD and digital
16. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE (107%)
INSTR NG (1CB24) circuit breaker. After the power-up
BIT check is completed, make sure that the E comes 26. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR
on the digital display. CHECK switch.
17. On the instrument panel, push and hold the 27. On the NG indicator, make sure that the LCD and
INSTR CHECK switch. digital displays show 50% RPM, as in step 23. Make
sure that the CHECK INSTR annunciator goes off.
NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show NG (1CB24) circuit breaker.
INSTR NG (1CB24) circuit breaker. After the power-up
exceedance will show for the length of time
BIT check is completed, make sure that the E comes
the switch is pushed.
on the digital display.
displays show the exceedance recorded in step 8 30. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
(105.6%) INSTR CHECK switch.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
The letter E and the exceedance will show CSP 21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear
for a maximum of 11 seconds. If the INSTR the Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all
CHECK switch is held for less than Engine History from the FADEC ECU.
exceedance will be displayed for the length
of time the switch is pressed.
helicopter.
31. Make sure that the exceedance recorded in
step 21 is displayed (107.0%) 40. Return the helicopter to the standard
32. On the instrument panel, release the INSTR Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
CHECK switch.
95-102. NG (N1) Magnetic Pickup — Removal/
33. On the NG indicator, make sure the LCD display Installation
and the digital display show 50% RPM. Make sure the
letter E goes off the digital display. Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series Operation
and Maintenance Manual for the removal and
34. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR installation of the NG (N1) pickup.
NG (1CB24) and ENGINE CONTROLS FADEC
(1CB16) circuit breakers. 95-103. DUAL TACHOMETER INDICATION
SYSTEM — DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299)
CAUTION
The dual tachometer indication system has a dual
tachometer indicator, NP (N2) speed sensor, and NR
HANDLE THE WIRES TO THE monopole sensor.
INSTRUMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH There are two types of dual tachometer indicators.
S TA N D A R D PRACTICES FOR One is manufactured by Diehl and the other by
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE AHLERS (Figure 95-48).
EQUIPMENT. THE NG INDICATOR AND
THE FADEC/ECU ARE SENSITIVE TO • Diehl – Installed in production helicopters S/N
ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY 53000 through 53794. These indicators use
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY both the power-on BIT and command BIT
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E S E (LCD TEST) check functions.
COMPONENTS.
• AHLERS – Installed in production helicopters
35. Disconnect the positive lead of the audio
S/N 53795 through 54299. These dual
oscillator from pin C of the ENG 1 GAS PROD (N1)
tachometer indicators can be identified by the
MAG connector. Disconnect the negative lead of the
AHLERS designation on the face of the
audio oscillator from the pin D of the ENG 1 GAS
instrument. The NR and NP needles of the
PROD (N1) MAG connector.
AHLERS dual tachometer indicator do not
move or self-test during the power-on BIT
36. In the engine compartment, connect the check. The AHLERS dual tachometer
connector to the ENG 1 GAS PROD (N1) MAG pickup. indicator is tested by pushing the LCD TEST
Make sure the connector is correctly installed and switch (1S15), which is indicated by full scale
tightened. Safety the connector. deflection of the NR and NP needles. Faults in
the AHLERS dual tachometer will be identified
37. Clear any exceedances from the NVM of the by no pointer movement when pushing the
indicator (paragraph 95-69). LCD TEST switch
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
1 1
NR
4 0 4
10
120
NP
4 110
20
4
30
T
100
5 5
90 % RPM 40
5 5
R
80 50
4 70 60
4
4 4
2 3 2 3
Diehl AHLERS
(TYPICAL)
1. Dual tachometer dial

2. Rotor pointer
3. Power turbine pointer
4. Red line
5. Green arc
407_MM_95_0047
Figure 95-48. Dual Tachometer — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The dual tachometer shows the rotor RPM (NR) and The other scale is the NP scale and it shows the %
the power turbine RPM (NP). The dual tachometer RPM of the power turbine. The NP indication is shown
indicator (Figure 95-49) has a dial, two pointers, and with the turbine pointer (T). For the range marking of
electronic components. Individual power supplies give the NP scale, refer to Table 95-17.
power to the processing units, which control the
drivers that operate the stepper motors. The stepper 95-104. Dual Tachometer System — Range
motors drive their associated pointer. Markings
The dial has two scales that show % RPM. One of the For the range marking of the NR scale, refer to
scales is the NR scale and it shows the % RPM of the Table 95-16.
rotor. The NR indication is shown with the rotor pointer
(R). For the range marking of the NR scale, refer to For the range marking of the NP scale, refer to
Table 95-16. Table 95-17.
Table 95-16. Rotor RPM (NR) Scale — Range Marking
MARKING RANGE (RPM) (%) DEFINITION
Red Line 85 Minimum, Power Off
Green Arc 85 to 107 Continuous Operation, Power Off
Red Line 107 Maximum, Power Off
Table 95-17. Power Turbine (NP) Scale — Range Marking
MARKING RANGE (RPM) (%) DEFINITION
Red Line 99 Minimum
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIEHL DUAL TACHOMETER INDICATOR SYSTEM 407_MM_95_0048a
Figure 95-49. Dual Tachometer System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
AHLERS DUAL TACHOMETER INDICATOR SYSTEM 407_MM_95_0048b
Figure 95-49. Dual Tachometer System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299) (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-105. Dual Tachometer Indication System, NR pin 4 provides the input to the FADEC/ECU. The coil
Monopole Sensor — Description between pin 5 and pin 6 provides the input to the low
rotor sensor.
The NR speed pickup is a magnetic sensor mounted
on the transmission lower case. As the gear teeth of
the spiral bevel gear pass by the sensor, the change in The signal is sent from the magnetic sensor to the NR
the magnetic field is converted into alternating voltage. circuit of the dual tachometer indicator. The indicator
The frequency of the alternating voltage increases as converts the alternating voltage to specific NR speed.
the gear RPM increases. Refer to paragraph 95-112 and paragraph 95-113 for
the removal and installation instructions for the
The pickup has three coils that output the same signal. magnetic sensor. The scale indication is in proportion
The coil between pin 1 and pin 2 provides the only to the frequency input from the speed pickup as shown
input to the instrument. The coil between pin 3 and in Table 95-18.
Table 95-18. NR Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input

(% RPM) (HZ) (PEAK TO PEAK)
0 0 0.0
20 400 3.0
40 800 6.0
60 1200 9.0
80 1600 12.0
85 1700 12.8
100 2000 15.0

107 2140 16.1
120 2400 18.0
95-106. Dual Tachometer Indication System, NP secondary input for use by the FADEC/ECU. The
(N2) Speed Pickup — Description signal from the pickup is supplied through the FADEC/
ECU even if it is not powered. The coil between pin A
The NP (N2) speed pickup is a magnetic sensor and pin B provides the primary input for use by the
mounted in the engine gearbox near the power turbine FADEC/ECU.
shaft spanner nut. As the slots in the nut pass by the
sensor, a change in the magnetic field is converted The signal is sent from the pickup to the NP (N2)
into alternating voltage. The frequency of the circuit of the dual tachometer indicator through the
alternating voltage increases as the RPM of the nut FADEC/ECU. The dual tachometer indicator converts
increases. the alternating voltage to specific percentage NP
speed. Refer to Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series
The pickup has two coils which each provide a Operation and Maintenance Manual for maintenance
separate output signal. The coil between the pin C and and removal/ installation instructions. The scale
pin D provides the only input to the instrument through indication is in proportion to the frequency input from
the FADEC/ECU. This coil also provides the the monopole sensor as shown in Table 95-19.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-19. NP Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input

0 0 0.0
20 2146 2.4
40 4292 4.8
60 6437 7.2
80 8583 9.6
99 10,622 11.9
100 10,729 12.0
120 12,875 14.4
140 15,021 16.8
160 17,166 19.2
95-107. Dual Tachometer Indication System —

NOTE
Operation
The NR and NP needles of the AHLERS
The analog input signal from the NP (N2) and the NR dual tachometer indicator do not move or
magnetic sensors are supplied to their respective self test during the power-on BIT check.
inputs within the dual tachometer indicator The AHLERS dual tachometer indicator is
(Figure 95-49). tested by pushing the LCD TEST switch
(1S15) which is indicated by full scale
deflection of the NR and NP needles.
As applicable to Diehl dual tachometer indicators, Faults in the AHLERS dual tachometer will
these analog signals are converted to digital signals be identified by no pointer movement when
and then are processed by the applicable processor. pushing the LCD TEST switch
The processors provide a signal to their associated
stepper motor driver to drive the applicable pointer to The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the NP
the correct position on the dial. (N2) part of the electrical circuit. The 28 VDC is
supplied through the ENG INSTR NP (1CB24) circuit
As applicable to AHLERS dual tachometer indicators, breaker on the overhead panel. The 28 VDC bus also
these analog signals are input into the associated supplies the power input to the NR part of the
internal relay and then processed by the frequency to indicator. The 28 VDC is supplied through the ENG
voltage converter. The signal from the associated INSTR NR (1CB21) circuit breaker installed on the
frequency to voltage converter provides a signal to the overhead panel. The dual tachometer has a 5 VDC
associated stepper motor pointer driver to drive the integral lighting. The 5 VDC is supplied from the
applicable pointer to the correct position on the dial lighting system (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-108. Dual Tachometer Indicator — Removal
2. Install the dual tachometer indicator (1M6) (4,

WARNING
Figure 95-50) in its location on the instrument
panel (5).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 3. Attach the dual tachometer indicator (1M6) (4) to
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC the instrument panel (5) with the screws (2) and
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). nuts (3).

from the helicopter. 4. Connect the electrical connectors (1M6P1 and
1M6P2) (1) to the receptacles of the dual tachometer
indicator. Connect the electrical connector (1M6P1) to
washers that attach the instrument panel the indicator receptacle (1M6J1). Connect the
(Figure 95-2). electrical connector (1M6P2) to the indicator
receptacle (1M6J2).
3. Loosen the fasteners that secure the upper cover
of the shroud assembly to the top of the glareshield. 5. Carefully put the instrument panel (5) in position.
4. At the instrument panel, remove the bolt and 6. Install the bolt and washers that attach the
washer that attach the instrument panel. instrument panel.
5. Tilt the instrument panel down. 7. Install the screws and washers that attach the
instrument panel.
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1M6P1 and
1M6P2) (1, Figure 95-50) from the dual tachometer
8. Do an operational check of the dual tachometer
indication system (paragraph 95-110).
7. Hold the dual tachometer indicator and remove

the screws (2) and nuts (3) that attach the dual 95-110. Dual Tachometer Indication System —
tachometer indicator (1M6) (4) to the instrument Operational Check
panel (5).
8. Remove the dual tachometer indicator (1M6) (4). CAUTION
95-109. Dual Tachometer Indicator — Installation

DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE
WARNING
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). external DC power to the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
1 ENGINE
ANTI-ICE
AUTO
RELIGHT
START
LITTER
DOOR
HEATER
OVERTEMP
L/FUEL
XFR
FUEL
FILTER
R/FUEL
XFR
FUEL
VALVE
RESTART
FAULT
FUEL
LOW
FADEC
DEGRADED
FADEC
MANUAL
XMSN
CHIP
T/R
CHIP
XMSN OIL
PRESS
CHECK
INSTR
XMSN OIL
TEMP
HYD
SYSTEM
ENGINE
OVSPD
CYCLIC
CENTERING
PEDAL
STOP
RPM
LT TEST
A
U
T
O
ON
E
L
T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
1
BASIC 869 LBS
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
4
3
1. Electrical connectors (1M6P1 and 1M6P2)

2. Screw
3. Nut
4. Dual tachometer indicator (1M6)
5. Instrument panel
407_MM_95_0049
Figure 95-50. Dual Tachometer Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Close the ENGINE INSTR NP (1CB24) circuit still does not go to 100%, refer to Trouble
breaker. No. 2 (Figure 95-52).
RESULT: • If the indicator does not return to the normal

NOTE indicator.

dual tachometer indicator do not move or 4. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
self-test during the power-on BIT check. external DC power from the helicopter.
The AHLERS dual tachometer indicator is
tested by pushing the LCD TEST switch
5. Open the ENGINE INSTR NP (1CB24) circuit
(1S15), which is indicated by full scale
deflection of the NR and NP needles. breaker.
Faults in the AHLERS dual tachometer will
be identified by no pointer movement when 6. Close the ENGINE INSTR NR (1CB21) circuit
pushing the LCD TEST switch. breaker.
• The NP indicator performs the power-on BIT.
• The T-pointer goes to 100%. CAUTION

power-on BIT and returns to the normal USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
indication of 0%. DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE
CORRECTIVE ACTION: DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS
• If the T-pointer does not go to 100%, refer to TEST TIME TO A MINIMUM.
Trouble No. 1 (Figure 95-51).
• If the indicator does not return to the normal external DC power to the helicopter.
indicator.
RESULT:
panel.
NOTE
RESULT: The NR and NP needles of the AHLERS

dual tachometer indicator do not move or
self-test during the power-on BIT check.
• The T-pointer goes to 100%.
commanded BIT and returns to the normal (1S15), which is indicated by full scale
indication of 0%. deflection of the NR and NP needles.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: be identified by no pointer movement when
pushing the LCD TEST switch.
• If the T-pointer does not go to 100%, wait for
5 seconds and repeat step 3. If the T-pointer • NR indicator performs the power-on BIT.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 1
DUAL TACHOMETER INDICATOR
CAUTION
DISCONNECT THE BATTERY AND THE EXTERNAL DC POWER PRIOR TO PERFORMING A

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE DUAL TACHOMETER INDICATOR.
NOTE
REFER TO CHAPTER 98, DUAL TACHOMETER INDICATOR SYSTEM - WIRING DIAGRAM.
THE T POINTER DOES NOT

GO TO 100%.
DOES THE T POINTER MOVE?
YES NO
REPLACE THE INDICATOR. IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN 1M6P2-1 AND 1M6P2-8?
YES NO

BETWEEN 1M6P2-1 AND
AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN AT CIRCUIT BREAKER
1M6P2-8 AND GROUND. OUTPUT 1CB24?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING REPLACE CIRCUIT

OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN BREAKER 1CB24.
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND 1M6P2-1.
407_MM_95_0050
Figure 95-51. Dual Tachometer Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 2
CAUTION

NOTE
THE T POINTER DOES NOT

GO TO 100%.
DOES THE T POINTER MOVE?
YES NO
REPLACE THE INDICATOR. DO OTHER INDICATORS

PERFORM LCD TEST CORRECTLY?
YES NO
(S/N 53795 THROUGH 54299) (S/N 53000 THROUGH 53794) DISCONNECT INSTRUMENT
PANEL DISCONNECT 10P1.
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING
OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN
1M6P2-12 AND 8TB3-SA. 1M6P2-12 AND 4TB2-SW.
IS THERE CONTINUITY BETWEEN
10P1-AA AND 10P1-BB WITH
LCD TEST SWITCH 1S15 PUSHED?
YES NO
IS THERE CONTINUITY BETWEEN REPLACE SWITCH 1S15.

10J1-BB AND GROUND?
YES NO

4TB2-SB AND 10J1-AA. 10J1-BB AND GROUND.
407_MM_95_0051
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• The R pointer goes to 107%. 95-111. Dual Tachometer Indication System —

Functional Check
power-on BIT and returns to the normal
indication of 0%.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1110 or Equivalent Boonton Audio

• If the R pointer does not go to 107%, refer to Oscillator
• If the indicator does not return to the normal MATERIALS REQUIRED

indicator. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
panel. C-405 Lockwire
RESULT: 1. Test the indication system of the power turbine

RPM (NP) as follows:
• The R pointer goes to 107%.
NOTE
• After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator ends the When the ENGINE NP (N2) connector is
commanded BIT and returns to the normal disconnected, the FADEC/ECU will cause
indication of 0%. the FADEC FAIL and FADEC DEGRADED
to be displayed on the caution/warning/
CORRECTIVE ACTION: advisory panel, and the FADEC FAIL horn
will come on. Switching the FADEC/ECU to
MANUAL will turn off the FADEC FAIL horn.
• If the R pointer does not go to 107%, wait for This fault will disappear when the ENGINE
5 seconds and repeat step . If the R pointer NP (N2) connector is reconnected and the
still does not go to 107%, refer to Trouble FADEC/ECU is cycled between AUTO and
No. 4 (Figure 95-54). MANUAL or the power to the FADEC/ECU
is turned back on.
• If the indicator does not return to the normal a. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
indication after 6 to 8 seconds, replace the external DC power from the helicopter.
indicator.
b. In the engine compartment, disconnect the
9. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the electrical connector from the ENGINE NP (N2)
external DC power from the helicopter. SENSOR.
c. Connect the audio oscillator as follows:

configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After (1) Positive to the pin D of the ENGINE NP
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). (N2) connector.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 3
CAUTION

NOTE
THE R POINTER DOES NOT

GO TO 107%.
DOES THE R POINTER MOVE?
YES NO

BETWEEN 1M6P1-1 AND 1M6P1-4?
YES NO

BETWEEN 1M6P1-1 AND
AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN 1M6P1-4 AND GROUND. AT CIRCUIT BREAKER
OUTPUT 1CB21?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING REPLACE CIRCUIT

OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN BREAKER 1CB21.
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND 1M6P1-1.
407_MM_95_0052
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 4
CAUTION

NOTE
THE R POINTER DOES NOT

GO TO 107%.
DOES THE R POINTER MOVE?
YES NO
REPLACE THE INDICATOR. DO OTHER INDICATORS

PERFORM LCD TEST CORRECTLY?
YES NO
(S/N 53795 THROUGH 54299) (S/N 53000 THROUGH 53794) DISCONNECT INSTRUMENT
PANEL DISCONNECT 10P1.
1M6P2-12 AND 8TB3-SA. 1M6P2-12 AND 4TB2-SW.
10P1-AA AND 10P1-BB WITH
LCD TEST SWITCH 1S15 PUSHED?
YES NO

10J1-BB AND GROUND?
YES NO

4TB2-SB AND 10J1-AA. 10J1-BB AND GROUND.
407_MM_95_0053
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
(2) Negative to the pin E of the ENGINE NP f. The NP indicator performs the power-on BIT.
(N2) connector. The T-pointer goes to 100%. After 6 to 8 seconds, the
indicator ends the power-on BIT and returns to the
normal indication of 0%.
CAUTION
• On the instrument panel, push and hold the
LCD TEST switch. On the dual tachometer,
USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT make sure the NP pointer goes to 100%.
DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE Make sure the NP pointer goes back to 0%
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y when the LCD TEST switch is released or
DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS after 5 seconds.
TEST TIME TO A MINIMUM. g. Set the audio generator as per Table 95-20.
Make sure the NP pointer gives the correct indication
d. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the for each test point.
e. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE h. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE
CONTROLS FADEC (1CB16) and ENGINE INSTR NP CONTROLS FADEC (1CB16) and ENGINE INSTR NP
(1CB24) circuit breakers. (1CB24) circuit breakers.
i. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the

NOTE
dual tachometer indicator do not move or j. Disconnect the audio oscillator from pin D and
self-test during the power-on BIT check. pin E of the ENG 1 NP (N2) connector.
(1S15), which is indicated by full scale k. In the engine compartment, connect the
deflection of the NR and NP needles. connector to the ENGINE NP (N2) sensor.
be identified by no pointer movement when l. Make sure the connector is correctly installed
pushing the LCD TEST switch. and connected.
Table 95-20. NP Test
AMPLITUDE NP POINTER
FREQUENCY
(VOLTS PEAK TO WAVE FORM INDICATION
(HZ)
PEAK) (%)
2146 2.4 Sine 20 ±0.35

10,729 12 Sine 100 ±0.35
12,875 14.4 Sine 120 ±0.35
0 0 Sine 0 ±0.35
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
be identified by no pointer movement when

2. Test the indication system of the rotor RPM (NR) pushing the LCD TEST switch.
as follows:
e. On the dual tachometer, make sure the NR
a. In the transmission compartment, disconnect pointer reads 107 ±0.35% RPM (upper red line) for 6
the electrical connector (1B8P1) from the NR to 8 seconds. After 6 to 8 seconds, make sure the NR
monopole sensor. pointer goes back to 0 ±0.35% RPM.
b. Connect the audio oscillator as follows: f. On the instrument panel, push and hold the
LCD TEST switch. On the dual tachometer, make sure
the NR pointer reads 107 ±0.35% RPM (upper red
(1) Positive signal output to pin 1 of the line). Make sure the NR pointer goes back to 0% when
electrical connector. the LCD TEST switch is released or after 5 seconds.
(2) Negative signal output to pin 2 of the g. Set the audio generator as per Table 95-21
electrical connector. Make sure the NR pointer gives the correct indication
for each test point.
c. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the
external DC power to the helicopter. h. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
d. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE
CONTROLS FADEC (1CB16) and ENGINE INSTR i. Disconnect the audio oscillator from pin 1 and
NR (1CB21) circuit breakers. pin 2 of the electrical connector (1B8P1).
j. In the transmission compartment, connect the

NOTE electrical connector (1B8P1) to the NR monopole
The NR and NP needles of the AHLERS sensor.
dual tachometer indicator do not move or
self-test during the power-on BIT check. k. Make sure the connector is correctly
The AHLERS dual tachometer indicator is connected.
(1S15), which is indicated by full scale 3. Return the helicopter to the standard
deflection of the NR and NP needles. configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Faults in the AHLERS dual tachometer will Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
Table 95-21. NR Test
AMPLITUDE NP POINTER
FREQUENCY
(VOLTS PEAK TO WAVE FORM INDICATION
(HZ)
PEAK) (%)
400 3.0 Sine 20 ±0.35
2000 15.0 Sine 100 ±0.25

2400 18.0 Sine 120 ±0.35
0 0 Sine 0 ±0.35
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-112. NR Monopole Sensor — Removal AND ON THE NR MONOPOLE SENSOR

(1B8).
MATERIALS REQUIRED 6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) to the electrical

connector (1B8P1) (3) and to the NR monopole sensor
(1B8) (2).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

CAUTION
WARNING INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428)

ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE
TRANSMISSION TO PREVENT FOREIGN
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE
TRANSMISSION.
7. Install caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the open port
NOTE of the main transmission (4).

necessary to perform the required 95-113. NR Monopole Sensor — Installation
maintenance.

from the helicopter. MATERIALS REQUIRED

2. Remove the fairing to gain access to the NR
monopole sensor (1B8) in the transmission NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
compartment.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1B8P1) (3,
Figure 95-55) from the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2). C-405 Lockwire
4. Remove the lockwire from the NR monopole

sensor (1B8) (2).
WARNING
5. Remove the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2) and
the packing (1) from the main transmission (4).
CAUTION
INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-156) 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
ON ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR (1B8P1) from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1. Packing
2. NR monopole sensor (1B8)
4 4. Main transmission
3
LOCKWIRE (C-405)
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
VIEW B (8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-55. NR Monopole Sensor — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Gain access to the transmission compartment. 95-114. NP (N2) Monopole Sensor — Removal/
On the aft right side of the transmission, locate the Installation
transmission port for the NR monopole sensor.
For the removal and installation of the NP (N2)
3. Remove the previously installed caps and/or monopole pickup, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B
plugs. Series Operation and Maintenance Practices.
4. Install the packing (1, Figure 95-55) on the NR 95-115. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE
monopole sensor (1B8) (2). INDICATION SYSTEM — DESCRIPTION
(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
5. Install the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2) into the
transmission port. Torque the NR monopole
The ENG OIL indicator gives an indication of the
sensor T .
engine oil temperature in degrees Centigrade (°C) and
the engine oil pressure in Pounds per Square Inch
6. Safety the NR monopole sensor with lockwire (PSI) (Figure 95-56). The ENG OIL indicator is made
(C-405). of a dial and electronic components in a sealed case.
NOTE The dial is divided into two scales. The scale on the
left side of the dial is the PSI X 10 scale and shows the
It is recommended to apply contact
pressure of the engine oil. The scale on the right side
of the dial is the °C scale and shows the temperature
of the engine oil.
7. Connect the electrical connector (1B8P1) (3) to
the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2). The two scales are single bar LCD displays. Each of
the LCD displays are along their related scale and
they operate as pointers. The segments of the LCD
displays come on in an ascending order from the zero
CAUTION position on the scale. The last segment of the LCD
display to come on along the PSI X 10 scale shows
the engine oil pressure. The last segment of the LCD
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE display to come on along the °C X 10 scale shows the
HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE engine oil temperature.
8. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1, Section 2) The ENG OIL indicator has two electronic circuits. One
and make sure the NR/NP indication is operational of the electronic circuits is the oil temperature circuit.
and within limits and that there are no oil leaks. The other electronic circuit is the oil pressure circuit.
9. Return the helicopter to the standard For the simplified schematic of the engine oil
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After temperature/pressure indication system, refer to
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). Figure 95-57.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
6
2
2
3 3
3
(TYPICAL)
1. Eng oil indicator dial

3. Red line
4. Green arc
5. Yellow arc
6. Red triangle
407_MM_95_0055
Figure 95-56. Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
407_MM_95_0056
Figure 95-57. Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-116. Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure

Indication System — Range Markings
The range marking for the PSI scale is shown in

Table 95-22. The range marking for the °C scale is
shown in Table 95-23.
Table 95-22. Engine Oil Pressure PSI Scale — Range Marking
MARKING RANGE (PSI) DEFINITION
Red Line 50 Minimum
Yellow Arc 50 to 90 Operation below 79% NG RPM
Narrow Green Arc 90 to 115 Continuous Operation, NG RPM

between 79 and 94%
Wide Green Arc 115 to 130 Continuous Operation NG RPM

greater than 94%
Red Triangle 200 Maximum Cold Start
Table 95-23. Engine Oil Temperature °C Scale — Range Marking
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
bulb. The resistance of the bulb changes as the

95-117. Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — temperature of the engine oil changes.
Description
95-119. Engine Oil Pressure Indication System —
The engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) is mounted Operation
in the transmission compartment on the right side of
the forward firewall. The transducer has a pressure The strain gauge circuit of the engine oil pressure
diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge. transducer receives an excitation voltage of 10 VDC
from the engine oil pressure indicator. The engine oil
95-118. Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — pressure port on the engine gearbox outputs a specific
Description oil pressure that changes the strain gauge bridge in
the transducer. This changes the signal sent to the
engine oil pressure indicator. The engine oil pressure
The engine oil temperature bulb is installed on the indicator shows the oil pressure in PSI in relation to
engine oil tank. The temperature bulb is in contact with the input signal from the transducer as shown in
the oil in the tank. The temperature bulb is a resistive Table 95-24.
Table 95-24. ENG PSI Scale Indication Versus Input Signal
INPUT SIGNAL FROM

INDICATION INDICATOR TOLERANCE
TRANSDUCER TO INDICATOR
(PSI) (PSI)
(MV X EXCITATION V)
0 0.00 ±12.5
25 1.00 ±5.0
50 2.00 ±5.0
60 2.40 ±5.0
70 2.80 ±5.0
80 3.20 ±5.0
90 3.60 ±5.0
100 4.00 ±5.0
110 4.40 ±5.0
115 4.60 ±5.0
120 4.80 ±5.0
130 5.20 ±5.0
140 5.60 ±5.0
150 6.00 ±5.0
175 7.00 ±5.0
200 8.00 ±5.0
225 9.00 ±5.0
250 10.00 ±12.5
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-120. Engine Oil Temperature Indication System of the circuit is contained in the indicator itself. As the
— Operation temperature of the oil in the engine oil tank changes,
the resistance of the temperature bulb changes. The
A resistive type temperature bulb (1RT1) mounted in engine oil temperature indicator displays the
the engine oil tank gives a specific resistance value to temperature in relation to the resistance value of the
the indicator. The temperature bulb is the variable temperature bulb, as shown in Table 95-25.
resistance part of a Wheatstone bridge. The balance
Table 95-25. Engine Oil Temperature Versus Resistance
INDICATION RESISTANCE INDICATOR TOLERANCE

(°C) (OHMS) (°C)
0 90.38 ±3
10 93.80 ±3
20 97.31 ±3
30 100.91 ±3
40 104.60 ±3
50 108.39 ±3
60 112.28 ±3
70 116.27 ±3
80 120.36 ±3
90 124.55 ±3
100 128.85 ±3
107 131.94 ±3
110 133.26 ±3
120 137.78 ±3
130 142.40 ±3
140 147.11 ±3
150 151.91 ±3
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Connect the functional check setup to the

95-121. Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure electrical connector (1RT1P1), as shown in
Indication System — Power Requirements Figure 95-58.
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the two 6. Set the switch of the functional check setup to the
electronic circuits of the instrument. The 28 VDC to the SET position.
oil temperature circuit is supplied through the ENGINE
INSTR OIL TEMP (1CB9) circuit breaker. The 28 VDC
to the oil pressure circuit is supplied through the NOTE
ENGINE INSTR OIL PRESS (1CB17) circuit breaker. The ability to get the accuracy of the
The two circuit breakers are on the overhead panel. resistance, as shown in Table 95-25, is
The engine oil temperature/pressure indicator has determined by the type of variable resistor
5 VDC integral lighting. The 5 VDC is supplied from and digital voltmeter used in the functional
the lighting system (Chapter 96). check setup.
95-122. Engine Oil Temperature Indication System 7. Adjust the variable resistance to a value, as
— Functional Check shown in Table 95-25.
8. Set the switch of the functional check setup to the

IND position.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE external DC power to the helicopter.
Model 77 or Equivalent Fluke Digital Voltmeter
INSTR OIL TEMP (1CB9) circuit breaker.
CAUTION 11. On the engine oil temp indicator, make sure the
LCD display shows the matching temperature, as that
shown on Table 95-25, for the resistance value set.
TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE
AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING 12. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF OIL TEMP (1CB9) circuit breaker.
B AT T E R Y P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
TO A MINIMUM. 13. Repeat step 6 through step 11 for other values in
Table 95-25.
1. Prepare the functional check setup, as shown in

Figure 95-58. 14. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the

15. Remove the functional check setup.
16. Connect the electrical connector (1RT1P1) to the

3. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE INSTR engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1).
OIL TEMP (1CB9) circuit breaker.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT1P1) configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
from the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1). Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIGITAL
MULTIMETER
104.6
50
2 WATT
RESISTOR
200
2 WATT
RHEOSTAT
1M2P1 SET
1RT1P1
IND
6 A
13 B SINGLE POLE/
DOUBLE THROW
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-58. Functional Check Setup for the Engine Oil Temperature Indicator (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-123. Engine Oil Temperature Bulb —

Functional Check
CAUTION
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE

AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE B AT T E RY P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
TK-3531 or Equivalent Dri-Block Calibrator TO A MINIMUM.

1. Remove the oil temperature bulb (paragraph
95-125).
2. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE OIL

2. Place the temperature bulb in a Dri-Block
PRESS INSTR circuit breaker (1CB17).
calibrator or equivalent.
3. Attach the digital voltmeter to the temperature

bulb. Set the voltmeter to read the resistance value in CAUTION
a range as set out in Table 95-25.
MAK E S URE T HAT THE OIL IN THE

4. Adjust the temperature of the Dri-Block calibrator PRESSURE TESTER IS THE SAME OIL
to a value per Table 95-25. A S T H E E N G I N E O I L . FA I L U R E TO
FOLLOW THIS PRECAUTION WILL
5. Make sure the voltmeter display reads the RESULT IN THE CONTAMINATION OF
matching resistance, as shown in Table 95-25, for the THE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
temperature value that was set.
3. Disconnect the engine oil pressure line from the
engine oil pressure transducer (1G5).
6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for the other values in
Table 95-25.
4. Connect the pressure tester to the input port of
the pressure transducer (1G5).
7. Remove the temperature bulb from the Dri-Block
calibrator.
8. Install the oil temperature bulb (paragraph
95-126). 6. On the overhead panel, close the ENGINE OIL
PRESS INSTR circuit breaker.
95-124. Engine Oil Pressure Indication System —
Functional Check
CAUTION
DO NOT INCREASE THE PRESSURE OF
THE PRESSURE TESTER TO MORE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE T H A N 2 5 0 . 0 P S I . I F Y O U H AV E
PRESSURE ABOVE THE 250.0 PSI LIMIT,
YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE THE ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
7. Slowly increase the pressure of the pressure

NOTE
tester to 200.0 PSI.
8. On the ENG OIL indicator, make sure the LCD maintenance.
display shows 200.0 ±5 PSI.
9. Decrease the pressure of the pressure tester to from the helicopter.
0 PSI.
2. Remove the cowling to gain access to the oil
tank.
10. Repeat step 7 and step 8 for each value in
Table 95-24. Make sure the indicator is accurate. 3. Open the drain valve and drain the oil from the oil
tank. Put a suitable container under the drain line.
11. On the overhead panel, open the ENGINE OIL
PRESS INSTR circuit breaker (1CB17). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT1P1) (3,
Figure 95-59) from the engine oil temperature bulb
(1RT1) (2).
5. Remove the lockwire from the engine oil
temperature bulb.
13. Disconnect the pressure tester from the engine
oil pressure transducer. 6. Remove the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1)
(2) from the engine oil tank (4).
oil pressure transducer.
CAUTION
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428)
ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE ENGINE
O I L T A N K TO P R E V E N T F O R E I G N
95-125. Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE.

of the engine oil tank (4) and the engine oil
MATERIALS REQUIRED temperature bulb (1RT1) (2).

8. Remove the packing (1) from the engine oil
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE temperature bulb (1RT1) (2). Discard the packing.
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs 95-126. Engine Oil Temperature Bulb —

Installation
WARNING MATERIALS REQUIRED

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-405 Lockwire
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1 1. Packing
2. Engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1)
3. Electrical connector (1RT1P1)
4. Engine oil tank
30 TO 40 IN-LBS
(3.4 TO 4.5 Nm)
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407_MM_95_0058_c01+
Figure 95-59. Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
WARNING CAUTION
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
9. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1, Section 2)
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power and make sure the engine oil temperature indication is
from the helicopter. operational and within limits and that there are no oil
leaks.

CAUTION configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
USE THE SAME OIL AS THE OIL IN THE

E N G I N E T O L U B R I C AT E T H E 95-127. Engine Oil Pressure Transducer —
PREFORMED PACKING. FAILURE TO Removal
OBEY THIS PRECAUTION MAY RESULT
I N T H E C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E l
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.

MATERIALS REQUIRED
2. Lubricate the packing (1, Figure 95-59) with Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
engine oil.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
3. Remove the previously installed caps and/or C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
plugs.
4. Install the packing (1) on the engine oil

WARNING
temperature bulb (1RT1) (2).
5. Install the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) (2) OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
in the port on the aft left side of the engine oil tank (4). WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
Make sure that the temperature bulb is correctly NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
installed and torqued T . EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
6. Safety the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) (2) NOTE

with lockwire (C-405).
7. Connect the electrical connector (1RT1P1) (3) to maintenance.
the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) (2). Make sure
that the electrical connector is correctly installed and 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
tightened. from the helicopter.
8. Safety the electrical connector (1RT1P1) (3) with 2. Gain access to the forward right side of the
lockwire (C-405). firewall at FS 150.00.
95-00-00
Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99 10 DEC 2012 Rev. 35 Page 183
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1G5P1)

(1, Figure 95-60) from the engine oil pressure
CAUTION
transducer (1G5) (2).
4. Remove the lockwire from the engine oil pressure USE THE SAME OIL AS THE OIL IN THE
transducer (1G5) (2). E N G I N E T O L U B R I C AT E THE
PREFORMED PACKING. FAILURE TO
5. Remove the oil pressure transducer (1G5) (2) F O L L O W T H I S P R E C A U T I O N M AY
from the tee fitting (4). RESULT IN THE CONTAMINATION OF
THE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
6. Remove the packing (3) from the oil pressure 2. Lubricate the packing (3, Figure 95-60) with
transducer (1G5) (2). engine oil.

CAUTION plugs.
4. Install the packing (3) on the engine oil pressure

INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428) transducer (1G5) (2).
ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER AND TEE
5. Install the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5)
FITTING TO PREVENT FOREIGN
(2) on the tee fitting (4). Make sure that the engine oil
OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE.
pressure transducer is correctly installed and
tightened.
7. Install caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the open
fittings of the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) (2)
and the tee fitting (4). 6. Safety the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5)
(2) to the tee fitting (4) with lockwire (C-405).
95-128. Engine Oil Pressure Transducer —

Installation 7. Connect the electrical connector (1G5P1) (1) to
the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) (2).
MATERIALS REQUIRED 8. Bleed the engine oil pressure transducer

(paragraph 95-129).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
CAUTION
C-405 Lockwire
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE

WARNING FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS and make sure the engine oil pressure indication is
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR operational and within limits and that there are no oil
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC leaks.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
from the helicopter. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
1. Electrical connector (1G5P1)

5 2. Engine oil pressure transducer (1G5)
3. Packing
4. Tee fitting
4 5. Cap
LOCKWIRE (C-405)
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
FIREWALL
1
FS 150.00
DETAIL A
Figure 95-60. Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-129. Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — 7. Connect the engine oil pressure line to the engine
Bleeding gearbox. Tighten the oil pressure line at the engine
gearbox.

95-130. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE/
PRESSURE INDICATION SYSTEM —
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH
54299)
Tester, 0 to 300 PSI The XMSN OIL indicator provides an indication of the
temperature in degrees Centigrade (°C) and the
1. Disconnect the engine oil pressure line at the pressure in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI)
engine gearbox. (Figure 95-61). The XMSN OIL indicator is made up of
a dial and electronic components in a sealed case.
CAUTION The dial is divided into two scales. The scale on the
left side of the dial shows the pressure of the
transmission oil. The scale on the right side of the dial
MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE is the °C scale and it shows the temperature of the
TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME transmission oil.
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF YOU DO NOT The two scales are single bar LCD displays. Each of
USE THE SAME TYPE OF OIL, YOU WILL the LCD displays are along their related scale and
C O N TA M I N AT E T H E E N G I N E O I L they operate as a pointer. The segments of the LCD
SYSTEM. displays come on in an ascending order from the zero
position on the scale. The last segment of the LCD
2. Attach the pressure tester to the engine oil
pressure line.
the engine oil pressure. The last segment of the LCD
display to come on along the °C X 10 scale shows the
3. Loosen the tee fitting cap (5, Figure 95-60) transmission oil temperature.
installed on the forward firewall aft of the engine oil
pressure transducer (1G5) (2).
The XMSN OIL indicator has two electronic circuits.
One of the electronic circuits is the oil temperature
4. Apply pressure slowly to fill the line with oil.
circuit. The other electronic circuit is the oil pressure
Continue to force oil into the line until a steady flow
circuit.
without air bubbles comes out the tee fitting (4) cap
port.
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the power
5. When a steady flow without air bubbles comes supply of the two electronic circuits. The 28 VDC to the
out the tee fitting (4) cap port, tighten the tee fitting oil temperature circuit is supplied through the XMSN
cap (5). INSTR OIL TEMP (1CB15) circuit breaker. The
28 VDC to the oil pressure circuit is supplied through
6. Release the pressure in the pressure tester. the XMSN INSTR OIL PRESS (1CB18) circuit breaker.
Disconnect the pressure tester from the engine oil The two circuit breakers are on the overhead panel.
pressure line. The transmission oil temperature/pressure indicator
has 5 VDC integral lighting. The 5 VDC is supplied
from the lighting system (Chapter 96).
NOTE
Keep the engine oil pressure line elevated For the simplified schematic of the transmission oil
while you attach it to the engine gearbox to temperature/pressure indication system, refer to
minimize the oil loss from the line. Figure 95-62.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
12
PSI PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
2
2
3 3
4
4
(TYPICAL)
1. XMSN oil indicator dial

3. Red line
4. Green arc
407_MM_95_0060
Figure 95-61. Transmission Oil Temperature/Pressure Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
407 MM 95 0061
Figure 95-62. Transmission Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-131. XMSN Oil Temperature/Pressure

Indication System — Range Markings Table 95-27. XMSN Oil Temperature °C Scale —
Range Marking
The range marking for the PSI scale is shown in
Table 95-26. The range marking for the °C scale is MARKING RANGE (°C) DEFINITION
Green Arc 15 to 110 Continuous
Operation
Table 95-26. XMSN Oil Pressure PSI Scale —
Range Marking
MARKING RANGE (PSI) DEFINITION 95-132. Transmission Oil Pressure Indication

System — Operation
Red Line 30 Minimum
The strain gauge circuit of the transmission oil
Green Arc 40 to 70 Continuous pressure transducer receives an excitation voltage of
Operation 10 VDC from the transmission oil pressure indicator.
The transmission oil pressure port on the transmission
Red Line 70 Maximum
oil manifold provides a specific oil pressure output that
changes the strain gauge bridge in the transducer.
This changes the signal sent to the transmission oil
pressure indicator. The transmission oil pressure
indicator shows the oil pressure in PSI corresponding
to the input signal as shown in Table 95-28.
Table 95-28. Transmission Oil Pressure Indication Versus Input Signal
INPUT SIGNAL FROM

PRESSURE INDICATOR TOLERANCE
(PSI) (PSI)
(MV X EXCITATION VOLTAGE)
0 0.00 ±6.0
10 0.80 ±2.4
20 1.60 ±2.4
30 2.40 ±2.4
40 3.20 ±2.4
50 4.00 ±2.4
60 4.80 ±2.4
70 5.60 ±2.4
80 6.40 ±2.4
90 7.20 ±2.4
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-133. Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — 95-134. Transmission Oil Temperature Indication
Description System — Operation
The transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6) is

A resistive type temperature bulb (1RT2), mounted in
mounted on the transmission oil manifold. The
the transmission filter manifold, provides a specific
manifold is on the transmission deck under the main
resistance value to the indicator. The temperature bulb
driveshaft. The transducer has a pressure diaphragm
is the variable resistance part of a Wheatstone bridge.
and a strain gauge bridge.
The balance of the circuit is contained in the indicator
itself. As the temperature of the oil in the transmission
filter manifold changes, the resistance of the
temperature bulb changes. The transmission oil
temperature indicator shows the temperature in
relation with the resistance value of the temperature
bulb as shown in Table 95-29.
Table 95-29. Transmission Oil Temperature Indication Versus Input Signal
INDICATION RESISTANCE INDICATOR TOLERANCE

(°C) (OHMS) (°C)
0 90.38 ±3
10 93.80 ±3
20 97.31 ±3
30 100.91 ±3
40 104.60 ±3
50 108.39 ±3
60 112.28 ±3
70 116.27 ±3
80 120.36 ±3
90 124.55 ±3
100 128.85 ±3
107 131.94 ±3
110 133.26 ±3
120 137.78 ±3
130 142.40 ±3
140 147.11 ±3
150 151.91 ±3
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-135. Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb —

NOTE
Description
The ability to get the accuracy of the
The transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2) is resistance, as shown in Table 95-29, is
installed on the transmission oil filter manifold. The oil determined by the type of variable resistor
temperature bulb is in contact with the oil of the and digital voltmeter used in the functional
transmission. The temperature bulb is a resistive bulb. check setup.
The resistance of the bulb changes as the temperature
of the transmission oil changes. 7. Adjust the variable resistance to a value, as
95-136. Transmission Oil Temperature Indicator —
Functional Check 8. Set the switch of the functional check setup to the
IND position.
9. On the overhead panel, close the XMSN INSTR

OIL TEMP (1CB15) circuit breaker.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 10. On the transmission oil temp indicator, make sure
the LCD display shows the matching temperature, as
Model 77 or Equivalent Fluke Digital shown in Table 95-29, for the resistance value set.
Multimeter
11. On the overhead panel, open the XMSN OIL
TEMP INSTR circuit breaker (1CB15).
CAUTION 12. Repeat step 6 through step 10 for other values in

Table 95-29.
DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE 13. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y external DC power from the helicopter.
USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND 14. Remove the functional check setup.
15. Connect the electrical connector (1RT2P1) to the
1. Prepare the functional check setup, as shown in transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2).
Figure 95-63.
2. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
external DC power from the helicopter. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
3. On the overhead panel, open the XMSN OIL 95-137. Transmission Oil Temperature Probe —
TEMP INSTR circuit breaker (1CB15). Functional Check
4. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT2P1)

from the transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2).
5. Connect the functional check setup to the NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

electrical connector (1RT2P1), as shown in
Figure 95-63. TK-3541 or Equivalent Dri-Block Calibrator
6. Set the switch of the functional check setup to the 1. Remove the oil temperature bulb (paragraph
SET position. 95-139).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIGITAL
MULTIMETER
104.6
50
2 WATT
RESISTOR
200
2 WATT
RHEOSTAT
1M3P1 SET
1RT2P1
IND
6 A
13 B SINGLE POLE/
DOUBLE THROW
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-63. Functional Check Setup for Transmission Oil Temperature Indicator (S/N 53000 Through
54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Place the temperature bulb in a Dri-Block 3. Locate the oil pressure line from the transmission
calibrator or equivalent. oil manifold to the freewheel.
3. Attach the digital voltmeter to the temperature 4. Remove the oil pressure line from the firewall.
bulb.
5. Install a cap on the line that is capable of
4. Set the voltmeter to show the resistance value in withstanding at least 100 PSI.
a range, as shown in Table 95-29.
6. Locate the oil pressure line from the transmission
5. Adjust the temperature of the Dri-Block calibrator to the transmission oil manifold. Disconnect the line
to a value, as shown in Table 95-29. from the transmission.
6. Make sure the voltmeter display shows the

matching resistance for the temperature value set.
CAUTION
7. Repeat step 5 and step 6 for the other values in
Table 95-29. MAK E S URE T HAT THE OIL IN THE
PRESSURE TESTER IS THE SAME OIL
8. Remove the oil temperature bulb from the AS THE TRANSMISSION OIL. FAILURE
Dri-Block calibrator or equivalent. TO FOLLOW THIS PRECAUTION MAY
RESULT IN THE CONTAMINATION OF
9. Install the oil temperature bulb per paragraph THE TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM.
95-140.
7. Connect the pressure tester at the transmission
95-138. Transmission Oil Pressure Indication — end of the transmission oil pressure line.
Functional Check
9. On the overhead panel, close the XMSN OIL
PRESS INSTR (1CB18) circuit breaker.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

Tester, 0 to 300 PSI CAUTION

CAUTION T H E H A N D P U M P TO M O R E T H A N
125.0 PSI. IF YOU HAVE PRESSURE
ABOVE THE 125.0 PSI LIMIT, YOU CAN
USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y TRANSDUCER.
USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND 10. Slowly increase the pressure of the pressure
TEST TIME TO A MINIMUM. tester to 90.0 PSI.
1. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the 11. On the XMSN OIL indicator, make sure the LCD
external DC power from the helicopter. display shows 90.0 ±2.4 PSI.
2. On the overhead panel, open the XMSN INSTR 12. Decrease the pressure of the pressure tester to
OIL PRESS (1CB18) circuit breaker. 0 PSI.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
13. Repeat step 10 and step 11 for each value shown

in Table 95-28. Make sure the indication is accurate. WARNING

external DC power from the helicopter. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
15. Remove the cap on the pressure line to the NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
freewheel. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
16. Connect the line to the fitting on the firewall.

NOTE
Tighten the line to the fitting.
17. Disconnect the pressure tester from the oil necessary to perform the required
pressure line. maintenance.
18. Remove the external power from the helicopter. 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
19. Disconnect the pressure tester from the oil
pressure line to the manifold. 2. Gain access to the left side of the transmission
compartment. Find the transmission oil temperature
bulb (1RT2) that is installed on the transmission oil
NOTE filter (4).
Keep the transmission oil pressure line
elevated while you attach it to the 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT2P1) (3,
transmission to minimize the oil loss from Figure 95-64) from the transmission oil temperature
the line. bulb (1RT2) (2).
20. Connect the transmission oil pressure line to the

4. Remove the lockwire from the transmission oil
transmission. Tighten the oil pressure line at the
transmission.
21. Return the helicopter to the standard 5. Remove the transmission oil temperature bulb
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After (1RT2) (2) and the packing (1). Discard the packing.
95-139. Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — CAUTION

Removal

MATERIALS REQUIRED ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE
T R A N S M I S S I O N O I L F I LT E R T O
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. PREVENT FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE
TO THE TRANSMISSION.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
of the transmission oil filter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
DETAIL A
3
1
4
1. Packing
2. Transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2)
4. Transmission oil filter
DETAIL B
LOCKWIRE (C-405)
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-64. Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-140. Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — 7. Connect the electrical connector (1RT2P1) (3) to
Installation the transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2) (2).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
CAUTION
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE

C-405 Lockwire FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.

and make sure the transmission oil temperature
WARNING indication is operational and within limits and that there
are no oil leaks.
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 9. Return the helicopter to the standard
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 95-141. Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer —
from the helicopter. Removal
MATERIALS REQUIRED
CAUTION
USE THE SAME OIL AS THE OIL IN THE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
TRANSMISSION TO LUBRICATE THE
PREFORMED PACKING. FAILURE TO C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
I N T H E C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
2. Lubricate the packing (1, Figure 95-64) with

transmission oil. WARNING

plugs. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
4. Install the packing (1) on the transmission oil
5. Install the transmission oil temperature bulb NOTE

(1RT2) (2) in the port on the left side of the Remove components only to the extent
transmission. Tighten the transmission oil temperature necessary to perform the required
bulb. maintenance.
6. Safety the transmission oil temperature bulb 1. Disconnect the battery or the external DC power
(1RT2) (2) with lockwire (C-405). from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Remove the engine air inlet cowling (Chapter 53) 5. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the electrical
to access the transmission oil manifold (4, connector (1G6P1) (3) and on the transmission oil
Figure 95-65). pressure transducer (1G6) (2).
CAUTION CAUTION
HANDLE THE CONNECTORS OF THE INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428)

TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE
TRANSDUCER IN ACCORDANCE WITH TRANSMIS SIO N OIL MANIFO LD TO
S TA N D A R D PRACTICES FOR PREVENT FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
EQUIPMENT. THE TRANSMISSION OIL
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-428) in the open port
(1M3) IS SENSITIVE TO of the transmission oil manifold (4) and on the oil
ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY pressure inlet of the transmission oil pressure
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY transducer (1G6) (2).
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE XMSN OIL
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(1M3). 7. Remove the packing (1) from the transmission oil
pressure transducer (1G6) (2). Discard the packing.
95-142. Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer —

CAUTION Installation
DO NOT TOUCH THE ELECTRICAL PINS

ON THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. WARNING
INSTALL AN ANTISTATIC CONNECTOR
COVER ON THE ELECTRICAL
C O N N E C T O R . FA I L U R E T O O B E Y OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THESE PRECAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
DAMAGE TO THE XMSN OIL NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
PRESSURE/ TEMPERATURE INDICATOR EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
(1M3).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1G6P1) (3) from the helicopter.
from the transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6)
(2).
4. Remove the transmission oil pressure transducer CAUTION

(1G6) (2) from the transmission oil manifold (4).

CAUTION PREFORMED PACKING. FAILURE TO
I N T H E C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E
INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-156) TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM.
ON THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR OF
THE TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE 2. Lubricate the packing (1, Figure 95-65) with the
TRANSDUCER (1G6). oil used in the transmission oil system.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
2
1. Packing
2. Transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6)
3 3. Electrical connector (1G6P1)
4. Transmission oil manifold
5. Cap
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-65. Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through
54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Remove the previously installed caps and/or 1. Locate the oil pressure line that travels from the
plugs. transmission to the transmission oil manifold (4,
Figure 95-65). Disconnect the oil pressure line at the
transmission.
2. Locate the pressure line that travels from the
transmission oil manifold (4) to the freewheel.
5. Install the transmission oil pressure transducer
(1G6) (2) on the transmission oil manifold (4). Torque
3. Remove the oil line from the freewheel.
the transmission oil pressure transducer T .
4. Install a plug that is capable of taking at least

6. Connect the electrical connector (1G6P1) (3) to 100 PSI on the line removed from the freewheel.
the transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6) (2).
Make sure that the electrical connector is tight and
secure.
CAUTION
7. Bleed the transmission oil pressure transducer
line (paragraph 95-143). MAK E S URE T HAT THE OIL IN THE
8. Install the engine air inlet cowling (Chapter 53). AS THE TRANSMISSION OIL. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THIS PRECAUTION MAY
RESULT IN THE CONTAMINATION OF
THE TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM.
CAUTION
5. Attach the pressure tester to the line that travels
from the transmission to the transmission oil
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE manifold (4).
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. 6. Loosen the cap (5) on the top of the transmission
oil manifold (4).
and make sure the transmission oil pressure indication 7. Apply pressure slowly so the line will fill with oil.
is operational and within limits and that there are no oil Continue to force oil into the line until a steady flow
leaks. without air bubbles comes out at the cap (5).
10. Return the helicopter to the standard 8. When steady flow comes out at the cap (5),
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After tighten the cap.
Disconnect the pressure tester from the oil pressure
95-143. Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer
line.
Line — Bleeding
NOTE
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED Keep the transmission oil pressure line
elevated while you attach it to the
transmission. This minimizes the oil loss
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE from the line.
10. Connect the transmission oil pressure line to the
transmission. Tighten the oil pressure line.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
11. Remove the cap (5) from the freewheel pressure

NOTE
line.
Keep the freewheel oil pressure line
elevated while you attach it to the 12. Connect the freewheel oil pressure line to the
freewheel. This minimizes the oil loss from freewheel. Tighten the oil pressure line.
the line.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FUEL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-144. FUEL PRESSURE INSTRUMENT

SYSTEM (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299) Table 95-30. Fuel Pressure PSI Scale — Range
Marking
95-145. FUEL PRESSURE INDICATION SYSTEM
— DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 THROUGH
54299) Red Line 8 Minimum
Green Arc 8 to 25 Continuous

The fuel pressure indication (Figure 95-66) is part of
Operation
the fuel pressure/ammeter dual indicator. The
indication for the fuel pressure is on the left side of the Red Line 25 Maximum
dual indicator. The fuel pressure indicator gives an
indication of the fuel pressure at the fuel shutoff valve.
The indicator has a dial and electronic components 95-147. Fuel Pressure Transducer — Description
inside a sealed case. The dial of the indicator has a
scale that shows FUEL PSI X 10. The fuel pressure transducer (1B6) is mounted along
with the fuel shutoff valve in a compartment on the
right side of the aft electrical equipment shelf. The
The dial also has a single bar LCD display that transducer is mounted on a fitting in the pressure line
operates as a pointer. The segments of the LCD between the aft fuel boost pumps and the fuel shutoff
display come on in an ascending order from the zero valve. The transducer has a pressure diaphragm and
position on the scale. The last segment of the LCD a strain gauge bridge.
the fuel pressure. 95-148. Fuel Pressure Indication System —
Operation
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the power
supply. The 28 VDC is supplied through the FUEL Either one of the two aft fuel boost pumps gives fuel
INSTR PRESS (1CB19) circuit breaker on the pressure output through a common fuel pressure line
overhead panel. to the fuel shutoff valve. The fuel pressure transducer
is mounted on the pressure line before the shutoff
valve (Chapter 28).
The pressure indicator has 5 VDC integral lighting.
The 5 VDC is supplied from the lighting system
(Chapter 96). The strain gauge circuit of the fuel pressure transducer
receives an excitation voltage of 10 VDC from the fuel
pressure indicator. One or both of the aft fuel boost
For the simplified schematic of the fuel pressure pumps gives a specific fuel pressure output, which
indication system, refer to Figure 95-67. changes the strain gauge bridge in the transducer.
This changes the signal sent to the fuel pressure
95-145A.Fuel Pressure Indicator — Removal and indicator. The fuel pressure indicator shows the fuel
Installation pressure in PSI corresponding to the input signal.
95-149. Fuel Pressure Indication System —

For the removal and installation of the fuel pressure/
Functional Check
ammeter indicator (2M1), refer to paragraph 95-61
and paragraph 95-62.

95-146. Fuel Pressure Indication System — Range
Markings
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
The range marking on the PSI scale is shown in
Commercial Air Pressure Regulator
Table 95-30.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6 R E C
E
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
PSI
AMPS 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120 15 21 5 3
X 10 0
NP GS GS 1000 FT
12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
W
5 3
1 2
6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30
6 7 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W
6
FWD TANK
30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21
6 OIL ~C 10 PSI OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5
15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
1
2
(TYPICAL)
1. Fuel pressure indicator dial

3. Red line
4. Green arc
407_MM_95_0065
Figure 95-66. Fuel Pressure Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
407_MM_95_0110
Figure 95-67. Fuel Pressure Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

CAUTION
2. On the overhead panel, open the FUEL INSTR
PRESS (1CB19) circuit breaker.
THE PRESSURE REGULATOR TO MORE
T H A N 6 0 . 0 P S I . Y O U M AY C A U S E
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO THE FUEL PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER.
INSTALL A PLUG ON THE OPEN PORT
OF THE ADAPTER TO PREVENT 6. Slowly increase the pressure of the air pressure
U N WA N T E D M AT E R I A L regulator to 30.0 PSI.
C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E F U E L
SYSTEM.
7. On the FUEL PRESS indicator (2M1), make sure
3. Remove the transducer (1B6) from the fuel the single bar display reads 30.0 PSI.
adapter. Put a cap on the opening of the adapter.
8. Decrease the pressure of the air pressure

4. Connect the air pressure regulator to the
regulator to 0 PSI.
pressure port of the fuel pressure transducer.
5. On the overhead panel, close the FUEL INSTR 9. Repeat step 7 and step 8 for each value shown in
PRESS (1CB19) circuit breaker. Table 95-31 and make sure the indication is accurate.
Table 95-31. Test Points for Fuel Pressure Indication System
INPUT SIGNAL FROM

FUEL PRESSURE TOLERANCE
(PSI) (PSI)
(MV X EXCITATION V)
0 0.00 ±0.6
3 0.50 ±0.6
6 1.00 ±0.6
9 1.50 ±0.6
12 2.00 ±0.6
15 2.50 ±0.6
18 3.00 ±0.6
21 3.50 ±0.6
24 4.00 ±0.6
27 4.50 ±0.6
30 5.00 ±0.6
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

10. On the overhead panel, open the FUEL INSTR Figure 95-68) from the fuel pressure transducer (1B6)
PRESS (1CB19) circuit breaker. (2).
11. Disconnect the air pressure regulator from the

fuel pressure transducer (1B6).
CAUTION
12. Install the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) on the
fuel adapter (paragraph 95-151). INSTALL A PLUG ON THE OPEN PORT
OF THE ADAPTER TO PREVENT
13. Remove external power from the helicopter. FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE
FUEL SYSTEM.
14. Return the helicopter to the standard 4. Remove the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) (2)
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After from the adapter.
5. Remove the packing (3) from the fuel pressure

95-150. Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal transducer (1B6) (2).
95-151. Fuel Pressure Transducer — Installation

MATERIALS REQUIRED

MATERIALS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-024 Assembly Fluid
WARNING
WARNING

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
NOTE 1. Disconnect the battery or remove the external DC

power from the helicopter.
maintenance. 2. Lubricate the packing (3, Figure 95-68) with
assembly fluid (C-024).
1. Disconnect the battery or the external DC power
from the helicopter. 3. Install the packing (3) on the fuel pressure
transducer (1B6) (2).
2. Remove the interior and gain access to the panel
to get to the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) installed 4. Install the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) (2) on
on the right side of the fuselage. the adapter. Tighten the fuel pressure transducer.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
DETAIL A
3

2. Fuel pressure transducer (1B6)
3. Packing
DETAIL B
Figure 95-68. Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Connect the electrical connector (1B6P1) (1) to probe installed in the auxiliary fuel tank. On installation
the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) (2). of the auxiliary fuel tank in the helicopter, a
microswitch is engaged, which tells the signal
conditioner to use a different set of values to calculate
NOTE the fuel quantity.
Make sure there is a minimum of
70 pounds or more fuel in the main fuel cell. The components of the FQGS are as follows:
6. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the • Three capacitance type probes
• The signal conditioner unit
7. Set the fuel valve switch to ON.
• The fuel quantity indicator
8. Set the BOOST/XFR switches to LEFT and
RIGHT. Make sure that the fuel pressure indication is 95-153. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
acceptable and within limits (BHT-407-FM-1, COMPONENT REPLACEMENT (S/N 53000
Section 1). THROUGH 54299)
9. Make sure there are no leaks at the fuel pressure

pressure transducer (1B6) (2).
CAUTION
10. Set the left and right BOOST/XFR switches to
OFF. DO A FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING
SYSTEM CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
11. Set the fuel valve switch to OFF. ANYTIME AN EXISTING, REPAIRED, OR
NEW COMPONENT OF THE FUEL
QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM IS
INSTALLED OR IF ASSOCIATED WIRING
OR ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS ARE
REPAIRE D O R REP LA CE D. IF T HIS
13. Install the access cover and the interior. PROCEDURE IS NOT COMPLETED, THE
FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING INDICATION
14. Return the helicopter to the standard MAY NOT BE ACCURATE.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). For the removal and installation procedures of fuel
quantity gauging system components not provided in
this chapter, refer to Chapter 28.
95-152. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
54299) 95-154. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR —
The Fuel Quantity Gauging System (FQGS) measures 54299)
the quantity of fuel in the two main fuel tanks. The
FQGS also measures the quantity of fuel in the The fuel quantity (FUEL QTY) indicator (Figure 95-69)
auxiliary fuel tank when it is installed. gives an indication of the quantity of fuel in pounds
(LBS). The FUEL QTY indicator is made up of a dial
The fuel quantity is measured by three capacitance and electronic components in an environmentally
type probes in the fuel tanks. The signals from the sealed case.
probes are used by the fuel signal conditioner to
calculate the fuel quantity. The signal conditioner The dial has a LBS X 100 scale to show the total
provides a signal to the fuel quantity gauge to display quantity of fuel. The dial has a single bar LCD display
the fuel quantity to the pilot. There is no additional and a digital display.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1
% X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
(TYPICAL)
2
1. Fuel quantity indicator dial

3. Digital display
Figure 95-69. Fuel Quantity Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The single bar display is along the LBS X 10 scale and supplied through the FUEL INSTR QTY (1CB8) circuit
it operates as a pointer. The segments of the LCD breaker on the overhead panel.
display come on in a clockwise order from 0 to
1200 pounds. The last segment of the LCD display to The FUEL QTY indicator has 5 VDC integral lighting.
come on along the scale shows the fuel quantity. The The 5 VDC is supplied from the lighting system
digital display shows the FUEL QTY in pounds in a four (Chapter 96).
digit format. The digital display shows dashes (- - - - -)
when the indication is above the maximum of the scale. For the simplified schematic of the fuel quantity
indication system, refer to Figure 95-70.
The indicator receives its input signal from the fuel
signal conditioner. The fuel quantity scale indication in 95-154A.Fuel Quantity Indicator — Removal and
relation to the input signal from the signal conditioner is Installation
For the removal and installation of the fuel quantity
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power input to the indicator (1M1), refer to paragraph 95-61 and
electronic components of the indicator. The 28 VDC is paragraph 95-62.
Table 95-32. Quantity Indication Versus Input Signal From the Signal Conditioner
INPUT SIGNAL FROM SIGNAL

FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR TOLERANCE
CONDITIONER TO INDICATOR
(LBS) (LBS)
(VDC)
0 0.50 ±6
100 0.92 ±6
200 1.33 ±6
300 1.75 ±6
400 2.17 ±6
500 2.58 ±6
600 3.00 ±6
700 3.42 ±6
800 3.83 ±6
900 4.25 ±6
1000 4.67 ±6
1100 5.08 ±6
1200 5.50 ±6
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1CB8 FUEL QTY

INSTR
407_MM_95_0122
Figure 95-70. Fuel Quantity Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-155. FUEL PROBES — DESCRIPTION (S/N to the DC controller. The electronic interface circuits
53000 THROUGH 54299) for the fuel low level detection system and the fuel
gauging system signal conditioner circuits are located
The Fuel Quantity Gauging System (FQGS) has three in the same unit. Both systems are physically and
capacitance-type fuel probes. The fuel probes are electrically separate within the unit. In addition, the two
identified as follows:
low level detection circuits are physically and
electrically separate from each other. The fuel probe in
• Main tank aft fuel probe (1A1), probe No. 1
the forward tank (probe No. 3) (1A3) also acts as a low
level switch.
• Main tank forward fuel probe (1A2), probe
No. 2
The signal conditioner is connected to the helicopter
• Forward tank fuel probe (1A3), probe No. 3 electrical harness through three electrical connectors.
There are three Light Emitting Diodes (LED) located
The probes are designed to give a signal between 0.5 on the aft side of the unit. They show the FQGS status
to 5.0 mA to the signal conditioner. When the probe is for troubleshooting purposes.
dry, the signal is 0.5 mA. When the probe is fully
immersed in fuel, the signal is 5.0 mA. The actual
probe signal, when immersed in fuel, depends upon The descriptions of the fault codes are shown in
the fuel dielectric constant. The fuel signal conditioner Table 95-33.
makes calculations to adjust for the different dielectric
constants. The faults are listed in Table 95-33 in order of
decreasing priority. As the table indicates, all internal
95-156. FUEL SIGNAL CONDITIONER —
faults in the fuel signal conditioner have priority over
any other fault display status.
54299)
The fuel signal conditioner is a separate unit that is If there are multiple faults, the LED will only display the
located on the aft electrical equipment shelf adjacent highest priority fault.
Table 95-33. Fuel Signal Conditioner Fault Codes — Description
SYSTEM CONDITION FAULT OUTPUT PROVIDED LED LED LED

DESCRIPTION TO INDICATOR AT PIN 19 0 1 2
No Fault Open, No Ground ON ON ON
Internal Fault Ground OFF OFF OFF
Probe No. 1 Ground ON OFF OFF
Probe No. 2 Ground OFF ON OFF
Probe No. 3 Ground OFF OFF ON
Fuel Detect Fault 1 Open ON OFF ON
NOTE:
1 A fuel detect fault indicates a fault in the circuitry that outputs the forward tank empty discrete signal
(pin 4 on the fuel signal conditioner), which controls the right transfer pump relay.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-157. Fuel Signal Conditioner, Fuel Low Level sensed by probe No. 3 is greater than 1% of the total
Circuits — Operation reading for this probe, the same timing circuit is
activated. After 155 ±2 seconds, the signal conditioner
The fuel signal conditioner contains the Low Level will provide a ground connection through pin 4 on the
Detector (LLD) electronic circuitry that operates with signal conditioner that energizes the XFR pump relay
two fuel low level switches mounted in the fuel tanks and enables the pump.
(LLD No. 1 in the main fuel tank and LLD No. 2 in the
forward fuel tank). The only functions of these circuits Power to the signal conditioner is provided by the
is to provide timing for the circuits and to remove any FUEL INSTR QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker. When no
erratic switch activation and corresponding light power is supplied to the signal conditioner, pin 4 will
flickering that may be caused as the switches move not be grounded. When power is supplied to the signal
from one position to another. Software is not used in conditioner, pin 4 will be set open or closed to agree
these circuits. with the results of the calculation of probe No. 3 at the
time of power-up. The setting of pin 4 may only be
Power input to the low level circuits is from separate delayed by the completion of the power-up BIT.
circuit breakers. The power for the LLD No. 1 circuit
comes from the LIGHTS CAUT (4CB1) circuit breaker. Refer to Chapter 96 for a description of the use of the
When no power is supplied to the LLD No. 1 circuit, low level feature of probe No. 3. Refer to Chapter 28
the low level circuit will be open between pin 3 and for a complete description of the operation of the low
pin 5. When power is supplied to the LLD No. 1 circuit, level feature of probe No. 3 in the operation of the fuel
the low level circuit will be set to open or closed within system.
2 seconds, to agree with the LLD No. 1 position at the
time of power-up. The power for the LLD No. 2 circuit 95-160. Fuel Signal Conditioner Quantity Circuits,
comes from the FUEL BOOST/XFR LEFT (1CB6) Built-in Test (BIT) — Operation
circuit breaker. When no power is supplied to the LLD
No. 2 circuit, the low level circuit will be open between
The fuel signal conditioner does a power-up Built-in
pin 3 and pin 5. When power is supplied to LLD No. 2
Test (BIT) when the unit is first given power by the
circuit, the low level circuit will be set to open or closed
FUEL INSTR QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker. The
within 2 seconds, to agree with the LLD No. 2 position
power-up BIT must be completed before the fuel
at the time of power-up.
signal conditioner can take any readings of fuel
quantity. The fuel signal conditioner should complete a
For a description of the operation of the low level power-up BIT check within approximately 4 seconds
switches, refer to Chapter 96. For a complete after application of power. There is no connection
description of the operation of the fuel low level between the BIT feature of the fuel quantity indicator
switches and the fuel system, refer to Chapter 28. and the fuel signal conditioner.
95-158. Low Level Detection Power-up Built-in
The power-up BIT examines the following:
Test (BIT)
• Microprocessor operation
The low level circuit does not have a Built-in Test (BIT)
feature to check the system for the integrity of the
components of the system. • Validity of each probe signal received
95-159. Low Level Detection Forward Fuel Probe • Power source for probe input
(1A3) — Operation
• Indicator output
When the signal conditioner calculates that the fuel
level sensed by probe No. 3 is less than 1% of the total If a failure is detected during the power-up BIT, the fuel
reading for this probe, a timing circuit is activated. signal conditioner will provide a ground to pin 19 of the
After 155 ±2 seconds, the signal conditioner will break fuel quantity indicator. The ground at pin 19 causes
the ground through pin 4 on the signal conditioner, the indicator display to go blank. If an error is found in
which will remove the electrical power from the XFR the probe signal received or in the power source for
pump relay and disable the XFR pump. Similarly when the probe input, the indicator output will be set to zero
the signal conditioner calculates that the fuel level for that probe or probes. In addition, the failures
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
detected will be displayed on three LEDs on the back 1. Disconnect the battery or the external DC power
of the fuel signal conditioner (Table 95-33). from the helicopter.
The continuous BIT examines the following: 2. Get access to the aft electrical equipment shelf.
CAUTION
• Validity of each probe signal received
• Power source for probe input HANDLE THE CONNECTORS OF THE

FUEL SIGNAL CONDITIONER IN
• Indicator output
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. THE FUEL
If a failure is detected during the continuous BIT, the SIGNAL CONDITIONER AND THE FUEL
fuel signal conditioner will provide a ground to pin 19 QUANTITY INDICATOR ARE SENSITIVE
of the fuel quantity indicator. The ground at pin 19
TO ELECTROSTATIC. FAILURE TO OBEY
causes the indicator display to go blank. If an error is
found in the probe signal received or in the power
source for the probe input, the indicator output will be
COMPONENTS.
set to zero for that probe or probes. In addition, the
failures detected will be displayed on three LEDs on
the back of the fuel signal conditioner.
CAUTION
95-161. Fuel Signal Conditioner Unit — Removal

ON THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS.
MATERIALS REQUIRED INSTALL AN ANTISTATIC CONNECTOR
C O N N E C T O R . FA I L U R E T O O B E Y
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
COMPONENTS.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1Z2P1,

WARNING 1Z2P2, 1Z2P3) (1, Figure 95-71) from the fuel quantity
signal conditioner (1Z2) (4).

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 4. Remove the screws (2) and the washers (3).
5. Remove the fuel quantity signal conditioner (1Z2)
(4).
NOTE
Remove components only to the extent 6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the electrical
necessary to perform the required connectors (1Z2P1, 1Z2P2, 1Z2P3) (1) and on the fuel
maintenance. quantity signal conditioner (1Z2) (4).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
4
3
1. Electrical connector
DETAIL A 2. Screw
3. Washer
4. Fuel quantity signal conditioner (1Z2)
Figure 95-71. Fuel Signal Conditioner — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-162. Fuel Signal Conditioner — Installation 5. Connect the electrical connectors (1Z2P1,
1Z2P2, 1Z2P3) (1) to the fuel quantity signal
conditioner (1Z2) (4).
WARNING
6. Do a calibration check of the fuel quantity
gauging system (paragraph 95-171).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 95-163. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC OPERATION (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-164. Fuel Probes — Operation
1. Disconnect the battery or remove the external DC
The fuel probes in the Fuel Quantity Gauging System
(FQGS) are capacitance-type probes. Capacitance
2. Get access to the aft electrical equipment shelf. probes vary the current returned to the signal
conditioner as the capacitance of the probe varies.
3. Install the fuel quantity signal conditioner (1Z2) The capacitance of the probe increases as it is
(4, Figure 95-71). Make sure that the electrical covered with fuel, since the dielectric constant of fuel
receptacles point forward of the helicopter. is greater than that of air. Therefore, as the probe is
covered with fuel, the current output will increase. The
4. Install the screws (2) and the washers (3). probes in this system are designed to provide 0.5 mA
of current when dry and increase the current linearly to
5.0 mA when the probe is completely covered in fuel.
All three probe input signals are continuously sampled
CAUTION by the signal conditioner.
95-165. Fuel Signal Conditioner — Operation

HANDLE THE CONNECTORS OF THE
FUEL SIGNAL CONDITIONER IN The Analog to Digital (A/D) converter changes the
A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D milliampere input current from the three probes to
P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C digital format. The microprocessor uses the digital
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. THE FUEL data to compute the weight of the fuel as described in
SIGNAL CONDITIONER AND THE FUEL the steps that follow:
QUANTITY INDICATOR ARE SENSITIVE
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY 1. The microprocessor finds if the main tank forward
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E S E fuel probe (1A2), probe No. 2, input signal is a valid
COMPONENTS. signal or if a default value should be used for the
reference signal. It chooses either probe No. 2 value
or a default value. It uses the value of probe No. 2 to
calculate the density of the fuel or use the default
CAUTION density value of 6.6594 pounds per gallon.
2. The microprocessor calculates the height of the

fuel for each of the three probes. The calculation uses
the value from the step above to correct for different
densities of fuel.
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY 3. The calculated height on each probe is used to
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E S E look up a volume of fuel in gallons in a database
E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE contained in the Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) of the
COMPONENTS. signal conditioner.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4. The weight of the fuel is then calculated by to calculate the weight as previously described. The
multiplying the volume by the density. A calculation is microprocessor sends the signal to the indicator.
done for all three probes to calculate the total system
weight of fuel. A calculation is also done for only the 95-169. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR —
forward tank fuel probe (1A3), probe No. 3. The digital OPERATIONAL CHECK (S/N 53000
data on the weight of fuel data is changed to analog THROUGH 54299)
data by an A/D converter. The analog signal is
transmitted from the signal conditioner to the fuel 1. Connect 28 VDC external power to the helicopter.
quantity indicator in the form of millivolts. The fuel
quantity indicator shows the fuel quantity, in pounds, in
2. Close the FUEL INSTR QTY (1CB8) circuit
agreement with the input signal shown in Table 95-32.
breaker.
95-166. Fuel Density Compensation — Operation

RESULT:
The dielectric value of the fuel changes as a result of
the type of fuel and the temperature of the fuel. The • All LCDs come on.
Fuel Quantity Gauging System (FQGS) calculates the
change in dielectric value with the use of a reference • All digits and decimals are displayed.
input signal from the main tank forward fuel probe
(1A2), probe No. 2. In most conditions, the main tank CORRECTIVE ACTION:
forward fuel probe (1A2) is completely immersed in
fuel (when there is a significant amount of fuel in the • If the LCDs do not come on, refer to Trouble
tank). With the probe completely immersed in a No. 1 (Figure 95-72).
standard density fuel, the reference input signal from
the probe is known precisely. • If all digits and decimals do not show, refer to
The FQGS also receives a signal from the completely
immersed main tank aft fuel probe (1A1). It compares • If the indicator does not return to normal
this signal with the reference input signal from the indication after 6 to 8 seconds, replace the
main tank forward fuel probe (1A2) (dielectric value indicator.
signal when the probe No. 2 is completely immersed in
a standard density fuel). The microprocessor then • If the indicator does not return to the normal
calculates the actual density of the fuel currently being indication of the fuel quantity in the helicopter,
used. This density value is used to correct all probe refer to paragraph 95-170.
data for density, when calculating the height of the fuel
on the probe. 3. Push the LCD TEST switch on the instrument
panel.
95-167. Forward Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation
RESULT:
When the FWD FUEL QTY button is pushed, a ground
signal is provided to pin 17 of the fuel signal
conditioner. When the microprocessor receives the • All LCDs come on.
ground signal, it is programmed to only output the
weight of the forward tank fuel probe (1A3), probe • All digits and decimals show.
No. 3, to the indicator.
• After 6 to 8 seconds the indicator ends the
95-168. Auxiliary Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation commanded BIT and return to the normal
indication of the fuel quantity in the helicopter.
When the auxiliary fuel tank is installed, a ground
signal is provided to pin 5 on the signal conditioner. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
When the microprocessor receives the ground signal,
it is programmed to use a different table to get the • If the LCDs do not come on and digits and
volume versus the calculated height on the main tank decimals do not show, refer to Trouble No. 3
aft fuel probe (1A1), probe No. 1. The volume is used (Figure 95-74).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-72. Fuel Quantity Indicator — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• If the indicator does not end the commanded 95-171. Fuel Quantity Gauging System —
BIT check after 6 to 8 seconds, replace the Calibration Procedure
indicator.

CAUTION
indication of the fuel quantity in the helicopter,
refer to paragraph 95-170.
OBSERVE STANDARD PRECAUTIONS
95-170. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
WHEN FUELING OR DEFUELING THE
OPERATIONAL CHECK (S/N 53000
HELICOPTER (CHAPTER 12).
THROUGH 54299)
NOTE CAUTION
If there are multiple faults, the fuel signal
conditioner LEDs show the highest priority
failure first, as shown in Table 95-33. If DO A FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING
multiple faults are present in the system, it SYSTEM CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
may be necessary to examine signal ANYTIME AN EXISTING, REPAIRED, OR
conditioner LEDs after some corrective NEW COMPONENT OF THE FUEL
action has already been carried out. QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM IS
NOTE
The faults that are shown by the signal PROCEDURE IS NOT COMPLETED, THE
conditioner are not reset unless the power FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING INDICATION
to the signal conditioner is turned off and MAY NOT BE ACCURATE.
then back on. After any corrective action is
taken, the power to the signal conditioner 1. Place the helicopter at a safe distance from fire
must be reset in order for the LEDs to show hazards (Chapter 12).
the current fault status.
2. Set the BATT ON OFF switch to the OFF position.
3. Ground the helicopter.
2. Close the FUEL INSTR QTY (1CB8) circuit
breaker. 4. Position helicopter 0.5° nose up.
RESULT: 5. Defuel the fuel cells (Chapter 12).
• After the instrument power-up BIT is

6. Add 18 pounds (approximately 2.8 U.S. gallons)
complete, the indicator shows the weight of
of fuel to the aft fuel tank.
fuel in the helicopter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 7. Connect 28 VDC external power to the helicopter.
• If the instrument does not complete the 8. On the overhead panel, close the FUEL INSTR
power-up BIT, refer to paragraph 95-169. QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker.
• If the indicator does not show the weight of 9. On the fuel quantity indicator, make sure the
fuel in the helicopter, refer to Trouble No. 1 digital display reads between 0 and 6 pounds. The first
(Figure 95-75). bar of the LCD display should be on. If necessary,
adjust the EMPTY ADJUST nut located on the back
• If the indicator goes blank, refer to Trouble side of the signal conditioner until the indicator shows
No. 2 (Figure 95-76). 5 LBS.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-75. Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 2
FUEL QUANTITY GAGING SYSTEM
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE FUEL QUANTITY GAGING SYSTEM.
NOTE
THE SIGNAL CONDITIONER MUST BE TURNED OFF AND ON AFTER CORRECTIVE ACTION HAS BEEN TAKEN.
THE SIGNAL CONDITIONER WILL NOT RESET FAULTS UNLESS THIS IS DONE.
REFER TO CHAPTER 98, FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION SYSTEM - WIRING DIAGRAM.
INTERNAL FQGS FAULT?
INDICATOR GOES BLANK YES NO

AFTER POWER UP BIT.
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER. PROBE 1 FAULT?

CYCLE POWER OFF/ON TO
SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
YES NO
3 LEDS COME ON INDICATING

LEDS ARE WORKING. DISCONNECT CONNECTOR A
1A1P1 FROM PROBE NO. 1.
YES NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR 1Z2P1

ARE LEDS ON SIGNAL FROM SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
CONDITIONER ALL ON?
YES NO

1Z2P1-10 AND 1A1P1-A,
PERFORM CALIBRATION CYCLE POWER OFF/ON 1Z2P1-21 AND 1A1P1-B,
CHECK OF FQGS. TO SIGNAL CONDITIONER. 1Z2P1-18 AND 1A1P1-C?
YES NO

LEDS ARE WORKING.
INSTALL BREAKOUT REPAIR/REPLACE WIRES THAT
YES NO TEST SET (FIGURE 95-77). HAVE NO CONTINUITY BETWEEN
1Z2P1-10 AND 1A1P1-A,
1Z2P1-21 AND 1A1P1-B,
1Z2P1-18 AND 1A1P1-C.
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER. REFER TO THE BIT STATUS IS SIGNAL FROM PROBE BETWEEN
LEDS TABLE. 0.5 mA AND 5.0 mA?
YES NO
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER. REPLACE PROBE.
407_MM_95_0075a
Figure 95-76. Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Trouble No. 2 (S/N 53000 Through 54299) (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
PROBE 2 FAULT?
YES NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR 1A2P1

PROBE 3 FAULT?
FROM PROBE NO. 2.
YES NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR 1Z2P1

FROM SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR 1A1P1 FUEL DETECT FAULT.
FROM PROBE NO. 3.

1Z2P1-19 AND 1A2P1-A, DISCONNECT CONNECTOR 1Z2P1 INSTALL BREAKOUT TEST SET
1Z2P1-12 AND 1A2P1-B, FROM SIGNAL CONDITIONER. (FIGURE 95-77).
1Z2P1-7 AND 1A2P1-C?
YES NO
IS SIGNAL FROM PROBE BETWEEN

0.5 mA AND 5.0 mA?
INSTALL BREAKOUT TEST SET REPAIR/REPLACE WIRES THAT YES NO

(FIGURE 95-77). HAVE NO CONTINUITY BETWEEN
1Z2P1-9 AND 1A3P1-A,
1Z2P1-19 AND 1A2P1-A,
1Z2P1-20 AND 1A3P1-B,
1Z2P1-12 AND 1A2P1-B,
1Z2P1-22 AND 1A3P1-C?
1Z2P1-7 AND 1A2P1-C.
IS SIGNAL FROM PROBE BETWEEN YES NO
0.5 mA AND 5.0 mA?
YES NO
INSTALL BREAKOUT TEST SET REPAIR/REPLACE WIRES THAT

(FIGURE 95-77). HAVE NO CONTINUITY BETWEEN
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER. REPLACE PROBE. 1Z2P1-9 AND 1A3P1-A,
1Z2P1-20 AND 1A3P1-B,
1Z2P1-22 AND 1A3P1-C.
0.5 mA AND 5.0 mA?
YES NO
407_MM_95_0075b
Figure 95-76. Fuel Quantity Gauging System — Trouble No. 2 (S/N 53000 Through 54299) (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
10. On the instrument panel, push and hold the FUEL QUANTITY IS DETERMINED BY THE
QTY FWD TANK switch. S O F T WA R E I N T H E F U E L S I G N A L
CONDITIONER.
11. On the fuel quantity indicator, make sure that the
digital display shows between 0 and 6 pounds. The 16. On the fuel quantity indicator, make sure that the
first bar of the LCD display should be on. digital and LCD display read as shown in Table 95-34
or Table 95-35 if an auxiliary tank is installed.
12. Close the LIGHTS CAUT (1CB4) circuit breaker.
17. Push and hold the FUEL QTY FWD TANK switch
13. Add 110 ±15 pounds (approximately 16 U.S.
gallons) of fuel to the aft fuel tank.
18. On the fuel quantity indicator, make sure that the
digital display and LCD display reads as per
Table 95-34.
sure that the FUEL LOW annunciator goes off. If the
annunciator does not go off, refer to Fuel Low
Annunciator Circuit (Chapter 96). 19. On the overhead panel, open the FUEL INSTR
QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker.
15. Add fuel until the fuel cell is full. The fuel level
should be at the bottom of the filler port. 20. Remove the external power from the helicopter.

CAUTION Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
DO NOT ADJUST THE FULL FUEL QTY

A D J U S T M E N T. T H E F U L L F U E L
Table 95-34. Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds
FULL FUEL WEIGHT-POUNDS (125.5 U.S. GAL/475 L)

FUEL
TEMPERATURE
JP4, JET B FUEL JET A, JET A1, JP5, JP8 FUEL
°F °C TOTAL FORWARD TOTAL FORWARD
-40 -40.0 844 ±25 259 ±8 898 ±27 276 ±8
-20 -28.9 836 ±25 256 ±8 889 ±27 273 ±8
0 -17.8 826 ±25 253 ±8 881 ±26 270 ±8
20 -6.7 818 ±25 251 ±8 874 ±26 268 ±8
40 4.4 809 ±24 248 ±7 864 ±26 265 ±8

60 15.6 799 ±24 245 ±7 857 ±26 263 ±8
80 26.7 791 ±24 243 ±7 848 ±25 260 ±8
100 37.8 781 ±23 239 ±7 840 ±25 258 ±8

120 48.9 773 ±23 237 ±7 833 ±25 256 ±8
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-35. Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds (Including Auxiliary Fuel Tank)
TEMPERATURE FULL FUEL WEIGHT-POUNDS (146.9 U.S. GAL/556.1 L)
°F °C JP4, JET B FUEL JET A, JET A1, JP5, JP8 FUEL
-40 -40.0 976 ±29 1037 ±31
-20 -28.9 966 ±29 1028 ±31
0 -17.8 955 ±29 1018 ±31

20 -6.7 945 ±28 1010 ±30
40 4.4 935 ±28 999 ±30
60 15.6 924 ±28 990 ±30
80 26.7 914 ±27 981 ±29
100 37.8 903 ±27 971 ±29
120 48.9 893 ±27 962 ±29
95-172. LOW LEVEL FUNCTION OF FORWARD 95-173. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
FUEL CELL PROBE NO. 3 — TEST SET (S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
OPERATIONAL CHECK (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299)
For the operational check of the left and right fuel
transfer pump annunciator circuit, refer to Chapter 96.
The purpose of this section is to describe the specific NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
functions of the fuel probe No. 3 as a fuel low level
switch. Model 77 or Equivalent Fluke Digital
Multimeter
NOTE
2. Close the FUEL INST QTY (1CB8) circuit
breaker. The information provided in Figure 95-77
may used by operators to build the fuel
RESULT: quantity gauging system test set. The test
set may be built using standard electrical/
• Signal conditioner LEDs are all on. electronic supplies.
The fuel quantity gauging system test set

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
(Figure 95-77) may used as an aid for troubleshooting
problems associated with the fuel quantity gauging
• If the LEDs on the signal conditioner are not
system.
all on, refer to Trouble No. 1 (Figure 95-78).

95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING

SYSTEM TEST SET
1Z2P1
+
FUEL SIGNAL CONDITIONER

OUTPUT SIGNAL
+ -
PROBE NO. 1
+ -
PROBE NO. 2
+ -
PROBE NO. 3
TO SIGNAL
CONDITIONER (1Z2)
TO HELICOPTER
(D38999/26WC35SN)
CONNECTOR (1Z2P1)
(D38999/20WC35PN)
NOTES
1 Resistor 100 ohm
1/8 watt 1/2% or better.
2 Minimum 22 gauge wires.
407_MM_95_0076
Figure 95-77. Fuel Quantity Gauging System Test Set (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 1
LOW LEVEL FUNCTION OF FORWARD FUEL CELL PROBE NO. 3
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE LOW LEVEL FUNCTION OF FORWARD FUEL CELL PROBE NO. 3.
NOTE
SIGNAL CONDITIONER LEDS

PROBE 2 FAULT?
ARE NOT ALL ON.
YES NO

SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
IS WIRING BETWEEN PROBE 2 AND
SIGNAL CONDITIONER CORRECT?
YES NO
LEDS ARE WORKING?
YES NO
REPLACE PROBE 2. REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING
BETWEEN PROBE 2 AND
SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
REFER TO THE BIT REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
STATUS LEDs TABLE.
PROBE 3 FAULT ?
INTERNAL FQSC FAULT? YES NO
YES NO
IS WIRING BETWEEN PROB 3 AND

FUEL DETECT FAULT.
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER. PROBE 1 FAULT? YES NO
YES NO
INSTALL BREAKOUT TEST

SET (FIGURE 95-77).
BETWEEN PROBE 3 AND
IS WIRING BETWEEN PROBE 1 AND SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
YES NO
0.5 mA AND 5.0 mA?
YES NO

BETWEEN PROBE 1 AND
SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
407_MM_95_0077
Figure 95-78. Low Level Function of Forward Fuel Cell Probe No. 3 — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Specifically, the fuel quantity gauging system test set 3. Install the fuel quantity gauging system test set as
may be used to measure any of the three fuel quantity follows;
probe (1A1, 1A2 and 1A3) input signals to the fuel
signal conditioner (1Z2) as well as the output signals a. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
from the fuel signal conditioner to the fuel quantity external DC power from the helicopter.
indicator (1M1).
b. Gain access to the fuel signal conditioner
Unless the actual quantity of fuel in the fuel cells is (1Z2) and disconnect the electrical connector (1Z2P1).
known, it is recommended that the fuel be drained from
the fuel cells and a measured amount added prior to c. Connect the test set connector D38999/
taking readings from the probes (1A1, 1A2 and 1A3) 20WC35PN to electrical connector (1Z2P1) and
and from the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2). For initial connect test set connector D38999/26WC35SN to the
troubleshooting, measurements of the three fuel fuel signal conditioner (1Z2).
quantity probe (1A1, 1A2 and 1A3) input signals to the
fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) as well as the output 4. Take readings of the fuel quantity probe (1A1, 1A2
signals from the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) to the fuel and 1A3) input signals to the fuel signal conditioner
quantity indicator (1M1) should be recorded at empty, (1Z2) as follows;
low fuel and full fuel conditions to coincide with the fuel
quantity gauging system calibration procedure
(paragraph 95-171). NOTE
Make sure the electrical connectors at the
fuel quantity probes are connected.
WARNING
a. Set the multimeter selector to read millivolts.
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS b. Place the positive and negative multimeter
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR probes into the applicable ports of the test set for probe
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC No. 1 (1A1).
CAUTION
CAUTION
OBSERVE STANDARD PRECAUTIONS DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE
WHEN FUELING OR DEFUELING THE CHECKS TO AVOID BATTERY
HELICOPTER (CHAPTER 12). DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS
1. Drain the fuel system (Chapter 12). TEST TIME TO A MINIMUM.

NOTE external DC power to the helicopter.
Refer to paragraph 95-171 for the
procedures to drain and fill the fuel cells to d. Close the FUEL INSTR QTY circuit breaker.
reflect empty, low fuel, and full fuel
conditions. NOTE
2. Add a measured amount of fuel to the fuel cells. Divide the millivolt reading by 100 to obtain
Record the specification and amount of measured fuel milliamps.
that has been added to the fuel cells from an initial
drained condition. e. Record the millivolt reading for probe No. 1
(1A1).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
f. Place the positive and negative multimeter b. Place the positive and negative multimeter
probes into the applicable ports of the test set for probes into the applicable ports of the test set for the
probe No. 2 (1A2). fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) output signal.
c. Record the voltage reading of the fuel signal

NOTE conditioner (1Z2) output signal to the fuel quantity
Divide the millivolt reading by 100 to obtain indicator (1M1).
milliamps.
6. Refer to Table 95-33 to compare the voltage
value recorded in step c, against the fuel quantity
g. Record the millivolt reading for probe No. 2
indication on the fuel quantity indicator (1M1) and the
(1A2).
actual amount of fuel in the fuel cells.
h. Place the positive and negative multimeter 7. Repeat step 2 through step 6 for conditions of low
probes into the applicable ports of the test set for fuel and full fuel as specified in paragraph 95-171 or
probe No. 3 (1A3). other fuel quantities as required.
NOTE 8. Remove the fuel quantity gauging system test set

as follows;
Divide the millivolt reading by 100 to obtain
milliamps. a. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
i. Record the millivolt reading for probe No. 3
(1A3). b. Gain access to the fuel signal conditioner
(1Z2) and disconnect the test set connectors.
j. Remove the positive and negative multimeter
probes from the test set. c. Connect electrical connector (1Z2P1) to the
fuel signal conditioner (1Z2).
k. Divide the millivolt readings recorded for probe
No.1 (1A1), probe No. 2 (1A2) and probe No. 3 (1A3)
external DC power to the helicopter and make sure the
by 100 to obtain millivolt values.
fuel quantity indication reflects the amount of fuel in
the fuel cells.
5. Record the voltage reading of the fuel signal
conditioner (1Z2) output signal to the fuel quantity 10. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
indicator (1M1) as follows; external DC power from the helicopter.
11. Contact Product Support Engineering for

NOTE
assistance with interpretation of the fuel quantity probe
Set the multimeter selector to volts prior to (1A1, 1A2, and 1A3) and fuel signal conditioner (1Z2)
taking the reading of the fuel signal recorded readings as required.
conditioner (1Z2) output signal to the fuel
quantity indicator (1M1). 12. Return the helicopter to the standard
a. Set the multimeter selector to volts. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
95-174. MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS 95-176. Shunt Resistor — Description

(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)
The miscellaneous instruments are as follows: NOTE

For data on the shunt resistor, refer to
• Ammeter Chapter 96.
• Clock/Outside Air Temperature (OAT)/volts
indicator The shunt resistor has a very low resistance. It is
connected in series between the output of the starter
• Hourmeter generator and the helicopter 28 VDC bus. The voltage
drop across the shunt is calibrated so that it gives a
95-175. AMMETER — DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000 specific millivolt drop for a given current flow. The
THROUGH 54299) voltage supplied to the ammeter is designed to
indicate a specific amperage as shown in Table 95-36
The ammeter is part of the fuel pressure/ammeter dual (indicator 407-375-007-101) or Table 95-37, given a
indicator. The ammeter gives an indication of the total difference between the HI input from the shunt and the
current load on the generator. The ammeter has a dial LO input. Circuit breakers are installed on both outputs
and electronic components inside a sealed case from the shunt to the instrument because they are
(Figure 95-79).
positive and wiring from the shunt to the indicator must
be protected.
The dial of the ammeter has a scale that shows
amps X 10. The range of the scale is from 0 to
200 amps.
Table 95-36. Ammeter 407-375-007-101
The range marking on the scale has a red line at Indications Versus Input Voltage
180 amps.
INDICATION INPUT VOLTAGE
The scale is a single bar LCD display that operates as (AMPS) (MV)
a pointer. The segments of the LCD display come on
in an ascending order from the zero position on the 0 0
scale. The last segment of the LCD display to come on
along the amps X 10 scale shows the current load in 20 10
amperes. 40 20
On the ammeter 407-375-007-101 only, the ammeter 60 30
has its memory pre-programmed to indicate if its
detects certain current amounts. For ammeter current 80 40
readings above 200 amps (maximum scale), the 100 50
indicator gives the indications that follow:
120 60
• Amps of 201 to 300. The ammeter keeps the
full scale for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the 140 70
indication drops to zero. 160 80
• Amps of 301 to 400. The ammeter keeps the 180 90

full scale for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the
indication drops to zero. 200 100
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-177A.Ammeter Indicator — Removal and

Table 95-37. Ammeter 407-375-007-103 Indication
Installation
Versus Input Voltage
INDICATION INPUT VOLTAGE For the removal and installation of the fuel pressure/
(AMPS) (MV) ammeter indicator (2M1), refer to paragraph 95-61
and paragraph 95-62.
0 0
20 10 95-178. Ammeter Indication System —
40 20 Operational Check
60 30
80 40
100 50
2. Open and then close the AMPS INSTR (1CB23)
120 60 circuit breaker.
140 70
160 80 RESULT:
180 90
• The ammeter indicator performs the power-on
200 100 BIT.
300 150
400 200 • All LCDs come on.
95-177. Ammeter Indication System — Operation • All digits and decimals show.
The signal conditioner receives its input signal from • After 6 to 8 seconds, the indicator ends the
the shunt resistor installed in line with the output of the power-on BIT and return to the normal
generator (Figure 95-79). The load current is indication of 0 amps.
measured across the shunt resistor. The signal
conditioner is protected against a current overload CORRECTIVE ACTION:
from the input signal by two circuit breakers. The
circuit breakers are installed in line with the two wires • If the LCDs do not come on, refer to Trouble
from the shunt resistor. The output of the signal No. 1, Figure 95-81.
conditioner is sent to the A/D converter where the
signal is converted to a digital signal. The digital signal • If all digits and decimals do not show, refer to
is sent to the processor. The ammeter shows the Trouble No. 2, Figure 95-82.
amps in agreement with the input signal.
The 28 VDC bus supplies the power to the power indication after 6 to 8 seconds, replace the
supply of the ammeter. The 28 VDC is supplied indicator.
through the AMPS IND (1CB23) circuit breaker on the
overhead panel.
panel.
Three fluorescent green lights are mounted behind the
dial face of the indicator. The LCDs of the indicator do
not normally allow the light to pass through them. With RESULT:
input to the indicator, the indicator turns each LCD
segment clear. This allows the green light to shine • All LCDs come on.
through, illuminating each segment. The green lights
are controlled in intensity depending on the input from • All digits and decimals show.
the 5 VDC lighting circuit.
For the simplified schematic of the ammeter indication commanded BIT and returns to the normal
system, refer to Figure 95-80. indication of 0 amps.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1
% X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
3 3 40
20 20
16
2 2 15
12
FUEL FUEL
AMPS 8 AMPS
PSI PSI 10
1 1
4
5
X 10 0
0 0 0
X 10
P/N 407-075-024-101 P/N 407-375-007-105/-107

AND SUBSEQUENT
(TYPICAL)
1. Ammeter indicator dial

3. Red line
Figure 95-79. Ammeter Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Figure 95-80. Ammeter Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 1
FUEL PRESSURE/AMMETER INDICATION SYSTEM
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE FUEL PRESSURE/AMMETER INDICATION SYSTEM.
NOTE
REFER TO CHAPTER 98, FUEL PRESSURE AND AMMETER INDICATION SYSTEM - WIRING DIAGRAM.
ALL LCDS DO NOT COME ON.
SOME LCDS COME ON.
YES NO
IF ONLY SOME LCDS ARE NO LCDS COME ON.

NOT OPERATIONAL,
REPLACE INSTRUMENT.
IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN AMMETER
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR
2M1P1-5 AND 2M1P1-12?
YES NO
REPLACE INDICATOR. IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN 2M1P5 AND
AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO

2M1P1-12 AND GROUND. CIRCUIT BREAKER 1CB23 AND
CONNECTOR 2M1P1.
407_MM_95_0082
Figure 95-81. Ammeter Indication System — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 2
CAUTION

NOTE
ALL DECIMALS AND DIGITS

DO NOT COME ON.
SOME DECIMALS AND DIGITS

COME ON.
YES NO
IF ONLY SOME DECIMALS AND NO DECIMALS AND DIGITS

DIGITS ARE NOT OPERATIONAL, COME ON.
REPLACE INSTRUMENT.

BETWEEN AMMETER
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR
2M1P1-5 AND 2M1P1-12?
YES NO

BETWEEN 2M1P5 AND
AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO

2M1P1-12 AND GROUND. CIRCUIT BREAKER 1CB23 AND
CONNECTOR 2M1P1.
407_MM_95_0083
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• If the LCDs do not come on, and the digits and NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
decimals do not show, refer to Trouble No. 3, EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
Figure 95-83.
NOTE
4. Do a ground run of the helicopter
(BHT-407-FM-1). Remove components only to the extent
5. With the engine operating at an appropriate RPM maintenance.
(BHT-407-FM-1), set the generator switch to the ON
position. 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
RESULT:
2. Get access to the DC equipment panel at
• The ammeter indicates maximum amps. The FS 155.00.
maximum amp indication will vary in
agreement with the condition of the charge on 3. Remove the screws (1, Figure 95-85) and the
the battery and what equipment is connected washers (2 and 3).
on the helicopter bus.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 4. Remove the cover (4) from the DC equipment

panel.
• If the ammeter does not show an amp
indication, refer to Trouble No. 4 5. Remove the bolts (9 and 12), screw (16),
(Figure 95-84). washers (10, 13, 15, and 18), and lugs (14 and 17)
from the shunt (2R1) (19).
6. Wait until the ammeter shows a constant amp
indication. Make a note of the ammeter indication. 6. Remove the nut (7) and washer (8) from the bus
bar (11).
7. Turn on both landing lights.
7. Remove the bus bar (11) from the terminal of the
RESULT: shunt (2R1) (19).
• The ammeter indicates an increase of load of

8. Remove the screws (5 and 16) and washers (6
approximately 18 amps.
and 18) from the shunt (2R1) (19).
• If the ammeter does not indicate an increase
in load, refer to Trouble No. 4 (Figure 95-84). 9. Remove the shunt (2R1) (19) from the DC
equipment panel.
8. Turn off both landing lights.
95-180. Shunt Resistor — Installation
WARNING
95-179. Shunt Resistor — Removal
WARNING NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 3
CAUTION

NOTE
LCDS AND LIGHTS DO NOT

COME ON.

AMMETER DISCONNECT 2M1P1-14
AND GROUND?
YES NO
REPLACE INDICATOR. DO INDICATORS PERFORM

LCD TEST CORRECTLY?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR DISCONNECT INSTRUMENT PANEL

COMPONENTS BETWEEN 2M1P1-14 DISCONNECT 10P1.
AND TERMINAL BLOCK 4TB2-SJ.

10P1-AA AND 10P1-BB WITH LCD
TEST SWITCH 1S15 PUSHED IN?
YES NO

10J1-BB AND GROUND?
YES NO

4TB2-SB AND 10J1-AA. 10J1-BB AND AIRCRAFT GROUND?
407_MM_95_0084
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 4
AMMETER SYSTEM
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE AMMETER SYSTEM.
NOTE
REFER TO CHAPTER 98, CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER AND HOURMETER - WIRING DIAGRAM.
HOURMETER DOES NOT OPERATE

WHEN Ng IS GREATER THAN 55%
AND WEIGHT IS REMOVED
FROM LANDING GEAR.
CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER
INDICATION (4M5) RECORDS
FLIGHT TIME DURING FLIGHT TEST.
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING REFER TO OPERATIONAL

OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN CHECK OF CLOCK/OAT/
4TB2 KY AND HOURMETER (1M7). VOLTMETER INDICATION (4M5).
REPLACE HOURMETER (1M7).
407_MM_95_0085
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2
3
SEE DETAIL A
2
3
9 7
8
10
1. Screw 11
2. Washer
3. Washer 12
4. Cover
5. Screw 6 13 5
6. Washer
5
7. Nut
8. Washer 6
9. Bolt 14
10. Washer
11. Bus bar 15
12. Bolt
13. Washer 19
18
14. Lug
15. Washer 16
16. Screw
17. Lug 20 17
18. Washer
19. Shunt (2R1)
20. DC power panel DETAIL A
Figure 95-85. Shunt Resistor — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Get access to the DC equipment panel at connected through the hourmeter circuit breaker and
FS 155.00. circuit. When the indicator is powered up the top
display will always show volts and the clock will
display the mode (UT/LT/FT/ or ET) to which it was set
3. Install the shunt resistor (2R1) (19, Figure 95-85)
when power was removed from the clock.
on the DC equipment panel.
95-183. Clock Battery Replacement

4. Install the screws (5) and washers (6) that attach
the shunt (2R1) (19) to the DC equipment panel.
The time settings on the clock are maintained by one
alkaline type battery of 1.5 volts, size AA. To replace
5. Install the lug (14) on the shunt (2R1) (19) with the battery do the steps that follow:
the bolt (12) and washers (13 and 15).
1. Gain access to the back of the clock/OAT/volts/

6. Install the lug (17) on the shunt (2R1) (19) with indicator.
the screw (16) and washer (18).
2. Remove the existing battery from its mount.

7. Install the bus bar (11) to the terminal on the
shunt (2R1) (19) with the bolt (9) and washer (10).
3. Place a new battery in the mount. Place the
positive terminal of the battery towards the end
8. Attach the bus bar (11) to the DC power panel marked positive (Red).
with the nut (7) and washer (8).
95-184. Clock Test Mode

9. Install the cover (4) on the DC equipment panel.
1. Hold the SEL button down for 3 seconds.

95-181. CLOCK/OAT/VOLTS INDICATOR —
54299) 2. The display indicates 88:88 and the clock mode
indicators all come on and show underlined (UT/LT/
The clock/OAT/volts indicator (Figure 95-86) is a FT/ET).
multi-function indicator. The indicator has two displays.
The top display shows the OAT and the 28 VDC bus 95-185. Clock Universal Time (UT) Set
voltage (VOLTS). The bottom display shows the clock
functions.
1. Push the SEL button to select the Universal Time
(UT) indication on the clock.
For the simplified schematic of the clock/OAT/volts
indicator, refer to Figure 95-87.
2. Push the SEL and CTL buttons together to select
the set mode. Make sure that the farthest left digit
95-182. CLOCK — DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000
starts to flash.
THROUGH 54299)
The clock shows the Universal Time (UT), Local Time 3. Push the CTL button to set the digit that flashes.
(LT), Flight Time (FT), and Elapsed Time (ET). Use the
SEL button on the clock to sequentially select the 4. Push the SEL button to select the next digit to be
format of the indication. set. Make sure that the next digit starts to flash.
The clock is powered by the 28 VDC bus through the

5. Push the CTL button to set the digit that flashes.
INSTR OAT/V (1CB20) circuit breaker. When the
power is removed from the helicopter, the time settings
are maintained by a battery installed on the back of the 6. When the last digit is set with the CTL button,
clock. The FT recording feature of the clock is push the SEL button and exit the set mode.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1
% X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
6
E
C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
W
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
W
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
5 4
(TYPICAL)
1. OAT/VOLTS button
2. OAT/VOLTS display
3. CLOCK display
4. CONTROL button
5. SELECT button
Figure 95-86. Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NOTES
1. Aircraft with no power
or
2. Caution light circuit breaker open
or
3. Ng greater than 55%
407_MM_95_0003
Figure 95-87. Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-186. Clock Local Time (LT) Set 95-188. Clock Flight Time Alarm Display
NOTE NOTE
The minute digits of the Local Time (LT) When the Flight Time (FT) is equal to the
mode are synchronized with the minutes of alarm time the display will flash. If FT is not
the Universal Time (UT) and cannot be set being displayed at the time the alarm
in local time. Minutes can only be set when becomes active, the clock will automatically
in the UT time set mode. select FT for display.
1. Press either the SEL or CTL button to turn off the

NOTE alarm.
When there is no power applied to the
clock, the CTL and SEL buttons are 2. ET count up:
disabled.
a. Push the SEL button to select ET indication on
1. Push the SEL button to select the LT indication the clock.
on the clock.
NOTE
the set mode. Make sure that the farthest left digit ET counts up to 59 minutes and
starts to flash. 59 seconds and then switches to hours and
minutes. It will count to a maximum of
99 hours and 59 minutes.
b. Push the CTL button to start the ET counting.
4. Push the SEL button to select the next digit to be
set. Make sure that the next digit starts to flash. c. Pressing the CTL button again resets ET to
zero.
3. ET countdown:
6. Push the SEL button to exit the set mode. a. Push the SEL button to select ET indication on
the clock.
95-187. Clock Flight Time (FT) Alarm Set
b. Push the SEL and CTL buttons together to
1. Push the SEL button to select the Flight Time enter the set mode.
(FT) indication on the clock.
c. Push the CTL button to set the digit that
flashes.
the set mode. Make sure that the farthest left digit d. Push the SEL button to select the next digit to
starts to flash. be set. Make sure that the next digit starts to flash.
3. Push the CTL button to set the digit that flashes. e. Push the CTL button to set the digit that
flashes.
4. Push the SEL button to select the next digit to be
set. Make sure that the next digit starts to flash. f. When the last digit is set with the CTL button,
pushing the SEL button will exit the set mode.
NOTE
6. Push the SEL button to set the FT alarm and to The alarm becomes active at zero and will
exit the set mode. flash the display. If ET is not being
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
displayed at the time the alarm becomes 2. Close the INSTR OAT/V (1CB20) circuit breaker.
active, the clock will automatically select ET
for display. After reaching zero the ET RESULT:
counter will count up.
• The top display shows the helicopter voltage
g. Press the CTL button to start the countdown. on the 28 VDC bus (27.0 E).
h. Pressing either SEL or CTL will reset the • The bottom display shows time as Universal
alarm. Time, Local Time, Flight Time or Elapsed Time
(UT/LT/FT/ or ET).
95-189. CLOCK DISPLAY SELECTION (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299) CORRECTIVE ACTION:
The red OAT VOLTS button at the top center of the • If top display does not show the volts, refer to
clock/OAT/volts indicator is used to sequentially select Trouble No. 1 (Figure 95-88).
the voltage display, Fahrenheit OAT and Celsius OAT.
When the Celsius OAT display is on, the OAT VOLTS • If bottom display does not show the time (UT/
button is pushed to start the cycle again. LT/FT/ or ET), replace the indicator.
3. Push the red OAT VOLTS control button on the

95-190. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (OAT)
top center face of the indicator.
DISPLAY — DESCRIPTION (S/N 53000
THROUGH 54299)
RESULT:
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is shown on the
• The top display shows the Outside Air
top display of the clock/OAT/volts indicator. The
Temperature (OAT) in °F.
indicator measures the OAT with the use of an active
type temperature bulb installed under the nose at
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
FS 43.00. As the OAT changes, the resistance of the
temperature bulb changes. The change in resistance
• If the top display does not show the OAT in °F,
changes the OAT display on the indicator.
refer to Trouble No. 2 (Figure 95-89).
95-191. VOLTS DISPLAY — DESCRIPTION (S/N 4. Push the red OAT VOLTS control button on the
53000 THROUGH 54299) top center face of the indicator.
The volts are shown on the Clock/OAT/volts indicator. RESULT:

The indicator measures the DC volts at its input. The
DC voltage is supplied from the 28 VDC bus to the • The top display shows the OAT in °C.
Clock/OAT/volts indicator through the INSTR OAT/V
(1CB20) circuit breaker. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
The volts function is selected with the red OAT VOLTS • If the top display does not show OAT in °C,
button on the top part of the clock. The VOLTS refer to Trouble No. 2 (Figure 95-89).
function is selected when the button is pushed. The
indication will cycle between volts, OAT (°F), and 5. Push the SEL button on the left side of the face of
OAT (°C) and back to volts again each time the button the indicator. Repeat.
is pushed.
RESULT:
95-192. CLOCK/OAT/VOLTS INDICATOR —
OPERATIONAL CHECK (S/N 53000 • The clock sequentially shows the clock modes
THROUGH 54299) (UT/LT/FT/ or ET). Once the last mode in the
series is shown, the clock displays the same
1. Connect 28 VDC external power to the helicopter. series starting all over again.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 1
CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER SYSTEM
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE CLOCK/OAT/VOLT INDICATOR.
NOTE
TOP DISPLAY DOES NOT

DISPLAY VOLTS.
PUSH OAT/VOLTMETER BUTTON

AT TOP CENTRE OF OAT/
VOLTMETER INDICATOR.
TOP DISPLAY SHOWS

OAT F AND OAT C.
YES NO
REPLACE INDICATOR. LOWER DISPLAY SHOWS TIME.
YES NO
REPLACE CLOCK/OAT/ DISCONNECT CONNECTOR

VOLTMETER INDICATOR. FROM CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER
INDICATOR (4M5 P1)

BETWEEN CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER
INDICATOR, DISCONNECT
4M5P1-2 AND 4M5P1-1?
YES NO

BETWEEN 4M5P1-2 AND
AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING

COMPONENTS BETWEEN OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN
4M5P1-1 AND GROUND. 4M5P1-2 AND DC BUS.
407_MM_95_0087
Figure 95-88. Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 2
CAUTION

NOTE
TOP DISPLAY DOES NOT SHOW

TEMPERATURE IN CELCIUS
OR FAHRENHEIT.
YES NO
REPLACE CLOCK/OAT/ TEMPERATURE DISPLAYED

VOLTMETER INDICATOR. IS NOT ACCURATE.
REPLACE TEMPERATURE PROBE.
407_MM_95_0088
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION: CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the clock does not cycle through the modes, • If the FT function of the clock does not record
replace the indicator. the flight time, refer to Trouble No. 4
(Figure 95-91).
6. Push the SEL button until the clock displays
Flight Time (FT). 17. Return the helicopter to the standard
7. In the battery compartment, open the
HOURMETER (1CB11) circuit breaker.
95-193. Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Removal
8. In the left side console, remove the engine out
relay (1K2) from its socket.
WARNING
9. Connect a jumper between A2 and A3 of socket
(1XK2).
10. Jack helicopter to remove weight from the landing NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
gear so that the weight on gear switch (8S5) is in its EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
in-flight position.
NOTE
11. In the battery compartment, close the
HOURMETER (1CB11) circuit breaker. Remove components only to the extent
RESULT: maintenance.

• The clock will begin to record flight time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Figure 95-92).
• If the clock does not begin to record flight
time, refer to Trouble No. 3 (Figure 95-90).
3. Remove the screws (4). Remove the clock/OAT/
volts indicator (4M5) (1) from the instrument panel (6).
12. Remove all power from helicopter.
4. Remove the nuts (5) from the clock/OAT/volts
13. In the battery compartment, open the indicator (4M5) (1).
5. Remove the battery (3) from the clock/OAT/volts
14. Remove the jumper between A2 and A3 from the indicator (4M5) (1).
relay socket (1XK2).
95-194. Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Installation
15. Install the engine out relay (1K2) in its socket.
16. Perform a flight test of the helicopter. WARNING
RESULT:
• With the engine NG speed above 55%, and WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
the weight removed from the landing gear, the NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
FT function of the clock records the flight time. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 3
CAUTION

NOTE
CLOCK (FT) DOES NOT RECORD

FLIGHT TIME.
HOURMETER 1M7 RECORDS TIME.
YES NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR FROM IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

CLOCK/OAT/VOLT INDICATOR. BETWEEN ENGINE OUT RELAY
1XK2-A2 AND AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO

BETWEEN CLOCK/OAT/VOLT
INDICATOR, DISCONNECT 4M5P1-3
AND AIRCRAFT GROUND? REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR
COMPONENTS BETWEEN ENGINE
YES NO OUT RELAY 1K2 AND 4TB2-KT OR
ADJUST WEIGHT ON GEAR SWITCH.
REPLACE CLOCK/OAT/VOLT REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE

INDICATOR. COMPONENTS BETWEEN 4TB2-K2 AT CIRCUIT BREAKER
AND CONNECTOR 4M5P1-3. OUTPUT 1CB11?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR REPLACE CIRCUIT-BREAKER

COMPONENTS BETWEEN 1XK2-A2 1CB11.
AND CIRCUIT BREAKER 1CB11.
407_MM_95_0089
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 4
CAUTION

NOTE
FLIGHT TIME CLOCK DOES NOT

RUN WHEN Ng IS GREATER THAN
55% AND WEIGHT IS REMOVED
FROM LANDING GEAR.
HOURMETER (1M7) OPERATES

DURING FLIGHT TEST.
YES NO
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR FROM HOURMETER CIRCUIT BREAKER

CLOCK/OAT/VOLT INDICATOR. 1CB11 PUSHED IN.
YES NO

BETWEEN CLOCK/CLOCK/
OAT/VOLT INDICATOR, DOES ENGINE OUT HORN AND PUSH IN HOURMETER
DISCONNECT 4M5P1-3 AND LIGHT OPERATE NORMALLY? CIRCUIT BREAKER 1CB11.
AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH ENGINE
RUNNING Ng>55% AND WEIGHT YES NO
REMOVED FROM GEAR?
YES NO
IS THERE DC VOLTAGE BETWEEN RETURN TO OPERATIONAL

4TB2-KT AND AIRCRAFT CHECK OF ENGINE OUT
GROUND WITH ENGINE SYSTEM CHAPTER 96.
REPLACE CLOCK/OAT/VOL RUNNING Ng>55% AND WEIGHT
T INDICATOR. REMOVED FROM GEAR?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR
COMPONENTS BETWEEN
4M5P1-3 AND 4TB2-PK.
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING OR REPLACE ENGINE OUT RELAY 1K2.
COMPONENTS BETWEEN 4TBZ-KZ
AND CLOCK/OAT/VOLT INDICATOR
AND BETWEEN 4TB2-KY AND
HOURMETER (IM7).
407_MM_95_0090
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEN FAIL
ON
U
L
START
INSTR
RPM T
FLOAT RESET
TEST
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 10 FEE
D S R 1000
FEE
T
2 40 T N 1000
0
1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 101 0
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
T KNOTS H T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 P
UL 5
L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T
E
6 C
16 5
2 4 9
12
3
FUEL
AMPS
PSI 8 2 NR
1
1
C X 100
0 NAV HDG 1 2
4 0 10 120
10 S
NP GS GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0 PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110 PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E
30
T
100
5 3
1 2
4 5 7 8
90
% RPM 40 NAV
6 9
3 6 3 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60
8 3
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 RPM
1 11
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
N
6
FWD TANK
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
OVSPD HORN 10
E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
6
PSI
24
ON
E
10
4
X 10 X 10
2 5
AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
MAN
5
1
1. Clock/OAT/Volts indicator (4M5)

3. Battery 4
4. Screw 6
5. Nut
6. Instrument panel
Figure 95-92. Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
2. Install the nuts (5, Figure 95-92) on the clock/ necessary to perform the required
OAT/volts indicator (4M5) (1). maintenance.

3. Position the clock/OAT/volts indicator (4M5) (1)
on the instrument panel (6).
2. Remove the screws (1, Figure 95-94) and

4. Install the screws (4) to attach the clock/OAT/
nuts (2) that attach the hourmeter (1M7) (6) to the aft
volts indicator (4M5) (1) to the instrument panel (6).
battery compartment wall (7).
5. Install the battery (3) on the clock/OAT/volts

indicator (4M5) (1). 3. Remove the screws (5) and washers (4) that
attach the electrical lugs (3) to the hourmeter (1M7)
(6).
the clock/OAT/volts indicator (4M5) (1).
4. Remove the hourmeter (1M7) (6).
7. If required, adjust the clock settings (paragraph
95-185 and paragraph 95-186). 95-197. Hourmeter — Installation
95-195. HOURMETER — DESCRIPTION

(S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299) WARNING
The hourmeter (Figure 95-93) gives an indication of

the operation hours of the helicopter. The hourmeter is OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
installed in the battery compartment of the helicopter. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
The hourmeter is a clock mechanism that is calibrated NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
in hours and tenths of hours. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
The hourmeter operates when it receives a 28 VDC 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
input from the HOURMETER (1CB11) circuit breaker. from the helicopter.
The 28 VDC signal is supplied when the two
conditions that follow are met: 2. Attach the electrical lugs (3, Figure 95-94) to the
hourmeter (1M7) (6) with the screws (5) and
• Engine out relay (1K2) is energized. With the washers (4).
engine out relay energized, 28 VDC is
supplied to the hourmeter.
3. Attach the hourmeter (1M7) (6) to the aft battery
compartment wall (7) with the screws (1) and the
• Weight is removed from the landing gear.
nuts (2).
95-196. Hourmeter — Removal

95-198. Hourmeter — Operational Check
1. Remove electrical power from the helicopter.

WARNING
2. In the battery compartment, open the

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS HOURMETER (1CB11) circuit breaker.
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 3. In the left side console, remove the engine out
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). relay (1K2) from its socket.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
POWER ON INDICATOR
(TYPICAL)
HOURS 1/10 OF AN HOUR
DETAIL A
Figure 95-93. Hourmeter — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5 SEE DETAIL A
4
1. Screw
2. Nut
3. Electrical lug
4. Washer
5. Screw
6. Hourmeter (1M7)
7. Aft battery compartment wall 7
1
DETAIL A
Figure 95-94. Hourmeter — Removal and Installation (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4. Connect a jumper between A2 and A3 of the 10. Remove the jumper between A2 and A3 of the
relay socket (1XK2). relay socket (1XK2).
11. Install the engine out relay (1K2) in its socket.

CAUTION
12. Do a flight test of the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-1).
MAKE SURE THE HELICOPTER IS ON A RESULT:

HARD AND LEVEL SURFACE BEFORE
YOU PUT IT ON THE JACKS. IF YOU DO • With the engine shut down and 28 VDC
NOT DO THIS, THE HELICOPTER CAN external power connected to the helicopter,
FALL ON ITS SIDE AND DAMAGE CAN the hourmeter does not run.
OCCUR.
• With engine NG speed above 55% and with
5. Jack the helicopter to remove weight from the helicopter weight on the landing gear, the
landing gear so that the weight on gear switch (8S5) is hourmeter does not run.
in its in-flight position (Chapter 7).
• With engine NG speed above 55% and with
6. Connect 28 VDC external power to the helicopter. helicopter weight removed from the landing
gear, the hourmeter will record flight time.
7. In the battery compartment, close the
HOURMETER (1CB11) circuit breaker. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the hourmeter does not record flight time,

RESULT:
refer to Trouble No. 2 (Figure 95-96).
• The hourmeter starts to record time. • If the hourmeter runs with 28 VDC external
power connected to the helicopter and with
CORRECTIVE ACTION: the engine shut down, refer to Trouble No. 3
(Figure 95-97).
• If the hourmeter does not operate, refer to
Trouble No. 1 (Figure 95-95). • If the hourmeter runs with helicopter engine
running and helicopter weight still on landing
8. In the battery compartment, open the gear, adjust the weight on gear switch.
9. Remove external power from the helicopter or configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
disconnect the battery power (Chapter 96). Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 1
HOURMETER SYSTEM
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE HOURMETER.
NOTE
HOURMETER DOES NOT OPERATE.
FT FUNCTION OF CLOCK/OAT/
VOLTMETER INDICATOR (4M5)
RECORDS FLIGHT TIME.
YES NO
IS THERE DC BUS VOLTAGE REFER TO OPERATIONAL CHECK

BETWEEN HOURMETER 1M7 + OF CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER.
AND AIRCRAFT GROUND?
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE GROUND REPLACE HOURMETER (1M7).

WIRE BETWEEN HOURMETER
1M7 AND AIRCRAFT GROUND.
407_MM_95_0094
Figure 95-95. Hourmeter — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 2
HOURMETER SYSTEM
CAUTION

NOTE
HOURMETER DOES NOT OPERATE

WHEN Ng IS GREATER THAN 55%
AND WEIGHT IS REMOVED
FROM LANDING GEAR.
CLOCK/OAT/VOLTMETER
INDICATION (4M5) RECORDS
FLIGHT TIME DURING FLIGHT TEST.
YES NO
REPAIR/REPLACE WIRING REFER TO OPERATIONAL

OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN CHECK OF CLOCK/OAT/
4TB2 KY AND HOURMETER (1M7). VOLTMETER INDICATION (4M5).
REPLACE HOURMETER (1M7).
407_MM_95_0095
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 3
HOURMETER SYSTEM
CAUTION

NOTE
HOURMETER OPERATES
WITH ENGINE SHUTDOWN.
ENGINE OUT HORN

OPERATES NORMALLY.
YES NO
REPLACE ENGINE OUT RELAY 1K2. REFER TO CHAPTER 96

FOR OPERATIONAL CHECK
OF ENGINE OUT SYSTEM.
407_MM_95_0096
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SECTION II: INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT)
95-199. GARMIN G1000H INTEGRATED • Section 8 – Return to Service Testing

AVIONIC SYSTEM — OPERATIONAL
AND SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE • Section 9 – Periodic Maintenance
INFORMATION (S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT) • Section 10 – System Reconfiguration
For operational information on the Garmin G1000H In addition to the information and maintenance
integrated avionics system that is not contained in this procedures contained in the BHT-407-MM concerning
manual, refer to the following documents: the Garmin G1000H integrated avionics system,
reference to the Garmin G1000/G1000H System
Maintenance Manual for supplemental information and
• Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s
procedures is also required.
Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00)
95-200. INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM —
• Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck –
GENERAL (S/N 54300 AND
Cockpit Reference Guide for the Bell 407GX
(190-01254-00) SUBSEQUENT)
The Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s NOTE

Guide provides detailed system and operational
Refer to the following documents for more
information while the Garmin G1000H Integrated
specific operational information on the
Flight Deck – Cockpit Reference Guide for the
Garmin G1000H integrated avionics
Bell 407GX provides higher level quick-reference
system:
data.
• Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s
Supplemental maintenance information specific to the Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00)
Garmin G1000H integrated avionics system is
available in the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance • Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck –
Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Cockpit Reference Guide for the Bell 407GX
Chapter 95). (190-01254-00)
The Garmin G1000/G1000H System Maintenance On 407GX helicopters S/N 54300 and subsequent, the
Manual contains the following Sections: Garmin G1000H integrated avionics system provides
flight instrument, Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
• Section 1 – Introduction (EICAS), audio panel and Communication Navigation
and Surveillance (CNS), flight management, hazard
• Section 2 – Overview avoidance, and other addition features. The primary
displays (Figure 95-98) include a Primary Flight
• Section 3 – LRU Descriptions Display (PFD) and a Multi-Function Display (MFD).
In this system, traditional instruments are replaced

• Section 4 – Configuration Mode
with an easy-to-scan PFD that features a large
horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed,
• Section 5 – Troubleshooting and course deviation information.
• Section 6 – Replacement Procedures In addition to the flight instruments, engine, navigation,

communication, terrain, traffic, weather, and Crew
• Section 7 – LRU Software Installation and Alerting System (CAS) information are also presented
Testing on the PFD.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4 5
3 6
160
20
9 A0L T 1 7
140 AIRSPEED 40 8 2
MASTER
EMERGENCY USE ONLY
120 KNOTS
7 3 W/C
60 WARNING
ELT ARM
ELT XMIT
100
80
6 5 4 PUSH TO MUTE
CAUTION RPM RADIO CALL THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN

TEST / RESET: PRESS TO XMIT
WAIT 1 SEC PRESS TO ARM
N407GX COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
FUEL CAPACITY BASIC 869 LBS FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 WITH DIRECT
TEST WITH AUX 998.9 LBS REVERSION TO MANUAL INSTALLED. REFER TO
PEDAL FADEC FUEL QTY DU FADEC ON (JET A AT 15°C) FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION
AUTO FUEL
8
MAN VALVE
OVSPD FWD TANK BACKUP MODE OFF

FLOAT FIRE STOP
VENT VENT
GARMIN
GMA-350
MKR MAN
MUTE
COM1 COM2 COM3 NAV1 AUX TEL MUSIC SQ
MIC1 MIC2 MIC3 NAV2 PILOT COPLT PASS SPKR VOL

PUSH TO
SPLIT COM PA DISTRIBUTE
CRSR
ATTD TRIM
DN
L R
UP
TRIGGER:
1st - ICS
1
2nd - RAD
LDG LTS
QUIET BOTH
F
W START
D
CARGO RELEASE
NORMAL OFF
FLOAT TA
ARM MUTE
DISENG
FLOAT
INFLATE
1. Audio panel (GMA 350H)

2. Multi-Function Display Unit (MFD) (GDU 1040H)
3. Emergency locator transmitter switch (optional kit)
4. Standby airspeed indicator
5. Standby altimeter
6. Master warning/caution light/mute switch
7. RPM warning light/mute switch
8. Primary Flight Display (PFD) (GDU 1040H)
407_MD-2_0001+
Figure 95-98. Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map • Wi-Fi datalink and storage unit (GDL 59H)
with navigation information, while the left portion of the (Chapter 97) (optional kit)
MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS). The EIS displays the engine, electrical, and fuel • Iridium transceiver (GRS 56H) (Chapter 97)
system information. (optional kit)
In the event of a PFD or MFD failure, the G1000H • Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) (GTS 800)
system automatically switches to reversionary (Chapter 97) (optional kit)
(backup) mode. In reversionary mode, all important
flight information is presented on the remaining display • Radar altimeter (RA 4500) (Chapter 97)
in the same format as in normal operating mode. (optional kit)
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable A description of the primary LRUs is provided under its
Units (LRUs): applicable chapter and section. For the installed
locations of the primary LRUs, refer to Figure 95-99.
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) and For an overview of the integrated avionics system
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H) architecture, refer to Figure 95-100.
The instrument systems include electro-mechanical

• Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
(standby instruments) or electronic instruments
(GIA 63H)
(integrated display system). The instrument system
includes the following instruments:
• Air Data Computer (ADC) (GDC 74H) and
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe
• Standby instruments
(GTP 59)
• Integrated flight display system
• Airframe and engine system processor
(GEA 71H) • Engine Indicating System (EIS) instruments
• Engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) 1. Standby Instruments. The standby instruments
include the instruments that follow:
• Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS) (GRS 77H) and magnetometer • Standby airspeed indicator
(GMU 44)
• Standby altimeter
• Audio panel (GMA 350H) (Chapter 97)
• Standby magnetic compass
• Mode S transponder with extended squitter
(GTX 33H ES) (Chapter 97) The standby airspeed indicator and the standby
altimeter receive inputs from the following primary
• XM weather and radio satellite datalink source:
receiver (GDL 69AH) (Chapter 97) (optional
kit) • Pitot-static system
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL B
A
INTEGRATED CHIPS
HARNESS WI-FI DATALINK
AIR DATA AVIONICS RECEIVER
COMPUTER UNIT NO. 1 (GDL 59H)
(ADC) (GIA 63H) (OPTIONAL KIT)
TRANSPONDER (GDC 74H)
(GTX 33H ES)
INTEGRATED
AVIONICS
UNIT NO. 2
(GIA 63H)
AIRFRAME AND
ENGINE SYSTEM
PROCESSOR
(GEA 71H)
XM WEATHER
RECEIVER
(GDL 69AH)
(OPTIONAL KIT) CHIPS
HARNESS
VIEW A
LOOKING FORWARD
(INSTRUMENT PANEL AND SHROUD REMOVED FOR CLARITY)
407gc_MM_95_0165a
Figure 95-99. G1000H Integrated Avionics System — Primary Component Locations (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent) (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
ENGINE SIGNAL SYSTEM (TAS) (GTS 800)
CONDITIONER (OPTIONAL KIT) IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
(GSC 46) (GSR 56) (OPTIONAL KIT)
ATTITUDE AND HEADING

REFERENCE SYSTEM
(AHRS) (GRS 77H)
RADAR ALTIMETER
TRANSCEIVER (RA 4500)
(OPTIONAL KIT)
DETAIL B
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_95_0165b
Figure 95-99. G1000H Integrated Avionics System — Primary Component Locations (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent) (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NO. 1
AUDIO GIA 63H
FREE FLIGHT GDL 59H GSR 56H GDL 69AH GTS 800
RA 4500 WI-FI DATALINK & IRIDIUM DATALINK (XM WEATHER/ NO. 1
ARINC 429 RS 232 TRAFFIC ADVISORY GIA 63H
RAD ALT (KIT) STORAGE (KIT) (KIT) AUDIO) (KIT) TA INHIBIT 2 SYSTEM (TAS) CAS MESSAGE AUDIO ALERT
(KIT)
AUDIO
AUDIO MGT EXCEED
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB MGT MISCOMP
(COLLECTIVE SWITCH)
HTAWS/TAS MUTE NOTE: NG EXCEED

HSDB (HIGH SPEED DATA BUS) HSDB NG MISCOMP
IF PFD FAILS, NP EXCEED 1
AURAL TA ALERT
TA INHIBIT 1
CONFIGURATION MFD WILL GENERATE NP MISCOMP
AUDIO ALERT CAS MESSAGE AIRFRAME DISCRETE INPUT MODULE THESE MESSAGES NR MISCOMP
Q EXCEED
1 BATTERY HOT BATTERY THERMAL SWICH
GDU 1040H COM / VOICE ALERT AUDIO
GMA 350H
COM / VOICE ALERT AUDIO GDU 1040H Q MISCOMP
1 5 ENGINE FIRE FIRE OVERHEAT DETECTOR (MFD)
RS 232
(PFD)
AUDIO PANEL RS 232 ALTN DATA FAIL
3 ENGINE OUT ENGINE OUT RELAY HSDB
HSDB
NG OAT LIMIT
4 FADEC FAIL FADEC ECU
CONFIGURATION FADEC MAINT
BAGGAGE DOOR BAGGAGE DOOR SWITCH MODULE
FADEC DEGRADED FADEC ECU
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
FADEC FAULT FADEC ECU
ARINC 429 GDC 74H ARINC 429
FADEC MANUAL FADEC AUTO/MANUAL RELAY RS 232 AIR DATA
COMPUTER (ADC)
FLOAT ARM FLOAT ARM SWITCH
ARINC 429
ANT: ANT:
Standard Garmin Equipment
FUEL FILTER A/F FUEL FILTER SWITCH COM RS 232

GTP 59 COM
ARTEX ELT
NAV/GS GMU 44 NAV/GS ARINC 429
FUEL LOW LOW LEVEL DETECTOR GPS (MAGNETOMETER) RS 485 (OAT PROBE) GPS (C406 N-HM)
1 NO. 1 (KIT)
FUEL VALVE FUEL SHUTOFF VALUE NO. 2
GIA 63H ARINC 429
ARINC 429
GRS 77H GIA 63H
GEN FAIL GENERATOR RELAY INTEGRATED ARINC 429
INTEGRATED AIRFRAME DISCRETE INPUT CAS MESSAGE AUDIO ALERT
AVIONICS UNIT ARINC 429 ATTITUDE AND HEADING RS 232 AVIONICS UNIT
HEATER OVERTMP HEATER TEMP SENSOR (AIRCOMM STC) RS 232 REFERENCE SYSTEM
(AHRS)
L/FUEL BOOST L/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-MAIN CELL CONFIGURATION BATTERY THERMAL SWICH BATTERY HOT 1
ANT:
L/FUEL XFR L/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-FWD CELL XPDR
MODULE EMERGENCY USE ONLY
ENGINE OUT RELAY ENGINE OUT 3
RS 232 GTX 33H ES RS 232
LITTER DOOR LITTER DOOR SWITCH ELT ARM
(TRANSPONDER) FADEC ECU ENGINE OVSPD
R/FUEL BOOST R/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-MAIN CELL CONFIGURATION ELT XMIT
XMSN OIL TEMP SWITCH XMSN OIL TEMP 1
R/FUEL XFR R/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-FWD CELL RS 485 MODULE TEST / RESET: PRESS TO XMIT
GEA 71H RS 485
WAIT 1 SEC PRESS TO ARM
XMSN OIL PRESS SWITCH XMSN OIL PRESS
AUTO RELIGHT AUTO RELIGHT RELAY AIRFRAME AND ENGINE
SYSTEM PROCESSOR BATTERY RELAY BATTERY RLY
ENGINE ANTI-ICE ENG ANTI-ICE PRESSURE SWITCH HYD. PRESS SWITCH HYDRAULIC SYS 1
INSTR FAN FAN CONTROL RELAY PEDAL STOP POSITION SWITCH PEDAL STOP
RESTART FAULT FADEC ECU GSC 46
ENGINE SIGNAL CYCLIC CENTERING SWITCH CYC CTR
START STARTER RELAY CONDITIONNER FAN CONTROL RELAY INSTR FAN
FLOAT TEST FLOAT TEST SWITCH AND FADEC ECU QUIET MODE SEL
FLOAT INFLATION SWITCH
QUIET/NORMAL SWITCH/FADEC ECU QUIET MODE ON
TRQ NR NG NP ENG OIL FUEL WOG
ENG XMSN OIL XMSN WEIGHT ON GEAR SWITCH
AMPS (ENGINE (XMSN (ENGINE (ENGINE PRESSURE PRESSURE
OIL TEMP PRESSURE (SHUNT) PRESSURE MONOPOLE MONOPOLE MONOPOLE OIL TEMP (TRANSDUCER) (TRANSDUCER)
(BULB) (TRANSDUCER) TRANSDUCER) SENSOR/ SENSOR/ (BULB)
OPTIONAL SENSOR)
Airframe Analogs & Discretes
FADEC ECU) FADEC ECU)

AUDIO ALERT LEGEND GARMIN EQUIPMENT
(GIA NO.1 OR NO.2 GENERATED) (KITS)
PRIMARY
DATA SOURCE
1 SINGLE PING STANDARD
ALTERNATE ENG CHIP XMSN CHIP TAIL ROTOR
GARMIN EQUIPMENT PUSH TO MUTE MGT DATA SOURCES DETECTORS (2) DETECTORS CHIP DETECTOR ENGINE FADEC ECU
2 CONTINUOUS SOLID TONE FUEL QTY (2+ FREEWHEEL)
(SIGNAL (ENGINE (PRIMARY DATA SOURCES FOR
3 CONTINUOUS FAST-PULSING TONE NON-GARMIN RPM 2 CONDITIONER) THERMO- ENGINE CHIP 1 XMSN CHIP 1 T/R CHIP 1 ARINC 429 NG, NP, NR, MGT)
EQUIPMENT (KITS) COUPLE)
RPM WARNING PBA (ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE
4 REPEATING DING-DONG TONE PEDAL STOP FOR TORQUE Q).
SOLENOID STATUS
EXISTING AIRCRAFT
5 CONTINUOUS SWEEPING SOUND EQUIPMENT
FOR RUSSIAN CERTIFICATION
MASTER
W/C
TEST
WARNING 1 PEDAL FADEC FUEL QTY DU FADEC ON
NOTE AUTO FUEL
CAUTION 1 MAN VALVE
REFER TO THE GARMIN G1000H PILOT’S GUIDE (190-01255-00) OR THE
MODE OFF
G1000H SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL (190-00907-00) FOR SPECIFIC WARNING/CAUTION PBA FLOAT FIRE STOP OVSPD FWD TANK BACKUP
G1000H SYSTEM MESSAGES, AUDIO ALERTS AND OTHER RELATED INFORMATION.
THIS SCHEMATIC PROVIDES PRIMARY IAS ARCHITECTURE AND IS NOT INTENTED TO

DEPICT ALL BACKUP REDUNDANCY FEATURES. REFER TO BHT-407-FM-2, SECTION 3,
407_MM_95_0008+
BHT-407-MD-2, SECTION 1 OR BHT-407-MM-10, CHAPTER 95.
Figure 95-100. G1000H Integrated Avionics System — Architecture Overview (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Integrated Flight Display System. The integrated • Transmission oil pressure and temperature
flight display system includes the following primary indication system
flight instruments, which are displayed on the PFD:
• Ammeter indication system
• Airspeed indicator
• Voltmeter indication system
• Altimeter
• Fuel quantity gauging system
• Attitude indicator
• Fuel pressure indication system
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Fuel flow indication system
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
The engine indicating system receives inputs from the
• Radar altimeter (RA 4500) (optional kit)
following primary sources:
(Chapter 97)
• Miscellaneous indications for Outside Air • Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
Temperature (OAT) and wind data are also (GIA 63H)
provided
• Additional display features of the PFD are (GEA 71H)
provided in paragraph 95-299
• Engine signal conditioner (GSC 46)
The Integrated Flight Display System receives inputs
from the following primary sources: • Rolls-Royce FADEC ECU
• Pitot-static system For information on the Crew Alerting System (CAS),

refer to Chapter 96.
• Air Data Computer (ADC) (GDC 74H)
For information on the following installations, refer to
• Attitude and Heading Reference System Chapter 97:
(AHRS) (GRS 77H) (Chapter 97)
• Crew Intercommunication System (ICS)
• Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (GMA 350H)
(GIA 63H)
• Aft ICS (Five Station) Kit
3. Engine Indicating System (EIS). The engine
indicating system includes the instrument systems that
• Transponder Mode S with Extended Squitter
follow:
(GTX 33H ES)
• Power Situation Indicator (PSI)

• RAD ALT (RA 4500) Kit
• Torque indication system
• TAS (GTS 800) Kit
• Measured gas temperature indication system
• XM Satellite Wx/Radio (GDL 69AH) Kit
• Gas producer indication system
• Datalink (Wi-Fi/Iridium) (GDL 59) Kit
• Dual tachometer system
• ELT Kit (C406 N-HM)
• Engine oil pressure and temperature
indication system For information on additional kits, refer to Chapter 99.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-201. INSTRUMENT PANEL — 2. Remove the shroud assemblies (paragraph

DESCRIPTION (S/N 54300 AND 95-214).
SUBSEQUENT)
3. Identify all connectors and tubing for ease of
re-installation.
The instrument panel (Figure 95-98) is installed at an
angle of 5°. The instrument panel contains all of the
flight, propulsion, fuel system, and miscellaneous 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (22P1 and
instruments which are displayed on the Primary Flight 10P1) (5 and 6, Figure 95-101) from the support and
Display (PFD) and the Multi-Function Display (MFD). It put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136).
also contains the standby airspeed indicator and
standby altimeter, as well as the various switches and 5. Disconnect the tube assembly (static) (14) from
pushbutton annunciators. The magnetic compass is the standby altimeter indicator (3410M1) (12).
installed on a bracket on the right side of the flight
compartment. 6. Disconnect the tube assemblies (static and pitot)
(15 and 16) from the standby airspeed indicator
(3410M2) (13).
95-202. INSTRUMENT PANEL — REMOVAL
7. Disconnect the tube assemblies (pitot and static)

(19 and 18) from the air data computer (GDC 74H)
MATERIALS REQUIRED (17).
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 8. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the
instruments and on the tubing.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs 9. On the right side, remove the bolt (8) and washer
(9) to disconnect the strut (1) from the instrument
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs panel (2). Do the same to disconnect the strut on the
left side.

WARNING from instrument panel (2).
11. Carefully remove the instrument panel assembly

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (2) from the support assembly (7).
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 12. If required, remove the Primary Flight Display
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3 and 4)
from the instrument panel (2) (paragraph 95-220).
NOTE
13. If required, remove the standby airspeed indicator
Remove components only to the extent (3410M2) (13) from the instrument panel (2)
necessary to perform the required (paragraph 95-287).
maintenance.
14. If required, remove the standby altimeter indicator
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power (3410M1) (12) from the instrument panel (2)
from the helicopter. (paragraph 95-292).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A 1 1
B
2
6 5
8
9
10
11
1 1
DETAIL A
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_95_0002a
Figure 95-101. Instrument Panel Assembly — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
18
VIEW B
1. Strut 11. Screw

2. Instrument panel 12. Standby altimeter indicator (3410M1)
3. Primary Flight Display (PDF) (3160DS2) 13. Standby airspeed indicator (3410M2)
4. Multi-Function Display (MDF) (3160DS1) 14. Tube assembly (static)
5. Electrical connector (22P1) 15. Tube assembly (static)
6. Electrical connector (10P1) 16. Tube assembly (pitot)
7. Support assembly 17. Air data computer (GDC 74H)
8. Bolt 18. Tube assembly (pitot)
9. Washer 19. Tube assembly (static)
10. Washer
SEALANT (C-251)
NOTE
1 Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the bonding area.
Figure 95-101. Instrument Panel Assembly — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-203. INSTRUMENT PANEL — CLEANING 95-205. INSTRUMENT PANEL — REPAIR
MATERIALS REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-305 Aliphatic Naphtha C-204 Epoxy Polyamide

Primer
C-516 Clean Cloth
C-245 1 Polyurethane Coating
1. Clean the instrument panel (2, Figure 95-101) NOTE:

with a clean cloth (C-516) moistened with aliphatic
naphtha (C-305). 1 Use color code 36307 per FED-STD-595
2. Dry the instrument panel (2) with a clean cloth If the paint on the instrument panel assembly (2,
(C-516). Figure 95-101) is damaged or partially removed, apply
one coat of epoxy polyamide primer (C-204) and two
coats of polyurethane coating (C-245) to the area
95-204. INSTRUMENT PANEL — INSPECTION
(BHT-ALL-SPM, chapter 4).
NOTE 95-206. INSTRUMENT PANEL — INSTALLATION

primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the MATERIALS REQUIRED
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
be used when the part is installed on the
helicopter. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-251 Sealant
1. Visually examine the instrument panel (2,
• Cracks, damage, and corrosion to the WARNING

instrument panel
• Condition of the paint; touch up any damaged OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
area(s) (paragraph 95-205) WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
• Loose or missing rivets
1. Put the instrument panel (2, Figure 95-101) in
• Condition of the nutplates position on the support assembly (7).
Replace or repair the instrument panel as required. 2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the support
assembly (7) and the instrument panel (2) are clean
Visually examine all the attaching hardware for wear, and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
damage, and corrosion damage. Replace as required. BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Install the screws (11) and the washers (10) to the 12. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from all
instrument panel (2). Tighten the bolts. the open ports.
13. Connect the tube assemblies (pitot and static) (19

NOTE and 18) on the air data computer (GDC 74H) (17).
If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of 14. Connect the tube assemblies (static and pitot) (15
corrosion at the time of installation, the and 16) on the standby airspeed indicator (3410M2)
following step is not required. (13).
4. Make sure the bond resistance between the

support assembly (7) and the instrument panel (2) 15. Connect the tube assembly (static) (14) on the
meets Class R-II electrical bonding requirements standby altimeter indicator (3410M1) (12).
NOTE
5. Make sure the mating surfaces of the brackets on
Refer to Chapter 98 for correct installation
the instrument panel (2) are clean and show no signs
of the electrical connectors and contacts.
of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
16. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs.
6. On the right side, install the bolt (8) and the

washer (9) to connect the strut (1) to the instrument 17. Connect the electrical connectors (22P1 and
panel (4). Do the same to connect the strut on the left 10P1) (5 and 6) on the support.
side.
18. If previously removed, install the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3
7. On the right side, tighten the bolt (8). Do the
and 4) on the instrument panel (2) (paragraph 95-223).
same on the left side.
19. Install the shroud assemblies (paragraph

NOTE 95-218).
were clean and showed no signs of 20. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
corrosion at the time of installation, the helicopter.
following step is not required.
21. Make sure all systems are operational
8. Make sure the bond resistance between the strut (Chapter 95, Chapter 96, Chapter 97).
(1) and the bracket of the instrument (2) meets Class
R-II electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8). 22. Do a leak check of the pitot-static system
(paragraph 95-260).
9. Apply sealant (C-251) to seal the electrical

bonding area of the struts attachment. 95-207. GLARESHIELD ASSEMBLY
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
10. If previously removed, install the standby
The glareshield assembly (1, Figure 95-102) reduces
altimeter indicator (3410M1) (12) on the instrument
the effects of sun glare for the pilot and copilot and can
panel (2) (paragraph 95-295).
be adjusted in position (forward or aft) during flight.
The glareshield assembly is located above the
11. If previously removed, install the standby instrument panel assembly and mounted on extension
airspeed indicator (3410M2) (13) on the instrument slides. The glareshield is a bonded assembly of a
panel (2) (paragraph 95-290). composite laminate.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Glareshield assembly
2. Thumb screw
3. Conical washer
A 4. Washer
5. Washer
6. Screw
7. Screw
8. Washer
9. Washer
10. Washer
11. Extension slide
12. Shroud assembly
13. Instrument panel assembly
SEALANT (C-251)
1
3 2
5
4
B
8
9
7
0.06 IN. 13 10
(1.5 mm)
TYP
12
11 1
VIEW B
VIEW LOOKING 12
VIEW A
FORWARD
S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT
NOTE
1 Apply barrier tape (C-456) on the extension slide (11) between the glareshied assembly
(1) and the extension slides.
407gc_MM_95_0007
Figure 95-102. Glareshield Assembly — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-208. GLARESHIELD ASSEMBLY — REMOVAL 95-210. GLARESHIELD ASSEMBLY —

INSPECTION
WARNING NOTE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS primarily intended when the part or
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR component has been removed from the
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). requirements, applicable criteria may also
helicopter.
NOTE
Remove components only to the extent 1. Visually examine the glareshield assembly (1,
necessary to perform the required Figure 95-102) for the following:
maintenance.
• Cracks, wear, damage, and delamination to
1. Set the battery switch to OFF, and remove the
the glareshield assembly
• Condition and debonding of the seal; replace

2. Remove the thumb screw (2, Figure 95-102),
as required (paragraph 95-211)
conical washers (3), and washers (4 and 5).
Replace the glareshield assembly (1) as required.

3. Remove the screws (6) and the glareshield
assembly (1).
2. Examine the extension slides (11) for damage,
4. If necessary, remove any of the extension slides corrosion, roughness, and binding.
(11) as follows:
Replace the extension slides (11) as required.
a. Remove the shroud assembly (12) only to the
necessary extent to access the fasteners of the 3. Examine all the attaching hardware for condition.
extension slide (11) (paragraph 95-214). Replace as required.
b. At two locations, remove the screw (7),

95-211. GLARESHIELD ASSEMBLY — REPAIR
washers (8, 9, and 10), and extension slide (11) from
the shroud assembly (12).
95-209. GLARESHIELD ASSEMBLY — CLEANING MATERIALS REQUIRED
1. Clean the glareshield assembly (1, Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

Figure 95-102) in accordance with the instructions
provided in the BHT-ALL-SPM, Chapter 5 for the NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
headliners and trim panels.
C-300 Adhesive
C-456 Barrier Tape
1. Replace and bond the seal with adhesive (C-300)

in accordance with the instructions provided in the
BHT-ALL-SPM, Chapter 7 for the silicone bonding.
2. Replace the barrier tape (C-456) on the extension

slide (11, Figure 95-102), as required.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-212. GLARESHIELD ASSEMBLY — 4. Install the thumb screw (2), conical washers (3),
INSTALLATION and washers (4 and 5) on the glareshield assembly
(1). Hand tighten the thumb screw to secure the
glareshield assembly in place.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 5. Make sure to have a gap of 0.06 inch (1.5 mm)
between the inner side of glareshield (1) and the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE external surface of the shroud assembly (12) all
around.
C-251 Sealant
95-213. SHROUD ASSEMBLY (S/N 54300 AND

SUBSEQUENT)
WARNING
The shroud assembly (30, Figure 95-103) protects the

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS electrical and avionic components behind the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR instrument panel assembly (1). The shroud assembly
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC is located between the instrument panel and the aft
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). battery bulkhead. The shroud assembly consists of an
aluminum left lower shroud assembly (23), composite
1. If previously removed, install the extension slides left and right upper shroud assemblies (20 and 3), and
(11, Figure 95-102) as follows: a composite right lower shroud assembly (13).
a. Put the extension slide (11) in position on the

shroud assembly (12). 95-214. SHROUD ASSEMBLY — REMOVAL
b. At two locations, install the washer (10)

between the shroud assembly (12) and the extension WARNING
slide (11).
c. At two locations, install the washers (8 and 9)

and wet install the screws (7) with sealant (C-251). OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Tighten the screws. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
d. Install the shroud assembly (12) (paragraph EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
95-218).
2. Put the glareshield assembly (1) in position on NOTE

the extension slides (11). Remove components only to the extent
3. Wet install the screws (6) with sealant (C-251). maintenance.
Tighten the screws.
NOTE from the helicopter.
Make sure to install the conical washers (3)

with the conical feature opposite one 2. Remove the glareshield assembly (paragraph
another. 95-208).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
30
DETAIL A
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_95_0097a
Figure 95-103. Shroud Assembly — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) (Sheet 1 of 4)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4
(3 PLACES)
5
3
2 (6 PLACES)
7
(2 PLACES)
8
11
(3 PLACES)
10
VIEW B
9
1
12 (3 PLACES)
13
15 14
17 16
VIEW C
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1
(5 PLACES) 18
E
19
20 21 22 (4 PLACES)
23
(4 PLACES) 24
25 26
VIEW D
20
27
28
(2 PLACES)
29
VIEW E
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_95_0097c
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

2. Screw
3. Right upper shroud assembly
4. Screw
5. Washer
6. Screw
7. Washer
8. Bolt
9. Right upper door
10. Screw
11. Washer
12. Screw
13. Right lower shroud assembly
14. Screw
15. Washer
16. Screw
17. Washer
18. Screw
19. Screw
20. Left upper shroud assembly
21. Screw
22. Washer
23. Left lower shroud assembly
24. Screw
25. Bolt
26. Left upper door
27. Screw
28. Washer
29. Bolt
30. Shroud assembly
20 TO 25 IN-LBS
(2.3 TO 2.8 Nm)
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_95_0097d
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Remove the right upper shroud assembly (3, c. Move the left lower shroud assembly (23)
Figure 95-103) as follows: forward and remove.
a. Access the battery compartment and remove

the bolts (8) and the washers (7) from the support. 95-215. SHROUD ASSEMBLY — CLEANING
b. Remove the screws (2).

MATERIALS REQUIRED
c. Remove the screws (4) and the washers (5).
d. Remove the screws (6).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
e. Remove the screws (10) and the washers
C-305 Aliphatic Naphtha
(11).
C-516 Clean Cloth
f. Remove the right upper shroud assembly (3)
from the instrument panel assembly (1).
1. Clean the right and left upper shroud assemblies
4. Remove the right lower shroud assembly (13) as (3 and 20, Figure 95-103) and left and right lower
follows: shroud assemblies (23 and 13) with a clean cloth
(C-516) moistened with aliphatic naphtha (C-305).
a. Remove the screws (12).
2. Dry the parts with filtered compressed air and a
b. Remove the screw (16) and the washer (17) clean cloth (C-516).
from the right upper door (9).
95-216. SHROUD ASSEMBLY — INSPECTION
c. Remove the screws (14) and the washers (15)
from the right upper door (9).
NOTE
d. Remove the right lower shroud assembly (13)
from the instrument panel assembly (1).
5. Remove the left upper shroud assembly (20) as
follows:
a. Remove the screws (18 and19). helicopter.
b. Access the battery compartment and remove

the bolts (29) and the washers (28) from the support. NOTE
Contact product support engineering for
c. Remove the screws (27 and 24). information on wear and damage limits
applicable to structural parts but not
d. Remove the left upper shroud assembly (20) contained in this chapter or in the
from the instrument panel assembly (1). BHT-ALL-SRM.
6. Remove the left lower shroud assembly (23) as

1. Visually examine the right upper, right lower or
follows:
left upper shroud assemblies (3, 13, or 20,
a. Remove the bolt (25) from the left upper door
(26).
• Cracks, wear, damage and delamination
b. Remove the screws (21) and the washers (22)
from the left upper door (26). • Condition and debonding of the strip(s)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• Condition and debonding of the shield washer MATERIALS REQUIRED

(s)
• Visually examine all the bonded nutplates for
condition and debonding NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• Condition of the sealant around the strip (s) NOTE:
1 Use color code 37038 per FED-STD-595.

• Condition of the grommet. Replace as
required (paragraph 95-217)
NOTE
area(s) (paragraph 95-217) For information on the structural repair of
damaged components and repair limits not
Replace or repair the shroud assemblies (3, 13, and contained in this chapter or in the
20) as required (paragraph 95-217). BHT-ALL-SRM, contact Product Support
Engineering.
2. Visually examine the left lower shroud assembly
(4) for the following: 1. If there is evidence of damage to the lower left
shroud assembly (23, Figure 95-103), refer to the
• Cracks, wear, damage and corrosion damage BHT-ALL-SRM, Chapter 3 for information on the
applicable repair.
areas (paragraph 95-217) 2. If there is evidence of damage to the right upper,
right lower, or left upper shroud assemblies (3, 13, or
• Condition of the nutplates. Replace as 20), refer to the BHT-ALL-SRM, Chapter 4 for
required (BHT-ALL-SRM, Chapter 3) information on the applicable repair.
Replace or repair the applicable part (s) as required

3. If the paint on the right upper, right lower, left
(paragraph 95-217)
upper, or left lower shroud assemblies (3, 13, 20, or
23) is damaged or partially removed, apply one coat of
3. Visually examine all the attaching hardware for
epoxy polyamide primer (C-204) and two coats of
wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion damage.
polyurethane coating (C-245) to the area
Replace as required.
95-217. SHROUD ASSEMBLY — REPAIR
4. If sealant is damaged on the strips of the right
upper, right lower, or left upper shroud assemblies (3,
13, or 20), apply sealant (C-251) but do not exceed the
MATERIALS REQUIRED
height of the strip.
5. If the shield washer(s) are unbonded on the right
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE upper, right lower, or left upper shroud assemblies (3,
13, or 20), bond the shield washer(s) with sealant
C-204 Epoxy Polyamide (C-251).
Primer
C-245 Polyurethane Coating 6. If the shield washer(s) are damaged on the right
1
C-251 Sealant 13, or 20), replace as required.
C-325 Adhesive 7. If the grommet is damaged or unbonded on the

left upper or the right upper shroud assembly (3 or 20),
C-331 Adhesive
replace part in accordance with the non-structural
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
bonding instructions provided in the BHT-ALL-SPM,

NOTE
Chapter 7 with adhesive (C-325).
were clean and showed no signs of
8. As required, replace the nutplates on the right
corrosion at the time of installation, the
13, or 20) with adhesive (C-331) (BHT-ALL-SRM,
Chapter 3).
f. Make sure the bond resistance between the
left lower shroud assembly (23) and the instrument
95-218. SHROUD ASSEMBLY — INSTALLATION panel assembly (1) meets Class R-II electrical bonding
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
MATERIALS REQUIRED 2. Install the left upper shroud assembly (20) as

follows:
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the left
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE upper shroud assembly (20) and the instrument panel
assembly (1) are clean and show no signs of
C-251 Sealant
corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
WARNING b. Put the left upper shroud assembly (20) in

position on the instrument panel assembly (1) and the
left lower shroud assembly (23).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR c. Install the screws (24 and 27). Do not tighten
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC the screws at this time.
d. Access the battery compartment and install
1. Install the left lower shroud assembly (23, the bolts (29) and the washers (28) on the support. Do
Figure 95-103) as follows: not tighten the bolts at this time.
e. Install the screws (18 and 19) on the left upper

a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the left
shroud assembly (20). Tighten the screws.
lower shroud assembly (23) and the instrument panel
assembly (1) are clean and show no signs of
corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, f. Tighten the screws (24 and 27) and the
Chapter 8 for surface preparation. bolts (29).
b. From the forward area of the instrument panel NOTE

assembly (1), move the left lower shroud assembly
(23) in position between the left upper door (26) and If the mating surfaces of the components
the structure support. were clean and showed no signs of
c. Install the screws (21) and the washers (22)
on the left upper door (26). Do not tighten the screws g. Make sure the bond resistance between the
at this time. left upper shroud assembly (20) and the instrument
panel assembly (1) meets Class R-II electrical bonding
d. Install the bolt (25) on the left upper door (26). requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
Torque the bolts T .
3. Install the right lower shroud assembly (13) as
e. Tighten the screws (21). follows:
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the right g. Access the battery compartment and install
lower shroud assembly (13) and the instrument panel the bolts (8) and the washers (7) on the support.
assembly (1) are clean and acceptable for bonding. Tighten the bolts.
Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8.
h. Tighten the screws (2, 4, 6, and 10).
b. Put the right lower shroud assembly (13) in
position between the right upper door (9) and the
structure support with the screws (14) and the NOTE
washers (15). Do not tighten the screws at this time. If the mating surfaces of the components
c. Install the screw (16) and the washer (17) on corrosion at the time of installation, the
the right upper door (9). Do not tighten the screw at following step is not required.
this time.
i. Make sure the bond resistance between the
d. Install the screws (12) on the right lower right upper shroud assembly (3) and the instrument
shroud assembly (13). Tighten the screws. panel assembly (1) meets Class R-II electrical bonding
e. Tighten the screws (14 and 16).
5. Install the glareshield assembly (paragraph
95-212).
NOTE
If the mating surfaces of the components 95-219. INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED
COMPONENTS (S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT)
f. Make sure the bond resistance between the For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation
right lower shroud assembly (13) and the instrument procedures of the instrument panel mounted
panel assembly (1) meets Class R-II electrical bonding components, refer to the following paragraphs:
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
4. Install the right upper shroud assembly (3) as Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H)
follows: (paragraph 95-220 through paragraph 95-223)
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the right • Master Warning/Caution Pushbutton
upper shroud assembly (3) and the instrument panel Assembly (3150S1) (paragraph 95-224
assembly (1) are clean and show no signs of through paragraph 95-227)
Chapter 8 for surface preparation. • RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly
(3160S2) (paragraph 95-228 through
b. Put the right upper shroud assembly (3) in paragraph 95-231)
position on the instrument panel assembly (1).
• FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) (paragraph
c. Install the screws (10) and the washers (11). 95-232 through paragraph 95-235)
Do not tighten the screws at this time.
• Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) (paragraph 95-236
d. Install the screws (6). Do not tighten the through paragraph 95-239)
screws at this time.
NOTE
e. Install the screws (4) and the washers (5). Do
not tighten the screws at this time. The fire test and float test pushbutton
switches are installed as part of the optional
f. Install the screws (2). Do not tighten the Fire Detection System kit (BHT-407-II-19)
screws at this time. and optional Emergency Float kit
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
(BHT-407-II-1), and are not installed as part

NOTE
of the basic helicopter.
• DU Backup, Fuel Quantity, FADEC Overspeed necessary to perform the required
Test, Pedal Stop Test, Fire Test, and Float Test maintenance.
Pushbutton Switches (paragraph 95-240
through paragraph 95-243) NOTE
The procedure is provided for the Primary
• Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS) Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) on the right
(paragraph 95-244 through paragraph 95-247) side. The procedure is the same for the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1)
95-220. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND on the left side, except where indicated.
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)
(GDU 1040H) — REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. CAUTION
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
MAKE SURE THAT YOU HOLD THE
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs DISPLAY UNIT IN PLACE WITH YOUR
HAND AT ALL TIME.
WARNING 2. Loosen the screws (4, Figure 95-104) on the PFD

(3160DS2) (3).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3. Pull out the PFD (3160DS2) (3) from the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR instrument panel assembly (1).
4. On the right side, disconnect the electrical
connector (3160DS2P1) (5) from the PFD (3160DS2)
(3).
CAUTION
5. On the left side, disconnect the electrical
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE DISPLAY connector (3160DS1P1) from the MFD (3160DS1) (2).
UNIT USE AN APPROVED STORAGE
CONTAINER. 6. Remove the PFD (3160DS2) (3) from the
instrument panel assembly (1).
CAUTION 7. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the

electrical connectors.
TO P R E V E N T D A M A G E O N T H E
DISPLAY UNIT, DO NOT PUSH ON THE 8. If the PFD (3160DS2) (3) is replaced, remove the
DISPLAY UNIT SCREEN. cards.
95-00-00
Page 282 Rev. 38 4 OCT 2013 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
BHT-407-MM-10

2. Multi-Function Display (GDU 1040H) (3160DS1)
A 3. Primary Flight Display (GDU 1040H) (3160DS2)
4. Screw
5. Electrical connector (3160A2P1)
18 TO 22 IN-LBS
(2.0 TO 2.5 Nm)
4
VIEW A
NOTE
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (3) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (2) are identical part numbered items.
407gc_MM_95_0100
Figure 95-104. Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H) — Removal
and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-221. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) (GDU requirements, applicable criteria may also
1040H) — CLEANING be used when the part or component is
installed on the helicopter.
MATERIALS REQUIRED 1. Visually examine the PFD (3160DS2) or MFD

(3160DS1) (3 or 2, Figure 95-104) for the following:
• Cracks or crazing
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• Mechanical damage and corrosion damage
C-516 Clean Cloth
Repair or replace as necessary
CAUTION 2. Visually examine the screen of the PFD

(3160DS2) or MFD (3160DS1) (3 or 2) for the
following:
DO NOT SPRAY ANY CLEANING
SOLUTION, SOLVENT, OR FLUID OF • Cracks or crazing
ANY KIND DIRECTLY ON THE DISPLAY
UNIT SCREEN OR ANYWHERE ON THE • Mechanical damage
FACE OF THE UNIT.
Repair or replace as necessary.
DO NOT TOUCH ANY OTHER PART OF
THE FRONT SURFACE OF THE DISPLAY
UNIT OR SCREEN WITH AN ABRASIVE 3. Visually examine the PFD (3160DS2) or MFD
CLOTH OR CLEANERS. DO NOT USE (3160DS1) (3 or 2) for the following:
ANY CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA. • Loose button(s) and knobs
1. Use a clean cloth (C-516) to remove any dirt, • Softkeys for cracks, crazing, and mechanical
dust, or contaminant on the screen of the Primary damage
Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) or Multi-Function
Display (MFD) (3160DS1) (3 or 2, Figure 95-104).
95-222. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND 4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) (GDU wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion
1040H) — INSPECTION damage. Replace as necessary.
NOTE 95-223. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) (GDU
The procedure is provided for the Primary 1040H) — INSTALLATION
Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) on the right
side. The procedure is the same for the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1)
on the left side, except where indicated. WARNING
NOTE
The following inspection criteria are WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
primarily intended when the part or NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
component has been removed from the EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
22 INCH-POUNDS (2.03 TO 2.49 NM)

CAN DAMAGE THE RACK.
CAUTION
5. Install the PFD (3160DS2) (3) on the instrument
panel assembly (1). Torque the screws T .
MAKE S URE THAT YOU HOLD THE
DISPLAY UNIT IN PLACE WITH YOUR
HAND AT ALL TIME. NOTE
The front surface of the display unit is a
non-conductive finish and should not be
CAUTION used for the electrical bonding
measurements.
TO P R E V E N T D A M A G E O N T H E
DISPLAY UNIT, DO NOT PUSH ON THE NOTE
DISPLAY UNIT GLASS SCREEN. If the mating surfaces of the components
NOTE corrosion at the time of installation, the
The procedure is provided for the Primary
Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) on the right 6. Make sure the bond resistance between the
side. The procedure is the same for the instrument panel assembly (1) and the PFD
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) (3160DS2) (3) meets Class R-II electrical bonding
on the left side, except where indicated. requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the instrument 7. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
panel assembly (1, Figure 95-104) and the PFD helicopter.
(3160DS2) (3) are clean and show no signs of
Chapter 8 for surface preparation. NOTE
The following step is not required if the
2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from same component as that removed is being
the electrical connectors. reinstalled and repair of the component did
not take place.
3. On the right side, connect the electrical connector
(3160DS2P1) (5) to the PFD (3160DS2 (3). 8. If a new, repaired, or replacement PFD
(3160DS2) (3) or MFD (3160DS1) (2) was installed,
complete the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
4. On the left side, connect the electrical connector
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H) Software
(3160DS1P1) to the MFD (3160DS1) (2).
and Configuration Loading Procedure (paragraph
95-364).
CAUTION 9. Do the GDU Testing in Section 7 and the return to

service tests as specified in Section 8 of the G1000/
G1000H System Maintenance Manual (190-00907-00)
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW. A (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). Conduct the testing
TORQUE OF MORE THAN 18 TO as specified for two display installations.
95-00-00
Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99 4 OCT 2013 Rev. 38 Page 285
BHT-407-MM-10
95-224. MASTER WARNING/CAUTION b. Rotate the two mounting screws (4)

PUSHBUTTON ASSEMBLY (3150S1) — counterclockwise to move the mounting cam (5) out of
REMOVAL the recessed area of the inner sleeve (7).
c. Tag and disconnect the wires from the

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED electrical connector (11) with the insertion/extraction
tool (M81969/14-01) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE d. Put protective tape on the exposed ends of all

the electrical leads.
Tool
e. Press on the release (12) and remove the
electrical connector (11) from the outer sleeve (10).
WARNING f. Remove the base (6) from the inner

sleeve (7).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS g. Pull on the locking tab (9) and remove the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR inner sleeve (7) from the outer sleeve (10).
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 4. Remove the outer sleeve (10) from the
instrument panel assembly (8).
NOTE
95-225. MASTER WARNING/CAUTION
PUSHBUTTON ASSEMBLY (3150S1) —
necessary to perform the required CLEANING
maintenance.
Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power electrical components equipment (Chapter 96).

2. Remove the right upper shroud assembly PUSHBUTTON ASSEMBLY (3150S1) —
(paragraph 95-214). INSPECTION
Refer to the inspection procedure for miscellaneous

electrical components (Chapter 96).
CAUTION
MAKE SURE THE MASTER CAUTION/ PUSHBUTTON ASSEMBLY (3150S1) —
INSTALLATION
WARNING SWITCH (3150S1)
PUSHBUTTON IS IN THE EXTENDED
(OUT) POSITION PRIOR TO
EXTRACTING THE PUSHBUTTON. SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
3. Remove the master caution/warning switch NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

(3150S1) (1, Figure 95-105) as follows:
Tool
a. Pull the cap (2) out of the base (6).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE
DETAIL B
12
11
10
VIEW A
(S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT)
9
6
8 1. Master warning/caution PBA (3150S1)
2. Cap
3. Flex circuit
4. Mounting screw
7 5. Mounting cam
1 6. Base
5 7. Inner sleeve
DETAIL B 8. Instrument panel assembly
4
9. Locking tab
3 10. Outer sleeve
2 11. Electrical connector
12. Release
407gc_MM_95_0109
Figure 95-105. Master Warning/Caution Pushbutton Assembly (3150S1) — Removal and Installation
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-228. RPM WARNING PUSHBUTTON

WARNING ASSEMBLY (3160S2) — REMOVAL
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED

EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NOTE Tool
Refer to the applicable wiring diagram
(Chapter 98) for the correct installation of
the electrical wires and contact.
WARNING
1. Install the master warning/caution switch
(3150S1) (1, Figure 95-105) as follows:
a. Remove the protective tape from the electrical
leads.
b. Remove tag and connect the wires to the
electrical connector (11) with the insertion/extraction NOTE
tool (M81969/14-01) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4). Remove components only to the extent
c. Install the inner sleeve (7) on the instrument maintenance.
panel assembly (8).
d. Install the outer sleeve (10) on the inner from the helicopter.
sleeve (7). Make sure the locking tab (9) is locked to
the inner sleeve.
2. Remove the right upper shroud assembly
(paragraph 95-214).
e. Install the electrical connector (11) on the
outer sleeve (10). Make sure the release (12) is locked
to the outer sleeve. 3. Remove the RPM warning pushbutton (3160S2)
(10, Figure 95-106) as follows:
f. Move the base (6) in the inner sleeve (9).
a. Pull on the cap (1) until it reaches the end of
g. Rotate the two mounting screws (4) clockwise normal travel. Slightly rotate it to the right to disengage
to move the mounting cam (5) into the recessed area the index pin (2) from the base (3).
of the inner sleeve (7).
b. Rotate the mounting screws (9)
h. Install the cap (2) to the base (6). counterclockwise to move the mounting cams (4) into
the recessed area.
2. Install the upper right shroud assembly
(paragraph 95-218). c. Tag and disconnect the pins (6) from the
built-in connector (5) with the insertion/extraction tool
3. Connect the battery or the external DC power to (M81969/14-02) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
the helicopter.
d. Put protective tape on the electrical leads.
4. Do the operational check for the master caution/
warning switch (3150S1) (1) (Chapter 96). e. Move the sleeve (8) from the base (3).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL B
C
3
2 VIEW A
(S/N 54300 AND
5 SUBSEQUENT)
4
10
6 8
DETAIL B FW
D
1. Cap 9
2. Index pin
3. Base
4. Mounting cam
5. Built-in connector
6. Pin
8. Sleeve VIEW C
9. Mounting screw
10. RPM warning PBA (3160S2)
407gc_MM_95_0108
Figure 95-106. RPM Warning Pushbutton Assembly — Removal and Installation

95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
f. Remove the base (3) from the instrument d. Remove the protective tape from the electrical
panel assembly (7). leads.
95-229. RPM WARNING PUSHBUTTON

e. Remove tags and connect the pins (6) to the
ASSEMBLY (3160S2) — CLEANING
built-in connector (5) with the insertion/extraction tool
Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous
electrical components equipment (Chapter 96).
f. Install the cap (1) and engage the index pin
95-230. RPM WARNING PUSHBUTTON (2) first into the base. Press firmly until it snap.
ASSEMBLY (3160S2) — INSPECTION
2. Install the right upper shroud assembly
(paragraph 95-218).
95-231. RPM WARNING PUSHBUTTON 3. Connect the battery or the external DC power to
ASSEMBLY (3160S2) — INSTALLATION the helicopter.
4. Do the operational check of the RPM warning

system (paragraph 95-411).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 95-232. FADEC MODE SWITCH (1S18) —

REMOVAL
Tool

WARNING
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS M81969/14-01 Insertion/Extraction

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Tool
1. Install the RPM warning pushbutton (3160S2) MATERIALS REQUIRED

(10, Figure 95-106) as follows:
a. Install the base (3) on the instrument panel
assembly (7). NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
b. Move the base (3) into the sleeve (8). C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
c. Rotate the mounting screws (9) clockwise to

draw up the mounting cams (4) out of the recessed
area of the sleeve (8). Do not overtighten. WARNING
NOTE
Refer to the applicable wiring diagram WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
(Chapter 98) for the correct installation of NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
the electrical wires and contact. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-234. FADEC MODE SWITCH (1S18) —

NOTE
INSPECTION
necessary to perform the required Refer to the inspection procedure for miscellaneous
maintenance. electrical components (Chapter 96).
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 95-235. FADEC MODE SWITCH (1S18) —
from the helicopter. INSTALLATION
2. Remove the right lower shroud assembly

(paragraph 95-214). SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
CAUTION
Tool
MAKE SURE THE FADEC MODE SWITCH
(1S18) PUSHBUTTON IS IN THE
EXTENDED (OUT) POSITION PRIOR TO
EXTRACTING THE PUSHBUTTON. WARNING
3. Pull the cap (2, Figure 95-107) out of the

base (6). OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
4. Rotate the two mounting screws (4)
counterclockwise to move the mounting cam (5) out of
the recessed area of the sleeve (9).
NOTE
5. Press on the release (10) to remove the Refer to the applicable wiring diagram
connector (11) from the sleeve (9). (Chapter 98) for the correct installation of
6. Remove the base (6), sleeve (9), and switch
guard (7) from the instrument panel assembly (8). 1. Remove the protective tape from the electrical
leads.
7. Remove the sleeve (9) from the base (6).

2. Remove tags and connect the wires to the
connector (11, Figure 95-107) with the insertion/
8. Tag and disconnect the wires from the connector extraction tool (M81969/14-01) (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
(11) with the insertion/extraction tool (M81969/14-01) Chapter 4).
3. Install the sleeve (9) on the base (6).
9. Put protective tape on the exposed end of all the
electrical leads. 4. Install the base (6), sleeve (9), and switch guard
(7) on the instrument panel assembly (8).
10. Remove the connector (11).
5. Install the connector (11) on the sleeve (9) and
95-233. FADEC MODE SWITCH (1S18) — make sure locking tabs are engaged.
CLEANING
6. Rotate the two mounting screws (4) clockwise to
Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous move the mounting cam (5) into the recessed area of
electrical components equipment (Chapter 96). the sleeve (9).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
7
VIEW A
(S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT)
SEE DETAIL B
3
4
5
10
1. FADEC mode switch (1S18) 1

2. Cap
3. Flex circuit
4. Mounting screw 9
5. Mounting cam
6. Base DETAIL B
7. Switch guard VIEW FROM BELOW FW 11
8. Instrument panel assembly D
9. Sleeve
10. Release
11. Connector
407gc_MM_95_0104
Figure 95-107. FADEC Mode Switch (1S18) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
7. Install the cap (2) on the base (6). 95-237. FUEL VALVE SWITCH (4A3S1) —
CLEANING
8. Install the right lower shroud assembly Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous
(paragraph 95-218). electrical components equipment (Chapter 96).
9. Connect the battery or the external DC power to 95-238. FUEL VALVE SWITCH (4A3S1) —
the helicopter. INSPECTION

10. Do the operational check of the FADEC mode electrical components (Chapter 96).
switch (1S18) (1) (Chapter 96).
95-239. FUEL VALVE SWITCH (4A3S1) —
INSTALLATION
95-236. FUEL VALVE SWITCH (4A3S1) —
REMOVAL
WARNING
WARNING
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). NOTE
NOTE (Chapter 98) for the correct installation of
necessary to perform the required 1. If previously removed, install the nut (6,
maintenance. Figure 95-108) and the locking ring (5) on the fuel
valve switch (4A3S1) (7).
from the helicopter. 2. Install the fuel valve switch (4A3S1) (7) on the
instrument panel (4).
2. Remove the right lower shroud assembly
(paragraph 95-214). 3. Make sure the locking ring (5) tab is aligned with
the hole in the instrument panel (7).
3. Tag and disconnect the terminals from the fuel 4. Install the switch guard (3) and make sure the tab
valve switch (4A3S1) (7, Figure 95-108). is aligned with the key way on the fuel valve switch
(4A3S1) (7).
4. Remove the nut (1), lockwasher (2), and switch
guard (3) from the fuel valve switch (4A3S1) (7) and 5. Install the lockwasher (2) and the nut (1) on the
the instrument panel (4). fuel valve switch (4A3S1) (7) and the instrument panel
(4). Tighten the nut.
5. Remove the fuel valve switch (4A3S1) (7) from

6. Remove tags and connect the terminal to the fuel
valve switch (4A3S1) (7).
6. If required, remove the locking ring (5) and the 7. Install the right lower shroud assembly
nut (6) from the fuel valve switch (4A3S1) (7). (paragraph 95-218).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL B
VIEW A
7
6
7
5
4
3
2
1 DETAIL B
1. Nut
2. Lockwasher
3. Switch guard
4. Instrument panel
5. Locking ring
6. Nut
7. Fuel valve switch (4A3S1)
VIEW C
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_95_0107
Figure 95-108. Fuel Valve Switch (4A3S1) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Connect the battery or the external DC power to

NOTE
the helicopter.
The following procedure is provided for the
9. Do the operational check for the fuel valve switch DU Backup switch (3160S1). The
(4A3S1) (7) (Chapter 96). procedure is the same for the following
switches:
95-240. DU BACKUP, FUEL QUANTITY, FADEC

• Forward fuel quantity (1S20) (6,
OVERSPEED TEST, PEDAL STOP TEST,
Figure 95-109)
FIRE TEST, AND FLOAT TEST
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES — REMOVAL
• FADEC overspeed test (1S19) (5)
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED • Pedal stop test (6540DS4) (4)
• Fire test (2600S1) (3) (BHT-407-II-19)

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
M81969/14-01 Insertion/Extraction • Float test (24S7) (2) (BHT-407-II-1)

Tool
MATERIALS REQUIRED
2. Remove the left lower and upper shroud
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. assemblies (paragraph 95-214).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
3. Remove the Multi-Function Display (MFD)
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs (paragraph 95-220).
4. Disconnect the electrical connector (10P1) (13).

WARNING
5. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the
electrical connector.
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 6. Remove the screws (12), washers (11), and
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). clamps (10) with the electrical cable assembly from
the instrument panel assembly (1).
NOTE
7. Remove the nut (8) and the lockwasher (9) from
The fire test and float test pushbutton the DU backup switch (3160DS1) (7).
switches are installed as part of the optional
Fire Detection kit (BHT-407-II-19) and
optional Emergency Float kit NOTE
of the basic helicopter. Refer to the applicable wiring diagram
the electrical wires and contacts.
NOTE
Remove components only to the extent 8. Tag and disconnect the wires from the electrical
necessary to perform the required connector (10P1) (13) with the insertion/extraction tool
maintenance. (M81969/14-01) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VIEW A
9 1
8
1. Instrument panel assembly 10

2. Float test switch (24S7) (Kit) 12 11
3. Fire test switch (2600S1) (Kit)
4. Pedal stop test switch (6540DS4)
5. Fadec overspeed test switch (1S19) 10
6. Forward fuel quantity switch (1S20) 11
12
7. DU backup switch (3160S1)
8. Nut
9. Lockwasher
10. Clamp
11. Washer
12. Screw
13. Electrical connector (10P1)
13
VIEW B
Figure 95-109. DU Backup, Fuel Quantity, FADEC Overspeed Test, Pedal Stop Test, Fire Test, and Float
Test Pushbutton Switches — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. Put protective tape on the exposed end of all the Fire Detection kit (BHT-407-II-19) and
electrical leads. optional Emergency Float kit
of the basic helicopter.
10. Remove the DU backup switch (3160S1) (7) from
the instrument panel assembly (1).
NOTE
95-241. DU BACKUP, FUEL QUANTITY, FADEC The following procedure is provided for the
OVERSPEED TEST, PEDAL STOP TEST, DU backup switch (3160S1). The
FIRE TEST, AND FLOAT TEST procedure is similar for the following
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES — CLEANING switches:
Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous • Forward fuel quantity (1S20) (6,
electrical components equipment (Chapter 96). Figure 95-109)
95-242. DU BACKUP, FUEL QUANTITY, FADEC • FADEC overspeed test (1S19) (5)
FIRE TEST, AND FLOAT TEST • Pedal stop test (6540DS4) (4)
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES —
INSPECTION • Fire test (2600S1) (3) (BHT-407-II-19)
Refer to the inspection procedure for miscellaneous • Float test (24S7) (2) (BHT-407-II-1)
1. If a new DU backup switch (3160S1) (7) is
95-243. DU BACKUP, FUEL QUANTITY, FADEC installed, do the following:
FIRE TEST, AND FLOAT TEST
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES — NOTE
INSTALLATION Refer to the applicable wiring diagram
a. Use the old DU backup switch (3160S1) (7) as
a template and cut the flying leads on the new DU
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE backup switch to the same length.
b. If applicable, splice the required flying leads of
Tool
the switch to the associated wires of the electrical
connector (10P1) (13). Cap and stow non-used wires
of the switch (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
WARNING
c. If applicable, install contacts (M39029/22-191)
to the wires (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
d. Discard the supplied sealing washer.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 2. Install the DU backup switch (3160S1) (7) on the
instrument panel assembly (1) with the lockwasher (9)
and the nut (8). Tighten the nut.
NOTE
The fire test and float test pushbutton 3. Remove protective tape on the exposed ends of
switches are installed as part of the optional all the electrical leads.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NOTE
WARNING
4. Remove tags and connect the wires to the NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
electrical connector (10P1) (13) with the insertion/ EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
extraction tool (M81969/14-01) (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 4).
NOTE
5. Install the clamps (10), washers (11), and screws Remove components only to the extent
(12) with the electrical cable assembly on the necessary to perform the required
instrument panel assembly (1). Tighten the screws. maintenance.
NOTE
6. Remove protective caps and/or plugs on the
electrical connector. The following procedure is provided for the
cable harness protection system (3160A2)
on the right side. The procedure is the
7. Connect the electrical connector (10P1) (13). same for the cable harness protection
system (3160A1) on the left side, except
8. Install the left lower and upper shroud assembly where indicated.
(paragraph 95-218).
9. Install the Multi-Function Display (MFD)
(paragraph 95-223). 2. Remove the shroud assembly to the necessary
extent (paragraph 95-214).
the helicopter. 3. Remove the Primary Flight Display (PFD) to
access the cable harness protection system
(CHIPS-H) (3160A2) (8, Figure 95-110) or the
NOTE Multi-Function Display (MFD) to access the cable
harness protection system (CHIPS-H) (3160A1) (9).
Refer to BHT-407-FMS-1 (Lightweight
Emergency Flotation Landing Gear) or
BHT-407-FMS-21 (Fire Detection System)
to perform a check of the applicable switch.
5. On the right side, remove the cable harness

11. Do an operational check of the applicable switch
protection system (CHIPS-H) (3160A2) (8) as follows:
(BHT-407-FM-2, Section 2).
a. Remove the sealant from the base of the

95-244. CABLE HARNESS PROTECTION SYSTEM standalone rack (5).
(CHIPS-H) — REMOVAL
b. Remove the screw (1) and the lockwasher (2)
from the CHIPS conduit assembly (3).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
c. Pull the CHIPS conduit assembly (3) forward
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. and lift sufficiently to disengage the locking tab on the
stand alone rack (5).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
6. Remove the screws (4) from the standalone
rack (5).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Screw
2. Lockwasher
3. CHIPS conduit assembly
A 4. Screw
5. Standalone rack
6. Support
7. Support
8. Cable harness protection system
(CHIPS-H) (3160A2)
9. Cable harness protection system
(CHIPS-H) (3160A1)
SEALANT (C-251)
5 1
2
1
6 7
LOCKING TAB
4
VIEW A
NOTE
1 After installation of cable harness protection system (CHIPS-H) (3160A2) (8 or 9) on support (6 and 7),
apply sealant (C-251) to cover the bonding area.
407gc_MM_95_0098
Figure 95-110. Cable Harness Protection System (CHIPS-H) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
7. Remove the standalone rack (5) from the b. Put the standalone rack (5) in position on the
supports (6 and 7). supports (6 and 7).
95-245. CABLE HARNESS PROTECTION SYSTEM c. Install the screws (4) on the standalone rack
(CHIPS-H) — CLEANING (5). Tighten the screws.
Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous NOTE

95-246. CABLE HARNESS PROTECTION SYSTEM corrosion at the time of installation, the
(CHIPS-H) — INSPECTION following step is not required.
Refer to the inspection procedure for miscellaneous d. Make sure the bond resistance between the
electrical components (Chapter 96). supports (6 and 7) and the standalone rack (5) meets
Class R-I electrical bonding requirements
95-247. CABLE HARNESS PROTECTION SYSTEM (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
(CHIPS-H) — INSTALLATION
e. Push and slide the CHIPS conduit assembly
(3) down onto the locking tab of the standalone
MATERIALS REQUIRED rack (5).
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. f. At the forward end of the CHIPS conduit
assembly (3), install the lockwasher (2) and the screw
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
(1). Tighten the screw.
C-251 Sealant
g. Apply sealant (C-251) to seal the electrical
bonding area around the supports (6 and 7) and the
standalone rack (5).
WARNING
h. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
the electrical connectors.
2. If the cable harness protection system (CHIPS-H)
(3160A2) (8) was previously removed, install the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (paragraph 95-223).
3. If the cable harness protection system (CHIPS-H)

NOTE (3160A1) (9) was previously removed, install the
The following procedure is provided for the Multi-Function Display (MFD) (paragraph 95-223).
cable harness protection system (3160A2)
on the right side. The procedure is the 4. Install the shroud assembly (paragraph 95-218).
same for the cable harness protection
system (3160A1) on the left side, except 5. Install the glareshield assembly (paragraph
where indicated. 95-212)
1. On the right side, install the cable harness 6. Connect the battery or the external DC power to
protection system (CHIPS-H) (3160A2) (8, the helicopter.
Figure 95-110) as follows:
7. Do the return to service tests as specified in
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the supports Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
(6 and 7) and the standalone rack (5) are clean and Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation. display installations.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-248. PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM — NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC

DESCRIPTION (S/N 54300 AND EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
SUBSEQUENT)
The pitot-static system (Figure 95-111) consists of a WARNING

pitot tube and two static ports, and their related tube
assemblies. The pitot tube is installed on a support
assembly installed at FS 1.00, on the right side of the DO NOT TOUCH THE PITOT TUBE
helicopter centerline. The pitot tube collects the ram WHEN IT IS HO T. MA KE S URE T HE
air from the outside of the helicopter. The ram air is ELECTRICAL POWER IS REMO VED
then supplied through the related tube assemblies to FROM THE PITOT TUBE. BEFORE THE
the standby airspeed indicator and air data computer REMOVAL PROCEDURE, ALLOW THE
(GDC 74H). PITOT TUBE TO BECOME COLD. A HOT
PITOT TUBE CAN CAUSE SERIOUS
The static ports are installed on the left and right sides BURNS.
of the fuselage at FS 36.95. The static ports collect the
atmospheric pressure that surrounds the helicopter.
NOTE
The atmospheric pressure is supplied through the
related tube assemblies to the standby airspeed Remove components only to the extent
indicator, standby altimeter, and air data computer necessary to perform the required
(GDC 74H). maintenance.
A static drain and pitot drain are connected to their 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
related tube assemblies and installed on the from the helicopter.
underbelly of the helicopter. The drains are installed to
drain any water or other contaminants from the pitot 2. On the overhead panel, set the PITOT HEATER
and static tube assemblies. circuit breaker switch to OFF.
The pitot tube and static ports are electrically heated 3. Remove the access panel to the landing light bay.
by internal elements (Figure 95-112) to prevent ice
formation. For additional information on the heated
pitot tube and static ports, refer to Chapter 96.
CAUTION
95-249. PITOT TUBE — REMOVAL

ON THE OPEN ENDS OF THE TUBE
MATERIALS REQUIRED
ASSEMBLIES TO PREVENT
C O N TA M I N AT I O N B Y F O R E I G N
OBJECTS. CONTAMINATION OF THE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE FLIGHT
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs INSTRUMENTS.
4. Disconnect the union (5, Figure 95-113) of the

pitot tube (4) from the tube assembly (7). Install caps
WARNING and/or plugs (C-428) on the open ends of the pitot
tube and tube assembly.
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5. Remove the screws (1) and lockwashers (2) that
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR attach the pitot tube (4) to its support assembly (6).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
STANDBY
ALTIMETER
STANDBY
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
SEE DETAIL A
AIR DATA
COMPUTER
8 (GDC 74H)
8
2
PITOT
LINE
7
8
6
STATIC
LINE 1. Pitot tube
3 9 2. Static port
4 9 2 3. Pitot drain
7
4. Static drain
5. Static drain
6. Pitot tube disconnect
7. Flexible tube
1 DETAIL A 8. Aluminum tube
9. Plug
Figure 95-111. Pitot-static System — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
C.B. PANEL
PITOT
STATIC HEATER
4CB2
7.5
28VDC
BUS
PILOT STATIC
PORT HTR
LCTN-RHS NOSE
STA 37.00
4HR2
TEMP
CONTROLLER
4HR3
COPILOT STATIC
PORT HTR
LCTN-LHS NOSE
STA 37.00
TEMP
CONTROLLER
PITOT HEATER
4HR1
4HR1P1
A
B
407_MM_95_0004
Figure 95-112. Pitot-static System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Screw
2. Lockwasher
4. Pitot tube
5. Union
6. Support assembly
7. Tube assembly 6
2
1
407_MM_95_0115
Figure 95-113. Pitot Tube — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
6. Carefully pull the pitot tube (4) from its support 5. Visually examine the attaching hardware for cracks,
assembly (6). wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion damage.
Replace as necessary.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the

95-252. PITOT TUBE — INSTALLATION
pitot tube (4).
8. Remove the pitot tube (4). WARNING
95-250. PITOT TUBE — CLEANING

Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
electrical components (Chapter 96). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
95-251. PITOT TUBE — INSPECTION NOTE

When you install a new pitot tube, do not
NOTE install the sleeve assembly that is supplied
with it.
primarily intended when the part or 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
component has been removed from the from the helicopter.
2. On the overhead panel, set the PITOT HEATER
be used when the part is installed on the circuit breaker switch to OFF.
helicopter.
3. Connect the electrical connector (3,
1. Examine the pitot tube (4, Figure 95-113) for Figure 95-113) to the pitot tube (4).
signs of overheating.
2. Examine the pitot tube (4) for signs of pitting or plugs.
corrosion.
5. Install the pitot tube (4) on the support assembly.
CAUTION 6. Connect the union (5) of the pitot tube (4) to the
union of the tube assembly (7) for the pitot pressure.
NEVER BLOW COMPRESSED AIR INTO 7. Attach the pitot tube (4) to the support assembly
THE PITOT PORT WHEN THE PITOT (6) with screws (1) and lockwashers (2). Tighten the
TUBE IS CONNECTED TO THE screws.
HELICOPTER. SERIOUS DAMAGE TO
THE PITOT-STATIC INSTRUMENTS WILL 8. Install the access window for the landing light.
OCCUR.
3. Blow the pitot tube (4) with compressed air. (paragraph 95-260).
4. Examine the pitot tube (4) electrical connector (3) 10. Do an operational check of the pitot tube and
pins for damage and corrosion. static port heating system (paragraph 95-259).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-253. STATIC PORT — REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
MATERIALS REQUIRED 2. Disconnect the static line (1, Figure 95-114) from
the elbow (3). Remove the insert (2) and install caps
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. and/or plugs (C-428) on the open lines and fittings.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
3. Remove the bolt (4) and the two packings (5)
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs from the elbow (3).
4. Remove the heated static vent (6) and the

shim (7).
WARNING
5. Remove the screw (8) and the washers (9 and
14) to disconnect the ground wire (WHITE) and the
shield from the ground stud (ND261 left side, ND262
right side).
6. Disconnect the power wire of the temperature
controller (13) at the splice.
WARNING
7. Remove the two screws (10), washers (11), and
nuts (12) that attach the temperature controller (13) to
DO NOT TOUCH THE STATIC PORTS the mounting bracket (15).
WHEN THEY ARE HOT. MAKE SURE THE
ELECT RICAL POWER IS REMO VED 95-254. STATIC PORT — CLEANING
FROM THE STATIC PORTS. BEFORE
THE REMOVAL PROCEDURE, ALLOW
THE STATIC PORTS TO BECOME COLD. Refer to the cleaning procedure for miscellaneous
A H O T S TAT I C P O RT C A N C A U S E electrical components (Chapter 96).
SERIOUS BURNS.
95-255. STATIC PORT — INSPECTION
CAUTION NOTE
INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428) primarily intended when the part or
ON THE OPEN END OF THE STATIC component has been removed from the
LINE TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION BY helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
FOREIGN OBJECTS. CONTAMINATION requirements, applicable criteria may also
OF THE PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM CAN be used when the part is installed on the
helicopter.
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS.
1. Examine the heated static vent (6, Figure 95-114)
and the temperature controller (13) for signs of
NOTE overheating.
necessary to perform the required 2. Examine the heated static vent (6) for signs of
maintenance. pitting or corrosion.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1 SEE DETAIL A
4
2
5
7
5
3
DETAIL B
10
SEE DETAIL B
13
11
14
12
15
9 DETAIL A
(LEFT SIDE SHOWN,
8
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)
1. Static line 6. Heated static vent 11. Washer

2. Insert 7. Shim 12. Nut
3. Elbow 8. Screw 13. Temperature controller
4. Bolt 9. Washer 14. Washer
5. Packing 10. Screw 15. Mounting bracket
Figure 95-114. Static Ports — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Install an insert (2) in the static line connector.

Connect the static line (1) to the elbow (3).
CAUTION
9. Install the temperature controller (13) on the

NEVER BLOW COMPRESSED AIR INTO mounting bracket (15). Install the two screws (10),
THE STATIC PORT WHEN THE STATIC washers (11), and nuts (12) that attach the
PORT ASSEMBLY IS CONNECTED TO temperature controller.
THE HELICOPTER. SERIOUS DAMAGE
TO THE PITOT-STATIC INSTRUMENTS
WILL OCCUR. NOTE
Refer to the pitot/static heaters and flight
3. Blow through the heated static vent (6) with
instrument system wiring diagram
compressed air.
(Chapter 98) for wire termination
information.
4. Examine the temperature controller (13) and
attaching wires for damage. 10. If required, prepare the mating surfaces of the
wire terminal ends and termination points for electrical
5. Visually examine the attaching hardware for bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace as necessary.
11. Connect the power wire (BLACK) of the
temperature controller to the helicopter wire (H7D20)
95-256. STATIC PORT — INSTALLATION with a splice. Connect the shield of the BLACK and
WHITE wires to the shield of the wire (H7D20)
WARNING
12. Install the screw (8) and the washers (9 and 14)
to connect the ground wire (WHITE) and the shield to
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS the ground stud (ND261 left side, ND262 right side).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Tighten the screw.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power (paragraph 95-260).
2. On the overhead panel, set the PITOT HEATER static port heating system (paragraph 95-259).
switch circuit breaker (4CB2) to OFF.
95-257. PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM — CLEANING
3. Install the heated static vent (6, Figure 95-114) on
the structure with a shim (7). Peel the shim as required
so the static port assembly protrudes 0.000 to
0.020 inch (0.00 to 0.50 mm) beyond the outside skin. MATERIALS REQUIRED

plugs. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
5. Install the two packings (5) on the bolt (4). C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
6. Insert the bolt (4) into the elbow (3). 1. Remove the plugs (9, Figure 95-111) from the
static drain (4) and pitot drain (3) ports. Drain collected
7. Tighten the bolt (4) into the heated static vent (6). water, if any.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Disconnect the static and/or pitot lines from the 2. Visually examine all of the pitot-static tube
following instruments, as applicable: assemblies. Make sure that they are correctly
attached and that there is no sign of chaffing, wear, or
• Standby altimeter other damage.
• Standby airspeed indicator 3. Visually examine the pitot tube (1) and the left
and right static ports (2). Make sure that there is no
• Air data computer (GDC 74H) obstruction or damage.
3. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the 95-259. PITOT-STATIC HEATING SYSTEM —
open ports of all the instruments. OPERATIONAL CHECK
CAUTION WARNING
U S E O N LY D RY F I LT E R E D A I R TO D O N O T T O U C H T H E H E AT E D
CLEAN LINES OF THE PITOT-STATIC SURFACES OF THE PITOT TUBE OR
SYSTEM. OTHERWISE, UNWANTED STATIC PORTS. TO PREVENT BURNS,
MATERIAL COULD CONTAMINATE THE ONLY PUT YOUR HANDS NEAR THE
LINES AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE S U R FA C E S T O D O A C H E C K F O R
INSTRUMENTS. HEATER OPERATION.
4. Blow dry filtered compressed air into the open

ends of the pitot and static lines. NOTE
Refer to the pitot/static heaters and flight
5. Make sure there is no blockage or obstruction of instrument system wiring diagram
the flow at the static drain and pitot drain ports, with no (Chapter 98) for troubleshooting
evidence of contamination or water. information.
6. Install the plugs (9) on the static drain (4) and 1. If applicable, remove the pitot tube cover.
pitot drain (3) ports.
NOTE
7. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from the
instruments. Use an external power unit, if available, to
prevent the battery from being drained of its
stored electrical power.
8. Connect all the previously disconnected static
and/or pitot lines to the following instruments:
2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
external DC power unit to ON.
• Standby altimeter
3. On the overhead panel, set the circuit breaker
• Standby airspeed indicator
switch (4CB2) to PITOT HEATER.
• Air data computer (GDC 74H)
4. Make sure that the surface temperatures of the
9. Do a leak check of the pitot-static system pitot tube and both static ports increase.
(paragraph 95-260).
5. Set the PITOT HEATER circuit breaker switch
95-258. PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM — INSPECTION (4CB2) to OFF.
1. Examine all of the lines and unions for correct 6. Make sure that the surface temperatures of the
tightness (Figure 95-111). pitot tube and both static ports begin to cool.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
7. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO
remove the external DC power from the helicopter. THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND
NOTE
The following procedure is intended to
95-260. PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM — LEAK CHECK verify that the pitot-static system does not
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) leak and that the instrument displays are
functional. For specific testing of the
airspeed, altitude, and vertical speed
indications used in conjunction with the
Garmin G1000H Integrated Avionics
System, refer to paragraph 95-272 through
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE paragraph 95-275.
1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static 1. On the pitot-static tester, open the two vent
Equivalent Tester valves. This lets the pressure in the pitot-static tester
become equal with the ambient pressure. Close all five
33410S-70-4 or Universal Test Adapter of the valves on the pitot-static tester.
Equivalent

CAUTION that the connections are tight and free of leaks.

D U R I N G T H E P I T O T- S TAT I C L E A K adapter of the pitot-static tester to the left static port.
CH E C K , DO NO T O P E N A L I NE O R Make sure that the connections are tight and free of
REMOVE A FITTING FROM THE VENT leaks.
E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S 4. Seal the right static port with removable tape.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is
OF THE TEST SET AND VALVES. DO free of leaks.
and free of leaks.
CAUTION
NOTE
SET. STANDBY INSTRUMENTS ARE Use an external power unit, if available, to
E A S I LY P E G G E D A N D C A N B E prevent the battery from being drained of its
DAMAGED BY IMPROPER stored electrical power.
MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET.
6. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect
CAUTION
the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). Write
DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC down the altitude shown on the altimeter of the test
SYSTEM HEATERS WHILE THE TEST set.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Set the barometric pressure of the Primary Flight 12. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source
Display (PFD) and the standby altimeter to valve for the pitot pressure. Slowly close the vent
29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). valve for the pitot pressure.
RESULT: 13. Keep the source valve of the pitot pressure open
• The PFD altimeter and standby altimeter show shows 120 knots.
the same altitude as the test set altimeter
within 20 feet. 14. At 120 knots, close the source valve for the pitot
pressure. Gently tap on the bezel of the airspeed
CORRECTIVE ACTION: indicator on the pitot-static tester and standby
airspeed indicator on the instrument panel.
• If the PFD altimeter or standby altimeter on
the instrument panel do not show the altitude RESULT:
within the tolerance of 20 feet, check for leaks
and or replace faulty units. If PFD altimeter is • The test set, PFD airspeed, and standby
out of limits, consider calibration or airspeed indicator all show 120 ±4 knots.
replacement of Air Data Computer (ADC).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NOTE • If the PFD or standby airspeed indicator on

You may need to add pressure in the tank the instrument panel do not show the airspeed
during the following test. within the tolerance of 120 ±4 knots, check for
leaks and or replace faulty units. If PFD
9. On the pitot-static tester, pump the pitot pressure airspeed display is out of limits, consider
handle until the pressure dial shows 50 inches HG calibration or replacement of the ADC.
(107 kPa).
15. Keep the source valve for the pitot pressure
closed for 5 minutes.
NOTE
16. After 5 minutes, read the airspeed on the
You may need to add vacuum in the tank
airspeed indicator on the pitot-static tester, the PFD,
during the following test.
and the standby airspeed indicator on the instrument
panel.
10. On the pitot-static tester, pump the static pressure
(vacuum) handle until the vacuum dial shows
20 inches HG (68 kPa). RESULT:
• The test set, PFD airspeed, and standby

airspeed indicator do not show a decrease in
CAUTION airspeed of more than 10 knots.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
THE VALVES ON THE PITOT-STATIC
TEST SET ARE SENSITIVE. ADJUST • If the airspeed has decreased by more than
T H E M S L O W LY A N D C A R E F U L LY. 10 knots, examine the components associated
INCORRECT ADJUSTMENT OF THE with the pitot pressure to find leaks. If you
VALVES CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE detect a leak at a tube connection, tighten the
S TA N D B Y A LT I M E T E R A N D T H E connection or replace the part that leaks.
STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR IN THE
HELICOPTER. 17. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent
valve for the pitot pressure. Make sure the test set,
11. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent PFD airspeed, and standby airspeed indicator slowly
valve for the pitot pressure to approximately 1/4 turn. go back to their minimum value (0 knots).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
18. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the source RESULT:

valve for the vacuum. Make sure that the PFD altitude
and airspeed indications as well as the standby • Make sure that the PFD altitude indication and
altimeter and the standby airspeed indicator all show the standby altimeter show the same altitude
an increase. Make sure that the PFD vertical speed as the pitot-static tester altimeter within 20
indication shows a positive rate (climb). feet.
19. When the airspeed indicator on the test set

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
shows 120 knots, close the source valve for the
vacuum and the vent valve for the pressure. Write
down the altitude shown on the altimeter of the • If the PFD altitude indication and the standby
pitot-static tester as well as the PFD altitude indication altimeter indication on the instrument panel do
and the indication of the standby altimeter on the not show the altitude within the tolerance of
instrument panel. 20 feet, check for leaks and or replace faulty
units. If PFD display is out of limits, consider
20. After 1 minute, gently tap on the bezel of the calibration or replacement of the ADC.
altimeter on the pitot-static tester and the standby
altimeter on the instrument panel. 22. On the pitot-static tester, slowly open the vent
valve for the vacuum. Make sure the altimeter
RESULT: indication on the pitot-static tester, as well as the PFD
and standby altimeter slowly go back to the local
• Make sure that the test set, PFD altitude pressure altitude.
indication, and the indication of the standby
altimeter do not show a decrease of altitude of
23. Slowly open the vent valve for the pressure.
more than 100 feet.
Make sure the airspeed indication on the pitot-static
tester, as well as the PFD and standby airspeed
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
indicator slowly go back to their minimum value
(0 knots).
• If the altitude has decreased by more than
with the static pressure to find leaks. If you 24. With the pressure and the vacuum stabilized,
detect a leak at a tube connection, tighten the disconnect the hoses of the pitot-static tester from the
connection or replace the part that leaks. helicopter. Remove the tape from the right static port.
21. On the pitot-static tester, slowly adjust the source

valve and the vent valve for the vacuum until the
altimeter on the pitot-static tester shows 1000 feet
AGL. At 1000 feet AGL, close the source valve and
the vent valve for the vacuum. Gently tap on the bezel 26. Return the helicopter to the standard
of the altimeter on the pitot-static tester and the configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
standby altimeter on the instrument panel. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-261. AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM altitude, vertical speed, airspeed values, air
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) temperature information, and density altitude.
The air data computer system measures the ambient The ADC (3140A1) provides pitot-static and
air temperature, and pitot and static air pressures to temperature derived air data to the integrated avionics
calculate the total air pressure, pressure altitude, units (3140A1 and 3140A2) and the Primary Flight
indicated airspeed, calibrated airspeed, vertical speed, Display (PFD) (3160DS2) and the Attitude Heading
and mach number. The air data computer system and Referencing Unit (AHRS) (3420A1).
sends these parameters and other generated
parameters the integrated avionics units and the The ADC (3140A1) provides the information that
Display Units (DUs) to be shown on the flight follows to the IAUs (3140A1 and 3140A2) and the
instruments of the Primary Flight Display (PFD). Display Units (DUs) (3160DS1 and 3160DS2) in Arinc
429 format:
The air data computer system includes the
components that follow: • Air temperature (total air temperature, outside/
static air temperature)
• Air Data Computer (ADC) (GDC 74H)
(3410A1) • Corrected static pressure
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe • Density altitude

(GTP 59) (1RT3)
• Impact pressure uncorrected
• Configuration module
• Indicated airspeed
• Barometric and pitot flight instruments on the
Primary Flight Indicator (PFD) • Mach number
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component • Pressure altitude

reference designator index table and location figure
(Chapter 98) to find the installed location of the • Total pressure
components.
• True airspeed
To help clarify system or circuit operation, refer to the
simplified schematic (Figure 95-115) while reading • Vertical speed
information about the air data computer system.
95-263. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE PROBE
95-262. AIR DATA COMPUTER (S/N 54300 AND (S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
SUBSEQUENT)
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe (1RT3) is
The Air Data Computer (ADC) (3140A1) is located located on the underside of the helicopter between the
behind the Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) in lower windows.
the cockpit of the helicopter.
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe (1RT3) is a
The ADC (3140A1) is a model GDC 74H remote model GTP 59 Resistive Temperature Device (RTD)
mounted device that provides air data for flight with a three-wire probe interface. The OAT probe
instrumentation. The ADC (3140A1) measures (1RT3) sends a raw temperature signal to the ADC
helicopter static and impact pressure information from (3140A1) to calculate air temperature and to provide a
pressure transducers and raw air temperature from an temperature compensation factor to the air data
outside temperature probe. Using the raw data from parameters.
the appropriate sensors, the unit computes pressure
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ADC MFD (L-DU)

3410A1 3160DS1
ADC (GDC 74H) 3160DS1P1 (GDU 1040H)
3410A1P1
3410CB2 3410A1P1
28 VDC 3A 55 28V DC POWER IN 1 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A 47 16 ARINC 429 IN 2 A

BUS ARINC 429 OUT 3 B 48 17 ARINC 429 IN 2 B
PDF (R-DU)
3160DS2
3160DS2P1 (GDU 1040H)
ARINC 429 OUT 3 A 32 16 ARINC 429 IN 2 A

F5A22N 17 POWER GROUND ARINC 429 OUT 3 B 33 17 ARINC 429 IN 2 B
OAT PROBE
1RT3
(GTP 59)
OAT POWER 2 POWER
OAT PROBE IN HI 3 SENSE
CONFIGURATION MODULE OAT PROBE IN LO 4 LOW
GROUND 1 1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND

VCC 4 21 CONFIG MODULE POWER AHRS
DATA 3 40 CONFIG MODULE DATA 3420A1
CLOCK 2 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 3420A1P1
(GRS 77H)
ARINC 429 OUT 1 A 41 15 ARINC 429 IN 1 A

ARINC 429 OUT 1 B 42 30 ARINC 429 IN 1 B
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1

3140A1
3140A1P3
(GIA 63H)
ARINC 429 OUT 1 A 26 12 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 5 A
1
ARINC 429 OUT 1 B 27 13 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 5 B
RS-232 OUT 1 11 41 MAIN RS-232 IN 1

PITOT INPUT SIGNAL GROUND 12 42 SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 IN 1 10 43 MAIN RS-232 OUT 1
STATIC INPUT

3140A2
3140A2P3
(GIA 63H)
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A 29 12 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 5 A

1
NOTE ARINC 429 OUT 2 B 30 13 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 5 B
1 FOR CONTINUATION, REFER TO PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) INTERFACE WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0124
Figure 95-115. Air Data Computer System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-264. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIR DATA Electrical power for the OAT probe (1RT3) is supplied
COMPUTER (GDC 74H)) (S/N 54300 AND by the ADC (3410A1) at contact 2 of electrical
SUBSEQUENT) connector 3410A1P1 and enters the OAT probe
(1RT3) at contact 1 of electrical connector (1RT3J1).
The configuration module is located in the electrical The OAT probe (1RT3) outputs a signal to the ADC
connector (3410A1P1), at the Air Data Computer (3410A1) at contact 2 of electrical connector (1RT3J1)
(ADC) (3140A1) in the cockpit of the helicopter. that is received at contact 3 of electrical connector
(3410A1P1). The ground for the signal to the ADC
The configuration module stores the setup and (3410A1) leaves at contact 3 of electrical connector
configuration files of the ADC (3140A1). This allows (1RT3J1) and is received at contact 4 of electrical
the ADC (3140A1) to be replaced without the need to connector (3410A1P1).
redo the setup and configuration of the unit.
The ADC (3410A1) contains all of the electronics,
95-265. BAROMETRIC AND PITOT INSTRUMENTS aneroid, and pitot sensors to sense, calculate, and
ON THE PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY transmit the respective Arinc air data parameters to
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) the Primary Flight Display (PFD), (3160DS2), the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1), and the
integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 and
The Air Data Computer (ADC) system is the source of
3140A2).
the flight instruments that follow:
• Altimeter An Arinc 429 bus leaves the ADC (3410A1) at

contacts 47 and 48 of electrical connector (3410A1P1)
and enters the MFD (3160DS1) at contacts 16 and 17
• Vertical speed indicator
of electrical connector (3160DS1P1).
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT) indicator

An Arinc 429 bus leaves the ADC (3410A1) at
• Airspeed indicator and enters the PFD (3160DS2) at contacts 16 and 17
of electrical connector (3160DS2P1).
These indicators are shown on the Primary Flight
Display (PFD). For more information on these An Arinc 429 bus leaves the ADC (3410A1) at
indicators, refer to the Garmin G1000H Integrated contacts 26 and 27 of electrical connector (3410A1P1)
Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX and enters the integrated avionics unit (3140A1) at
(190-01255-00). contacts 12 and 13 of electrical connector
(3140A1P3).
95-266. AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM —
OPERATION (S/N 54300 AND An additional RS-232 duplex bus is used for
SUBSEQUENT) communications between the ADC (3410A1) and the
IAU (3140A1). Contacts 11, 12, and 10 of electrical
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the Air connector (3410A1P1) and contacts 41, 42, and 43
Data Computer (ADC) (3140CB2) circuit breaker and are used for this bus.
is then directed to contact 55 of electrical connector
(3410A1P1) (Figure 95-115). An Arinc 429 bus leaves the ADC (3410A1) at
The ADC (3410A1) is always powered as soon as the and enters the IAU (3140A2) at contacts 12 and 13 of
battery switch is set to on or external power is applied electrical connector (3140A2P3).
to the helicopter.
The Attitude Heading and Referencing Unit (AHRU)
The ADC (3410A1) inputs are the Outside Air (3420A1) needs the Arinc air data parameters for
Temperature (OAT) probe (1RT3), the pitot air, and the operation. The information is sent through an Arinc
static air. Both the pitot and static inputs sense air 429 bus. The Arinc 429 bus leaves the ADC (3410A1)
pressure routed from the pitot and static ports of the at contacts 41 and 42 of electrical connector
helicopter. (3410A1P1) and enters the AHRU (3420A1) at
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
contacts 15 and 30 of electrical connector 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
(3420A1P1). from the helicopter.
A configuration module is installed in the backshell of 2. Remove the left upper shroud assembly
electrical connector (3410A1P1). The configuration (paragraph 95-214).
module stores the setup and configuration files of the
Air Data Computer (ADC) (3410A1). This allows the
3. If installed, remove the Multi-Function Display
ADC (3410A1) to be replaced without the
(MFD) (paragraph 95-220).
configuration and setup files to be downloaded.
Configuration and setup information will be transferred
to the new ADC (3410A1) from the configuration 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3410A1P1)
module when the new ADC (3410A1) is powered. (2, Figure 95-116) from the air data computer
(3410A1) (1).
95-267. AIR DATA COMPUTER SYSTEM —
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT 5. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance 6. Disconnect the tube assembly (pitot) (3) from the
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance nipple (5) at the pitot port of the air data computer
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM. (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1).
95-268. AIR DATA COMPUTER (GDC 74H) — 7. Disconnect the tube assembly (static) (4) from
REMOVAL the adapter (6) at the static port side of the air data
computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1).
MATERIALS REQUIRED 8. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on all

pitot and static open ports.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 9. Remove the screws (10) and the washers (9)
from the air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1).
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs 10. Remove the air data computer (GDC 74H)
(3410A1) (1) from the supports (7 and 8).
WARNING 11. If the air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1)
is replaced, do as follows:

a. Remove the nipple (5) from the air data
b. Remove the adapter (6) from the air data
NOTE
Remove components only to the extent c. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on
necessary to perform maintenance. all pitot and static open ports.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1)

A 4. Tube assembly (static)
5. Nipple
6. Adapter
7. Support
8. Support
9. Washer
10. Screw
SEALANT (C-251)
3 2
10
4
B 9
1 2
5 8
2
6
VIEW B
1
VIEW A
INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVED FOR CLARITY
NOTES
1 Apply tape C-133 to the threads.
2 After installation of the air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1), apply sealant (C-251) to seal the mating
edges of the electrical bonding area.
407gc_MM_95_0099
Figure 95-116. Air Data Computer (GDC 74H) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-269. AIR DATA COMPUTER — CLEANING

WARNING
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
1. If the air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1,
C-516 Clean Cloth Figure 95-116) has been replaced, do as follows:
a. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean all static and pitot port fittings.
cloth (C-516).
b. Install tape (C-133) to the threads of the nipple
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a (5) and adapter (6), which are installed into the air data
clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1).
(C-385).
c. Install the nipple (5) on the pitot port of the air
3. Remove the dirt from electrical connector with a data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1). Tighten the
soft bristle brush. nipple.
d. Install the adapter (6) on the air data computer

95-270. AIR DATA COMPUTER — INSPECTION
(GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1). Tighten the adapter.
1. Visually examine the air data computer
2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the air data
(GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1, Figure 95-116) for the
computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1) and the supports
following:
(7 and 8) are clean and show no signs of corrosion.
Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for
• Cracks surface preparation.
• Mechanical damage and corrosion damage 3. Put the air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1)
(1) in position on the supports (7 and 8).
4. Install the screws (10) and the washers (9) on the
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1). Tighten
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion the screws.
95-271. AIR DATA COMPUTER (GDC 74H) — NOTE

INSTALLATION If the mating surfaces of the components
MATERIALS REQUIRED following step is not required.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 5. Make sure the bond resistance between the air
data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1) and the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE supports (7 and 8) meet Class R-I electrical bonding
C-133 Tape
6. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the mating edges
C-251 Sealant
of the electrically bonded areas of the air data
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1) and the supports 16. Do the return to service tests as specified in
(7 and 8). Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
7. Connect the tube assembly (static) (4) to the Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two
adapter (6) at the static port side of the air data display installations.
95-272. AIRSPEED INDICATIONS — PRIMARY
8. Connect the tube assembly (pitot) (3) to the FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND STANDBY
nipple (5) at the pitot port of the air data computer AIRSPEED INDICATOR — OPERATIONAL
(GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1). CHECK

electrical connectors. SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
10. Connect the electrical connector (3410A1P1) (2)

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
to the air data computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) (1).
11. If previously removed, install the Multi-Function Equivalent Tester
Display (MFD) (paragraph 95-223).
Equivalent
12. Install the left upper shroud assembly (paragraph
95-218). Model 6300 or Laversab Pitot-static
Equivalent Tester

the helicopter.
CAUTION
NOTE
The following step is not required if the D U R I N G T H E P I TO T- S TAT I C L E A K
same component as that removed is being C HE C K , DO NO T O P E N A L I NE O R
reinstalled and repair of the component did REMOVE A FITTING FROM THE VENT
not take place. SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE
14. If a new, repaired, or replacement air data E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S
computer (GDC 74H) (3410A1) was installed, INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION
complete the Air Data Computer (GDC 74H) Software
and Configuration Loading Procedure (paragraph
95-370). NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE VALVES.
NOTE CAUTION
For improved accuracy, allow the air data
computer (GDC 74H) to warm up for
15 minutes before performing the following TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST
checks. SET. THE HELICOPTER INSTRUMENTS
15. Do the operational checks as specified in DAMAGED BY IMPROPER
paragraph 95-272 through paragraph 95-275. MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
6. Power the test set and complete the initialization

setup.
CAUTION
DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars). Set
SYSTEM HEATERS WHILE THE TEST the altitude to 1000 feet AGL.
THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND 8. Set barometric pressure on the Primary Flight
PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR. Display (PFD) and the standby altimeter to match the
test set's barometric setting of 29.92 inches
(1013 millibars) Hg.
NOTE
The following instructions are written based 9. Verify that the PFD altimeter indication reads the
on use of the Laversab Model 6300 same as the test set altimeter within ±20 feet.
pitot-static tester. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for operation
and use of this pitot-static tester. If the NOTE
Barfield 1811GA665 or another equivalent When verifying standby instrument values,
pitot-static tester is used, refer to that gently tap on the instrument to allow the
manufacturer’s instructions for operation needle to stabilize.
and use of the applicable pitot-static tester.
10. Verify that the helicopter’s standby altimeter
indication reads the same as the test set altimeter
NOTE
within ±20 feet.
computer (GDC 74H) to warm up for 15 11. Simulate 120 knots airspeed with the test set.
minutes prior to performing this check.
12. Verify that the helicopter’s airspeed indication on
1. Connect the pitot hose and the pitot tube adapter the PFD reads 120 ±4 knots.
13. Verify that the helicopter’s standby airspeed
indication reads 120 ±4 knots.
adapter of the pitot-static tester to the left static port. 14. Perform a leak check on the pitot system
Make sure that the connections are tight and free of for 5 minutes. Verify losses are below 10 knots
leaks. (2 knots/min).
3. Seal the right static port with removable tape. 15. Increase the simulated airspeed to 145 knots
Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is airspeed with the test set.
free of leaks.
16. Verify that the airspeed trend vector (vertical
4. Make sure that all of the connections are tight magenta line to the right of the color-coded speed
and free of leaks. range strip) on the PFD is pointing upwards as the
airspeed increases.
NOTE 17. Verify that the VNE audio tone is heard in the pilot
Use an external power unit, if available, to and copilot headsets as the airspeed passes through
prevent the battery from being drained of its 140 ±2 knots.
18. Verify that the helicopter’s airspeed indication on
5. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the PFD digital readout displays 145 ±4 knots and the
external DC power to the helicopter. airspeed pointer is on the red tape.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
19. Verify that the helicopter’s standby airspeed 95-273. VELOCITY NOT TO EXCEED (VNE) —
indication reads 145 ±4 knots. OPERATIONAL CHECK
20. Reduce the simulated airspeed to 0 knots with

the test set. SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
21. Verify that the VNE audio tone ceases in the pilot NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
and copilot headsets as the airspeed passes through
140 knots. 1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static
Equivalent Tester
22. Verify that the airspeed trend vector (vertical
magenta line to the right of the color-coded speed 33410S-70-4 or Universal Test Adapter
range strip) on the PFD is pointing downwards as the Equivalent
airspeed decreases.
Model 6300 or Laversab Pitot-static
Equivalent Tester
23. The following provides additional test points for
the standby airspeed indicator and the allowable Type 1433M or Decade Resistor Box
tolerances. Gently tap on the bezel of the pitot-static Equivalent (or equivalent)
tester airspeed indicator and make sure it shows the
selected airspeed within the tolerances. Gently tap the
standby airspeed indicator on the instrument panel
and read the airspeed. CAUTION
• 20 knots ±1.5
DURING THE TEST, DO NOT OPEN A
LINE OR REMOVE A FITTING FROM THE
• 60 knots ±1.5 VENT SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE
• 80 knots ±1.5 E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S
• 100 knots ±4 OF THE TEST SET AND VALVES. DO
• 120 knots ±4
• 140 knots ±4 CAUTION
• 145 knots ±4
24. Reduce the simulated airspeed to 0 knots with SET. THE HELICOPTER INSTRUMENTS
the test set. ARE EASILY PEG GED AND CAN BE
DAMAGED BY IMPROPER
disconnect the hoses of the test set from the
CAUTION
external DC power from the helicopter. DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC
27. Return the helicopter to the standard SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. Verify that the displayed OAT value on the

NOTE
Primary Flight Display (PFD) corresponds to an OAT
The following instructions are written based value of approximately -40°C.
on use of the Laversab Model 6300
pitot-static tester. Refer to the 10. Using the air data test set, simulate 10,000 feet.
and use of this pitot-static tester. If the
11. Verify that the VNE bug is at 114 knots ±2 knots.
Barfield 1811GA665 or another equivalent
pitot-static tester is used, refer to that
manufacturer’s instructions for operation 12. Using the air data test set, simulate field elevation
and use of the applicable pitot-static tester. and return the airspeed to 0 knots.
13. Remove the decade box and reconnect the

NOTE
electrical connector (1RT3P1).
computer (GDC 74H) to warm up for 14. With the pressure and the vacuum stabilized,
15 minutes prior to performing this check. disconnect the hoses of the test set from the

adapter of the pitot-static tester to the left static port.
Make sure that the connections are tight and free of
leaks.
95-274. ALTITUDE INDICATIONS — PRIMARY

3. Seal the right static port with removable tape.
FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND STANDBY
Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is
ALTIMETER — OPERATIONAL CHECK
free of leaks.

and free of leaks.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NOTE
Use an external power unit, if available, to 1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static
prevent the battery from being drained of its Equivalent Tester
5. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect Equivalent
Model 6300 or Laversab Pitot-static
Equivalent Tester
setup.
7. Disconnect the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) CAUTION

probe from electrical connector (1RT3P1). Connect
one terminal of the decade box to pins 1 (PWR) and 2
(HI) and the other terminal of the decade box to pin 3 D U R I N G T H E P I T O T- S TAT I C L E A K
(LO) at electrical connector (1RT3P1). C HE C K , DO NO T O P E N A L I NE O R
8. Set the decade resistor box to 420 ohms. SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
INSTRUMENTS. FOLLOW THE TEST 3. Seal the right static port with removable tape.
E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION free of leaks.
NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE VALVES. 4. Make sure that all of the connections are tight
and free of leaks.
CAUTION NOTE
Use an external power unit, if available, to
TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST prevent the battery from being drained of its
SET. THE HELICOPTER INSTRUMENTS stored electrical power.
ARE EASILY PEGG ED AND CAN BE
DAMAGED BY IMPROPER 5. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect
MANIPULATION OF THE TEST SET. external power to the helicopter.

setup.
CAUTION
the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars).
DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC
SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO 8. Set the barometric pressure on the Primary Flight
THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND Display (PFD) and the standby altimeter to match the
PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR. test set's barometric setting of 29.92 inches
(1013 millibars) Hg.
NOTE 9. On the test set, simulate 120 knots airspeed and

The following instructions are written based 1000 feet altitude AGL.
pitot-static tester. Refer to the 10. Verify that PFD altimeter indication reads the
manufacturer’s instructions for operation same as the test set altimeter within ±20 feet.
pitot-static tester is used, refer to that NOTE
manufacturer’s instructions for operation When verifying standby instrument values,
and use of the applicable pitot-static tester. gently tap on the instrument to allow the
needle to stabilize.
NOTE
11. Verify that the helicopter’s standby altimeter
For improved accuracy, allow the air data reads within ±20 feet of the test set indicator.
15 minutes prior to performing this check. 12. Perform a leak check on the static system
for 5 minutes. Verify losses are below 500 feet
1. Connect the pitot hose and the pitot tube adapter (100 feet/min).
connections are tight and free of leaks. 13. Simulate a climb to 2,000 feet altitude AGL with
the test set.
adapter of the test set to the left static port. Make sure 14. Verify that the altimeter trend vector is pointing
that the connections are tight and free of leaks. upwards while altitude is increasing towards set value.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
15. Verify that the PDF indicated altitude reads within the pitot-static tester altimeter and make sure it shows
+20 feet of the test set indicator. the selected altitude within the tolerances. Gently tap
the standby altimeter on the instrument panel and read
16. Verify that the helicopter’s standby indicator the altitude.
reads within ±20 feet of the test set indicator.
• -1000 feet ±20
17. Set the selected altitude on the PFD to 5,000 feet
AGL. • 0 feet ±20
18. Simulate a climb to 5,500 feet altitude AGL with • 500 feet ±20
the test set.
• 1000 feet ±20
19. Verify that as altitude reaches 4000 feet AGL, the
selected altitude indication becomes black on a light • 1500 feet ±25
blue background, flashes for 5 seconds, and a single
aural tone is generated in the pilot and copilot • 2000 feet ±30
headsets.
• 3000 feet ±30
20. Verify that as altitude reaches 5000 feet AGL, a
single aural tone is generated. • 4000 feet ±35
21. Verify that as altitude reaches 5200 feet AGL, the • 6000 feet ±40
selected altitude indication becomes black on a yellow
background and a single aural tone is generated. • 8000 feet ±60
22. Simulate a descent to 1,000 feet AGL altitude on • 10,000 feet ±80
the test set.
• 12,000 feet ±90
23. Verify that as altitude returns to 5200 feet AGL,
the selected altitude background turns blue again. 29. On the test set, slowly reduce the airspeed to
0 knots. Make sure the PFD and standby airspeed
24. Verify that as altitude decreases through 4800 indicator slowly go back to their minimum value
feet AGL, the selected altitude background turns (0 knots).
yellow and remains yellow until a new selection is
made. 30. On the test set, slowly reduce the altimeter to the
local pressure altitude. Make sure the PFD and
25. Verify that the altimeter trend vector is pointing standby altimeter go back to the local pressure
downwards as the altitude is decreasing. altitude.
26. Verify that the PDF indicated altitude reads within 31. With the pressure and the vacuum stabilized,
±20 feet of the test set indicator when 1000 feet AGL disconnect the hoses of the pitot-static tester from the
is achieved. helicopter. Remove the tape from the right static port.
27. Verify that the helicopter’s standby indicator 32. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
reads within ±20 feet of the test set indicator when external DC power from the helicopter.
1000 feet AGL is achieved.
28. The following provides additional test points and configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
the allowable tolerances. Gently tap on the bezel of Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-275. VERTICAL SPEED INDICATIONS —

NOTE
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) —
OPERATIONAL CHECK The following instructions are written based
pitot-static tester. Refer to the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE pitot-static tester is used, refer to that
1811GA665 or Barfield Pitot-static and use of the applicable pitot-static tester.
Equivalent Tester
33410S-70-4 or Universal Test Adapter NOTE

Equivalent For improved accuracy, allow the air data
Model 6300 or Laversab Pitot-static 15 minutes prior to performing this check.
Equivalent Tester
connections are tight and free of leaks.
CAUTION
D U R I N G T H E P I TO T- S TAT I C L E A K adapter of the test set to the left static port. Make sure
CH E C K , DO NO T O P E N A L I NE O R that the connections are tight and free of leaks.
SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE 3. Seal the right static port with removable tape.
INSTRUMENTS. FOLLOW THE TEST Make sure that the static port is correctly sealed and is
E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ’ S free of leaks.
and free of leaks.
CAUTION NOTE
TAKE CARE WHEN USING THE TEST stored electrical power.
ARE EASILY PEGG ED AND CAN BE 5. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect
DAMAGED BY IMPROPER external power to the helicopter.

setup.
CAUTION
DO NOT TURN ON THE PITOT-STATIC the altimeter to 29.92 inches HG (1013 millibars).
SET IS CONNECTED OR DAMAGE TO 8. Set barometric pressure on the Primary Flight
THE TEST SET FITTINGS AND Display (PFD) to match the test set's barometric
PITOT-STATIC PORTS MAY OCCUR. setting of 29.92 inches (1013 millibars) Hg.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. On the test set, simulate 120 knots airspeed and 22. Return the helicopter to the standard
1000 feet altitude AGL. configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
10. Verify that PFD altimeter indication reads the
same as the test set altimeter within ±20 feet. 95-276. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIR DATA
COMPUTER (GDC 74H)) — REMOVAL
11. Perform a leak check on the static system for
5 minutes. Verify losses are below 500 feet (100 feet/
min). WARNING
12. Simulate an increasing altitude rate of climb of

1000 feet per/minute on the test set. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
13. Verify the PFD VSI indication displays 1000 feet
per/minute in the pointer.
14. Simulate an increasing altitude rate of climb of from the helicopter.
2000 feet per/minute on the test set.
2. Remove the shroud assembly (paragraph
15. Verify the PFD VSI indication displays 2000 feet 95-214) to get access to the electrical connector
per/minute in the pointer and that the tape turns red. (3140A1P1).
16. Simulate a decreasing altitude rate of descent of 3. Disconnect the electrical connector
500 feet per/minute on the test set. (3140A1P1) (1, Figure 95-117).
4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the

17. Verify the PFD VSI indication displays -500 feet
cover (3) of the electrical connector (3410A1P1) (1).
per/minute in the pointer.
5. Slide the configuration module (6) out of the slot

18. On the test set, slowly reduce the airspeed to
to remove it from the electrical connector body (5).
0 knots. Make sure the PFD airspeed indicator slowly
goes back to the minimum value (0 knots).
19. On the test set, slowly reduce the altimeter to the CAUTION
local pressure altitude. Make sure the PFD goes back
to the local pressure altitude.
DO NOT USE TOOLS TO REMOVE THE
CONNECTOR FROM THE
CONFIGURATION MODULE. THE
CONNECTOR IS FRAGILE AND MAY
BREAK.
21. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the 6. Carefully disconnect the electrical connector (4)
external DC power from the helicopter. from the configuration module (6).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B 4
6
DETAIL A
5
2. Screw
3. Cover
5. Electrical connector body DETAIL B
6. Configuration module (ROTATED 180°)
7. Air data computer (3410A1)

Figure 95-117. Configuration Module (Air Data Computer (GDC 74H)) — Removal and Installation
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-277. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIR DATA 95-279. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIR DATA
COMPUTER (GDC 74H)) — CLEANING COMPUTER (GDC 74H)) —
INSTALLATION
MATERIALS REQUIRED
WARNING
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
C-516 Clean Cloth EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,

clean cloth (C-516).
CAUTION
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol DO NOT USE TOOLS TO CONNECT THE
(C-385). CONNECTOR TO THE CONFIGURATION
MODULE. THE CONNECTOR IS
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a FRAGILE AND MAY BREAK.
soft bristle brush.
1. Connect the electrical connector (4,
95-278. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIR DATA Figure 95-117) to the configuration module (6).
COMPUTER (GDC 74H)) — INSPECTION
2. Slide the configuration module (6) in the slot to

NOTE insert it in the electrical connector body (5).
primarily intended when the part or 3. Install the two screws (2) that secure the
component has been removed from the cover (3) of the electrical connector (3140A1P1) (1).
be used when the part or component is 4. Connect the electrical connector (3140A1P1) (1)
installed on the helicopter. to the air data computer (3410A1) (7).
1. Examine the configuration module for mechanical

or corrosion damage.
the helicopter.
2. Examine the condition of the connector.

6. If the configuration module (6) was replaced by a
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface. new or repaired unit, do the Air Data Computer
(GDC 74H) Software and Configuration Loading
Procedure (paragraph 95-370).
4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary. 7. Install the shroud assembly (paragraph 95-218).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-280. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
(GTP 59) — REMOVAL clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
MATERIALS REQUIRED 3. Remove the dirt from electrical connector with a

soft bristle brush.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 95-282. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(GTP 59) — INSPECTION
1. Visually examine the outside air temperature
sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2, Figure 95-118) for the
following:
WARNING
• Cracks

• Mechanical damage, and corrosion damage.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). Repair or replace as necessary.
1. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or 2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
remove the external DC power from the helicopter. wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion
2. Remove the aft landing light panel.
95-283. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT3P1) (1, (GTP 59) — INSTALLATION
Figure 95-118).
4. Install the caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the MATERIALS REQUIRED

5. Remove the nut (5), washer (4), ring terminal (3),
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
and outside air temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3)
(2) from the aft landing light panel (6). C-251 Sealant
95-281. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(GTP 59) — CLEANING
WARNING
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol 1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the outside air
temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2,
C-516 Clean Cloth
Figure 95-118) and the aft landing light panel (6) are
clean and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface
cloth (C-516). preparation.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
2 1
5 1
6
DETAIL A
2. Outside air temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3)
3. Ring terminal
4. Washer
5. Nut
6. Panel
SEALANT (C-251)
NOTE
1 After installation, apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of the outside air
temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2) and the panel (6).
Figure 95-118. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (GTP 59) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Install the ring terminal (3), outside air 95-284. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2), washer (4), (GTP 59) — OPERATIONAL CHECK
and nut (5) on the aft landing light panel (6). Tighten
the nut.
NOTE
NOTE
If the mating surfaces of the components 15 minutes prior to performing this check.
following step is not required. NOTE
3. Make sure the bond resistance between the prevent the battery from being drained of its
outside air temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2) stored electrical power.
and the aft landing light panel (6) meets Class R-II
electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, 1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect
Chapter 8). external DC power to the helicopter.
4. Apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of the

outside air temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2), 2. Using an accurate temperature measuring device
nut (5), and aft landing light panel (6). or accurate temperature information as a baseline,
ensure the outside air temperature (OAT) displayed on
the Primary Flight Display (PFD) is approximately the
5. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
same.
6. Connect the electrical connector (1RT3P1) (1). 3. Verify that the indication and value does not differ
between the PFD and MFD when the DU BACKUP
switch is pressed.
7. Install the aft landing light panel (6).
8. Connect the battery or the external DC power to 4. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
the helicopter. external DC power from the helicopter.
9. Do an operational check of the outside air 5. Return the helicopter to the standard
temperature sensor (GTP 59) (1RT3) (2) (paragraph configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
95-284). Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
STANDBY INSTRUMENTS (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
95-285. STANDBY INSTRUMENTS (S/N 54300 pressure is used to compensate for the variation of the
AND SUBSEQUENT) — DESCRIPTION density of the air at various altitudes.
The standby instruments include a standby airspeed The only electrical power necessary is for the 28 VDC
indicator, a standby altimeter, and a magnetic of the integral lighting. The lighting system supplies
compass. the electrical power to the integral lighting circuit of the
indicator (Chapter 96).
95-286. STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR —
DESCRIPTION (S/N 54300 AND 95-287. STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR —
SUBSEQUENT) REMOVAL
The standby airspeed indicator (Figure 95-119) is

installed in the top of the instrument panel. The
standby airspeed indicator gives an indication of the
helicopter airspeed in knots. The standby airspeed
indicator has a bellows assembly, set of gears, pointer, NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
and dial. The set of gears are restrained by a spring.
The spring causes the pointer to go back to zero when M81969/14-02 Insertion/Extraction
there is no pressure in the bellows. A sealed case tool
contains all of the components of the standby airspeed
indicator.
The scale of the standby airspeed indicator is marked MATERIALS REQUIRED

with graduations at every 5 knots from 20 to 165 knots.
Range markings are painted on the dial. The green Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
range marking is from 0 to 140 knots. A red/white line
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
is painted at 100 knots to show the maximum
autorotation speed. A red line is painted at 140 knots C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
to show the never exceed speed (VNE).
The standby airspeed indicator (Figure 95-120) is fully

mechanical and can operate without electrical power. WARNING
The bellows assembly is mechanically attached to the
set of gears. The set of gears move the pointer on the
dial of the standby airspeed indicator. Pitot pressure OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
from the pitot tube is supplied to the inside of the WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
bellows assembly. As the pitot pressure increases, the
bellows assembly expands. The expansion of the
bellows assembly causes the gears to move the
pointer to show an increase of airspeed. As the pitot
pressure decreases, the bellows assembly retracts. NOTE
The retraction of the bellows assembly causes the
gears to move the pointer to show a decrease of Remove components only to the extent
airspeed. necessary to perform the required
maintenance.
Static pressure from the static ports is supplied to the
case of the standby airspeed indicator. The static 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
pressure is around the bellows assembly. The static from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1 2
(TYPICAL)
1. Airspeed indicator dial

2. Pointer
3. Red-white line (max autorotation speed)
4. Green arc
5. VNE red line (140 knots)
407_MM_95_0116
Figure 95-119. Standby Airspeed Indicator — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SET OF AIRSPEED INSTRUMENT

PITOT GEARS POINTER GLASS
PRESSURE
BELLOWS AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
STATIC
DIAL
PRESSURE
(TYPICAL)
407_MM_95_0117
Figure 95-120. Standby Airspeed Indicator — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Remove the shroud assembly (paragraph 1. Clean the exterior surface of the indicator with a
95-214). clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
3. Tag and disconnect the wires from the in-line
electrical connectors (3410M2P1 and 3410M2P2) (10 95-289. STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR —
and 9, Figure 95-121) with the insertion/extraction tool INSPECTION
NOTE
4. Disconnect the tube assembly (pitot) (6) from the
nipple (5) at the pitot port of the standby airspeed The following inspection criteria are
indicator (3410M2) (4). primarily intended when the part or
5. Disconnect the tube assembly (static) (8) from
the adapter (7) at the static port side.
be used when the part or component is
6. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on all
pitot and static open ports. 1. Examine the indicator for damage.
7. Remove the screws (1) from the instrument panel 2. Examine the condition of the mounting surface
assembly (3). and the attaching hardware.
8. Remove the standby airspeed indicator (3410M2) 3. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
(4) from the instrument panel assembly (3). cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary.
9. If you replace the standby airspeed indicator
(3410M2) (4), do as follows: 95-290. STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR —
INSTALLATION
a. Remove the nipple (5) from the standby
airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4).
b. Remove the adapter (7) from the standby
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
c. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on
all pitot and static open ports.
tool
d. Remove the nuts (2) from the standby
MATERIALS REQUIRED
95-288. STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR —
CLEANING Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
MATERIALS REQUIRED
C-133 Tape
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-516 Clean Cloth
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
10
A
9
2 8
7 1
5 1
1. Screw
2. Nut
4. Standby airspeed indicator (3410M2)
5. Nipple
7. Adapter
9. Electrical connector (3410M2P1) VIEW A
NOTE
1 Apply tape (C-133) to tapered thread.
Figure 95-121. Standby Airspeed Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Install the screws (1) on the standby airspeed

WARNING indicator (3410M2) (4). Tighten the screws.
4. Connect the tube assemblies (6 and 8) to the

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS standby airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4). Tighten the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR fittings.
5. Remove the protective tape from the electrical
leads.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 98 for correct installation 6. Remove the tags and connect the wires to the
of the wires and contacts. in-line electrical connectors (3410M2P1 and
3410M2P2) (10 and 9) with the insertion/extraction
1. If the standby airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4, tool (M81969/14-02) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
Figure 95-121) has been replaced, do as follows:
a. Install the nuts (2) on the standby airspeed 7. Install the shroud assemblies (paragraph
indicator (3410M2) (4). 95-218).
b. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from 8. Connect the battery or the external DC power to
all static and pitot ports. the helicopter.
NOTE 9. Make sure the light is working on the standby

When you install tape (C-133) on the nipple airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4).
(5), make sure no tape is left on the end
chamfer.
NOTE
c. Install tape (C-133) on the threads of the To do an operational check of the standby
nipple (5). Install the nipple on the pitot port of the airspeed indicator, refer to paragraph
standby airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4). Tighten the 95-272.
nipple.
NOTE (paragraph 95-260).
When you install tape (C-133) on the
adapter (7), make sure no tape is left on the 95-291. STANDBY ALTIMETER — DESCRIPTION
end chamfer. (S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
d. Install tape (C-133) on the thread of the The standby altimeter (Figure 95-122) is installed in
adapter (7). Install the adapter on the static port of the the top of the instrument panel. The altimeter gives an
standby airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4). Tighten the indication of the helicopter altitude in feet. The standby
adapter. altimeter (Figure 95-123) has an aneroid capsule, a
set of gears, three pointers, and a dial. A sealed case
2. Put the standby airspeed indicator (3410M2) (4) contains all of the components of the standby
in position at the back of the instrument panel altimeter. The position of the three pointers on the dial
assembly (3). shows the altitude of the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2
1
7
3
(TYPICAL)
5
4

3. Scale (in Hg)
4. Long pointer (100th of feet)
5. Barometric adjustment knob
6. Altimeter dial
7. Scale (in millibars)
407_MM_95_0010
Figure 95-122. Standby Altimeter — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

DIFFERENTIAL GLASS
ALTITUDE
STATIC POINTERS
PRESSURE
BARO
SET
SCALE BARO
SET
KNOB
(TYPICAL)
Figure 95-123. Standby Altimeter — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The aneroid capsule moves the three pointers of the

altimeter through the set of gears. The aneroid MATERIALS REQUIRED
of 29.92 inches HG at 15°C (50°F). Static pressure is Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
supplied from the static ports into the case of the
altimeter. As the helicopter altitude increases, the NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
static pressure decreases and causes the aneroid
capsule to expand. As the aneroid capsule expands, C-428 Caps and/or Plugs
the set of gears moves the pointers to show an
increase in altitude. As the helicopter altitude
the aneroid capsule to retract. As the aneroid capsule WARNING
retracts, the set of gears moves the pointers to show a
decrease in altitude.
The standby altimeter is set by the barometric setting WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
scale and knob. The standby altimeter has two setting NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
windows, one in inches of mercury (inch HG), the other EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
in millibars (mb).
NOTE
Altitude definitions are as follows:
1. Indicated altitude. This is the altitude read directly necessary to perform maintenance.
from the altimeter when it is set to the current
barometric pressure.
2. Pressure altitude. This is the altitude read from
the altimeter when it is set to 29.92 inch HG 2. Remove the shroud assemblies (paragraph
(1013 millibars) (standard barometric pressure). 95-214).
3. Density altitude. This is the pressure altitude 3. Tag and disconnect the wires from the in-line
corrected for non-standard temperature. electrical connectors (3410M1P1 and 3410M1P2) (8
and 9, Figure 95-124) with the insertion/extraction tool
4. True altitude. This is the exact height above
mean sea level.
4. Disconnect the tube assemblies (1 and 7) from
the tee and adapter assembly (2) at the static port of
5. Absolute altitude. This is the actual height above
the standby altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5).
the earth surface.
The bezel of the altimeter has 5 VDC integral lighting. 5. Remove the screws (11) from the instrument
The lighting system supplies the 5 VDC (Chapter 96). panel assembly (10).
95-292. STANDBY ALTIMETER INDICATOR — 6. Remove the standby altimeter indicator (3410M1)
REMOVAL (5) from the instrument panel assembly (10).
7. If you replace the standby altimeter indicator

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED (3410M1) (5), do as follows:
a. Remove the adapter (4) from the standby

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5).
b. Remove and discard the packing (3) from the
tool
adapter (4).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
A
7 9
6
5
1
4 3
1
10
11
1. Tube assembly
2. Tee and adapter assembly
3. Packing
4. Adapter
5. Standby altimeter indicator (3410M1)
6. Nut
7. Tube assembly
11. Screw
NOTE VIEW A
1 Apply tape (C-133) to tapered thread.
Figure 95-124. Standby Altimeter Indicator — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
c. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-428) on 95-295. STANDBY ALTIMETER INDICATOR —
all pitot and static open ports. INSTALLATION
d. Remove the nuts (6) from the standby

altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5). SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
95-293. STANDBY ALTIMETER INDICATOR —

CLEANING NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
MATERIALS REQUIRED tool
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE MATERIALS REQUIRED
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
C-516 Clean Cloth NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-133 Tape
1. Clean the exterior surface of the indicator with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
WARNING
95-294. STANDBY ALTIMETER INDICATOR —
INSPECTION
NOTE WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
The following inspection criteria are EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
component has been removed from the 1. If the standby altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5,
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection Figure 95-124) has been replaced, do as follows:
installed on the helicopter. a. Install the nuts (6) on the standby altimeter
1. Examine the indicator for damage.
b. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
2. Examine the condition of the mounting surface all static and pitot ports.
and the attaching hardware.
c. Install the packing (3) on the adapter (4).
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion d. Install the adapter (4) on the tee and adapter
damage. Replace when necessary. assembly (2). Tighten the adapter.
NOTE
When you install tape (C-133) on the
adapter (4), make sure no tape is left on the
end chamfer.
e. Install tape (C-133) on the threads of the

adapter (4). Install the adapter on the port of the
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
standby altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5). Tighten the case of the magnetic compass contains all the
adapter. components. The case is sealed and it is filled with
damping fluid. The lubber line is attached to the case
2. Put the standby altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5) at the face of the magnetic compass. The lubber line
in position at the back of instrument panel gives a reference line of the helicopter longitudinal
assembly (10). axis.
3. Install the screws (11) on the standby altimeter The magnetic card aligns itself with the magnetic field
indicator (3410M1) (5). Tighten the screws. of the earth. As the helicopter turns, the case turns
around the magnetic card. The position of the lubber
line on the magnetic card shows the heading of the
4. Install the tube assemblies (1 and 7) on the tee
helicopter.
and adapter assembly (2). Tighten the fittings.
A compensator is installed in the lower part of the
5. Remove the protective tape from the electrical case. The compensator has two permanent magnets.
leads. The compensator is used to correct the deviation
errors caused by the magnetic interference within the
helicopter. Figure 95-125 shows the simplified
NOTE
schematic of the magnetic compass.
Refer to Chapter 98 for correct installation
of the wires and contacts. 95-297. MAGNETIC COMPASS — CALIBRATION
(COMPASS ROSE METHOD)
6. Remove the tags and connect the wires to the
in-line electrical connectors (3410M1P1 and 1. Examine the magnetic compass for the
3410M1P2) (8 and 9) with the insertion/extraction tool conditions that follow. If any of these conditions are
(M81969/14-02) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4). present, replace the magnetic compass:
7. Install the shroud assemblies (paragraph • Level of the damping fluid is low
95-218).
8. Connect the battery or the external DC power to has a crack
the helicopter.
• Magnetic card has too much oscillation
9. Make sure the light is working on the standby
altimeter indicator (3410M1) (5). • Magnetic card is not level
• Magnetic card does not move freely

NOTE
To do an operational check of the standby 2. Before you start the calibration procedure make
altimeter, refer to paragraph 95-274. sure of the following conditions:
10. Do a leak check of the pitot-static system a. All of the magnetic material and equipment in
(paragraph 95-260). the helicopter are in their normal flight positions.
95-296. MAGNETIC COMPASS — DESCRIPTION b. The controls and levers are in their normal
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) flight positions.
The magnetic compass (Figure 95-125) is installed on c. All the persons near or in the helicopter have
a bracket in the right side of the forward cabin. The no magnetic material on them.
magnetic compass gives an indication of the heading
of the helicopter in relation to the magnetic north. The d. All vehicles, ground power units, other
magnetic compass has a magnetic card, which is helicopters, and aircraft are moved away from the
installed on a pivot assembly, and a lubber line. The compass rose.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIAPHRAGM COMPASS LUBBER INSTRUMENT

CARD LINE GLASS
PIVOT
ASSEMBLY
COMPASS MAGNETS COMPENSATOR

FLUID MAGNETS
COMPENSATOR
Figure 95-125. Magnetic Compass — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
e. The location for the compass calibration must

be at least 300 feet (90 m) away from electrical power
CAUTION
cables or communication cables installed above or
below ground.
f. The location for the compass calibration must LIGHTS, PITO T TUBE , AND S TAT IC
be at least 600 feet (180 m) away from large objects PORTS HEATERS. FAILURE TO OBEY
THIS PRECAUTION MAY RESULT IN AN
such as buildings, railroad tracks, high voltage
OVERHEAT CONDITION AND DAMAGE.
transmission lines, or direct current cables.
g. A magnetic survey must be performed on the used during flight. Simulate the actual flight conditions
compass swing area in accordance with local aviation to the extent practical during the compass calibration.
regulations. Additional surveys must be carried out Make sure the landing lights, pitot tube, and static port
after any changes, major construction, or new heaters are set to the OFF position.
installations within 600 feet (180 m) of the compass
swing area. NOTE
All of the adjustments of the screws on the
3. On the magnetic compass, loosen the cover to compass compensator must be made with
access the compensator. a non-metallic screwdriver. The compass
should be lightly tapped after each
adjustment and be allowed time to settle
4. Install the towing wheels on the helicopter skid
before a reading is taken.
(Chapter 9).
5. Tow the helicopter to a compass rose screw until the compass accurately reads north (N).
(Chapter 9).
heading.
6. Attach the right skid of the helicopter to the
compass rose with a holding fixture (Figure 95-126).
13. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W
7. Install the extension arm to the tow bar
(Chapter 9). 14. Move the helicopter to the magnetic south (S)
heading.
heading. 15. Read the heading on the compass and note any
error.

CAUTION screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.

A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE heading.
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. 18. Read the heading on the compass and note any
error.
and following warmup, roll the throttle to the FLY 19. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W
position. screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ALIGNMENT
LINE
SE
SW
GROUND HANDLING
WHEELS
W
E
COMPASS ROSE
HOLDING FIXTURE
CENTER
NW
NE
N TOW BAR TOW TRUCK
Figure 95-126. Compass Rose Method — Diagram (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
a. All of the magnetic material and equipment in

the helicopter are installed in their normal flight
CAUTION
positions.
THE MAXIMUM VALUE FOR AN ERROR b. The controls and levers are in their normal
IS ±10°. IF AN ERROR VALUE EXCEEDS flight positions.
±10°, DO THE C A L I B R AT I O N
PROCEDURE AGAIN. IF THE ERROR c. All the persons near or in the helicopter have
VA L U E C A N N O T B E D E C R E A S E D , no magnetic material on them.
d. All vehicles, ground power units, and
20. Move the helicopter through every 30° magnetic helicopters are moved away from the compass rose.
heading. Write all error values on a new correction
card. Write the serial number of the compass on the e. The location for the compass calibration must
back of the correction card. be at least 300 feet (90 m) away from electrical power
cables or communication cables installed above or
21. On the magnetic compass, install the cover of the below ground.
compensator.
f. The location for the compass calibration must
22. Shut down the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2). be at least 600 feet (180 m) away from large objects
such as buildings, railroads tracks, high voltage
transmission lines, or direct current cables.
23. Install the correction card in the holder on the
magnetic compass.
g. The location for the compass calibration is
level.
95-298. MAGNETIC COMPASS — CALIBRATION
(SIGHT COMPASS METHOD)
h. A magnetic survey must be performed on the
compass swing area in accordance with local aviation
regulations. Additional surveys must be carried out
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED after any changes, major construction, or new
installations within 600 feet (180 m) of the compass
swing area.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1234F or Equivalent Sight Compass 3. On the magnetic compass, loosen the cover to
access the compensator.
1. Examine the magnetic compass for the

4. Install the towing wheels on the helicopter skid
conditions that follow. If any of these conditions are
(Chapter 9).
5. Tow the helicopter to the location for the

• Level of the damping fluid is low
calibration (Chapter 9).
has a crack 6. Install the extension arm to the tow bar
(Chapter 9).
• Magnetic card oscillates too much
7. Use the sighting compass as follows:
• Magnetic card is not level
a. To determine the heading of the helicopter, the
• Magnetic card does not move freely sighting compass must be held as level as possible.
The person that uses the sighting compass must look
2. Before you start the calibration procedure, make through the sighting lens to the centre line of the
sure of the conditions that follow: helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
b. Take a reading of the heading after a sufficient PORTS HEATERS. FAILURE TO OBEY
amount of time for the compass card to stabilize. Read THIS PRECAUTION WILL RESULT IN AN
the heading three times to make sure of a proper OVERHEAT CONDITION AND DAMAGE.
indication of the heading.
c. The person that uses the sighting compass used during flight. Simulate the actual flight conditions
must stand directly in front of the helicopter. The to the extent practical during the compass calibration.
person must align the sighting compass directly in line Make sure the landing lights, pitot tube, and static port
with the helicopter centre line. The person reads the heaters are set to the OFF position.
heading on the sighting compass and finds any errors
of the helicopter heading. Move the helicopter to
correct any error of the helicopter heading. NOTE
d. At every heading, compare the heading of the Make all of the adjustments of the screws
magnetic compass indication and the indication of the on the compensator with a non-metallic
sighting compass. Write down any error shown on the screwdriver. Tap the compass lightly after
magnetic compass indication. each adjustment. Allow time for the
compass to settle before you take a
reading.
CAUTION 11. On the compass compensator, adjust the N-S

screw until the compass reads accurately north (N).
THE PERSON WHO USES THE
SIGHTING CO MPASS MUS T STAND 12. Move the helicopter to the magnetic east (E)
D I R E C T LY I N F R O N T O F T H E heading. Make sure of the helicopter heading with the
HELICOPTER AT A MINIMUM DISTANCE sighting compass.
OF 30 FEET (9.15 M). A DISTANCE OF
50 FEET (15.25 M) OR MORE IS
RECOMMENDED. 13. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W
heading. Make sure of the helicopter heading with the 14. Move the helicopter to the magnetic south (S)
sighting compass (Figure 95-127). heading. Make sure of the helicopter with the sighting
compass.
CAUTION 15. Read the heading on the compass and note any
error.

HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE 16. On the compass compensator, adjust the N-S
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.

position.
sighting compass.

CAUTION error.
DO NOT ENERGIZE THE LANDING 19. On the compass compensator, adjust the E-W
LIGHTS, PITOT TUBE , AND STAT IC screw to remove 1/2 of the noted error.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GROUND HANDLING WHEELS
TOW TRUCK
TOW BAR
LINE OF VISION
SIGHTING LENS
SIGHTING COMPASS
TECHNICIAN
Figure 95-127. Sighting Compass Method — Diagram (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
with the sighting compass. Write all error values on a

new correction card. Write the serial number of the
CAUTION
compass on the back of the correction card.
THE MAXIMUM VALUE FOR AN ERROR 21. On the magnetic compass, install the cover of the
IS ±10°. IF AN ERROR VALUE EXCEEDS
compensator.
±10°, DO THE C A L I B R AT I O N
PROCEDURE AGAIN. IF THE ERROR
VA L U E C A N N O T B E D E C R E A S E D , 22. Shut down the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2).
20. Move the helicopter through every 30° magnetic 23. Install the correction card in the holder on the
heading. Make sure of every heading of the helicopter magnetic compass.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
INTEGRATED FLIGHT DISPLAY SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND

SUBSEQUENT)
95-299. FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — • Engine data, showing Power Situation

INTEGRATED DISPLAYS (S/N 54300 Indicator (PSI) and dual tachometer
AND SUBSEQUENT)
Synthetic Vision is also available on the PFD and is
Increased situational awareness is provided by explained in the Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight
replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD)
(Figure 95-128) that features a large horizon, These flight instrument system integrated display
airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course system receives inputs from the following primary
deviation information. In addition to the flight sources:
instruments, engine, navigation, communication,
terrain, traffic, and weather information are also • Pitot-static system (paragraph 95-248)
presented on the PFD. Additional display features of
the PFD are shown in Figure 95-129. • Air Data Computer (ADC) (GDC 74H)
(paragraph 95-262)
The following flight instruments and supplemental
• Attitude and Heading Reference System
flight data are displayed on the PFD:
(AHRS) (GRS 77H) (Chapter 97)
• Airspeed indicator, showing indicated • Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
airspeed, airspeed awareness ranges, trend (GIA 63H) (paragraph 95-313)
vector
As the information provided in the following
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication paragraphs is general in nature, refer to the Garmin
G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell
• Altimeter, showing barometric setting, trend 407GX (190-01255-00) for additional information on
vector, reference altitude the flight instrument displays and their operation.
• Radar Altimeter (RA 4500) (optional kit) 95-300. AIRSPEED INDICATOR (S/N 54300 AND
(Chapter 97) SUBSEQUENT)
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) The airspeed indicator (Figure 95-130) displays
airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The
• Vertical deviation, glideslope, and glidepath groundspeed is displayed in knots below the airspeed
indicators indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on
the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots.
The minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at
20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI), showing
time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the
turn rate indicator, Course Deviation Indicator
black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching
(CDI), bearing pointers and information
never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
windows, navigation source
A color-coded (yellow, green, and red) speed range
• Transponder mode, code, and ident/reply strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote
(Chapter 97) normal operating range, caution range, and
never-exceed speed (VNE). A black and white
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT) checkered shutter covers the airspeed indication at or
below 15 knots, and remains displayed until reaching
• Wind data 20 knots.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
21 20
1 19
18
17
2
16
15
3
4 14
5 13
6 12
7 11
8 10
1. NAV frequency box 12. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

2. Airspeed indicator 13. Turn rate indicator
3. Current heading 14. Altimeter barometric setting
4. Ground speed 15. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
5. Power Situation Indicator (PSI) 16. Selected altitude
6. Selected heading bug 17. Altimeter
7. Dual tachometer 18. Selected altitude
8. Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 19. Com frequency box
9. Softkeys 20. Slip/skid indicator
10. System time 21. Attitude indicator
11. Transponder data box
Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved 407gc_MM_95_0126
Figure 95-128. Primary Flight Display (PFD) (Default) — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1
12
11
3 10
9
4
5 6 7
1. Traffic annunciation
2. Radar altimeter
3. Selected heading
4. Wind data
5. DME information window
6. Bearing information windows
7. Barometric minimum descent altitude
8. Flight plan window
9. Annunciation window
10. Selected course
11. Glideslope indicator
12. Marker beacon annunciation
Figure 95-129. Additional PFD Information — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
AIRSPEED
TREND
INDICATED VECTOR
AIRSPEED
SPEED SHUTTER COVERS

RANGES RED POINTER AT VNE
INDICATED AIRSPEED
BELOW 20 KNOTS
VNE 100 KNOTS

GROUND
EXCEEDED IN
SPEED
AUTOROTATION
Figure 95-130. Airspeed Indicator — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The airspeed trend vector is a vertical, magenta line 95-302. ALTIMETER (S/N 54300 AND
that appears to the right of the color-coded speed SUBSEQUENT)
range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or
decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored The altimeter (Figure 95-132) displays 600 feet of
to the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape
moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rolling number gauge. Numeric labels and major tick
rate of acceleration or deceleration. For any constant marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick
marks are at intervals of 20 feet. The current altitude is
rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of
displayed in the black pointer.
the line shows approximately what the indicated
airspeed value will be in 6 seconds. If the trend vector
The selected altitude is displayed above the altimeter
crosses VNE, the text of the actual airspeed readout
in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If
speed remains constant or if any data needed to the selected altitude exceeds the range shown on the
calculate airspeed is not available due to a system tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of
failure. the tape. When the metric value is selected it is
displayed in a separate box above the selected
95-301. ATTITUDE INDICATOR (S/N 54300 AND altitude.
SUBSEQUENT)
A magenta altitude trend vector extends up or down
the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
Attitude information (Figure 95-131) is displayed over approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the
a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
horizon line. The attitude indicator displays the pitch, altitude remains constant or if data needed for
roll, and slip/skid information. calculation is not available due to a system failure.
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the
below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
labels are shown for every 10°, up to 80°. Minor pitch (hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the
altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in
marks are shown for intervening 5° increments, up to
VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For
25° below and 45° above the horizon line. Between large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
20° below to 20° above the horizon line, minor pitch helicopter to re-establish on the descent path. If the
marks occur every 2.5°. When the synthetic vision change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
system is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10° target altitude, the helicopter may not re-establish on
up and 7.5° down. the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll A baro transition alert is provided to alert the pilot to
scale. Major tick marks at 30° and 60° and minor tick change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is
marks at 10, 20, and 45° are shown to the left and right
displayed by the flashing light blue barometric
of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
pressure setting when crossing the transition altitude.
of the pointer on the roll scale.
95-303. RADAR ALTIMETER (RA 4500)
The slip/skid indicator is the bar beneath the roll (OPTIONAL KIT) (S/N 54300 AND
pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer SUBSEQUENT)
and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate
uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid The optional radar altimeter (RA 4500) optional kit
(outside the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar (BHT-407-II-29) indication is shown in Figure 95-129.
relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal
to one ball displacement on a traditional slip/skid Refer to Chapter 97 for detailed information on the
indicator. radar altimeter (RA 4500) system.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8
1
1. Roll pointer
2 7 2. Roll scale
3. Horizon line
4. Aircraft symbol
6 5. Land representation
3 6. Pitch scale
7. Slip/skid indicator
8. Sky representation
9. Roll scale zero
4
5
SLIP/SKID INDICATION
Figure 95-131. Attitude Indicator — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SELECTED
ALTITUDE
SELECTED (METERS)
ALTITUDE
SELECTED
ALTITUDE
BUG
CURRENT
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE (METERS)
CURRENT
TREND ALTITUDE
VECTOR
MDA/DH
BUG
BAROMETRIC
BAROMETRIC SETTING BOX
SETTING (HECTOPASCALS)
ALTIMETER ALTIMETER (METRIC)
Figure 95-132. Altimeter — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-304. VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI) (S/N (Figure 95-134) appear on the PFD in conjunction with
54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical
track” voice alert.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) (Figure 95-133)
displays the helicopter vertical speed on a fixed scale VNV indications are removed from the PFD according
with labels at 1000, 2000, and 3000 fpm. Digits appear to the criteria listed in Figure 95-134.
in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater
than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds
3000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding 95-307. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the (HSI) (S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
pointer.
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
A magenta chevron is displayed as the Required (Figure 95-135) displays a rotating compass card in a
Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV heading-up orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal
target altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 points and numeric labels occur every 30°. Major tick
minute” alert has been generated. marks are at 10° intervals and minor tick marks at 5°
intervals. A digital reading of the current heading
95-305. VERTICAL DEVIATION, GLIDESLOPE, appears on top of the HSI, and the current track is
AND GLIDEPATH INDICATORS (S/N 54300 represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The
AND SUBSEQUENT) HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing,
and navigation source information. The HSI is
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) (Figure 95-133) available in two formats, a 360° compass rose and a
is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical 140° arc.
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being
used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD The 360° HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator
within 1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the (CDI), with a course pointer, to/from indicator, and a
display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a
single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
The glideslope indicator appears to the left of the line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2). which points in the
altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the direction of the set course. The to/from arrow rotates
active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the with the course pointer and is displayed when the
glideslope indicator, like a glideslope needle on a active NAVAID is received.
conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, NO GS is displayed in
place of the diamond. The arc HSI is a 140° expanded section of the
compass rose. The arc HSI contains a course pointer,
combined to/from indicator and a sliding deviation
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS
indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage,
approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance
the to/from indicator flips and points to the tail of the
(LNAV+V, L/VNV, LPV). When an approach of this
helicopter, just like a conventional to/from flag.
type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the
Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the
selected navigation source, the glidepath indicator
arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an
appears as a magenta diamond. If the approach type
arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), NO GP
is displayed in place of the diamond.
The selected heading is shown to the upper left of the
Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. HSI and is displayed in light blue. The light blue
heading bug on the compass rose corresponds to the
95-306. VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) selected heading.
INDICATIONS (S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT) The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the
HSI. The color of the selected course corresponds to
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV the selected navigation source: magenta for GPS or
indications (VNV Target Altitude, RSVI, VDI) green for NAV (VOR, LOC).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
VNV TARGET
ALTITUDE
VERTICAL
SPEED
INDICATOR
VERTICAL
DEVIATION GLIDESLOPE GLIDEPATH
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
VERTICAL
REQUIRED SPEED
VERTICAL POINTER
SPEED
INDICATOR
VERTICAL SPEED AND GLIDESLOPE GLIDEPATH

DEVIATION INDICATORS (VSI AND VDI) INDICATOR INDICATOR
Figure 95-133. Vertical Speed and Vertical Deviation Indication — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TOP OF DESCENT MESSAGE
VNV TARGET
ALTITUDE
VERTICAL
DEVIATION
INDICATOR
REQUIRED
VERTICAL
SPEED BUG
GPS IS TERMINAL
SELECTED PHASE OF
NAVIGATION FLIGHT
SOURCE
VNV Indication Removed

Criteria
Required Vertical Vertical VNV Target
Speed (RSVI) Deviation (VDI) Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight
X X X
plan change
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV softkey selected on MFD) X X X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to

unsupported flight plan leg type X X X
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV

X X X
Target Altitude
Current crosstrack or track angle error has X X X

exceeded limit
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be
reached within maximum allowed flight path angle and X X
vertical speed
Figure 95-134. Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD) — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
1. Turn rate indicator

2. Selected heading
3. Current track indicator
4. Lateral deviation scale
5. Navigation source
6. Aircraft symbol
7. Course deviation indicator (CDI)
8. Rotating compass card
9. OBS mode active
10. To/from indicator
11. Course pointer
12. Heading bug
13. Flight phase
14. Selected course
15. Turn rate and heading trend vector
16. Current heading
17. Lubber line
17 16 15
1
Half-standard
2 14
Turn Rate
3 Arrow Shown
13 Standard for Turn Rate
4
Turn Rate > 4 deg/sec
5 12
6 11
TURN RATE INDICATOR
10 AND TREND VECTOR
7 9
8
360° HSI SHOWN
Tuning Mode Bearing 1 Bearing 2

Pointer Pointer
Frequency
Distance
Distance to Station ADF

Bearing Source Identifier Frequency
Bearing Source Pointer 1 Pointer 2 Bearing Source

BEARING 1 INFORMATION WINDOW BEARING 2 INFORMATION WINDOW
HSI WITH BEARING AND DISTANCE INFORMATION
Figure 95-135. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The turn rate indicator is located directly above the the Primary Flight Display (PFD) under normal display
rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right conditions and in reversionary display mode.
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard
turn rates. A magenta turn rate trend vector shows the 95-310. WIND DATA INDICATION (S/N 54300 AND
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the SUBSEQUENT)
heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the
Wind direction and speed (relative to the helicopter)
indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard
(Figure 95-137) in knots can be displayed in a window
turn rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted to the upper left of the HSI. When the window is
heading of 18° from the current heading. At rates selected for display, but wind information is invalid or
greater than 4° per second, an arrowhead appears at unavailable, the window shows NO WIND DATA. Wind
the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction data can be displayed in three different ways.
is no longer valid.
95-311. POWER SITUATION INDICATOR (PSI)
Two bearing pointers and associated information can AND DUAL TACHOMETER (S/N 54300
be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF AND SUBSEQUENT)
sources by pressing the PFD softkey, then a BRG or
DME softkey. The bearing pointers are light blue and The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and dual
are single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A tachometer indicator are shown in Figure 95-149.
pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to
indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers
Refer to paragraph 95-382 for detailed information on
never override the CDI and are visually separated
these indications.
from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be
selected but not necessarily visible due to data
unavailability. When the arc HSI is displayed, the 95-312. PFD ANNUNCIATORS AND ALERTING
bearing information windows and pointers are FEATURES (S/N 54300 AND
disabled. SUBSEQUENT)
The following annunciations and alerting functions are

The DME information window is displayed above the
displayed on the Primary Flight Display (PFD). For
BRG1 information window on the 360° HSI and in a
information on these features, refer to the Garmin
box above and along side the arc HSI. It shows the
G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell
DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
407GX (190-01255-00).
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the
distance is replaced by ... . NM.
• System alerting
95-308. TRANSPONDER MODE (S/N 54300 AND

• Marker beacon annunciations
SUBSEQUENT)
• Traffic annunciation
The transponder mode indication is shown in
Figure 95-128.
• Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning
System (HTAWS) annunciations
Refer to Chapter 97 for detailed information on the
transponder (GTX 33H ES) system. • Altitude alerting
95-309. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (OAT) • Low altitude annunciation

INDICATION (S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT) • Minimum descent altitude/decision height
alerting
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) (Figure 95-136) is
displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) in the lower left of • Radar altimeter
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NORMAL DISPLAY
REVERSIONARY MODE
Figure 95-136. Outside Air Temperature Indication — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
OPTION 3 NO DATA
Figure 95-137. Wind Data Indication — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-313. INTEGRATED AVIONICS AND (3160DS1) and Multi-Function Display (MFD)

DISPLAY SYSTEM (S/N 54300 AND (3160DS2) in the cockpit.
SUBSEQUENT)
The integrated avionics units (3140A1 and 31040A2)
The integrated avionics and display system is the main are the central processors to the G1000 system. The
data collection, display, and control system used on the integrated avionics units function as a main
helicopter. The integrated avionics and display system communications hub, linking most Line Replaceable
is used by the pilot for various control functions and the Units (LRUs) with the PFD and MFD. The integrated
indication of most avionic and mechanical systems. avionics units contain the GPS receiver, VHF COM/
NAV receivers, and system integration
The integrated avionics and display system includes microprocessors.
the components that follow:
The integrated avionics units communicate directly with
• Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 the PFD and MFD using a High Speed Data Bus
(GIA 63H (3140A1 and 3140A2) (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Software and
configuration settings are sent from the displays
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) and through the integrated avionics units to LRUs in the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H) system.
(3160DS1 and 3160DS2)
The integrated avionics units contain the following
• Airframe and engine systems processor sub-assemblies:
(GEA 71H) (7320A1)
• A main processor that interfaces with all LRUs
• Engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) (7730A1) in the G1000 sub-system
• Configuration modules (PFD and airframe and • A twelve channel parallel GPS receiver that
engine systems processor) simultaneously tracks and uses up to 12
satellites
• Reversion mode select switch
• Includes a 15-channel WAAS certified GPS
• Miscellaneous status pages and indicators on receiver
the multifunction/primary flight display
• A VHF COM transceiver that provides tuning
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component from 118.00 to 136.992 MHz in 25 kHz or
reference designator index table and location figure 8.33 kHz spacing for 760 or 2280 channel
(Chapter 98) to find the installed location of the configuration, respectively
components.
• A VOR/ILS localizer receiver that provides
To help clarify system or circuit operation, refer to the tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
simplified schematic (Figure 95-138) while reading increments
information about the integrated avionics and display
system. • An ILS glideslope receiver that provides tuning
from 328.6 to 335.4 MHz as paired with the
95-314. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS frequency tuned on the VOR/ILS localizer
receiver
The integrated avionics units (3140A1 and 31040A2)
are located behind the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
CB PANEL
GIA 1 COM
3160CB6 MFD (L-DU) INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1
3160DS1 3140A1
28 VDC 7.5 A
BUS (GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H) 3140A1P5
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A AIRCRAFT POWER 29

ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B POWER GROUND 76
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A
GIA 1 SYS
3160A1P1 ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B
3160CB4 3140A1P1
28 VDC 3A 27 POWER GROUND REVERSIONARY AIRCRAFT POWER 17

BUS 58
MODE SELECT 1 AIRCRAFT POWER 19
POWER GROUND 30
SIGNAL GROUND 38
POWER GROUND 31 AIRFRAME AND ENGINE
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
57 CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM 3 SYSTEMS PROCESSOR
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
MFD (L-DU) 7320A1
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
3160CB1 ETHERNET IN 2B 9 REVERSIONARY 3140A1P3 7320A1P1 (GEA 71H)
LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 59 MODE SELECT
28 VDC 5A 35 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) 23 5 RS-485 1A
BUS 3160S1 PUSH ON
PUSH OFF 1 RS-485 1B (GEA 1) 24 6 RS-485 1B
ACTION
SWITCH
ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER
2
7730A1
PFD (R-DU)
7730A1P1 7730A1P1
3160DS2
PFD (R-DU)
(GDU 1040H) 1 POWER IN 5 14
3160CB2 3160A2P1 3160DS2P1
2 POWER GROUND 23 11
28 VDC 5A 35 MDF (L-DU) LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 59 21 77
DIGITAL DIGITAL
BUS ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 3 3 67 3
OUTPUTS INPUTS
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6 26 74
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 29 75
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 32 76
GIA 2 SYS SIGNAL GROUND 38
27 POWER GROUND
3160CB3 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
REVERSIONARY
58
MODE SELECT 1 3140A2
28 VDC 3A
CONFIGURATION
BUS (GIA 63H) 3140A2P3
MODULE
3140A2P1 1 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) 23 7 RS-485 2A
CONFIG MODULE GROUND 1 1 GROUND RS-485 1B (GEA 1) 24 8 RS-485 2B
CONFIG MODULE POWER 23 17 AIRCRAFT POWER
4 VCC CONFIG MODULE
GIA 2 COM CONFIG MODULE DATA 22 19 AIRCRAFT POWER
3 DATA
3160CB5 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 43 30 POWER GROUND 1 1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND
2 CLOCK
31 POWER GROUND 4 21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT
28 VDC 7.5 A 3 40 CONFIG MODULE DATA
BUS
2 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
3140A2P3
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A 3140A2P5

GEA ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A AIRCRAFT POWER 29 35 AIRCRAFT POWER 1
7320CB1
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B POWER GROUND 76 20 POWER GROUND
28 VDC 3A
BUS
7320A1P2
ANALOG IN 2A HI
54
(BUS MON)
NOTES
1 CONTINUATION POINT FROM WIRING DIAGRAMS HAVING FEEDS TO INTEGRATED 3 REFER TO ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS) AND ENGINE POWER AND SPEED
AVIONICS NO. 1 (3140A1) OR INTEGRATED AVIONICS NO. 2 (3140A2) (CHAPTER 98) INDICATION WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
2 REFER TO INSTRUMENTS AND PANEL LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98). 407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0125_c01
Figure 95-138. Integrated Avionics and Display System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-315. DISPLAY UNITS – Control and display of dual communications

transceivers operating in the 118.00 to
The Display Units (DUs) are located in the cockpit on 136.975 MHz range in 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz
the instrument panel. frequency spacing
The DUs provide a central display and user interface – Control and display of dual VOR/ILS receivers
for the Garmin integrated flight deck. The DUs are tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
mounted flush to the aircraft instrument panel using increments
four captive screws. The DUs can be configured as
either a Multi-Function Display (MFD) or Primary Flight – Control and display of transponder, as well as
Display (PFD). The DUs provides the three major datalink (if installed) and weather radar (if
functions that follow: installed)
• Flight instrument functions: 95-316. AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM

PROCESSOR (GEA 71H)
– Display of attitude (pitch and roll), rate of turn,
slip/skid, heading, airspeed, altitude, and The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1)
vertical speed information (PFD or is installed in the instrument panel, behind the Primary
reversionary modes only) Flight Display (PFD).
– Display of engine and airframe The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1)
instrumentation (MFD or reversionary modes is a model GEA 71H micro-processor based input/
only) output Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) used to monitor
sensor inputs and drive annunciator outputs for aircraft
– Display of the command bars and modes airframe and engine systems.
(PFD or reversionary modes only)
The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1)
• Navigation instrument functions: interfaces with the engine signal conditioner (GSC 46)
(7730A1) and various sensors on the aircraft and
– Display of position and ground speed for use communicates airframe and engine information via an
by the pilot/flight crew RS-485 digital interface to the integrated avionics units
(3140A1 and 3140A2). The integrated avionics units
– Display of stored navigation and map N0.1 and No. 2 then interface with the Primary Flight
databases for use by the pilot/flight crew Display (PFD) (3160DS2) and the Multi-Function
Display (MFD) (3140DS1). Typically, the MFD shows
– Control and display of the HSI, Selected engine instrumentation while the PFD normally shows
Heading, and Selected Course (PFD or airframe alerts provided by the airframe and engine
reversionary modes only) system processor (7320A1). Engine/airframe
instrumentation is also displayed on the PFD and/or
– Area navigation functions using the MFD while the system is in reversionary mode. The
determined position/velocity and stored airframe and engine systems processor (7320A1)
navigation data uses a configuration module temperature sensor
housed in the backshell of electrical connector
– Approach navigation functions and associated (7320A1P1) to monitor backshell junction
databases temperatures. The backshell also contains a
thermocouple sensor to provide a reference junction
– Baro-altitude vertical navigation for the engine temperature sensor.
• System interface functions: 95-317. ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (GSC 46)
– Interfacing with the integrated avionics units The engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) is installed on
No. 1 and No. 2 and the PFD and MFD the aft avionics equipment shelf, which is located
Display Units (DU) behind the aft hat rack in the passenger compartment.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The purpose of the engine signal conditioner The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) contains
(GSC 46) is to convert analog signals from the engine all of the electronics to do communications between
torque transducer, main rotor (NR) monopole pickup, the Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) and is the main
engine gas producer (NG) monopole pickup, and the interface of the Integrated Avionics System (IAS).
engine power turbine (NP) monopole pickup into
digital signals for use by the airframe and engine Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the
system processor (GEA 71H). Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160CB1) circuit
breaker and is then directed to contact 35 of electrical
95-318. CONFIGURATION MODULES connector (3160DS1P1).
Two configuration modules are used in the system.

Both are installed in the main electrical connector of The MFD (3160DS1) is always powered as soon as
the respective Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) they the battery switch is set to on or external power is
support. One configuration module is installed in the applied to the helicopter.
backshell of the electrical connector (3160DS2P1),
which is located at the Primary Flight Display (PFD) The MFD (3160DS1) contains all of the electronics to
(3160DS2). Another is installed in the backshell of the display and control the various pages.
electrical connector (73120A1P1), which is located at
the airframe and engine processor (7320A1). An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of
electrical connector (3140A1P3) and leaves the MFD
The configuration module for the PFD (3160DS2) (3160DS1) at contacts 2 and 3 of electrical connector
contains the main configuration files for the G1000 (3160DS1P1).
system. The configuration module for the engine
systems processor (7320A1) contains engine and
airframe configurations for the helicopter systems. An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the
electrical connector (3160A1P1) and leaves the
95-319. MISCELLANEOUS STATUS PAGES ON integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) at contacts 2
THE MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY AND and 3 of electrical connector (3140A1P3).
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
These two busses make a transmit and receive bus
The primary function of the integrated avionics and that allows two-way communications between the
display system is to sense and convert the various integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) and the MFD
data from the helicopter systems and display the (3160DS1). This allows the controls to be made on the
information on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and MFD (3160DS1) to act on the integrated avionics unit
the Multi-Function Display (MFD). For more (3140A1).
information on these PFD and MFD pages, refer to the
G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide. Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the
GIA 2 COM (3160CB3) circuit breaker and is then
95-320. INTEGRATED AVIONICS AND directed to contacts 17 and 19 of electrical connector
DISPLAY SYSTEM — OPERATION (3140A2P1).
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1 Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the
COM (3160CB6) circuit breaker (Figure 95-138) and is GIA 2 SYS (3160CB3) circuit breaker and is then
then directed to contacts 17 and 19 of electrical directed to contact 29 of electrical connector
connector (3140A1P1). (3140A2P5).
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the
GIA 1 SYS (3160CB4) circuit breaker and is then The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) is always
directed to contact 29 of electrical connector powered as soon as the battery switch is set to on or
(3140A1P5). external power is applied to the helicopter.
The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) is always The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) contains
powered as soon as the battery switch is set to on or all of the electronics to do communications between
external power is applied to the helicopter. the LRU and is the main interface of the IAS.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the PFD The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1)
(3160CB2) circuit breaker and is then directed to transmits the digital data to the integrated avionics unit
contact 35 of electrical connector (3160DS2P1). (3140A1) via an RS-485 bus at contacts 5 and 6 of
electrical connector (7320A1P1) and contacts 23 and
24 of electrical connector (3140A1P3).
The PFD (3160DS2) is always powered as soon as
the battery switch is set to on or external power is
applied to the helicopter. The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1)
transmits the digital data to the integrated avionics unit
No, 2 (3140A2) via an RS-485 bus at contacts 7 and 8
The PFD (3160DS2) contains all of the electronics to of electrical connector (7320A1P1) and contacts 23
display and control the various pages. and 24 of electrical connector (3140A2P3).
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of A configuration module is installed in the electrical
electrical connector (3140A2P3) and leaves the PFD connector (7320A1P1). The configuration module
(3160DS2) at contacts 2 and 3 of electrical connector stores setup and configuration files for the airframe
(3160DS2P1). and engine system processor (7320A1).
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the The MFD (3160DS1) and the PFD (3160DS2) have
electrical connector (3160DS2P1) and leaves the their own transmit/receive busses that allows the
integrated avionics unit (3140A1) at contacts 2 and 3 Integrated Avionics Systems (IAS 1 or IAS 2) to be
of electrical connector (3140A2P3). controlled by either display unit.
These two busses make a transmit and receive bus An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 8 and 9 of the
that allows two-way communications between the electrical connector (3160DS1P1) and leaves the PFD
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) and the PFD (3160DS2) at contacts 6 and 7 of electrical connector
(3160DS2P1).
(3160DS2). This allows the controls to be made on the
MFD (3160DS1) to act on the integrated avionics unit
No, 2 (3140A2). An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 8 and 9 of the
electrical connector (3160DS2P1) and leaves the MFD
(3160DS1) at contacts 6 and 7 of electrical connector
A configuration module is installed in the electrical
(3160DS1P1).
connector (3160DS2P1). The configuration module
stores setup and configuration files for the PFD
(3160DS2). A reversionary mode select switch (3160S1) gives a
signal ground input from contacts 38 of electrical
connectors (3160DS1P1 and 3160DS2P1) to contacts
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GEA contacts 58 of electrical connectors (3160DS1P1 and
(7320CB1) circuit breaker and is then directed to 3160DS2P1) for mode control.
contact 35 of electrical connector (7320A1P1) and
contact 54 of electrical connector (7320A1P2).
95-321. INTEGRATED AVIONICS AND DISPLAY
SYSTEM — REDUNDANCY
The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1)
is always powered as soon as the battery switch is set System redundancy is provided in the event of a
to on or external power is applied to the helicopter. failure of integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1),
Integrated Avionics Unit No. 2 (3140A2) or the
The airframe and engine system processor (7320A1) Airframe and Engine System Processor (GEA 71H).
contains all of the electronics to read the various
analog, digital, and contact inputs from the engine and Table 95-38 provides information on the items that will
the airframe systems and convert them into a digital be inoperative in the event that one of the units fails.
format. Items not listed remain operative.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-38. Inoperative Items Following GIA 63H NO.1, GIA 63H NO. 2 or GEA 71H Failure
GIA 63H NO.1 GIA 63H NO.2 GEA 71H

INOPERATIVE ITEM
FAILURE FAILURE FAILURE
ENGINE FIRE Warning (Kit) X

RPM Warning X
RPM Audio Mute X
XMSN OIL PRESS Warning X
XMSN OIL TEMP Warning X
BAGGAGE DOOR Caution X
BATTERY RLY Caution X
CYC CTR (On PSI) X
ENGINE CHIP Caution X
FLOAT ARM Caution (Kit) X
FUEL FILTER Caution X
FUEL LOW Caution X
R/FUEL BOOST Caution X
L/FUEL BOOST Caution X
FUEL VALVE Caution X
L/FUEL XFR Caution X
R/FUEL XFR Caution X
GEN FAIL Caution X
HEATER OVERTEMP Caution (Kit) X
HYDRAULIC SYS Caution X
LITTER DOOR Caution X
T/R CHIP Caution X
XMSN CHIP Caution X
AUTO RELIGHT Advisory X
ENGINE ANTI-ICE Advisory X
START Advisory X
FLOAT TEST Status (Kit) X
WOG Status X
TA MUTE on Collective X
Forward Fuel Tank Quantity Select Button X
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-322. INTEGRATED AVIONICS AND DISPLAY 4. On the right side, pull on the ring (9) on the front
SYSTEM — COMPONENT REPLACEMENT of the integrated avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H)
(3140A2) (1) and lift the integrated avionics unit 0.75
inch (19.05 mm) to remove the integrated avionics unit
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
from the rack (2).
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM. 5. On the left side, pull on the ring (9) on the front of
the integrated avionics unit No. 1 (GIA 63H) (3140A1)
(10) and lift the integrated avionics unit 0.75 inch
95-323. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT (GIA 63H) (19.05 mm) to remove the integrated avionics unit
— REMOVAL from the rack (2).

MATERIALS REQUIRED electrical connectors.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 7. If necessary, remove the rack (2) as follows:
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
a. Remove the sealant from the base of the
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs rack (2).
b. Pull on the spring clips (5) to unlock the

backplate (4) from the rack (2).
WARNING
c. Remove the screws (3) from the rack (2).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS d. Remove the rack (2) from the supports (6
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR and 7).
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 95-324. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT (GIA 63H)
— CLEANING
NOTE
The following procedure is provided for the MATERIALS REQUIRED
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) on
the right side. The procedure is the same Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
for the integrated avionics unit No, 1
(3140A1) on the left side, except where NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
indicated.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power C-516 Clean Cloth
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean

2. Remove the Primary Flight Display (PFD) or the cloth (C-516).
Multi-Function Display (MFD), if installed (paragraph
95-220). 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
3. At the forward lower area of rack (2, (C-385).
Figure 95-139), loosen the screw (8) until the spring
pins on the rack clear the foot of the integrated 3. Remove the dirt from electrical connector with a
avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2) (1). soft bristle brush.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
1. Integrated avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2) 10
2. Rack
3. Screw
4. Backplate SEALANT (C-251) DETAIL A
5. Spring clip
6. Support 13 TO 17 IN-LBS
7. Support (1.5 TO 1.9 Nm)
8. Screw
9. Ring 4
10. Integrated avionics unit No. 1 (GIA 63H) (3140A1)
NOTE
2
1 After installation of the rack (2), apply
sealant (C-251) to seal the edges of the
electrical bonding area.
4 PLACES
1
3
WEDGE
1
9 SPRING
PIN SPRING
6
PIN
1
7
8
FOOT
DETAIL B
Figure 95-139. Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA 63H) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-325. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT (GIA 63H) of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
— INSPECTION Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
1. Visually examine the integrated avionics unit b. Install the rack (2) with the screws (3) on the
((GIA 63H) 3140A2 or 3140A1) (1 or 10, supports (6 and 7). Tighten the screws.
NOTE
• Cracks
• Mechanical damage and corrosion damage.
c. Make sure the electrical bonding between the
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for supports (6 and 7) and the rack (2) meets Class R-I
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
damage. Replace as necessary. Chapter 8).
95-326. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT (GIA 63H) d. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the mating
— INSTALLATION edges of the electrically bonded areas of the supports
(6 and 7) and the rack (2).
MATERIALS REQUIRED e. Put the backplate (4) in position at the back of

the rack (2) and make sure the spring clips (5) are
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. engaged and lock the backplate in place.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from

C-251 Sealant
3. On the right side, put the integrated avionics unit
No. 2 (3140A2) (GIA 63H) (1) in position on the rack
(2). Lift the integrated avionics unit 0.75 inch (19.05
WARNING mm) to position the foot of the integrated avionics unit
forward of the spring pins on the rack.

4. On the left side, put the integrated avionics unit
No. 1 (GIA 63H) (3140A1) (10) in position on the rack
(2). Lift the integrated avionics unit 0.75 inch (19.05
mm) to position the foot of the integrated avionics unit
forward of the spring pins on the rack.
NOTE
The following procedure is provided for the
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) on CAUTION
the right side. The procedure is the same
for the integrated avionics unit No. 1
(3140A1) on the left side, except where MAKE SURE THE THREADS OF THE
indicated. SCREW (8) PROPERLY ENGAGE THE
MATING THREADS OF THE RACK (2).
1. If previously removed, install the rack (2, CONFIRM PROPER ALIGNMENT
Figure 95-139) as follows: BETWEEN THE SCREW AND THE
THREADED HOLE OF THE RACK
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the supports DURING INSTALLATION. DO NOT USE
(6 and 7) and the rack (2) are clean and show no signs FORCE WHILE INSTALLING THE
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SCREW OR CROSS THREADING AND 95-327. DISPLAY UNITS — REMOVAL

DAMAGE TO THE PARTS CAN OCCUR.
For the removal of the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
5. Ensuring proper thread engagement, start the and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H), refer
screw (8) into the mating threaded hole of the rack (2). to paragraph 95-220.
Do not tighten the screw at this time.
95-328. DISPLAY UNITS — CLEANING
CAUTION For the cleaning of the Primary Flight Display (PFD)

and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H), refer
to paragraph 95-221.
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW
(8). A TORQUE OF MORE THAN 13 TO
17 INCH-POUNDS (1.5 TO 1.9 NM) CAN 95-329. DISPLAY UNITS — INSPECTION
DAMAGE THE RACK.
For the inspection of the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
6. Tighten the screw (8) until the connectors are and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H), refer
connected and the spring pins on the rack (2) is fully to paragraph 95-222.
engaged with the foot on the bottom of the integrated
avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2) (1). Torque the
95-330. DISPLAY UNITS — INSTALLATION
screw (8) T .
For the installation of the Primary Flight Display (PFD)

7. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
and Multi-Function Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H), refer
8. Install the Primary Flight Display (PFD) or the

95-331. CONFIGURATION MODULE (PRIMARY
Multi-Function Display (MFD), as applicable
FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)) — REMOVAL
(paragraph 95-223).

the helicopter. WARNING
NOTE OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following step is not required if the
same component as that removed is being
reinstalled and repair of the component did
not take place.
1. Disconnect the battery and the external power
10. If a new, repaired, or replacement integrated
avionics unit No. 1 or No. 2 was installed, complete
the integrated avionics unit (GIA 63H) No. 1 or No. 2 2. Remove the Primary Flight Display (GDU 1040H)
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure (3160DS2) (2, Figure 95-140) (paragraph 95-220).
(paragraph 95-367).

11. Do the GIA Testing in Section 7 and the return to cover (5) of the electrical connector (3160A2P1) (3).
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). Conduct the testing 4. Slide the configuration module (8) out of the slot
as specified for two display installations. to remove it from the electrical connector body (7).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3
SEE DETAIL B
VIEW A

2. Primary Flight Display (GDU 1040H) (3160DS2)
4. Screw
5. Cover
7. Electrical connector body
8. Configuration module
DETAIL B
(ROTATED 90°)
407gc_MM_95_0163
Figure 95-140. Configuration Module (Primary Flight Display (PFD)) — Removal and Installation (S/N
54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Examine the condition of the connector.

CAUTION
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface.
DO NOT USE TOOLS TO REMOVE THE 4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
CONNECTOR FROM THE cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
CONFIGURATION MODULE. THE damage. Replace when necessary.
CONNECTOR IS FRAGILE AND MAY
BREAK. 95-334. CONFIGURATION MODULE (PRIMARY
FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)) —
5. Carefully disconnect the electrical connector (6) INSTALLATION
from the configuration module (8).
95-332. CONFIGURATION MODULE (PRIMARY WARNING

FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)) — CLEANING

MATERIALS REQUIRED WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol CAUTION
C-516 Clean Cloth

DO NOT USE TOOLS TO CONNECT THE
CONNECTOR TO THE CONFIGURATION
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry, MODULE. THE CONNECTOR IS
clean cloth (C-516). FRAGILE AND MAY BREAK.
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a 1. Connect the electrical connector (6,
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol Figure 95-140) to the configuration module (8).
(C-385).
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a insert it in the electrical connector body (7).
soft bristle brush.
3. Install the two screws (4) that secure the
cover (5) of the electrical connector (3160A2P1) (3)
95-333. CONFIGURATION MODULE (PRIMARY
Tighten the screws.
FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)) — INSPECTION
4. Install the Primary Flight Display (PFD)

NOTE (GDU 1040H) (3160DS2) (paragraph 95-223).
primarily intended when the part or 5. Connect the battery or the external DC power to
component has been removed from the the helicopter.
NOTE
installed on the helicopter. When the PFD master configuration
module is replaced, the G1000 system ID
1. Examine the configuration module number will change. The Supplemental
(8, Figure 95-140) for damage. Database cards, SVT Unlock, TAWS
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Unlock, and other SD cards may need to be 4. At the forward lower area of rack (2,
replaced since they will be locked to the old Figure 95-141), loosen the screw (8) until the wedge
system ID number. Contact Garmin for on the bottom of the airframe and engine system
assistance in determining which cards will processor (GEA 71H) (1) is released from the wedge
need to be replaced. Subscription in the rack.
information with Garmin and Jeppesen will
also need to be updated with the new 5. Pull on the ring (9) on the front of the airframe
System ID number. and engine system processor (GEA 71H) (1) and lift
the airframe and engine system processor 0.75 inch
6. If a new, repaired, or replacement configuration (19.05 mm) to remove the airframe and engine system
module (8) was installed, refer to Section 6 of the processor (GEA 71H) from the rack (2).
G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual
(190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95) for
configuration procedures.
7. Do the return to service tests as specified in 7. If necessary, remove the rack (2) as follows:
Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two a. Remove the sealant from the base of the rack
display installations. (2).
b. Pull on the spring clips (5) to unlock the

95-335. AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM backplate from the rack (2).
PROCESSOR (GEA 71H) — REMOVAL
c. Remove the screws (4) from the rack (2).
MATERIALS REQUIRED d. Remove the rack (2) from the supports (6

and 7).
95-336. AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE PROCESSOR (GEA 71H) — CLEANING
MATERIALS REQUIRED
WARNING Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC C-516 Clean Cloth
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).

2. Remove the Primary Flight Display (PFD), if clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
installed (paragraph 95-220). (C-385).
3. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
electrical connectors. soft bristle brush.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1. Airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H)
2. Rack
3. Back plate
4. Screw 3
5. Spring clips SEALANT (C-251)
6. Support
7. Support 13 TO 17 IN-LBS
8. Screw (1.5 TO 1.9 Nm) 2
9. Ring
NOTE 1
1 After installation of the rack (2),

apply sealant (C-251) to seal the
edges of the electrical bonding area. 4 PLACES
4
WEDGE
1
6
9
1
7
FOOT
WEDGE
8
DETAIL B
Figure 95-141. Airframe and Engine System Processor (GEA 71H) — Removal and Installation
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
PROCESSOR (GEA 71H) — INSPECTION
1. Visually examine the airframe and engine system were clean and showed no signs of
processor (GEA 71H) (1, Figure 95-141) for the corrosion at the time of installation, the
following: following step is not required.
c. Make sure the bond resistance between the

• Cracks rack (2) and the supports (6 and 7) meet Class R-I
electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8).
• Mechanical damage, and corrosion damage
d. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the mating
Repair or replace as necessary. edges of the electrically bonded areas of the supports
(6 and 7) and the rack (2).
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion e. Put the back plate (3) in position at the back of
damage. Replace as necessary. the rack (2) and make sure the spring clips (5) are
engaged and lock the backplate in place.
95-338. AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM 2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
PROCESSOR (GEA 71H) — the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
3. Put the airframe and engine system processor
(GEA 71H) (1) in position on the rack (2). Lift the
MATERIALS REQUIRED receiver 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) to position the foot of
the receiver forward of the wedge on the rack.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
CAUTION
C-251 Sealant
MAKE SURE THE THREADS OF THE

SCREW (8) PROPERLY ENGAGE THE
WARNING MATING THREADS OF THE RACK (2).
CONFIRM PROPER ALIGNMENT
BETWEEN THE SCREW AND THE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS THREADED HOLE OF THE RACK
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR DURING INSTALLATION. DO NOT USE
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC FORCE WHILE INSTALLING THE
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). SCREW OR CROSS THREADING AND
DAMAGE TO THE PARTS CAN OCCUR.
1. If previously removed, install the rack (2, 4. Ensuring proper thread engagement, start the
Figure 95-141) as follows: screw (8) into the mating threaded hole of the rack (2).
Do not tighten the screw at this time.
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the supports
(6 and 7) and the rack (2) are clean and show no signs
of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, CAUTION
Chapter 8.
b. Install the rack (2) with the screws (4) on the DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW
supports (6 and 7). Tighten the screws. (8). A TORQUE OF MORE THAN 13 TO
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
17 INCH-POUNDS (1.5 TO 1.9 NM) CAN 3. Remove the airframe and engine system
DAMAGE THE RACK. processor (paragraph 95-335).
5. Tighten the screw (8) until the connectors are 4. Pull on the spring clips (5, Figure 95-142) to
connected and the retaining wedge in the rack (2) is unlock the back plate (4) from the rack (2).
fully engaged with the wedge on the bottom of the
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H) (1).
Torque the screw T .
electrical connector (7301A1P1) (6).
6. If previously removed, install the Primary Flight 6. Remove the two screws (7) that secure the
Display (PFD) (paragraph 95-223). cover (8) of the electrical connector (7301A1P1) (6).
7. Connect the battery and external DC power from 7. Slide the configuration module (11) out of the slot
the helicopter. to remove it from the electrical connector body (10).
NOTE
The following step is not required if the CAUTION
same component as that removed is being
reinstalled and repair of the component did
not take place. DO NOT USE TOOLS TO REMOVE THE
CONNECTOR FROM THE
8. If a new, repaired, or replacement airframe and CONFIGURATION MODULE. THE
engine system processor was installed, complete the CONNECTOR IS FRAGILE AND MAY
Airframe and Engine System Processor (GEA 71H) BREAK.
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure
(paragraph 95-371). 8. Carefully disconnect the electrical connector (9)
from the configuration module (11).
9. Do the GEA Testing in Section 7 and the return to
95-340. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIRFRAME
AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR) —
CLEANING
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). Conduct the testing
as specified for two display installations.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
95-339. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIRFRAME
REMOVAL
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
WARNING C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
C-516 Clean Cloth

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC clean cloth (C-516).
1. Disconnect the battery and the external power clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
from the helicopter. (C-385).
2. Remove the Primary Flight Display (PFD), if 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
installed (paragraph 95-220). soft bristle brush.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1. Airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H)
2. Rack
3. Screw
4. Back plate 3 4
2
5. Spring clips
7. Screw
8. Cover 1
10. Electrical connector body
11. Configuration module
7
8
6
SEE DETAIL C
9 5
11
DETAIL B
10
DETAIL C
(ROTATED 90°)
Figure 95-142. Configuration Module (Airframe and Engine System Processor) — Removal and
Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-341. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIRFRAME 1. Connect the electrical connector (9,

AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR) — Figure 95-142) to the configuration module (11).
INSPECTION
insert it in the electrical connector body (10).
NOTE
The following inspection criteria are 3. Install the two screws (7) that secure the
primarily intended when the part or cover (8) of the electrical connector (7301A1P1) (6).
component has been removed from the Tighten the screws.
4. Install the two screws (3) to secure the electrical
be used when the part or component is connector (7301A1P1) (6) to the back plate (4).
installed on the helicopter. Tighten the screws.
1. Examine the configuration module

5. Push on the spring clips (5) to lock the back plate
(11, Figure 95-142) for mechanical and corrosion (4) into the rack (2).
damage.
6. Install the airframe and engine system processor

2. Examine the condition of the connector. (paragraph 95-339).
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface. 7. Install the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
(paragraph 95-223).
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion 8. Connect the battery (Chapter 96) to the helicopter
damage. Replace when necessary. electrical system.
95-342. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AIRFRAME NOTE

Loading of software and configuration files
INSTALLATION is not required when replacing the
configuration module of the airframe and
engine system processor.
WARNING
9. Do the return to service tests as specified in
Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two
display installations.
95-343. BACKSHELL THERMOCOUPLE
(AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM
PROCESSOR) — REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
For replacement of the backshell thermocouple, which
is installed inside of the airframe and engine system
DO NOT USE TOOLS TO CONNECT THE processor (GEA 71H) electrical connector
CONNECTOR TO THE CONFIGURATION (7301A1P1), refer to Section 6 of the G1000/G1000H
MODULE. THE CONNECTOR IS System Maintenance Manual (190-00907-00)
FRAGILE AND MAY BREAK. (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-344. ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (GSC 46) 1. Clean the external surfaces of the engine signal
— REMOVAL conditioner (GSC 46) (7730A1) (1, Figure 95-143) with
a clean cloth (C-516) moistened with drycleaning
solvent (C-304).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
2. Wipe dry with a clean cloth (C-516).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 3. Clean the electrical connector(s) with a soft

bristle brush.
95-346. ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (GSC 46)

— INSPECTION
WARNING
NOTE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The following inspection criteria are
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR primarily intended when the part or
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC component has been removed from the
1. Disconnect the battery and the external DC be used when the part or component is
2. Remove the upper access cover in the baggage 1. Visually examine the engine signal conditioner
compartment. (GSC 46) (7730A1) (1, Figure 95-143) for the
following:
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (7730A1P1)
(2, Figure 95-143) from the engine signal conditioner
• Mechanical or corrosion damage
(GSC 46) (7730A1) (1).
4. Remove the screws (4) and the washers (5) from • Cracks and other physical damage
the engine signal conditioner (GSC 46)(7730A1) (1).
• Loose or missing mounting hardware
5. Remove the engine signal conditioner (GSC 46)
(7730A1) (1) from the aft avionics equipment shelf (3). Repair or replace as necessary.
95-345. ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (GSC 46) 2. Visually examine the electrical connector
— CLEANING (7730A1P1) (2) for the following:
• Mechanical or corrosion damage

MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. • Dirt
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• Bent or damaged pins; repair or replace as
C-304 Drycleaning Solvent necessary (BHT-ELEC-SPM)
C-516 Clean Cloth

95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
5
1
DETAIL A
SEALANT (C-251)
1. Engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) (7730A1)

NOTE
2. Electrical connector (7730A1P1) 1 After installation of the engine signal
3. Aft avionics equipment shelf conditioner (1), apply sealant (C-251) to
4. Screw seal the edges of the electrical bonding
5. Washer area.
Figure 95-143. Engine Signal Conditioner (GSC 46) — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-347. ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (GSC 46) 8. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
— INSTALLATION helicopter.
NOTE
WARNING
Loading of software and configuration files
is not required when replacing the engine
signal conditioner (GSC 46) (7730A1).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 9. Do the return to service tests as specified in
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two
1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the aft avionics display installations.
equipment shelf (3, Figure 95-143) and the engine
signal conditioner (GSC 46) (7730A1) (1) are clean 95-348. INFORMATION, MAINTENANCE AND
and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the CONFIGURATION PAGE
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
NAVIGATION, SOFTWARE AND
CONFIGURATION LOADING,
2. Install the engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) DATABASE SUBSCRIPTIONS, AND
(7730A1) (1) with the screws (4) and the washers (5) SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
on the aft avionics equipment shelf (3). Tighten the
screws. This section of the chapter provides information on
Multi-Function Display (MFD) Page Group Navigation,
Bell Maintenance pages, Primary Flight Display (PFD)
NOTE Configuration Page Group Navigation, Software and
If the mating surfaces of the components Configuration Loading, Navigation Database
were clean and showed no signs of Subscriptions and Loading, and System
corrosion at the time of installation, the Troubleshooting.
95-349. MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) PAGE
3. Make sure the bond resistance between the GROUP NAVIGATION
engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) (7730A1) (1) and
the aft avionics equipment shelf (3) meets Class R-II Information on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) is
electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, presented on pages grouped according to function.
Chapter 8).
The page groups include:
4. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the mating edges • Map Pages — MAP
of the electrically bonded areas of the aft avionics
equipment shelf (3) and the engine signal conditioner • Waypoint Pages — WPT
(GSC 46) (7730A1) (1).
• Auxiliary Pages — AUX
electrical connectors. • Flight Plan Pages — FPL
• Nearest Pages — NRST

6. Connect the electrical connector (7730A1P1) (2)
to the engine signal conditioner (7730A1) (GSC 46)
• Engine Page — EIS
(1).
Although the majority of the information within these
7. Install the upper access panel in the baggage page groups (Figure 95-144) is pilot and flight
compartment. operation related, certain maintenance and
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
troubleshooting procedures may refer to specific

NOTE
pages within these groups.
For information to access the Bell
Maintenance Pages located under the AUX
NOTE – OEM DIAGNOSTICS page group and
page title, refer to paragraph 95-355.
The available page titles within the specific
page group will expand when certain
optional kits are added. Based on this, the NOTE
page titles listed within each page group Use an external power unit, if available, to
will reflect the active configuration of each prevent the battery from being drained of its
helicopter. stored electrical power.
1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or apply external

The page group and active page title are displayed in DC power to the helicopter.
the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation
Status Box. In the bottom right corner of the screen, 2. MFD power-up check — Complete.
the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom.
Available pages in the group are displayed in a list 3. Press the ENT key on the MFD or press the
above the page groups. The current page group and rightmost softkey on the MFD.
current page within the group are shown in cyan. For
some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather 4. Rotate the large FMS knob until the page group
Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of menu appears on the lower right side of the screen.
the page changes while the page name in the list Continue to rotate the large FMS knob to highlight the
remains the same. the required page group.
There are also several pages (Airport Information and 5. Rotate the small FMS knob to select the required
page title and view the page.
XM Information) that are selected first from within a
main page group with the FMS knobs, then with the
6. To change the page being viewed within the
appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In this
same page group, rotate the small FMS knob to select
case, the page remains set to the selected screen until
and view the desired page.
a different screen softkey is pressed.
7. To change the page group being viewed, rotate
The page groups and pages are accessed as follows: the large FMS knob to highlight the desired group.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ENTER
KEY
LARGE
FMS
KNOB
SMALL
FMS
KNOB
MFD POWER-UP PAGE RIGHTMOST

SOFTKEY
407gc_MM_95_0166a+
Figure 95-144. MFD Page Group Navigation (Sheet 1 of 7)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SELECTED PAGE GROUP ACTIVE PAGE TITLE
PAGE TITLES IN
SELECTED GROUP
PAGE GROUPS AND PAGE TITLES PAGE

SELECTION SEQUENCE GROUPS
STEP 1. PAGE GROUPS

STEP 2. PAGE TITLES
MAP PAGES (MAP)

Navigation Map
Traffic Map
Weather Data Link
(service optional)
HTAWS
MAP PAGES
Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved 407gc_MM_95_0167b
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
WAYPOINT PAGES (WPT)

Airport Information pages
- Airport information (INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport directory (INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach information (APR Softkey)
- Weather information (WX Softkey)
Intersection information
NDB information
VOR information
User waypoint information
AIRPORT
INFORMATION
PAGES
WAYPOINT PAGES
Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved 407gc_MM_95_0167c
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
REPORTS/DATA
AUXILIARY PAGES (AUX) LINK PAGES
Weights, Fuel, Exceedances
Trip Planning SATELLITE PHONE
Utility PAGES
GPS Status
System Setup
- System Setup 1 (SETUP 1 Softkey)
- System Setup 2 (SETUP 2 Softkey)
XM Radio
- XM Information (INFO Softkey)
- XM Radio (RADIO Softkey)
Satellite Phone
- Telephone (TEL Softkey)
- SMS (SMS Softkey)
Reports/Data Link
- Report Status (REPORT Softkey) XM
- WI-FI Setup (WI-FI Softkey) SATELLITE
OEM diagnostics PAGES
System Status
Video
Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved

AUXILIARY PAGES 407gc_MM_95_0167d
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FLIGHT PLAN PAGES (FPL)
Active Flight Plan

- Wide View, Narrow View (VIEW Softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog

or
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
NOTE
The Flight Plan Pages may also be
accessed using the FPL key. Main pages
within this group are selected by turning
the small FMS knob.
FLIGHT PLAN PAGES

Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved 407gc_MM_95_0167e
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NEAREST PAGES (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
NEAREST PAGES
Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved 407gc_MM_95_0167f
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM - EIS

ENGINE PAGE
Copyright 2011 Garmin Ltd or its Subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved 407gc_MM_95_0167g
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-350. BELL MAINTENANCE PAGES To save an image of the page, press the SAVE IMG
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) softkey. This will store the image on the maintenance
SD card assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent),
The Bell Maintenance Pages which can be accessed which is installed in the upper SD card slot of the MFD.
and displayed on the Multi-Function Display (MFD)
include the following pages: To clear the data from the page, refer to paragraph
95-358.
• Faults page (paragraph 95-351)
95-352. DATA STATUS (ENG/ECU DATA &
• Data Status page (paragraph 95-352) STATUS) — BELL MAINTENANCE PAGE
The ENG/ECU DATA & STATUS page (Figure 95-145)

• Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
displays ENG/ECU data, ENG/GEA data, cycles, and
95-353)
ENG/ECU status.
• Power Check History page (paragraph
To access and view this maintenance page on the
95-354)
Multi-Function Display (MFD), refer to paragraph
95-355.
These pages fall under the AUX information page
group of the MFD under the page title of OEM
To save an image of the page, press the SAVE IMG
DIAGNOSTICS (Figure 95-145).
softkey. This will store the image on the maintenance
SD card assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent),
To access and view these pages on the MFD which is installed in the upper SD card slot of the MFD.
(paragraph 95-355), the maintenance SD card
assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent) must be 95-353. EXCEEDANCES & CHIP HISTORY — BELL
installed into the upper SD card slot of the MFD and MAINTENANCE PAGE
the helicopter must be on the ground with the WOG
Crew Alerting System (CAS) message displayed. The EXCEEDANCES & CHIP HISTORY page
(Figure 95-145) will display the date, time, parameter,
95-351. FAULTS (ENG/ECU FAULTS) — BELL peak, and duration of recorded exceedances on the
MAINTENANCE PAGE Multi-Function Display (MFD). The page will also
display the date, time and the identification of the
The ENG/ECU FAULTS page (Figure 95-145) displays detector associated with a chip occurrence.
information on main faults, Primary Governor (PG)
control faults, Reversionary Governor (RG) control
faults, degraded engine faults, and maintenance NOTE
engine faults on the Multi-Function Display (MFD). In specific regards to torque exceedances,
and regardless if the primary torque input
NOTE signal is from the airframe transducer, or if
the alternate input signal from the FADEC
Regardless if an ENG/ECU Fault CAS ECU is being used to drive the torque
message was displayed in-flight or at indication at the time of the exceedance,
shutdown, maintenance action is required the recorded torque exceedance displayed
prior to further flight. Refer to Chapter 76 as on the Exceedances & Chip History page of
well as the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B the MFD will reflect Bell Helicopter limits
Operation and Maintenance Manual to regarding possible maintenance actions.
determine required maintenance actions. Rolls-Royce values are not displayed on
the MFD page.
The ENG/ECU FAULTS page will display last engine
run (inactive historical) faults in white text and current Regardless if an exceedance was identified in-flight or
(active) faults in yellow text. at shutdown, maintenance action is required prior to
further flight. Refer to Chapter 5, Chapter 76, and the
To access and view this maintenance page on the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Operation and Maintenance
MFD, refer to paragraph 95-355. Manual to determine required maintenance actions.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
To determine required maintenance actions following a message displayed for the maintenance
recorded exceedance, Bell Helicopter Textron and pages to be available.
Rolls-Royce agreed that the helicopter display units
(407GX) would be used for NG, MGT, and Torque (Q)
exceedances and the FADEC ECU would be used for NOTE
NP overspeed exceedances. Use an external power unit, if available, to
To access and view this maintenance page on the stored electrical power.
MFD, refer to paragraph 95-355.
1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or apply external
To save an image of the page, press the SAVE IMG DC power to the helicopter.
SD card assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent), 2. MFD power-up check — Complete.
which is installed in the upper SD card slot of the MFD.
3. Press the ENT key on the MFD or press the
To clear the data from the page, refer to paragraph rightmost softkey on the MFD.
95-358.
4. Rotate the large FMS knob until the page group
95-354. POWER CHECK HISTORY — BELL
menu appears in the lower right side of the screen
MAINTENANCE PAGE
(Figure 95-145). Continue to rotate the large FMS
knob to highlight the AUX page group.
The POWER CHECK HISTORY page (Figure 95-145)
displays date, pressure altitude, OAT, torque, MGT,
airspeed, vertical speed, MGT margin, and PWR 5. Rotate the small FMS knob to select the OEM
margin values for both regular power checks Diagnostics page.
(BHT-407-FM-2, Section 4) and assured power checks
(BHT-407-FMS-9) on the Multi-Function Display 6. Once OEM DIAGNOSTICS is highlighted, the
(MFD). MAINTENANCE PAGE menu will appear in the upper
left side of the MFD screen. Press the FMS knob to
To access and view this maintenance page on the enable the curser and then rotate the small FMS knob
MFD, refer to paragraph 95-355. to highlight the desired maintenance page:
To save an image of the page, press the SAVE IMG • Faults page (paragraph 95-351)
SD card assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent), • Data Status page (paragraph 95-352)
which is installed in the upper SD card slot of the MFD.
• Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
To clear the data from the page, refer to paragraph 95-353)
95-358.
• Power Check History page (paragraph
95-355. ACCESSING THE BELL MAINTENANCE 95-354)
PAGES ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION
DISPLAY (MFD)
7. Press the ENT key on the MFD to view the
highlighted maintenance page.
NOTE
The maintenance SD card assembly 8. To change the maintenance page being viewed
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) must be within OEM DIAGNOSTICS, rotate the inner FMS
installed into the upper SD card slot of the knob to highlight the desired page. Press the ENT key.
Multi-Function Display (MFD) and the
helicopter must be on the ground with the 9. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
WOG Crew Alerting System (CAS) external DC power from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-356. SAVING THE DATA DISPLAYED ON THE In the event that you would like to save page images
BELL MAINTENANCE PAGES, from the Primary Flight Display (PFD), a maintenance
INFORMATION PAGES, AND SCREEN SD card assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent)
DISPLAYS may be installed in the upper SD card slot of the PFD.
As previously mentioned, the No. 2 and No. 9 softkeys
Most maintenance and information pages and certain may be used to save the image in the “print folder”.
screen displays provide a SAVE IMG softkey to save
the displayed data to the maintenance SD card 95-357. Recording of Flight Data Information
assembly (407-075-219-101 or subsequent), which is
installed in the upper SD card slot of the In addition to the information provided on the Bell
Multi-Function Display (MFD). The images are saved Maintenance Pages, flight data information is recorded
in the ”print folder” of the SD card. Each image is into the “data_log” folder of the maintenance SD card
typically 2 to 3 MBs in size. during each flight. A separate date/time stamped file is
created for each flight and the following parameters
are recorded at a rate of 1 Hertz (once per second) for
NOTE
the duration of each flight.
When the SAVE IMG softkey is pressed,
the G1000H system may be unresponsive • Pitch
to subsequent inputs for 1 minute. A pop-up
window will display when the image is • Roll
saved.
• Heading
1. Press the SAVE IMG softkey to save a .bmp file
of the current screen image. Select other pages and • Airspeed
save the images as required.
• Pressure altitude
NOTE
• Vertical acceleration
Remove the electrical power from the MFD
prior to removing or installing the • OAT
maintenance SD card.
• GPS latitude, longitude, altitude,
2. Gently press on the maintenance SD card to groundspeed, etc.
release the spring latch and eject the card from the
card slot. • CAS messages
3. Insert the SD card into a Windows compatible PC

or laptop incorporating an appropriate SD card reader NOTE
and save, print, or e-mail the data from the ”print The following additional parameters will be
folder” as required. included in a future system update.
• N2 (NP) speed
NOTE
To identify the softkey locations discussed • N1 (NG) speed
in the following paragraph, the leftmost
softkey is No. 1 and the rightmost softkey is • Rotor (NR) speed
No. 12.
• Torque
In the event that the MFD page you would like to save
does not have a SAVE IMG softkey, you may press the • MGT, turbine outlet temperature
No. 2 and No. 9 softkeys at the same time for
approximately 2 seconds. This will save a .bmp file of Individual files will continue to be saved and stored in
the current screen image to the “print folder” on the the “data_log” folder for each flight until such time that
maintenance SD card. the maintenance SD card is full.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Use of a maintenance terminal is required

to clear faults stored in the FADEC ECU.
CAUTION
Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B
Operations and Maintenance Manual.
DO NOT DE LETE THE “DATA_LOG” 1. To clear the inactive historical faults from the
FOLDER FROM THE MAINTENANCE SD ENG/ECU FAULTS page, press the FMS knob to
CARD. THIS FOLDER IS REQUIRED IN enable the curser, then rotate the large FMS knob to
ORDER FOR THE SYSTEM TO SAVE select Clear History and press the ENT key.
T H E F L I G H T D A TA I N F O R M A T I O N
FILES.
2. To clear the exceedance, chip, and power check
To ensure the maintenance SD card maintains history data from the EXCEEDANCES & CHIP
adequate space for continuous recording and storage HISTORY page, do the following steps:
of the “data_log” files, it is recommended that the files
be copied from the “data_log” folder at least once a a. With electrical power applied to the helicopter,
year or every 1000 hours of flight operation. Once the open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers.
files are copied and stored in another location for
possible future reference, the existing files can be b. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on
deleted from the “data_log” folder. both the MFD and PFD, and then close the PFD and
MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
95-358. CLEARING HISTORY FROM THE BELL configuration mode.
MAINTENANCE PAGES
c. After the PFD and MFD display INITIALIZING
SYSTEM, release the ENT key on the PFD and MFD.
CAUTION
NOTE
FAULTS AND EXCEEDANCES ARE NOT GARMIN will initially display on the MFD
TO BE ERA SED/CL EARE D UNLE SS and PFD screens followed by the SYSTEM
APPROPRIATE MAINTENANCE STATUS page.
ACTIONS HAVE BEEN CARRIED OUT IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE BHT-407-MM d. The SYSTEM STATUS page will now be
AND ROLLS-ROYCE 250-C47B displayed on both the MFD and PFD.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL. e. Rotate the large FMS knob on the MFD to
confirm the SYSTEMS page group is selected. Then
rotate the small FMS knob to select and view the
NOTE MAINTENANCE LOG page.
Clearing last engine run (i.e., inactive
historical) faults from the ENG/ECU f. Press the CLEAR softkey to clear the
FAULTS page or exceedances from the exceedance, chip, and power check history data.
EXCEEDANCES & CHIP HISTORY page
of the Multi-Function Display (MFD) will not 3. To exit configuration mode, temporarily open the
clear the associated faults and PFD and MFD circuit breakers (5 seconds) and then
exceedances stored in the FADEC ECU. close the circuit breakers.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ENTER
KEY
LARGE
FMS
KNOB
SMALL
FMS
KNOB
MFD POWER-UP PAGE RIGHTMOST

SOFTKEY
407gc_MM_95_0166a+
Figure 95-145. Bell Maintenance Pages — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent) (Sheet 1 of 6)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SELECTED PAGE GROUP ACTIVE PAGE TITLE
AVAILABLE
PAGES
PAGE TITLES IN
SELECTED GROUP
PAGE GROUPS, PAGE TITLES, AND AVAILABLE PAGES PAGE

GROUPS
SELECTION SEQUENCE
STEP 1. PAGE GROUPS
STEP 2. PAGE TITLES
STEP 3. AVAILABLE PAGES
407gc_MM_95_0166b+
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
PAGE TITLE
FAULTS PAGE
407gc_MM_95_0166c+
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DATA STATUS PAGE
407gc_MM_95_0166d+
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
EXCEEDANCES & CHIP HISTORY PAGE
407gc_MM_95_0166e+
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
POWER CHECK HISTORY PAGE
407gc_MM_95_0166f+
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-359. CONFIGURATION PAGE GROUP • Integrated avionics unit (GIA 63H) pages —
NAVIGATION GIA

NOTE (GEA 71H) pages — GEA
For specific information on the
configuration mode, refer to Section 4 • Transponder (GTX 33H ES) pages — GTX
of the G1000/G1000H System
Maintenance Manual (190-00907-00) • Attitude and heading reference system
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). (GRS 77H) pages — GRS
Configuring, calibrating, and troubleshooting the • Air data computer (GDC 74H) — ADC
Garmin G1000H integrated avionics system is
performed in configuration mode. As certain • Audio panel (GMA 350H) — GMA
maintenance and troubleshooting procedures may
refer to specific configuration pages (Figure 95-146), The configuration pages are accessed as follows:
the following information will provide the instructions to
navigate and access the pages.
NOTE
NOTE prevent the battery from being drained of its
Certain "protected" configuration pages are stored electrical power.
critical to aircraft operation and safety. The
technician is unable to modify or change 1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or apply external
settings on these pages unless they are DC power to the helicopter.
authorized and equipped to do so. They are
viewable to aid in troubleshooting. 2. With electrical power applied to the helicopter,
open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers.
In the bottom right corner of the screen, the
configuration page group tabs are displayed along the 3. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on
bottom. Available pages in the group are displayed in both the MFD and PFD, and then close the PFD and
a list above the page groups. The current page group MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
and current page title within the group are shown in configuration mode.
cyan. The active page title is displayed in the upper
center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. 4. After the PFD and MFD display INITIALIZING
Page groups and pages can change depending on the SYSTEM, release the ENT key on the PFD and MFD.
configuration for a specific aircraft.
Although configuration information is primarily NOTE

presented on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), the GARMIN will initially display on the MFD
Multi-Function Display (MFD) will display the SYSTEM and PFD screens followed by the SYSTEM
STATUS, OEM DIAGNOSTICS, and the STATUS page.
MAINTENANCE LOG page groups.
5. The SYSTEM STATUS page will now be
displayed on both the MFD and PFD.
The PFD configuration page groups include:
6. Rotate the large FMS knob until the page group

• System pages — SYSTEM
menu appears in the lower right side of the screen.
Continue to rotate the large FMS knob to highlight the
• Display Unit (GDU 1040H) pages — GDU the required page group.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
7. Rotate the small FMS knob to select the required field, or in some cases, allows the user to
page title and to view the page. enter data for the field
8. To change the page being viewed within the • To confirm a selection, press the ENT key
same page group, rotate the small FMS knob to select
and view the desired page.
• To cancel a selection, press the small FMS
knob; pressing the small FMS knob again
9. To change the page group being viewed, rotate turns the cursor off; the CLR key can also be
the large FMS knob to highlight the desired group. used to cancel a selection or turn the cursor
off
When the required configuration page has been
selected, use the FMS knob to perform the following
In addition, some configuration pages have
actions:
commands or selections that are activated by display
softkeys. If a softkey is associated with a command,
• To activate the cursor, press the small FMS
that command will be displayed directly above the key.
knob
A grayed-out softkey shows a command that is
unavailable. A softkey that is highlighted shows the
• To cycle the cursor through different data
current active selection.
fields, rotate the large FMS knob
• To change the contents of a highlighted data 10. To exit configuration mode, temporarily open the
field, rotate the small FMS knob; this action PFD and MFD circuit breakers (5 seconds) and then
displays an options menu for the particular close the circuit breakers.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ACTIVE PAGE TITLE ENTER

KEY
PAGE TITLES IN
SELECTED GROUP
PAGE GROUPS AND PAGE TITLES PAGE LARGE

GROUPS FMS KNOB
SMALL
FMS KNOB
SELECTION SEQUENCE
STEP 1. PAGE GROUPS
STEP 2. PAGE TITLES
407gc_MM_95_0168a
Figure 95-146. Configuration Page Group Navigation (Sheet 1 of 8)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GDU PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168b
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GIA PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168c
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GEA PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168d
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GTX PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168e
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GRS PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168f
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ADC PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168g
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GMA PAGE GROUP
407gc_MM_95_0168h
Figure 95-146. Configureation Page Group Navigation (Sheet 8 of 8)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-360. REQUIREMENTS TO LOAD configuration files only applies to the

SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION installation of new, repaired, or replacement
FILES INTO THE G1000H SYSTEM components, or if identical part numbered
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) components are relocated to an alternate
position on the helicopter (i.e., swapping
The primary requirements to load software and the installed positions of the Primary Flight
configuration files into the Garmin G1000H integrated Display (PFD) and the Multi-Function
avionics system are as follows: Display (MFD) (GDU 1040H), or swapping
the positions of the integrated avionics
• To upgrade the system to the latest released units No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H)).
software version
When a specific G1000H system component has been
• To load the applicable software and replaced, the applicable software and configuration
configuration files into a specific G1000H files for the component need to be installed. The LRU
system component that has been replaced replacement software loading procedure is provided in
paragraph 95-363.
• To load the applicable software and
configuration files after initial installation of an When an optional kit is installed on the helicopter, the
optional kit, after the replacement of a Line applicable software and configuration files for the kit
Replaceable Unit (LRU) used within an need to be installed. Information on the Optional Kits
optional kit, or to configure the system to an Software and Configuration Loading Procedure is
available configuration (i.e., configure the provided in paragraph 95-373. Additionally,
system to the fuel specification being used) information on the procedure to remove the software
and configuration files after removal of a kit is also
• If required, to remove the software and provided in paragraph 95-373.
configuration files for all optional kits
95-361. PROCEDURE TO CREATE A MAIN
NOTE SOFTWARE LOADER IMAGE SD CARD
Installation of a G1000H system software

version upgrade is authorized. Installation NOTE
of an earlier version of G1000H software
The software version loaded in the
than was installed at the time of helicopter
following procedure installs both the
delivery is not authorized.
software and configuration files.
When a new G1000H system software version is
released, and unless the upgrade is specified as The following procedure provides instructions to load
mandatory by Bell Helicopter, operators have the the required G1000H system software onto an SD
option of installing the software upgrade. The card. Depending on the software loading requirement
procedure to create a Main Software Loader Image (paragraph 95-360), the instructions which follow allow
SD Card with the required software version is provided for the creation of a software loader SD card with the
in paragraph 95-361. The procedure to install the latest released software or a previously released
software upgrade in the G1000H system is provided in software version. Only one software version can be
the Basic Initial G1000H Software Loading Procedure loaded onto a single SD card.
(paragraph 95-362).
NOTE
NOTE A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
If the same G1000H system component is loading software. Use of other brand cards
removed and reinstalled in the same is not recommended as the display units
helicopter, and the component has not might not recognize them.
been repaired, reloading of the software
and configuration files is not required. The 1. Obtain a SanDisk SD card with a minimum of
requirement to load the software and 1 GB memory capacity.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NOTE
After accessing http://
www.bellcustomer.com/software.cfm,
select “407GX / G1000H Software”.
Available G1000H software versions will be
available for downloading from this
location.
2. Access the Web site http://

www.bellcustomer.com/software.cfm and select 8. Verify that the executable file is now being
“407GX / G1000H Software”. extracted.
NOTE
The first software loader image file that has
been released is "006-B1237-03_0A.exe".
Although this procedure is written based on
this specific version of software, it may also
be used for future software releases.
3. Download the "006-B1237-03_0A.exe" (or

subsequent) software loader image file onto the
computer's local drive. Note the folder location that the
9. On the G1000 Software Update window, verify
file is being saved to.
that the Airframe is "Bell 407" and software Version is
"1237.03" (or subsequent software version). Click the
Next > button.
NOTE
It is recommended that the computer is
equipped with an SD card slot reader.
Otherwise, an external SD reader is
required to proceed.
4. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the

computer. Ensure that the computer is able to
recognize the SD card and note the SD card drive
letter.
5. On the computer, access the local drive letter

and/or folder that the software loader image file was
saved to in step 3.
6. Double-click on the "006-B1237-03_0A.exe"

executable file to run it.
10. On the G1000 Software Update window, ensure

7. Click Yes at the "To install software, press Yes" that the Storage Card Reader drive letter matches the
prompt. drive letter noted in step 4. Otherwise, change the
drive letter to the match drive letter noted in step 3.
Click the Next > button.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
12. Verify that the software loader image files are

being transferred to the SD card.
CAUTION
13. Verify that the software loader image files were
successfully transferred to the SD card. Click the
ALL EXISTING DATA ON THE SD CARD
Finish button.
WILL BE ERASED WHEN
TRANSFERRING THE SOFTWARE
LOADER IMAGE FILES ONTO THE SD
CARD. THIS ENSURES THAT ONLY ONE
SOFTWARE VERSION CAN BE LOADED
ONTO A SINGL E SD CARD. IF YO U
NEED TO RETAIN THE EXISTING DATA
ON THE SD CARD, USE ANOTHER SD
CARD FOR THIS PROCEDURE.
11. Click the Next > button to transfer the software

loader image files onto the SD card.
14. Eject the SD card from the computer and

label the SD card with the part number
"GARMIN P/N 010-00922-01" and the software
version "GARMIN S/W P/N 006-B1237-03" (or
subsequent software part number) as applicable.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NOTE
CAUTION
For information on the requirements to load
software and configuration files into the
G1000H integrated avionics system, refer
DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE
REMOVED FROM THE G1000H SYSTEM
WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. POWER
15. Follow the applicable G1000H software loading
LOSS DURING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
procedures to complete the Basic Initial G1000H
MAY CAUSE AN LRU TO BECOME
Software Loading Procedure (paragraph 95-362), the
CORRUPTED AND UNRESPONSIVE,
LRU Replacement Software Loading Procedure
REQUIRING REPLACEMENT.
(paragraph 95-363), or the Optional Kits Software and
Configuration Loading Procedure (paragraph 95-373).
NOTE
95-362. BASIC INITIAL G1000H SOFTWARE Use an external power unit, if available, to
LOADING PROCEDURE prevent the battery from being drained of its
The following procedure will load the software and
configuration files for the entire G1000H system. 3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
NOTE NOTE
Refer to the requirements to load software Not removing the Supplemental Database
and configuration files into the G1000H Cards in the following step may corrupt the
system (paragraph 95-360) prior to cards during the software upload.
initiating this procedure. Ensure the
software loader SD card contains the 4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from
applicable released software approved for the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before
loading into the G1000H system. When loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for
conducting an initial software load, it is reinstallation.
recommended that the latest released
software be installed (paragraph 95-361). 5. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) from the upper SD
card slot of the MFD. Retain the card for reinstallation.
NOTE
A SanDisk SD card is recommended for 6. Insert the software loader card into the top SD
loading software. Use of other brand cards card slot of the MFD.
is not recommended as the display units
may not recognize them properly.
7. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on
both the PFD and MFD, while closing the PFD and
NOTE MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
configuration mode.
The following step may be omitted if an
existing software loader SD card with the
required software version installed is 8. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
available. the MFD and PFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
1. If required, create a software loader SD card with 9. Press the YES softkey on the MFD at the DO
the required version of software (paragraph 95-361). YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt.
2. Open the PFD, MFD, ENG START, and ENG 10. Press the YES softkey on the MFD at the DO
IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE SPLASH SCREEN?
to be closed. prompt.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
11. After the splash screen file is updated 22. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading the
successfully on the MFD, open the PFD and MFD software and configuration files into the G1000H
circuit breakers to remove power to the display units. system.
12. Remove the software loader card from the MFD

and insert it into the top SD card slot of the PFD. NOTE
The software and configuration files upload
13. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on will take approximately 2.5 hours to
both the MFD and PFD, while closing the PFD and complete.
configuration mode. 23. After successful software and configuration files
upload, an Upload Complete - COMPLETE OK
14. Release the ENT key on the PFD and MFD, after window is displayed. Push the ENT key to
the PFD and MFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM. acknowledge.
15. Press the YES softkey on the PFD at the DO 24. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers.
YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt.
25. Remove the software loader card from the top SD

16. Press the YES softkey on the PFD at the DO card slot of the MFD.
YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE SPLASH SCREEN?
prompt.
26. Reinsert the Supplemental Database Cards into
17. After the splash screen file is updated the lower SD card slot of the PFD and MFD. Make
successfully on the PFD, both display units display the sure to insert the card that was removed from the PFD
SYSTEM STATUS page in configuration mode. back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
18. On the PFD, use the FMS knobs to select the
SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group. 27. Install the maintenance SD card assembly
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD
19. Push the FMS knob to activate the cursor; rotate card slot of the MFD.
the inner FMS knob to select the BELL 407 group and
push the ENT key. 28. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return
the display units to the normal mode.
20. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the
item window and push the ENT key.
29. On the MFD, use the FMS knobs to go to the
AUX - SYSTEM STATUS page, verify that the software
NOTE part number matches the latest approved software
part number listed in the "ldr_part_nmbr.txt" file on the
All the basic software and configuration SD loader card.
files applicable for the 407GX are now
displayed in the PRODUCT window.
21. Push the CLR ALL softkey, and then push the helicopter.
CHK ALL softkey to select all the system software and
configuration files to be loaded. 31. The G1000H system is now successfully loaded
with basic software and configuration files for the Bell
407GX. If additional options and/or kits are installed in
NOTE
the helicopter, refer to the Kit installation Software and
A check mark inside the square box is Configuration Loading Procedure (paragraph 95-374)
displayed for all applicable 407GX software to complete the configuration setup of the G1000H
and configuration files to be loaded. system.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-363. G1000H LINE REPLACEABLE UNIT (LRU) 95-364. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND
REPLACEMENT — SOFTWARE LOADING MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)
PROCEDURE (GDU 1040H) SOFTWARE AND
CONFIGURATION LOADING PROCEDURE
The following procedure is required when the G1000H Do the procedure in paragraph 95-365 if a Primary
system software and configuration files already exist in Flight Display (PFD) (GDU 1040H) is replaced or
the aircraft (i.e., they have been previously uploaded paragraph 95-366 if a Multi-Function Display (MFD)
into the G1000H integrated avionics system) and a (GDU 1040H) is replaced.
G1000H Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) is subsequently
95-365. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)
replaced.
(GDU 1040H) SOFTWARE AND
Do this procedure if the Primary Flight Display (PFD)

CAUTION
is replaced.
THE SOFTWARE LOADER CARD THAT NOTE

WILL BE USED IN THIS PROCEDURE
Refer to the G1000H Line Replaceable Unit
MUST BE CONFIRMED TO HAVE THE (LRU) Replacement — Software Loading
CORRECT SOFTWARE VERSION Procedure (paragraph 95-363) prior to
BEFORE LOADING ANY FILES INTO THE initiating this procedure. Ensure the
G1000H SYSTEM. LOADING FILES software loader SD card contains the
FROM A PREVIOUS OR MORE RECENT applicable released software approved for
loading into the G1000H system.
SOFTWARE VERSION THAN IS
CURRENTLY LOADED IN THE SYSTEM
WILL PREVENT THE SYSTEM FROM NOTE
OPERATING CORRECTLY. A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
loading software. Use of other brand cards
1. Verify the SYS SOFTWARE VERSION part
number displayed on the MFD AUX - SYSTEM
STATUS page matches the software part number
NOTE
listed in the "ldr_part_nmbr.txt" file on the SD loader
card. The following step may be omitted if an
required software version installed is
2. If the SYS SOFTWARE VERSION part numbers available.
match, proceed with the applicable software and
configuration loading procedure for the applicable LRU 1. If required, create a software loader SD card with
the required version of software (paragraph 95-361).
(paragraph 95-365 through paragraph 95-374).
3. If the SYS SOFTWARE VERSION part numbers NOTE

do not match, it is recommended that the latest To prevent aircraft specific configuration
released software version be loaded onto a SD loader data residing in the PFD configuration
card (paragraph 95-361) and that the Basic Initial module from being deleted, it is required
that the replacement PFD (GDU 1040H) be
G1000H Software Loading Procedure (paragraph
initially placed in the Multi-Function Display
95-362) be completed. This will load the entire (MFD) position to have the system files
G1000H system with the latest software and loaded. After the system files are loaded
configuration files. into the display in the MFD position, the
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
GDU 1040H is moved to the PFD position 9. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
to continue loading the configuration files. the MFD and PFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
2. Temporarily install the replacement GDU 1040H 10. Press the ENT key on the MFD to acknowledge
display in the MFD position. DO YOU WANT TO CLEAR USER SETTING? if
prompted.
3. Open the PFD, MFD, ENG START, and ENG
IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are 11. Press the YES softkey on the MFD at DO YOU
to be closed. WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt and
confirm update completion.
12. Press the YES softkey on the MFD at DO YOU

CAUTION
WANT TO UPDATE THE SPLASH SCREEN? prompt
and confirm update completion.
REMOVED FROM THE G1000H SYSTEM 13. After the splash screen file is updated
WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. POWER successfully on the MFD, open the MFD circuit
LOSS DURING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE breaker to remove power to the display unit.
CORRUPTED AND UNRESPONSIVE, 14. Remove the external DC power from the
REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. helicopter.
NOTE 15. Move the GDU 1040H from the MFD position to
the PFD position.
prevent the battery from being drained of its 16. Install the original MFD back into the MFD
stored electrical power. position.
4. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
NOTE
NOTE Both PFD and MFD should be installed on

the instrument panel at this time. Ensure
Not removing the Supplemental Database that the Supplemental Database Cards
Cards in the following step may corrupt the from the lower SD card slot of all displays
cards during the software upload. remain removed.
5. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from 17. Ensure that the software loader card is inserted
the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before into the top SD card slot of the PFD.
loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for
reinstallation. 18. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on
6. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) from the upper SD configuration mode.
19. Release the ENT key on the PFD and MFD, after
7. Insert the software loader card into the top SD the PFD and MFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
card slot of the MFD.
20. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU
8. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt.
MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in 21. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM
configuration mode. STATUS page in configuration mode.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
22. On the PFD, use the FMS knobs to select the sure to insert the card that was removed from the PFD
SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group. back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
23. Push the FMS knob to activate the cursor; rotate
NOTE
push the ENT key.
The Jeppesen Aviation database file must
24. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the be the same version that is on the MFD. If
item window and push the ENT key. the database is mismatched between the
PFD and MFD, the communication
between the display units will be halted,
NOTE resulting in Red X's to be displayed. If
Jeppesen Aviation database file is a newer
All the basic software and configuration version, it is required to load the newer file
files applicable for the 407GX are now into both PFD and MFD displays following
displayed in the PRODUCT window. the same loading procedure. For additional
information on the Jeppesen Aviation
25. Push the CLR ALL softkey, and then push the database, refer to the Garmin G1000H
CHK CFG softkey to select all the system Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide –
configuration files to be loaded. Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
26. Use the FMS knobs with the ENT softkey to 32. Insert the Jeppesen Aviation database file SD
highlight and select the following software files to be card into the upper SD card slot on the PFD.
loaded:
33. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. Push
• GIA 1 - SOFTWARE the YES softkey when prompted to update the
navigation database to the standby card on the PFD.
• GIA 2 - SOFTWARE
34. Push the YES softkey when prompted to update
NOTE the navigation database as the active database on the
PFD.
Check mark inside the square box is
displayed for all applicable 407GX
35. Confirm successful navigation database upload
configuration and software files to be
on the PFD.
loaded.
27. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading the 36. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers.
configuration and software files into the G1000H
system. 37. Remove the Jeppesen Aviation database file SD
card from the PFD.
28. After successful configuration and software file
upload, an Upload Complete - COMPLETE OK 38. If a newer navigation database version is loaded,
window is displayed. Push the ENT key to it is required to also load the newer navigation
acknowledge. database version on the MFD. Follow step 32 to
step 34 to load the navigation database into the MFD
29. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. as necessary.
30. Remove the software loader card from the top SD 39. Install the maintenance SD card assembly
card slot of the PFD. (407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD
the lower SD card slot of the PFD and MFD. Make 40. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

helicopter.
CAUTION
42. The PFD (GDU 1040H) is now successfully

loaded with basic software and configuration files for DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE
the Bell 407GX. If additional options and/or kits are REMOVED FROM THE G1000H SYSTEM
installed in the helicopter, refer to the Kit installation WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. POWER
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure LOSS DURING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
(paragraph 95-374) to complete the configuration MAY CAUSE AN LRU TO BECOME
setup of the G1000H system. CORRUPTED AND UNRESPONSIVE,
95-366. MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)
(GDU 1040H) SOFTWARE AND NOTE
CONFIGURATION LOADING PROCEDURE Use an external power unit, if available, to
Do this procedure if a Multi-Function Display (MFD) stored electrical power.
(GDU 1040H) is replaced.
NOTE
NOTE
(LRU) Replacement — Software Loading Not removing the Supplemental Database
Procedure (paragraph 95-363) prior to Cards in the following step may corrupt the
initiating this procedure. Ensure the cards during the software upload.
software loader SD card contains the
5. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from
applicable released software approved for
the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before
reinstallation.
NOTE
6. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly
A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
7. Insert the software loader card into the top SD
NOTE
The following step may be omitted if an 8. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on
existing software loader SD card with the both the PFD and MFD, while closing the PFD and
required software version installed is MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
available. configuration mode.
1. If required, create a software loader SD card with 9. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
the required version of software (paragraph 95-361). the MFD and PFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
10. Press the ENT key on the MFD to acknowledge

2. Install the replacement GDU 1040H in the MFD DO YOU WANT TO CLEAR USER SETTING? if
location. prompted.
3. Open the PFD, MFD, ENG START, and ENG 11. Press the YES softkey on the MFD at DO YOU
IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt and
to be closed. confirm update completion.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
12. Press the YES softkey on the MFD at DO YOU • GIA 2 - SOFTWARE
WANT TO UPDATE THE SPLASH SCREEN? prompt
and confirm update completion.
NOTE
13. After the splash screen file is updated Check mark inside the square box is
successfully on the MFD, open the MFD and PFD displayed for all applicable 407GX
circuit breakers to remove power to the display units. configuration and software files to be
loaded.
14. Remove the software loader card from the MFD
24. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading the
and insert it into the top SD card slot of the PFD.
configuration and software files into the G1000H
system.
25. After successful configuration and software file
upload, an Upload Complete - COMPLETE OK
configuration mode.
window is displayed. Push the ENT key to
acknowledge.
16. Release the ENT key on the PFD and MFD, after
the PFD and MFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
26. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers.

WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt.
18. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM

STATUS page in configuration mode.
the lower SD card slot of the PFD and MFD. Make
sure to insert the card that was removed from the PFD
19. On the PFD, use the FMS knobs to select the back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group. removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

the inner FMS knob to select the BELL 407 group and NOTE
push the ENT key. The Jeppesen Aviation database file must
be the same version that is on the MFD. If
21. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the the database is mismatched between the
item window and push the ENT key. PFD and MFD, the communication
between the display units will be halted,
resulting in Red X's to be displayed. If the
NOTE Jeppesen Aviation database file is a newer
version, it is required to load the newer file
All the basic software and configuration into both PFD and MFD displays following
files applicable for the 407GX are now the same loading procedure. For additional
displayed in the PRODUCT window. information on the Jeppesen Aviation
database, refer to the Garmin G1000H
22. Push the CLR ALL softkey, and then push the Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide –
CHK CFG softkey to select all the system Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
configuration files to be loaded.
29. Insert the Jeppesen Aviation database file SD
23. Use the FMS knobs with the ENT softkey to card into the upper SD card slot on the MFD.
highlight and select the following software files to be
loaded: 30. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. Push
the YES softkey when prompted to update the
• GIA 1 - SOFTWARE navigation database to the standby card on the MFD.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
31. Push the YES softkey when prompted to update

NOTE
the navigation database as the active database on the
MFD. A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
32. Confirm successful navigation database upload is not recommended as the display units
on the MFD. may not recognize them properly.
33. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. NOTE

34. Remove the Jeppesen Aviation database file SD existing software loader SD card with the
card from the MFD. required software version installed is
available.
35. If a newer navigation database version is loaded,
it is required to also load the newer navigation 1. If required, create a software loader SD card with
database version on the PFD. Follow step 29 to the required version of software (paragraph 95-361).
step 31 to load the navigation database into the PFD
as necessary.
IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are
36. Install the maintenance SD card assembly to be closed.
37. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. CAUTION

helicopter. DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE
39. The MFD (GDU 1040H) is now successfully
loaded with basic software and configuration files for
the Bell 407GX. If additional options and/or kits are
installed in the helicopter, refer to the Kit installation
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure
(paragraph 95-374) to complete the configuration
setup of the G1000H system. NOTE
95-367. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS NO. 1 AND prevent the battery from being drained of its
NO. 2 (GIA 63H) SOFTWARE AND stored electrical power.
Do this procedure if the integrated avionics unit No. 1
or No. 2 (GIA 63H) is replaced.
NOTE
NOTE Not removing the Supplemental Database
Refer to the G1000H Line Replaceable Unit Cards in the following step may corrupt the
(LRU) Replacement — Software Loading cards during the software upload.
Procedure (paragraph 95-363) prior to
initiating this procedure. Ensure the 4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from
software loader SD card contains the the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before
applicable released software approved for loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for
loading into the G1000H system. reinstallation.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly • NAV 2 - SOFTWARE

card slot of the MFD. Retain the card for reinstallation. • COM 1 - SOFTWARE
6. Insert the software loader card into the top SD • COM 1 - CONFIGURATION
• COM 2 - SOFTWARE
both the PFD and MFD, while closing the PFD and • COM 2 - CONFIGURATION
configuration mode. • GPS/WAAS 1 - SOFTWARE
• GPS/WAAS 2 - SOFTWARE
8. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
the MFD and PFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
• AUD - SOFTWARE
• AUD - CONFIGURATION
• FUEL - CONFIGURATION
STATUS page in configuration mode. • FUEL CAL - CONFIGURATION
11. On the PFD, use the FMS knobs to select the • CAL - CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group.
NOTE
the inner FMS knob to select the BELL 407 group and A check mark is displayed inside the
push the ENT key. square box associated with the software or
configuration file after the ENT key is
13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the pushed to indicate the file is selected to be
item window and push the ENT key. loaded.
16. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading software

NOTE and configuration files into the GIA 63H units.
All the basic software and configuration
files applicable for the 407GX are now 17. After successful configuration files upload, a
displayed in the PRODUCT window. COMPLETE OK window is displayed. Push the ENT
key to acknowledge.
14. Push the CLR ALL softkey.
15. Use the FMS knobs with the ENT softkey to
highlight and select the following software and 19. Remove the software loader card from the top SD
configuration files to be loaded: card slot of the MFD.
• GIA 1 - SOFTWARE 20. Reinsert the Supplemental Database Cards into

• GIA 1 - CONFIGURATION sure to insert the card that was removed from the PFD
back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
• GIA 2 - SOFTWARE removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
• GIA 2 - CONFIGURATION 21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly

• NAV 1 - SOFTWARE card slot of the MFD.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
22. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return

CAUTION

helicopter. DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE
24. The integrated avionics unit (GIA 63H) is now
successfully loaded with basic software and
configuration files for the Bell 407GX. If additional
options and/or kits are installed in the helicopter, refer
to the Kit installation Software and Configuration
Loading Procedure (paragraph 95-374) to complete
the configuration setup of the G1000H system. NOTE
95-368. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) SOFTWARE prevent the battery from being drained of its
AND CONFIGURATION LOADING stored electrical power.
PROCEDURE
Do this procedure if an audio panel (GMA 350H) is
replaced.
NOTE
Not removing the Supplemental Database
NOTE Cards in the following step may corrupt the
Refer to the G1000H Line Replaceable Unit cards during the software upload.
(LRU) Replacement — Software Loading
Procedure (paragraph 95-363) prior to 4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from
initiating this procedure. Ensure the the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before
software loader SD card contains the loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for
applicable released software approved for reinstallation.
NOTE
loading software. Use of other brand cards 6. Insert the software loader card into the top SD
is not recommended as the display units card slot of the MFD.

NOTE both the PFD and MFD, while closing the PFD and
configuration mode.
available. 8. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
1. If required, create a software loader SD card with
the required version of software (paragraph 95-361). 9. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU
IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are 10. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM
to be closed. STATUS page in configuration mode.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
11. On the PFD, use the FMS knobs to select the 20. Reinsert the Supplemental Database Cards into
SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group. the lower SD card slot of the PFD and MFD. Make
12. Push the FMS knob to activate the cursor; rotate back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
the inner FMS knob to select the BELL 407 group and removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
push the ENT key.
21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly
13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the (407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD
item window and push the ENT key. card slot of the MFD.
22. Close the PFD, MFD, and ICS circuit breakers to

NOTE return the display units and ICS panel to the normal
All the basic software and configuration mode.
displayed in the PRODUCT window. 23. Remove the external DC power from the
helicopter.
95-369. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE
15. Use the FMS knobs with the ENT softkey to SYSTEM (GRS 77H) AND
highlight and select the following software and MAGNETOMETER (GMU 44) SOFTWARE
configuration files to be loaded: AND CONFIGURATION LOADING
PROCEDURE
• GMA AUX - SOFTWARE
NOTE
• GMA ASR - SOFTWARE
If only the configuration module of the
Attitude Heading Reference System
• GMA DSP - SOFTWARE (AHRS) (GRS 77H) was replaced, no
software loading is required. However,
• GMA ROUTING TABLE - SOFTWARE AHRS (GRS 77H) and magnetometer
(GMU 44) calibration is required to be
• GMA ROUTING TABLE - CONFIGURATION performed. Refer to the Garmin G1000/
G1000H System Maintenance Manual
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 97) for the
NOTE calibration procedures.
A check mark is displayed inside the
square box associated with the software or Do this procedure if the AHRS (GRS 77H) unit or
configuration file after the ENT key is magnetometer (GMU 44) unit is replaced.
pushed to indicate the file is selected to be
loaded.
NOTE
16. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading software Refer to the G1000H Line Replaceable Unit
and configuration files into the GMA 350H unit. (LRU) Replacement — Software Loading
17. After successful configuration files upload, a initiating this procedure. Ensure the
COMPLETE OK window is displayed. Push the ENT software loader SD card contains the
key to acknowledge. applicable released software approved for
18. Open the PFD, MFD, and ICS circuit breakers.
NOTE
19. Remove the software loader card from the top SD A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
card slot of the MFD. loading software. Use of other brand cards
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
is not recommended as the display units 6. Insert the software loader card into the top SD
may not recognize them properly. card slot of the MFD.

NOTE
The following step may be omitted if an MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
existing software loader SD card with the configuration mode.
available. 8. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
the required version of software (paragraph 95-361). 9. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU
IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are 10. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM
to be closed. STATUS page in configuration mode.

CAUTION
push the ENT key.
LOSS DURING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE 13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the
MAY CAUSE AN LRU TO BECOME item window and push the ENT key.
NOTE
NOTE files applicable for the 407GX are now
Use an external power unit, if available, to displayed in the PRODUCT window.
stored electrical power. 14. Push the CLR ALL softkey.
3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter. 15. Use the FMS knobs with the ENT softkey to
highlight and select the following software and
configuration files to be loaded:
NOTE
• GRS - SOFTWARE
Cards in the following step may corrupt the
• GMU - SOFTWARE
cards during the software upload.
• GMU - CONFIGURATION
loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for NOTE
reinstallation.
square box associated with the software or
5. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly configuration file after the ENT key is
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) from the upper SD pushed to indicate the file is selected to be
card slot of the MFD. Retain the card for reinstallation. loaded.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-370. AIR DATA COMPUTER (GDC 74H)

SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION
CAUTION
LOADING PROCEDURE
DO NOT PUSH THE "CANCEL" SOFTKEY

A T T HE B O T T O M O F T HE SC RE E N NOTE
DURING THE SOFTW ARE LO AD. IF If only the configuration module of the air
THERE IS A SOFTWARE LOADING data computer (GDC 74H) was replaced,
PROBLEM, ALLOW THE SOFTWARE TO follow the procedure below to only load the
AUTOMATICALLY STOP THE LOAD. GDC - CONFIGURATION file.
PRESSING THE "CANCEL" SOFTKEY
MAY RESULT IN AN UNRESPONSIVE
GMU 44, REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. If the air data computer (GDC 74H) was
replaced, follow the procedure below to
load both the GDC - SOFTWARE and GDC
and configuration files into the GRS 77H and GMU 44 - CONFIGURATION files.
units.
Do this procedure if the air data computer (GDC 74H)
unit is replaced.
17. After successful configuration files upload, a
COMPLETE OK window is displayed. Push the ENT
key to acknowledge. NOTE
18. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. (LRU) Replacement — Software Loading
19. Remove the software loader card from the top SD initiating this procedure. Ensure the
card slot of the MFD. software loader SD card contains the
sure to insert the card that was removed from the PFD NOTE
removed from the MFD back into the MFD. A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly may not recognize them properly.
NOTE
22. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return The following step may be omitted if an
the display units to the normal mode. existing software loader SD card with the
available.
helicopter.
24. Do the calibration procedures for the AHRS
(GRS 77H) and magnetometer (GMU 44). Refer to the
Garmin G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual 2. Open the PFD, MFD, ENG START, and ENG
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 97) for the calibration IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are
procedures. to be closed.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

CAUTION
DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE the inner FMS knob to select the BELL 407 group and
REMOVED FROM THE G1000H SYSTEM push the ENT key.
LOSS DURING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE 13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the
MAY CAUSE AN LRU TO BECOME item window and push the ENT key.
NOTE
NOTE All the basic software and configuration
stored electrical power. 14. Push the CLR ALL softkey.
NOTE
NOTE If only the configuration module of the air

data computer (GDC 74H) was replaced,
Not removing the Supplemental Database follow the procedure below to only select
Cards in the following step may corrupt the the GDC - CONFIGURATION file.
If the air data computer (GDC 74H) was
4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from replaced, follow the procedure below to
the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before select both the GDC - SOFTWARE and
loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for GDC - CONFIGURATION files.
reinstallation.
5. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly highlight and select the following software and
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) from the upper SD configuration files to be loaded:
• GDC - SOFTWARE
card slot of the MFD. • GDC - CONFIGURATION
7. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on NOTE

MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in A check mark is displayed inside the
configuration mode. square box associated with the software or
pushed to indicate the file is selected to be
loaded.
9. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU and configuration files into the GDC 74H unit.
10. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM COMPLETE OK window is displayed. Push the ENT
STATUS page in configuration mode. key to acknowledge.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
18. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. 1. If required, create a software loader SD card with
card slot of the MFD. 2. Open the PFD, MFD, ENG START, and ENG
to be closed.
back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was CAUTION
21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE

(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD REMOVED FROM THE G1000H SYSTEM
card slot of the MFD. WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. POWER
22. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return CORRUPTED AND UNRESPONSIVE,
the display units to the normal mode. REQUIRING REPLACEMENT.
23. Remove the external DC power from the NOTE

helicopter.
PROCESSOR (GEA 71H) SOFTWARE AND
CONFIGURATION LOADING PROCEDURE 3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
Do this procedure if the airframe and engine system

processor (GEA 71H) unit is replaced. NOTE
NOTE Cards in the following step may corrupt the
(LRU) Replacement — Software Loading 4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from
Procedure (paragraph 95-363) prior to the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before
initiating this procedure. Ensure the loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for
software loader SD card contains the reinstallation.
loading into the G1000H system. 5. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly
NOTE card slot of the MFD. Retain the card for reinstallation.

NOTE MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
The following step may be omitted if an configuration mode.
required software version installed is 8. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after
available. the MFD and PFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU PRESSING THE "CANCEL" SOFTKEY
WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt. MAY RESULT IN AN UNRESPONSIVE
GEA 71H, REQUIRING REPLACEMENT.
STATUS page in configuration mode. 16. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading software
and configuration files into the GEA 71H unit.
key to acknowledge.
push the ENT key.

13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the
item window and push the ENT key.
NOTE the lower SD card slot of the PFD and MFD. Make
All the basic software and configuration back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
files applicable for the 407GX are now removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
14. Push the CLR ALL softkey. 21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly
configuration files to be loaded: 22. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return
• GEA 1 - SOFTWARE
helicopter.
• GEA 1 - CONFIGURATION
• FUEL CAL - CONFIGURATION 95-372. TRANSPONDER (GTX 33H ES)

SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION
LOADING PROCEDURE
NOTE
Do this procedure if the transponder (GTX 33H ES)
unit is replaced.
pushed to indicate the file is selected to be NOTE
loaded.
CAUTION initiating this procedure. Ensure the
DO NOT PUSH THE "CANCEL" SOFTKEY loading into the G1000H system.
A T T HE B O T T O M O F T HE SC RE E N
DURING THE SOFTW ARE LO AD. IF
NOTE
THERE IS A SOFTWARE LOADING
PROBLEM, ALLOW THE SOFTWARE TO A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
AUTOMATICALLY STOP THE LOAD. loading software. Use of other brand cards
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
is not recommended as the display units 6. Insert the software loader card into the top SD
may not recognize them properly. card slot of the MFD.
NOTE 7. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on

The following step may be omitted if an MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in
existing software loader SD card with the configuration mode.
available.
to be closed. 10. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM

CAUTION SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group.

push the ENT key.
MAY CAUSE AN LRU TO BECOME 13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the
CORRUPTED AND UNRESPONSIVE, item window and push the ENT key.
NOTE
NOTE
Use an external power unit, if available, to files applicable for the 407GX are now
prevent the battery from being drained of its displayed in the PRODUCT window.
NOTE configuration files to be loaded:
Cards in the following step may corrupt the • GTX - SOFTWARE
• GTX - CONFIGURATION
loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for NOTE
reinstallation.
5. Remove the maintenance SD card assembly configuration file after the ENT key is
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) from the upper SD pushed to indicate the file is selected to be
card slot of the MFD. Retain the card for reinstallation. loaded.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
16. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading software to an available configuration (i.e., fuel specification
and configuration files into the GTX 33H unit. being used).
17. After successful configuration files upload, a NOTE

key to acknowledge. Refer to the G1000H Line Replaceable Unit
18. Open the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. initiating this procedure. Ensure the
19. Remove the software loader card from the top SD applicable released software approved for
card slot of the MFD. loading into the G1000H system.
20. Reinsert the Supplemental Database Cards into NOTE

21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly

(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD NOTE
card slot of the MFD. The following step may be omitted if an
22. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return required software version installed is
the display units to the normal mode. available.

23. Remove the external DC power from the the required version of software (paragraph 95-361).
helicopter.
95-373. OPTIONAL KITS SOFTWARE AND IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are
CONFIGURATION LOADING PROCEDURE to be closed.
Do the Kit Installation Software and Configuration

Loading Procedure (paragraph 95-374) to load
software and configuration files after initial installation CAUTION
of an optional kit, after the replacement of a Line
Replaceable Unit (LRU) used within an optional kit, or
to configure the system to an available configuration DO NOT ALLOW POWER TO BE
(i.e., configure the system to the fuel specification REMOVED FROM THE G1000H SYSTEM
being used). WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. POWER
Do the Kit Removal Software and Configuration
Procedure (paragraph 95-375) to remove the software
and configuration files for all optional kits.
95-374. KIT INSTALLATION SOFTWARE AND NOTE

CONFIGURATION LOADING PROCEDURE Use an external power unit, if available, to
Do this procedure after initial installation of an optional stored electrical power.
kit, after replacement of a line replaceable unit (LRU)
used within an optional kit, or to configure the system 3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
• Bell - APC Starter Generator Load Kit

NOTE
Installation Option (for increased 200A
Not removing the Supplemental Database generator load)
Cards in the following step may corrupt the
cards during the software upload. • Bell - Engine Fire Detection Kit 1 Installation
Option (for standard fire detection kit; does not
4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from have dedicated aural warning tone)
loading software into any unit. Retain the cards for • Bell - Engine Fire Detection Kit 2 Installation
reinstallation. Option (for CIS certification kit; dedicated
aural warning tone)
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) from the upper SD • Bell - Float Kit Installation Option
• Bell - GDL 59
card slot of the MFD. • Bell - GSR 56
• Bell - GTS 800 TAS

MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in • Bell - HeliSAS
configuration mode.
• Bell - Heater Overtemp Detection Kit
Installation Option
• JP-4 Installation Option (IAS defaults to JP-5)
9. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU • JP-4 with Aux Tank Installation Option
• JP-5/JP-8 Installation Option
STATUS page in configuration mode. • JP-5/JP-8 with Aux Tank Installation Option
11. On the PFD, use the FMS knobs to select the • Bell – KN63 DME Installation Option
• Bell - KR87 ADF Installation Option
the inner FMS knob to select the "Options" group and • Bell - No GMA 350H (to install third party
push the ENT key. audio panel)
• Bell - RAD ALT Installation Option

NOTE
Quiet Mode and ELT kits are configured • Bell - GDL 69AH Installation Option
"on" in the basic ship system software;
therefore, configurations for these kits are 14. With the installed kit option highlighted, push the
not necessary. ENT key.
13. Rotate the FMS knobs to highlight the 15. Push the CLR ALL softkey, and then push the
appropriate kit/option in the ITEM menu to configure CHK ALL softkey to select all the applicable software
the G1000H system. The options in the ITEM menu and configuration files to be loaded for the selected kit
are as follows: option.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
26. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return

NOTE
A check mark inside the square box is
displayed for all applicable 407GX software 27. Remove the external DC power from the
and configuration files to be loaded for the helicopter.
selected kit option.
95-375. KIT REMOVAL SOFTWARE AND
16. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading software CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
and configuration files for the selected kit option.
This procedure will return the G1000H system to the
17. After successful kit option software and basic software and configuration file set-up without
configuration files upload, a COMPLETE OK window any kit options installed.
is displayed. Push the ENT key to acknowledge.
NOTE
NOTE Refer to the G1000H Line Replaceable Unit
(LRU) Replacement – Software Loading
For the Bell – GTS 800 TAS option, perform
step 18 through step 21. Omit step 18
initiating this procedure. Ensure the
through step 21 for other options.
18. For the Bell – GTS 800 TAS option, rotate the
FMS knobs to the GTS configuration page.
NOTE
19. On the GTS configuration page, push and rotate
the FMS knob to highlight the CONFIGURATION - A SanDisk SD card is recommended for
BOTTOM ANTENNA. loading software. Use of other brand cards
20. Rotate the FMS knob to change the
CONFIGURATION - BOTTOM ANTENNA from
GARMIN GA58 to MONOPOLE selection and push NOTE
the ENT key. The following step may be omitted if an
21. Verify that the CONFIGURATION - BOTTOM required software version installed is
ANTENNA fields for SET and ACTIVE are available.
MONOPOLE.
23. Remove the software loader card from the top SD IGNTR circuit breakers. All other circuit breakers are
card slot of the MFD. to be closed.

CAUTION
25. Install the maintenance SD card assembly WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. POWER
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD LOSS DURING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
card slot of the MFD. MAY CAUSE AN LRU TO BECOME
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

NOTE
NOTE
prevent the battery from being drained of its 14. Push the CLR ALL softkey, and then push the
stored electrical power. CHK CFG softkey to select all the system
configuration files to be loaded.
NOTE
NOTE
A check mark inside the square box is
Not removing the Supplemental Database displayed for all applicable 407GX
Cards in the following step may corrupt the configuration files to be re-loaded. Since
cards during the software upload. the kit options installation only affects the
configuration files, it is not required to
4. Remove the Supplemental Database Cards from reload system software to remove kit
the lower SD card slot of the MFD and PFD before options.
reinstallation. 15. Push the LOAD softkey to begin loading
configuration files into the G1000H system.
16. After successful configuration files upload, an
Upload Complete - COMPLETE OK window is
displayed. Push the ENT key to acknowledge.
NOTE
7. Push and hold the ENT key simultaneously on The G1000H is now successfully returned
both the PFD and MFD, while closing the PFD and to the basic software and configuration files
MFD circuit breakers to power the display units on in for the Bell 407GX without any kit options
configuration mode. installed.
8. Release the ENT key on the MFD and PFD, after 17. Determine if there are any kit options currently
the MFD and PFD display INITIALIZING SYSTEM. installed in the aircraft. If there are kit options
remaining on the aircraft, please go to step 12 of the
9. Press the NO softkey on the PFD at the DO YOU Kit installation Software and Configuration Loading
WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES? prompt. Procedure (paragraph 95-374) to configure the
required kit options. Otherwise, continue with step 18
10. Verify that both display units display the SYSTEM below.
SYSTEM UPLOAD page under the SYSTEM group. 19. Remove the software loader card from the top SD
the inner FMS knob to select the BELL 407 group and 20. Reinsert the Supplemental Database Cards into
push the ENT key. the lower SD card slot of the PFD and MFD. Make
13. Rotate the FMS knobs to select BELL 407 in the back into the PFD, and the MFD card that was
item window and push the ENT key. removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
21. Install the maintenance SD card assembly the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual
(407-075-219-101 or subsequent) into the upper SD (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95).
95-377. GARMIN G1000H INTEGRATED AVIONICS
22. Close the PFD and MFD circuit breakers to return SYSTEM — TROUBLESHOOTING
Based on the enhanced fault isolation and
23. Remove the external DC power from the troubleshooting capabilities of the Garmin G1000H
helicopter. system, specific troubleshooting information is
typically not provided within the operational check and
95-376. NAVIGATION DATABASES — functional check procedures within this chapter.
SUBSCRIPTION AND UPDATE LOADING
PROCEDURES
To initiate troubleshooting of a problem within the
Garmin G1000H system, refer to Section 5 of the
NOTE G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual
(190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). This
Additional information may also be
information may be used in conjunction with the
referenced in the Garmin G1000H
Chapter 98 wiring diagrams to assist with
Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide –
troubleshooting.
Bell 407GX (190-01255-00) under
DATABASE MANAGEMENT.
For additional troubleshooting assistance, contact Bell
To obtain information on navigation database Helicopter Textron Product Support Engineering or
subscriptions from both Garmin and Jeppesen, as well Garmin Customer Support at http://www.garmin.com/
as update loading procedures, refer to Section 10 of us/support/contact/.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM (EIS) (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND

SUBSEQUENT)
95-378. ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM (EIS) • Engine power turbine speed (NP)
• Rotor speed (NR)
The G1000H Integrated Flight Deck offers improved
flight operations and reduces pilot workload by The PSI is made up of three sections:
automatically monitoring critical system parameters
and providing system alerts during all phases of flight. • Power indicator section
The Engine Indicating System (EIS) provides an • Power parameters digital readout section
indication of the performance of the systems related to
the power plant and includes the following:
• Dual tachometer presentation section
• Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and dual
tachometer display on the Primary Flight In addition to the information displayed within the three
Display (PFD) (Figure 95-147) sections of the PSI, information is also provided on the
following:
• Engine Indication System (EIS) strip
(Figure 95-147) displays the engine, electrical, • Engine starting indications
and fuel information on the Multi-Function
Display (MFD) • 5-minute takeoff timer
A larger version of the PSI and Dual Tachometer are • Engine data source annunciation and
also available on the Engine page of the MFD miscompare monitoring
(Figure 95-148).
• Data source inputs and exceedance
In the event of a PFD or MFD failure, the PSI and dual monitoring
tachometer, as well as a condensed EIS strip, are
provided in Reversionary Mode (Figure 95-148). For the pilot, as will be conveyed in the following
descriptive paragraphs, the primary benefit of the
The associated Crew Alerting System (CAS) displays power situation indicator is that only one indicator
warnings, cautions, and advisories to communicate needs to be monitored instead of the traditional three
conditions, statuses, and system failures (Chapter 96). (Q, MGT, and NG).
95-379. POWER SITUATION INDICATOR (PSI) 95-380. PSI — POWER INDICATOR SECTION
The power indicator section (Figure 95-149) of the PSI
The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) (Figure 95-149), is provides a single "round dial" gauge presentation of
an integrated display presentation of all parameters the power that is currently being demanded from the
required to manage the power from the engine and its engine and also provides a presentation of the power
effect on the rotor system. The PSI presents limits that are available. The power indicator section
information on the following parameters: provides this information for the following parameters:
• Engine torque (Q) • Engine torque (Q)
• Engine Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) • Measured gas temperature (MGT)
• Engine gas producer turbine speed (NG) • Engine gas producer turbine speed (NG)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
PFD
CAS
WINDOW
POWER
SITUATION
INDICATOR
DUAL
TACHOMETER
MFD
EIS STRIP
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS) (NORMAL)
Figure 95-147. Propulsion Instrument Displays — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
MFD ALERTS
WINDOW
CONTAINING CAS
MESSAGES
EIS STRIP
POWER SITUATION
INDICATOR
DUAL
TACHOMETER
ENGINE PAGE DISPLAY (MFD)
EIS
STRIP
CAS
WINDOW
POWER
SITUATION
INDICATOR
DUAL
TACHOMETER
REVERSIONARY MODE (MFD OR PFD)
Figure 95-148. Engine Page and Reversionary Mode Displays — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
RED RADIAL TICK (OPERATING LIMIT)

MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
CONTROLLING PARAMETER (BOXED)
POWER LIMIT
POWER PARAMETERS DIGITAL
READOUT SECTION
POWER INDICATOR NEEDLE
ENGINE TORQUE READOUT
MGT READOUT
NG READOUT
POWER INDICATOR SECTION NR DIGITAL READOUT
DUAL TACHOMETER SECTION

NR/NP NEEDLE POINTER
NORMAL OPERATION (TYPICAL)
RED RADIAL TICK (MGT START LIMIT) CONTROLLING PARAMETER

(Q OR MGT)
CONTROLLING PARAMETER (MGT)
5 MINUTE TAKE OFF

ZONE TIMER
MGT START EXCEEDANCE (TYPICAL) Q TIMER (TYPICAL)
407gc_MM_95_0139_c01+
Figure 95-149. Power Situation Indicator (PSI) — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The intent of the power indicator section of the PSI between the power indicator needle and the
gauge is to present the "margin" remaining between 10 position (MCP limit) can be considered an
Q, MGT, NG, and the Maximum Continuous Power indication of the "available power margin".
(MCP) limit. In addition, the power indicator section
maintains a display of the margins to any other limit. The red radial tick mark, which is positioned at the end
Margins are displayed in terms of power indicator of the power indicator section yellow arc, represents
needle travel rather than actual parameter values. the engine operating limit. The yellow arc represents
the available 5-minute takeoff power available. The arc
beyond this appears gray, but will change to red if the
NOTE
power indicator needle moves beyond the red tick
The 0 through 10 numbers displayed on the mark.
twelve linear sections of the power indicator
section of the PSI are not to be interpreted The size of the yellow arc and the position of the red
as parameter (Q, MGT, or NG) values. The radial tick mark can vary from the 10 position into the
numbers should only be considered as gray arc to indicate the margin available until any
indicators to differentiate power indicator parameter (Q, MGT, or NG) reaches its red line limit.
needle position versus the available power
margin remaining to the displayed The parameter (Q, MGT, or NG) determining red line
operating limit. position may not necessarily be the same as the
controlling parameter. In this case, the red line may
The power indicator needle indicates against a change position as power is demanded from the
"normalized" arc scale. This means that for standard engine or as operating conditions change.
operating conditions, the power indicator needle
position and rate of movement is about the same for In addition, not all parameters have a yellow, 5-minute
similar power settings no matter which parameter is takeoff limitation. For example, as NG does not have a
driving the needle. For all three parameters (Q, MGT 5-minute takeoff limitation, if it becomes the limiting
and NG), the 10 position on the scale (needle straight parameter, the yellow arc zone will decrease in size
up) corresponds to the MCP limit. The 5 position on until the red line is displayed at the 10 position. The
the scale approximately corresponds to 100% flat red line limit for NG will also change based on
pitch with the throttle in the FLY detent. The 3 position operational pressure altitudes below or above 10,000
on the scale approximately corresponds to ground idle feet. When operating above 10,000 feet pressure
power with the throttle at idle on a standard day. altitude, the NG red line limit will be determined as a
function of OAT.
When operating in the green portion of the power
indicator section arc, the position of the power 95-381. PSI — POWER PARAMETER DIGITAL
indicator needle corresponds to the parameter (Q, READOUTS
MGT, or NG) that if plotted on the normalized scale,
would be closest to the MCP point. When operating The power parameter digital readouts (Figure 95-149)
past the MCP point, the power indicator needle are provided to show the actual values of the
indicates the parameter furthest away from the MCP parameters (Q, MGT, or NG) associated with the
point. power indicator section.
In other words, since the designed scaling of the The digital readout provides:
power indicator section makes all parameters move at
approximately the same rate during power changes, • Engine torque (Q) as a percentage of the
the power indication needle will always correspond to transmission torque limit
the parameter (Q, MGT, or NG) that will reach MCP
first, or the one that has traveled furthest past the MCP • Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) in
point. degrees Celsius (°C)
For a given set of conditions, the parameter (Q, MGT, • Gas producer turbine speed (NG) in percent
or NG) that ends up being responsible for establishing
the position of the power indicator needle is referred to A color-coded box around the parameter (Q, MGT, or
as the "controlling parameter". The angular distance NG) legend is used to mark the "controlling parameter"
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
responsible for the power indicator needle position in The color of the NP and NR indicator pointers will
the power indicator section. match the associated color of the arc that the pointer is
positioned within. In the event of an actual "engine
The digital readouts are colored in accordance with out" condition while the helicopter is airborne, the NP
their operating ranges. In general, the color of the indicator pointer will be displayed in grey. If the system
power indicator needle will match the color of the determines the value of NP and/or NR to be invalid,
controlling parameter digital readout. Digital readouts the associated pointer will be suppressed from view.
are green in the normal range (below MCP), and
yellow when in the 5-minute takeoff zone. Red (white When in autorotation, the rotor arc is scaled for
digits on a red background) is used when operating autorotation and the white reference tick at the
above the operating limit. The controlling parameter 9 o'clock position of the arc indicates 100% NR. The
indicator box will also match the color of the parameter upper red tick indicates the 107% NR power off limit
range and the power indicator needle. In the event that and the lower red tick indicates the 85% NR minimum
the engine is in an actual "engine out" condition while limit.
the helicopter is airborne, the associated digital
readouts will be displayed in grey. When operating in Quiet Mode (BHT-407-II-21/
BHT-407-FMS-25.2), the engine AUTO governing
95-382. PSI — DUAL TACHOMETER SECTION speed of 92% NP/NR is indicated by a magenta circle
with a thin reference line that indicates the 92% NP/
NR location on the arc.
The dual tachometer section of the PSI
(Figure 95-150) represents the power turbine speed
(NP) and main rotor speed (NR). The dual tachometer When the FADEC ECU is operating in MANUAL
section is presented in an arc format and provides the mode, the engine power indicator needle and
following: controlling parameter box change to cyan except
when the power indicator needle is in the yellow or red
range.
• Rotor arc scale
95-383. PSI — ENGINE START

• NR needle pointer
• NP needle pointer NOTE

When the engine is in start mode and MGT
• NR digital readout is the controlling parameter on the power
indication section, the 5-minute takeoff
zone timer is inhibited.
NOTE
If both NR and NP values are less than When an engine start is initiated, a red triangle will
20%, the NR digital readout is suppressed appear on the power indication section red arc to
(blank) and the NR and NP pointers are indicate the MGT start limit (Figure 95-149).
displayed at the bottom of the rotor arc
scale. The red triangle will also move position in accordance
with the allowed start limit profile. The initial triangle
The rotor arc is scaled for normal operation and the position profile allows a temperature spike for
engine AUTO governing speed of 99 to 100% NP/NR 1 second up to 927°C, or a 10-second transient up to
is indicated by a white reference tick at the 9 o'clock 843°C. If MGT exceeds 843°C for more than
position of the arc. The upper red tick of the arc 10 seconds, the red triangle will then be displayed to
indicates the 107% NR power off limit and the middle indicate the 843°C scale position. Otherwise, if MGT
red tick of the arc indicates the 102.1% NP limit. The does not exceed 843°C for more than 10 seconds, the
lower red tick of the arc indicates the 87.1% NP upper red triangle will stay at the 927°C scale position.
limit of the avoid continuous operation range while the
lower yellow tick of the arc indicates the 68.4% NP The red triangle will be removed from display
lower limit of the avoid continuous operation range. 5 seconds after the starter is disengaged at 50% NG.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NP/NR NEEDLE POINTER
NR DIGITAL READOUT
DUAL TACHOMETER
SECTION
ROTOR ARC SCALE
107% NR 107% NR
102.1% NP
102.1% NP
100% NP/NR 100% NP/NR
QUIET MODE
87.1% NP 92% NP/NR
87.1% NP
68.4% NP 68.4% NP
QUIET MODE
NORMAL OPERATION (TYPICAL)
(BHT-407-II-21/BHT-407-FMS-25.2)
107% NR
107% NR
102.1% NP
100% NR
100% NP/NR
85% NR
87.1% NP
68.4% NP
AUTOROTATION WITH OVERSPEED INDICATION
ENGINE FAILURE
407gc_MM_95_0140
Figure 95-150. PSI — Dual Tachometer Section — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-384. PSI — 5-MINUTE TAKEOFF ZONE TIMER – Power turbine speed (NP)
The yellow arc zone of the power indicator section – Main rotor speed (NR)
represents the 5-minute time limited operating zone,
which is associated with engine torque (Q) and – Measured Gas Temperature (MGT)
Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) limitations.
• Airframe and engine system processor (GEA

If the power indicator needle enters the yellow arc 71H) supplied signal:
zone when Q or MGT is the controlling parameter, a
yellow 5-minute timer indication will also appear inside
the power indicator arc (Figure 95-149). – Engine torque (Q)
When displayed, the timer will count down in minutes If for any reason any of the primary data source input
and seconds. If the timer has less than 30 seconds signals are not available, the PSI will automatically
remaining, the timer will flash. If the timer reaches switch to the alternate data source input available from
zero, the timer value will remain at zero and the the Airframe and Engine System Processor
display will turn to red. (GEA 71H) or the FADEC ECU (for alternate Q) as
follows:
For example, if MGT is the controlling parameter and
the timer reaches zero, an exceedance will be logged • Airframe and engine system processor
in the display unit memory, as well as in the FADEC (GEA 71H) supplied signals:
ECU, and a MGT EXCEED message will be displayed
in the Crew Alerting System (CAS) window.
– Gas producer turbine speed (NG)
For additional information on recorded Q or MGT – Power turbine speed (NP)

exceedances associated with the PSI, refer to
paragraph 95-393 and paragraph 95-398.
– Main rotor speed (NR)
95-385. PSI — ENGINE DATA SOURCE
ANNUNCIATION AND MISCOMPARE – Measured Gas Temperature (MGT)
MONITORING
• FADEC ECU Supplied Signal:
The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) is provided with
primary data source inputs and alternate data source – Engine torque (Q)
inputs for indication redundancy.
The input signals that drive the PSI indications are NOTE
provided from the FADEC ECU and the airframe and As NP does not have a digital readout, the
engine system processor (GEA 71H) and then are fed following information does not apply for this
to integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H), parameter.
which in turn feed the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
and Multi-Function Display (MFD).
If the primary data source input is unavailable and the
alternate data source input is in use, the annunciation
The primary data source input signals that drive the ALTN (amber text) will appear on top of the engine
PSI are provided as follows: digital readout (Figure 95-151). This indicates that the
alternate data source is in use. Additionally, a yellow A
• FADEC ECU supplied signals: will display next to the affected parameter's label to
indicate the alternate data source being used for this
parameter (i.e., QA to indicate primary Q data failed,
– Gas producer turbine speed (NG) alternate Q data in use).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
ALTERNATE SOURCE UNAVAILABLE

PRIMARY FAILED, ALTERNATE IN USE
PRIMARY Q FAILED, ALTERNATE IN USE

PRIMARY MGT FAILED, ALTERNATE IN USE
PRIMARY NG FAILED, ALTERNATE IN USE
PRIMARY NR FAILED, ALTERNATE IN USE
407gc_MM_95_0141
Figure 95-151. PSI — Engine Data Source Annunciation and Miscompare Monitoring — Description
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
If the alternate data source is unavailable for any SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED (Cont)
reason, the annunciation ALTN (white text) will appear
on top of the power parameters digital readout
readout. This indicates a loss of available backup NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
should the primary data source be lost. Additionally, TT-1000A or Turbine Temperature
the ALTN DATA FAIL Crew Alerting System (CAS) Equivalent Indicating System Test
message will accompany the PSI indication. Set
In the event that a primary data source input is Tester, 0 to 300 PSI
unavailable at the same time that an alternate data
source is unavailable, the ALTN (amber text) This operational check is used to check the
annunciation will have priority over the ALTN (white functionality of the torque (Q), Measured Gas
text) annunciation. The applicable CAS messages for Temperature (MGT), and gas producer turbine speed
both however, will display in the CAS window. (NG) as displayed on the power indicator section of
the PSI at the same time.
The system also continually monitors and compares
input signal data from the FADEC ECU and the Individual operational checks of Q, MGT, and NG
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H). If indications are provided in their respective sections
the primary data source input signal data does not within this chapter.
match the alternate data source input signal for each
PSI parameter (NG, NP, NR, MGT, and Q) within the
allowed tolerances for a period of more than
5 seconds, the respective “yellow” miscompare CAUTION
message will appear in the CAS window as follows:
• NG MISCOMP – Difference > 2% and at least MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE
one of the NG values is between 10% and TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME
125% TYPE OF OIL THAT IS USED IN THE
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF YOU DO NOT
USE THE SAME TYPE OF OIL, YOU WILL
• NP MISCOMP – Difference > 2% and at least
C O N TA M I N AT E T H E E N G I N E O I L
one of the NP values is between 32% and
SYSTEM.
125%
• NR MISCOMP – Difference > 2% and at least NOTE

one of the NR values is between 22% and The hand pressure gun and transducer
125% should be positioned at the same level as
the helicopter transducer.
• MGT MISCOMP – Difference > 20°C
NOTE
• Q MISCOMP – Difference > 4% and at least
one of the Q values is greater than 3% Due to the complexity of the FADEC
system, it is considered normal if the ALTN
95-386. POWER SITUATION INDICATOR (PSI) — message is displayed during the following
TORQUE, MGT, AND NG POWER tests and FADEC reverts to MAN.
INDICATOR SECTION — OPERATIONAL
CHECK If the FADEC reverts to MAN, it is normal
for a power indicator needle that would
otherwise be green, to be displayed in
cyan.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 1. Disconnect the engine torque oil pressure line at

the left side aft face of the engine. Connect a hand
1110 or Equivalent Boonton Audio pressure gun to the line leading to the transducer.
Oscillator Make sure that the connection is sealed.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Set the FUNCTION switch on the temperature 11. Check that the MGT digital readout displays the
indicating system test set tester to INDICATOR TEST selected temperature ±3°C.
and disconnect the lugs on the terminal board (1TB1)
in the engine bay. 12. Increase the pressure on the engine torque
transducer gun to a pressure of 80.0 PSIG.
3. Connect the test set black lead to the green lug of
the electrical and avionics harness. Connect the test
13. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout
set red lead to the white lug of the electrical and
displays 90 ±1% and is presented in the annunciation
avionics harness.
box as controlling the power indicator needle.
14. Verify that the power indicator needle is below the

CAUTION 12 o'clock position and colored green.
15. Increase the pressure on the hand gun to

DO NOT PRESS EITHER PUSHBUTTON
84.3 PSIG.
WITH TEST CLIPS CONNECTED TO THE
HELICOPTER EICAS. THE CURRENT
APPLIED MAY DAMAGE THE UNIT. 16. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout
displays 95.0 +0.5% and is presented in the
4. Disconnect NG – GAS PROD MAG PICKUP in annunciation box as controlling the power indicator
the engine compartment. Connect the audio oscillator; needle.
positive to pins A and C, negative to pins B and D of
Rolls-Royce provided connector. 17. Verify that the power indicator needle is between
12 and 1 o'clock position and colored yellow.
5. Make sure that the PFD, MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GIA 2/
SYS, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, FAN/AVNCS, 18. Increase the pressure on the hand gun to
and GEA circuit breakers are closed. 90.0 PSIG.
NOTE 19. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout
displays 101.0 +0.3% and is presented in the
Use an external power unit, if available, to annunciation box as controlling the power indicator
prevent the battery from being drained of its needle.
6. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter. 20. Verify that the power indicator needle is just
passed the 1 o'clock position and colored red.
7. Check that the MGT digital readout indicates
approximately the ambient temperature, the engine 21. Reduce the pressure on the hand gun to
torque digital readout displays 0% torque (±1%) and 70.0 PSIG.
the gas producer rotation speed (NG) digital readout
displays 0% RPM (±1%). 22. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout
displays 78.0 +1% and is not presented in the
8. Set waveform on the audio oscillator to sine, annunciation box anymore.
amplitude to 12.0 V, peak to peak, and frequency to
17,850 Hz. 23. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the temperature
indicating system test set to 727°C.
9. Check that the gas producer rotation speed digital
readout (NG) displays 100 ±0.6% RPM. 24. Check that the MGT digital readout displays the
selected temperature ±3°C and is presented in the
10. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the temperature annunciation box as controlling the power indicator
indicating system test set to 700°C. needle.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
25. Verify that the power indicator needle is at the 39. Check that the gas producer rotation speed digital
12 o'clock position and colored green. readout (NG) displays 106 ±0.6% RPM and is
presented in the annunciation box as controlling the
26. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the temperature power indicator needle.
indicating system test set to 779°C.
40. Verify that the power indicator needle is past the
12 o'clock position and colored red.
27. Check that the MGT digital readout displays the
selected temperature ±3°C and is presented in the
annunciation box as controlling the power indicator 41. Set waveform on the audio oscillator to sine,
needle. amplitude to 12.0 V, peak to peak, and frequency to
17,850 Hz.
28. Verify that the power indicator needle is at the 42. Check that the gas producer rotation speed digital
1 o'clock position and colored yellow. readout (NG) displays 100 ±0.6% RPM and is not
presented in the annunciation box anymore.
29. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the temperature
indicating system test set to 800°C. 43. Verify that the power indicator needle is between
the 11 and 12 o'clock positions and colored green.
selected temperature ±3°C and is presented in the 44. Set waveform on the audio oscillator to sine,
annunciation box as controlling the power indicator amplitude to 0.0 V, peak to peak, and frequency to
needle. 0 Hz. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the temperature
indicating system test set to 0°C as displayed on the
31. Verify that the power indicator needle is between digital indicator. Reduce the pressure on the hand gun
the 1 and 2 o'clock positions and colored red. to 0 PSIG.
45. Check that the torque (Q) digital readout displays

32. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the temperature 0.0 +1%, check that the MGT digital readout displays
indicating system test set to 700°C. the TOT temperature ±3°C, and the gas producer
rotation speed digital readout (NG) displays 0 ±0.6%
33. Check that the MGT digital readout displays the RPM.
selected temperature ±3°C.
34. Verify that the power indicator needle is between helicopter.
11 and 12 o'clock position and colored green.
47. Disconnect the hand pressure gun from the
35. Set waveform on the audio oscillator to sine, engine torque oil pressure line at the left side, aft face
amplitude to 12.6 V, peak to peak, and frequency to of the engine. Reconnect the pressure transducer on
18,743 Hz. the engine and make sure the connection is tight and
sealed.
36. Check that the gas producer rotation speed digital 48. Disconnect the temperature indicating system
readout (NG) displays 105 ±0.6% RPM and is test set and reconnect the electrical and avionics
presented in the annunciation box as controlling the harnesses to the terminal board (1TB1). Verify that the
power indicator needle. connection is tight and secure.
37. Verify that the power indicator needle is at the 49. Disconnect the audio oscillator and reconnect NG
12 o'clock position and colored green. – GAS PROD MAG PICKUP in the engine
compartment. Check that all connections are tight and
38. Set waveform on the audio oscillator to sine, secure.
amplitude to 12.7 V, peak to peak, and frequency to
18,921 Hz. 50. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
51. Erase any exceedances from the Exceedances &

NOTE
Chip History page (paragraph 95-358).
Although Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT) and
52. With reference to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Rolls-Royce use different torque
Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication CSP transducers and oil pressure values to
21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear any represent 100% Q, (i.e., engine limit =
Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all 590 foot-pounds/710 HP and transmission
Engine History from the FADEC ECU. limit = 560 foot-pounds/674 HP) all Q values
displayed on the PSI reflect BHT values.
53. Remove the external DC power from the Therefore, in the event that Q data source
helicopter. inputs are obtained from the alternate
Rolls-Royce engine mounted torque
transducer, a scaling factor is automatically
applied to provide BHT Q values on the PSI.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). The alternate Q data source input signal is provided
from the engine mounted torque transducer to the
95-387. PSI — ENGINE TORQUE (Q) DATA FADEC ECU and then to the integrated avionics units
INPUTS AND EXCEEDANCE No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an RS 485 data bus.
MONITORING (S/N 54300 AND The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
SUBSEQUENT) (GIA 63H) then feed their respective PFD and MFD via
an HSDB.
The engine torque (Q) indication on the power
parameter digital readout of the Power Situation NOTE
Indicator (PSI) (Figure 95-149) displays Q in percent.
Any torque exceedance value that is
The engine torquemeter pressure sensing port outputs recorded represents the straight torque
a specific oil pressure for a specific engine torque. This seen by both the engine gearbox and the
oil pressure is fed to two separate torque transducers main transmission. In the event of a
(Figure 95-152). The primary Q data source for the PSI recorded torque exceedance, reference to
is provided from the Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT) both the BHT-407-MM and Rolls Royce
airframe mounted torque transducer and the alternate 250-C47B Operation and Maintenance
data source is provided from the Rolls-Royce engine Manual is required to ensure appropriate
mounted torque transducer. inspections are carried out.
The primary Q data source input signal from the NOTE

airframe mounted torque transducer is initially provided
to the engine signal conditioner (GSC 46), and then to As mention previously, and although BHT
the airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H). and Rolls-Royce use different torque
The Q signal is then fed to integrated avionics units transducers and oil pressure values to
No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an RS 485 data bus. represent 100% Q, all Q exceedances
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 recorded on the display units reflect BHT
(GIA 63H) then feed their respective Primary Flight values. Exceedance values recorded by the
Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) via a FADEC ECU will represent Rolls-Royce
High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) to display the PSI values. To convert from Bell recorded %
indication. torque to FADEC ECU% torque, divide Bell
% torque by 1.0535. To convert FADEC
ECU% torque to foot-pounds, multiply
FADEC ECU% torque by 5.9. To convert
FADEC ECU% torque to Bell % torque,
multiply FADEC ECU% torque by 1.0535.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
MFD (L-DU) INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1 ENGINE TORQUE FADEC ECU
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
3160DS1 3140A1
1B7
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H) 1B7P1
ROLLS-ROYCE ENGINE TORQUE
HI PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (TMOP)
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A B
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B GROUND
D
LO R R' ENGINE
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B
C
16 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7A FADEC
REVERSIONARY 10 VDC R R'
58 17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7B FADEC A
MODE SELECT 1
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
SIGNAL GROUND 38 23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1)
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6 BELL HELICOPTER ENGINE TORQUE
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ENGINE TORQUE
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
1B7
(PRIMARY PRESS SIGNAL (TORQUE) LO C

1
DATA SOURCE) PRESS SIGNAL (TORQUE) HI B
EXCITATION GROUND D
+10 VDC EXCITATION A
FADEC/ECU
1A50
1A50P2 1A50P1 ROLLS-ROYCE ENGINE TORQUE XMTR (TMOP)
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 69 (–) ARINC 429 TRANSMIT REF 64 A +5 V REF
2
3160S1 PUSH ON 68 (+) (PRIMARY DATA SOURCE) GND 65 B GND
PUSH OFF
ACTION (+) 66 C OUTPUT (+) (ALTERNATE
OUT 2
SWITCH (–) 67 D OUTPUT (–) DATA SOURCE)
PFD (R-DU) AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER
3160DS2 7320A1 7730A1
7320A1P1 (GEA 71H) 7320A1P1 7730A1P1 (GSC 46)
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS2P1
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 5 RS-485 1A +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER A 14 5

6 RS-485 1B TRANSDUCER LO (GND) 11 23 7730A1P1
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 6
7 RS-485 2A 1 DIGITAL IN 4A (TORQUE) 77 21
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 VFC 24
8 RS-485 2B
SIGNAL GROUND 38
7
REVERSIONARY 1 DIGITAL IN 5A (TORQUE) 67 3
58 VFC 25
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H)
NOTES
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) 1 PRIMARY DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR TORQUE (Q) IS PROVIDED THROUGH
17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7B FADEC ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (7730A1) AND AIRFRAME AND ENGINE
16 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7A FADEC SYSTEM PROCESSOR (7320A1).
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B 2 ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR TORQUE (Q) IS PROVIDED FROM
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A FADEC/ECU (1A50).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0120_c02
Figure 95-152. PSI — Torque Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The 100% maximum PSI torque indication represents data) or local analog input data (i.e., alternate data in
674 horsepower at the engine output shaft. This output the event ECU Arinc 429 primary data fails). A
is divided on the helicopter between the tail rotor drive summary of the exceedances shall be displayed on
system and the main rotor drive system. This division the MFD upon subsequent power-up as long as
of horsepower is done automatically in flight, exceedance data remains in the NVM (i.e., unless
depending on the power requirements of the different exceedance data is erased by authorized
drivetrain systems. The 674 horsepower limit is the maintenance personnel, a summary of the
maximum allowed in the total drivetrain system. exceedances is displayed upon subsequent power-up
to indicate that maintenance action is required). For
The 93.5% PSI torque indication represents each exceedance event, the following parameters
630 horsepower. This is the maximum limit allowed on shall be recorded in NVM by the display unit and the
a continuous basis on the engine gearbox. The FADEC ECU:
5-minute limit between 93.5% (630 horsepower) and
100% (674 horsepower) represents a 5-minute limit on • Peak value
the engine gearbox in this range of power. The torque
recorded by the display unit is the torque at the engine
• Duration
gearbox. Therefore, 630 horsepower at the indicator
represents 630 horsepower at the engine gearbox.
• Time
Q exceedance recording (Table 95-39) is based on
data from either FADEC ECU Arinc 429 data (primary • Date
Table 95-39. Engine Torque Exceedance Monitoring
TORQUE% INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
93.6 to 100% PSI indications shown in yellow and Not recorded.

5-minute takeoff counter activated.
100.1 to 105.3% PSI indications shown in red. Not recorded.
105.4 to 110% PSI indications shown in red. Recorded after 10 seconds.

Q EXCEED (amber text) CAS message
displayed and Q exceedance recorded in
display unit and FADEC ECU.
Above 110.1% PSI indications shown in red. Recorded immediately.

Q EXCEED (amber text) CAS message
displayed and Q exceedance recorded in
display unit and FADEC ECU.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-388. ENGINE TORQUE INDICATION SYSTEM — When evaluating an engine overtorque situation
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN TORQUE (Rolls-Royce Maintenance Manual), the following
INDICATOR AND FADEC SYSTEM information will be valuable in relating the torque
indication system to the relevant engine values. The
Although the torque indicator and the FADEC system relationship between the torque indicator system and
both are driven by the engine oil pressure from the the FADEC system is shown in Table 95-40. For
engine torquemeter sensing port on the engine additional information and conversion formulas, refer
gearbox, the interpretation of what represents 100% is to Recorded Exceedances/Conversion Factors in
different between the torque indicator and the FADEC. Chapter 76.
Table 95-40. Relationship Between Engine Torque Indication and FADEC System
TORQUE FADEC TORQUE HORSEPOWER ENGINE OIL

FOOT-POUNDS
INDICATOR (%) (%) (HP) PRESSURE (PSI)
113.75 107.88 766 637 103.9
105.35 100.00 710 590 96.3
100.00 94.92 674 560 91.4
93.57 88.73 630 524 85.5
95-389. ENGINE TORQUE INDICATION SYSTEM gauge bridge in the airframe mounted engine torque
TRANSDUCER — DESCRIPTION transducer. This in turn changes the signal sent to the
engine signal conditioner (GSC 46). The torque
The engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) is indicator displays a percentage of torque
mounted in the transmission compartment on the left corresponding to the input signal.
side of the forward firewall. The transducer has a
pressure diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge.
The relationship of the engine oil pressure at the
The strain gauge circuit of the airframe transducer torquemeter pressure sensing port, engine torque
receives an excitation voltage of 10 VDC from the pressure transducer (1B7) signal, and torque
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H). indication is shown in Table 95-41. The relationship of
The oil pressure output supplied by the engine the oil pressure to the indicated torque is a straight line
torquemeter pressure sensing port changes the strain relationship.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-41. Torque Indication Versus Oil Pressure
ENGINE TORQUEMETER INPUT SIGNAL FROM

SHAFT HORSEPOWER TORQUE
PRESSURE SENSING TRANSDUCER TO
(SHP) INDICATION (%)
PORT (PSI) INDICATOR (MV) (%)
811.2 108 85.80 ±0.3 118.2 ±2
752.5 102 81.01 ±0.3 111.6 ±2
741.4 100.5 79.85 ±0.3 110.0 ±2
737.4 100 79.41 ±0.3 109.4 ±2
722.7 98 77.81 ±0.3 107.2 ±2
709.7 96.24 76.44 ±0.3 105.3 ±2
685.8 93 73.89 ±0.3 101.8 ±2
674.0 91.4 72.45 ±0.3 100.0 ±2
663.7 90 71.38 ±0.5 98.5 ±2
648.6 88 69.78 ±0.5 96.3 ±2
630.2 85.5 67.75 ±0.5 93.5 ±2
589.9 80 63.43 ±0.5 87.5 ±2
516.2 70 55.55 ±1 76.6 ±2
442.5 60 47.60 ±1 65.6 ±2
368.7 50 39.72 ±1 54.7 ±2
295.0 40 31.85 ±1 43.8 ±2
221.1 30 23.90 ±1 32.8 ±2
147.5 20 16.02 ±1 21.9 ±2
73.7 10 8.06 ±1 10.9 ±2
- 0 - ±4.7
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-390. ENGINE TORQUE PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER — REMOVAL WARNING
WARNING OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC from the helicopter.
2. Install the preformed packing (3, Figure 95-153)

NOTE on the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2).
necessary to perform the required 3. Get access to the left side of the forward firewall
maintenance. FS 155.00 of the transmission compartment.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 4. Install the engine torque pressure transducer
from the helicopter. (1B7) (2) on the tee fitting (4). Torque the pressure
transducer.
2. Get access to the left side of the forward firewall

FS 155.00 of the transmission compartment. Locate NOTE
the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2, It is recommended to apply contact
Figure 95-153. enhancer (C-052) to the electrical
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1B7P1) (1)
5. Connect the electrical connector (1B7P1) (1) to
from the engine torque pressure transducer
the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2).
(1B7P1) (2).
6. Bleed the engine torque pressure transducer

4. Remove the engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2) (paragraph 95-392) and do an operational
(1B7) (2) from the tee fitting (4). check of the torque indication system (paragraph
95-393).
5. Remove the preformed packing (3) from the
engine torque pressure transducer (1B7) (2). 95-392. ENGINE TORQUE PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER — BLEEDING
95-391. ENGINE TORQUE PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER — INSTALLATION
MATERIALS REQUIRED NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1. Disconnect the engine oil pressure line at the
engine torquemeter pressure sensing port.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A

1 2. Engine torque pressure
transducer (1B7) FIREWALL
3. Preformed packing
4. Tee fitting FS 155.00
5. Tee fitting cap
DETAIL A
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-153. Engine Torque Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
CAUTION CAUTION
MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE
TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME
TYPE OF OIL THAT IS USED IN THE TYPE OF OIL THAT IS USED IN THE
HELICOPTER ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF YOU DO NOT
YOU DO NOT USE THE SAME TYPE OF USE THE SAME TYPE OF OIL, YOU WILL
OIL, YOU WILL CONTAMINATE THE C O N TA M I N AT E T H E E N G I N E O I L
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. SYSTEM.
2. Attach the pressure tester to the engine oil NOTE

pressure line.
The hand pressure gun and transducer
should be positioned at the same level as
3. Loosen the tee fitting cap installed on the forward the helicopter transducer.
firewall before the transducer.
NOTE
4. Apply pressure slowly so the line will be filled with
oil. Continue to force oil into the line until a steady flow Due to the complexity of the FADEC
without air bubbles is established at the tee fitting cap. system, it is considered normal if the ALTN
message is displayed during the following
tests and FADEC to revert to MAN.
5. When steady flow is established, tighten the tee
fitting cap. The torque tests may be tested in conjunction with the
PSI functions and the FADEC torque test.
Disconnect the pressure tester from the engine oil 1. Disconnect the engine torque oil pressure line at
pressure line. the forward left side face of the engine. Connect a
hand pressure gun to the line leading to the
transducer. Make sure that the connection is sealed.
NOTE
2. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS,
Keep the engine oil pressure line elevated
PFD, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, ADC, and FAN/
while attaching to the engine gearbox to
AVNCS circuit breakers.
7. Connect the engine oil pressure line to the engine NOTE

torquemeter pressure sensing port.
95-393. PSI — TORQUE (Q) INDICATION — stored electrical power.
OPERATIONAL CHECK
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 4. Check that the engine torque digital readout
indicates 0% torque (±2%) and the digital readouts for
the MGT and NG are valid and not crossed out with a
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE red X.

5. Verify that the boxed white ALTN message is not
displayed on the PSI section and the white ALTN
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DATA FAIL advisory message is not displayed on the 20. Verify that the engine torque (Q) digital readout
CAS window. displays 90 ±1.0% and the Q EXCEED caution
extinguishes from the CAS window.
6. With the pressure gun connected to the
transducer input line, apply a pressure of 80 PSIG. 21. Erase the Q exceedance displayed on the
Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
7. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout 95-358).
displays 90 ±1% and the power indicator needle is
green and between the 11 and 12 o'clock positions on 22. Verify that the boxed white ALTN message on the
the green arc. PSI section and the white ALTN DATA FAIL advisory
message on the CAS window are not showing.
8. Increase pressure to 84.3 PSIG.
23. Open the GEA circuit breaker on the overhead
9. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout CB panel.
yellow and at the 12 o'clock position on the yellow arc. 24. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is
displayed on the PSI section, the engine torque (Q)
10. Increase pressure to 90 PSIG. goes to (QA), the digital readout displays (QA) 90 +1%
and the white ALTN DATA FAIL advisory is displayed
on the CAS.
11. Check that the engine torque (Q) digital readout
red and at the 1 o'clock position on the red arc, and 25. Increase pressure to 83.0 PSIG.
the 5-minute timer is displayed.
26. Check that the engine torque digital readout
12. Increase pressure to 96.5 PSIG. displays (QA) 95 +1% and the power indicator needle
is at 12 o'clock position on the yellow arc and that the
5-minute timer appears.
13. Check that the amber Q EXCEED caution
message is displayed on the CAS window after
10 seconds and that the 5-minute timer appears. 27. Increase pressure to 89.6 PSIG.
14. Decrease the pressure to 80 PSIG. 28. Check that the engine torque digital readout
displays (QA) 101 +1%, the power indicator needle is
15. Verify that the torque digital readout displays at the 1 o'clock position on the red arc, and the
90 ±1.0% and the Q EXCEED caution extinguishes on 5-minute timer is displayed.
the CAS window.
29. Increase pressure to 95.5 PSIG.
16. Verify that the Q exceedance has been recorded
on the Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph 30. Check that the amber Q EXCEED caution
95-353). message is displayed on the CAS window after
10 seconds.
17. Increase pressure to 106 PSIG (do not exceed
110 PSIG). 31. Decrease the pressure to 80 PSIG.
18. Check that the amber Q EXCEED caution 32. Verify that the engine torque digital readout
message is immediately displayed on the CAS displays (QA) 90 ±1.0% and the Q EXCEED caution
window, that the 5-minute timer appears and an extinguishes from the CAS window.
exceedance is recorded on the Exceedances & Chip
History page (paragraph 95-353). 33. Verify the Q exceedance has been recorded on
the Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
19. Decrease the pressure to 80 PSIG. 95-353).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
34. Increase pressure to 106 PSIG (do not exceed the Power Situation Indicator (PSI) (Figure 95-149)
110 PSIG). displays MGT in degrees C.
35. Check that the amber Q EXCEED caution An MGT thermocouple (Figure 95-154) is mounted on
message is immediately displayed on the CAS the engine turbine section and provides two separate
window, that the 5-minute timer appears, and an signals. One signal is provided to the FADEC ECU
exceedance is recorded on the Exceedances & Chip and is used as the primary MGT data source. The
History page. second signal is provided to the airframe and engine
system processor (GEA 71H) and is used as the
36. Decrease the pressure to 80 PSIG. alternate data source.
37. Verify that the engine torque digital readout The primary MGT data source input signal is provided
displays (QA) 90 ±1.0% and the Q EXCEED caution is from the FADEC ECU to both integrated avionics units
extinguished from the CAS window. No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H), via an Arinc 429 data bus.
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
38. Close the GEA circuit breaker on the overhead (GIA 63H) then feed their respective PFD and MFD via
CB panel. a High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) to display the PSI
indication.
39. Verify that the engine torque digital readout
symbol changes from QA to Q and the boxed amber The alternate MGT data source input signal is
ALTN message extinguishes on the PSI section. provided from the airframe and engine system
processor (GEA 71H) to the integrated avionics units
40. Decrease the pressure to 0 PSIG and disconnect No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an RS 485 data bus.
the hand pressure gun. Remove the cap and reinstall The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
the engine torque oil pressure transducer lines. Make (GIA 63H) then feed their respective PFD and MFD via
sure that all connections are tight and secure. an HSDB.
41. Erase any Q exceedance displayed on the MGT exceedance recording is provided for operations
Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph in start mode (Table 95-42) as well as normal engine
95-358). operation (Table 95-43). The exceedance recording is
based on data from either the FADEC ECU Arinc 429
data (primary data) or from local analog input data
(i.e., alternate data in the event ECU Arinc 429
Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication CSP
primary data fails). A summary of the exceedances
21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear any
shall be displayed on the MFD upon subsequent
Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all
power-up as long as exceedance data remains in the
NVM (i.e., unless exceedance data is erased by
authorized maintenance personnel, a summary of the
43. Remove the external DC power from the exceedances is displayed upon subsequent power-up
helicopter. to indicate that maintenance action is required). For
each exceedance event, the following parameters
44. Return the helicopter to the standard shall be recorded in NVM by the display unit and the
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After FADEC ECU:
• Peak value
95-394. PSI — MEASURED GAS
TEMPERATURE (MGT) DATA INPUTS
• Duration
AND EXCEEDANCE MONITORING
• Time
The engine Measured Gas Temperature (MGT)
indication on the power parameter digital readout of • Date
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
MFD (L-DU) INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B
REVERSIONARY
58 17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7B FADEC
MODE SELECT 1
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
FADEC/ECU
1A50
1A50P2 1A50P1
69 (–) MGT SIGNAL CHROMEL 78

ARINC 429 TRANSMIT 1
68 (+) (PRIMARY DATA SOURCE) ALUMEL 79
MEASURED GAS
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR TEMPERATURE (MGT)
THERMOCOUPLES
7320A1
1TC1
7320A1P1 (GEA 71H) 7320A1P1 1TB1
REVERSIONARY (ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE)
MODE SELECT 5 RS-485 1A 62
ANALOG IN 6 HI (MGT) CHROMEL C
6 RS-485 1B 2
3160S1 PUSH ON ALUMEL A
(ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE)
PUSH OFF 63
ANALOG IN 6 LO (MGT)
ACTION
SWITCH
PFD (R-DU) 7 RS-485 2A

3160DS2 8 RS-485 2B
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS2P1
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38
REVERSIONARY
58 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H)
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1) NOTES

23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1)
17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7B FADEC 1 PRIMARY DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR MGT IS PROVIDED FROM FADEC/ECU (1A50) TO
16 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7A FADEC INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1 (3140A1) AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
(3140A2) VIA ARINC 429 DATA BUS.
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B 2 ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR MGT IS PROVIDED TO INTEGRATED AVIONICS
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A UNIT NO. 1 (3140A1) AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS NO. 2 (3140A2) VIA AIRFRAME AND
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR (7320A1).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0111_c01
Figure 95-154. PSI — MGT Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-42. MGT Exceedance Monitoring — During Start
MGT°C INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
843 to 926°C PSI provides a red triangle on the power Recorded after 10 seconds. MGT
indication section red arc to indicate the 927°C EXCEED (amber text) CAS
MGT start limit. If MGT exceeds 843°C for more message displayed and MGT
than 10 seconds, the red triangle will then be exceedance recorded in display
displayed to indicate the 843°C scale position unit and FADEC ECU.
926.1 to 927.9°C PSI indications shown in red. PSI provides a red Recorded after 1 second. MGT
triangle on the power indication section red arc to EXCEED (amber text) CAS
indicate the 927°C MGT start limit. message displayed and MGT
exceedance recorded in display
unit and FADEC ECU.
Above 928°C PSI indications shown in red. PSI provides a red Recorded immediately. MGT
triangle on the power indication section red arc to EXCEED (amber text) CAS
indicate the 927°C MGT start limit. message displayed and MGT
unit and FADEC ECU.
Table 95-43. MGT Exceedance Monitoring — During Normal Operation
MGT°C INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
727.1 to 779°C PSI indications shown in yellow and 5-minute Recorded after 5 minutes.
takeoff counter activated. MGT EXCEED (amber text) CAS
message displayed and MGT
exceedance recorded in display unit
and FADEC ECU.
779.1 to 905°C PSI indications shown in red. Recorded after 12 seconds.
MGT EXCEED (amber text) CAS
and FADEC ECU.
Above 905°C PSI indications shown in red. Recorded immediately.

MGT EXCEED (amber text) CAS
and FADEC ECU.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-395. MGT INDICATION SYSTEM 95-397. MGT THERMOCOUPLE LOOP —

THERMOCOUPLES — DESCRIPTION RESISTANCE CHECK
Four alumel-chromel thermocouples are mounted on

the engine. Each thermocouple probe generates a DC
voltage that is directly proportional to the gas
temperature that it senses. The thermocouples and
the thermocouple harness provide an average of the NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
four voltages that is representative of the turbine outlet
temperature of the gases as they go out of the gas TT-1000A or Turbine Temperature
producer turbine of the engine. Equivalent Indicating System Test
Set
The MGT indication of the indicator in relation to the
input signal from the thermocouples is shown in
Table 95-44. 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
Table 95-44. MGT Indication Versus Input Signal 2. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple
terminal board (1TB1), disconnect the wires E9AALML
INDICATION (°C) INPUT SIGNAL (MV) GRN and ALML from terminal A. Disconnect the wires
E9ACHROM and CHROM from the terminal C.
100 4.10 ±0.62
200 8.14 ±0.62 3. Connect a lead of the test set to terminal A.

Connect the other lead of the test set to terminal C.
300 12.21 ±0.62
400 16.40 ±0.62

4. On the test set, follow the manufacturer's
500 20.64 ±0.21 instructions and set the test set to check resistance.
600 24.90 ±0.21

5. Make sure that the resistance of the
700 29.13 ±0.21 thermocouple loop is between 0.26 and 0.38 ohms.
779 32.41 ±0.21
6. In the engine compartment, disconnect the leads
800 33.28 ±0.21
of the test set from terminal A and terminal C of the
826 34.34 ±0.21 thermocouple terminal board (1TB1).
900 37.33 ±0.21

7. In the engine compartment, on the thermocouple
927 38.40 ±0.21 terminal board (1TB1), connect wires E9AALML GRN
and ALML to terminal A. Connect wires E9ACHROM
999 41.23 ±0.21
and CHROM to terminal C. Make sure that the wires
are correctly installed. Make sure the nuts of the
95-396. THERMOCOUPLE HARNESS — terminal board are correctly tightened.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series Operation 8. Return the helicopter to the standard
and Maintenance Manual for the removal and configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
installation of the thermocouple harness. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-398. PSI — MEASURED GAS TEMPERATURE

(MGT) — OPERATIONAL CHECK
CAUTION
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED DO NOT PRESS EITHER PUSHBUTTON

WITH TEST CLIPS CONNECTED TO THE
AIRCRAFT EICAS. THE CURRENT
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE APPLIED MAY DAMAGE THE UNIT.
TT-1000A or Turbine Temperature 7. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to
Equivalent Indicating System Test 700°C as displayed on the test set digital indicator.
Set
selected temperature +2°C and that the MGT label for
NOTE the digital readout is boxed.
Due to the complexity of the FADEC
system, it is considered normal if the ALTN 9. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the
message is displayed during the following green arc between the 11 and 12 o'clock positions and
checks, and for FADEC to revert to MAN. that the MGT label is outlined to show that this is the
most significant parameter.
1. Open the GEA and engine CONTROLS/FADEC

10. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to
circuit breakers.
show 729°C on the PSI.
2. Set the FUNCTION switch on the temperature 11. Verify that the power indicator needle turns yellow
indicating system test set to INDICATOR TEST and and is on the yellow arc past the 12 o'clock position.
disconnect the lugs on the terminal board (1TB1) in
the engine bay. 12. Check that the MGT tester digital readout
displays the PSI temperature +2°C.
3. Connect the black lead from the test set to the

13. Verify that the 5-minute takeoff timer is displayed.
green lug of the electrical and avionics harness.
Connect the red lead from the test set to the white lug
of the electrical and avionics harness.
700°C.
4. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, 15. Verify that the 5-minute takeoff timer turns off and
PFD, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, ADC, FAN/ that the needle returns to the green arc.
AVNCS, and LIGHTING/MISC circuit breakers.
NOTE
Use an external power unit, if available, to 17. Verify that the power indicator needle turns red, is
prevent the battery from being drained of its at about the 1 o' clock position on the red arc, the
5-minute timer is displayed, and that MGT EXCEED is
displayed in the CAS window after 10 seconds.
5. Connect external DC power to the helicopter.

18. Check that the MGT tester digital readout
displays the PSI temperature +2°C.
6. Check that the MGT digital readout indicates
approximately the indicated OAT temperature. 19. Return the TEMP ADJ knob to 700°C.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
20. Make sure that MGT exceedance data has been 36. Make sure that MGT exceedance data has been
recorded on the Exceedances & Chip History page recorded on the Exceedances & Chip History page
(paragraph 95-355). (paragraph 95-355).
21. Open the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC circuit 37. Close the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC circuit
breaker on the overhead CB panel. breaker on the overhead panel.
22. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is 38. Verify that the MGTA parameter changes to MGT.
visible in the PSI section and that ALTN DATA FAIL is
in the CAS window.
39. Set the engine start mode (Starter On discrete =
active; GND on pin 21 of starter relay (1K1) located on
23. Check that the MGT changes to MGTA and the DC power panel in the aft fuselage) and position the
tester digital readout displays the selected TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to show 900°C on the
temperature +2°C. PSI.
24. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the 40. Check that the amber MGT EXCEED caution is
green arc between the 11 and 12 o' clock positions. not displayed on the CAS window after 10 seconds.

26. Verify that the power indicator needle turns yellow

42. Check that the amber MGT EXCEED caution is
and is on the yellow arc past the 12 o' clock position.
displayed in the CAS window after 10 seconds.
27. Check that the tester digital readout displays the

selected temperature +2°C. 43. Return the TEMP ADJ knob to 700°C.
28. Verify that the 5-minute takeoff timer is displayed. 44. Verify that MGT exceedance data has been
recorded on the Exceedances & Chip History page
(paragraph 95-355).
700°C.
45. Erase the MGT exceedance displayed on the
30. Verify that the 5-minute takeoff timer turns off and
95-358).
that the needle returns to the green arc.
31. Position the TEMP ADJ knob on the test set to 46. Verify that the MGT EXCEED caution is
show 800°C on the PSI. extinguished from the CAS window.
32. Verify that the power indicator needle turns red, is 47. Verify that the START indication appears beside
at about the 1 o' clock position on the red arc, that the the MGT indication.
5-minute timer is displayed, and that MGT EXCEED is
displayed in the CAS window after 10 seconds. 48. Open the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC circuit
breaker on the overhead CB panel.
33. Check that the tester digital readout displays the
selected temperature +2°C. 49. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is
visible in the PSI section and that ALTN DATA FAIL is
34. Return the TEMP ADJ knob to 700°C. displayed in the CAS window.
35. Verify that the 5-minute takeoff timer turns off and 50. Open the GEA circuit breaker on the overhead
that the needle returns to the green arc. CB panel.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
51. Verify that the PSI digital readout shows a red X The two NG signals from the monopole speed sensor
for all parameters. are provided from the FADEC ECU via two separate
paths.
52. Disconnect the test set black lead from the green
lug of the electrical and avionics harness. Disconnect The primary NG data source input signal is provided
the test set red lead from the white lug of the electrical from the FADEC ECU to both integrated avionics units
and avionics harness. No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H), via an Arinc 429 data bus.
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
53. Reconnect the electrical and avionics harnesses (GIA 63H) then feed their respective Primary Flight
to the terminal board (1TB1). Make sure that the Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) via a
connection is tight and secure. high speed data bus (HSDB) to display the PSI
indication.
54. Close the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC and
GEA circuit breakers on the overhead CB panel. The alternate NG data source input signal is provided
from the FADEC ECU to the engine signal conditioner
(GSC 46), which then provides the signal to the
55. Verify all PSI parameters show valid values.
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H).
The NG signal is then fed to integrated avionics units
56. Erase any MGT exceedance displayed on the No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an RS 485 data bus.
Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
95-358). (GIA 63H) then feed their respective PFD and MFD via
a high speed data bus (HSDB).
Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication CSP An NG OAT LIMIT (white text) Crew Alerting System
21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear any (CAS) advisory message will display if the engine is
Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all NG limited due to OAT. Additional power inputs, with
Engine History from the FADEC ECU. the message displayed, will cause the rotor to droop.
58. Remove the external DC power from the NG exceedance recording (Table 95-45) is based on
helicopter. data from either FADEC ECU Arinc 429 data (primary
data) or from local analog input data (i.e., alternate
59. Return the helicopter to the standard data in the event ECU Arinc 429 primary data fails). A
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After summary of the exceedances shall be displayed on
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). the MFD upon subsequent power-up as long as
exceedance data remains in the NVM (i.e., unless
95-399. PSI — GAS PRODUCER (NG) DATA exceedance data is erased by authorized
INPUTS AND EXCEEDANCE maintenance personnel, a summary of the
MONITORING (S/N 54300 AND exceedances is displayed upon subsequent power-up
to indicate that maintenance action is required).
SUBSEQUENT)
The engine gas producer (NG) indication on the power For each exceedance event, the following parameters
parameter digital readout of the Power Situation shall be recorded in NVM by the display unit and the
Indicator (PSI) (Figure 95-149) displays NG speed in FADEC ECU:
percentage of rated RPM.
• Peak value
An NG monopole speed sensor (Figure 95-1) is
mounted on the engine gearbox and provides two • Duration
separate signals to the FADEC ECU. Signal No. 2 is
used as the primary NG data source input and signal
No. 1 is used as the alternate data source input. The • Time
primary NG signal will be passed through the FADEC
ECU, even when the ECU is not powered. • Date
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-45. GAS PRODUCER (NG) Exceedance Monitoring

NG% INDICATION EXCEEDANCE
NG EXCEED (amber text) CAS message
displayed and NG exceedance recorded
in display unit and FADEC ECU.
NG EXCEED (amber text) CAS message
displayed and NG exceedance recorded
in display unit and FADEC ECU.
95-00-00
Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99 10 DEC 2012 Rev. 35 Page 468A/468B
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 FADEC/ECU
1A50 GAS PROD N1 (NG)
1A50P2 1A50P1 MONOPOLE SENSOR
69 (–) ARINC 429 TRANSMIT (+) 40 A

1 1 1
68 (+) (PRIMARY DATA SOURCE) (–) 41 B
SPEED PICKUP
(+) 36 C
2 2
(–) 37 D

7730A1
1A50P2 7730A1P1 (GSC 46) 7730A1P1
(ALTERNATE N1 (NG) SPEED LO 77 30
2 29
DATA SOURCE) N1 (NG) SPEED HI 76 13 VFC
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT
3160S1 PUSH ON AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR
PUSH OFF
7320A1
ACTION
SWITCH 7320A1P1 (GEA 71H)
5 RS-485 1A
PFD (R-DU) 6 RS-485 1B
3160DS2
7 RS-485 2A
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS2P1 8 RS-485 2B
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 75 DIGITAL IN 2A (NG) (ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE) 2

ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H) NOTES
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) 1 PRIMARY DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR NG IS PROVIDED FROM FADEC/ECU (1A50) TO
17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7B FADEC INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1 (3140A1) AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
16 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7A FADEC (3140A2) VIA ARINC 429 DATA BUS.
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A 2 ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR NG IS PROVIDED TO INTEGRATED AVIONICS
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B UNIT NO. 1 (3140A1) AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 (3140A2) VIA FADEC
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A ECU (1A50), ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (7730A1) AND AIRFRAME AND ENGINE
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B SYSTEM PROCESSOR (7320A1).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0118_c01
Figure 95-1. PSI — NG Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
In addition to the exceedance limits provided in

Table 95-45, the NG EXCEED (amber text) message
will also be displayed and an NG exceedance recorded
immediately in the display unit and FADEC ECU when
NG exceeds the limits shown in Table 95-46.
Table 95-46. NG Limit Versus OAT Above 10,000 Feet Pressure Altitude
GAS PRODUCER RPM (NG) LIMIT
WHEN ABOVE 10,000 FT HP

MAXIMUM NG % RPM WITH OAT IS AS FOLLOWS
OAT °C -40 -39 -38 -37 -36 -35 -34 -33 -32 -31 -30
MAX NG % 99.0 99.2 99.4 99.6 99.8 100.0 100.2 100.4 100.6 100.8 101.1
95-400. NG (N1) MAGNETIC PICKUP — data source input. The primary NG signal will be
DESCRIPTION passed through the FADEC ECU, even when the ECU
is not powered.
The N1 speed pickup consists of a magnetic sensor
mounted in the engine gearbox near the centrifugal The coil between pins A and B (signal No. 1) provides
breather idler gear, which is part of the gas producer the primary input for use by the FADEC/ECU.
geartrain. As the gears pass by the sensor, a change in
the magnetic field is converted into an alternating The NG scale indication in relation to the input signal
voltage. The frequency of the alternating voltage from the N1 pickup is shown in the Table 95-47.
increases as the gear RPM increases.
95-401. NG (N1) MAGNETIC PICKUP — REMOVAL/
The pickup has two coils that output the same signal. INSTALLATION
The coil between pins C and D (signal No. 2) is used Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series Operation
as the primary NG data source input for the NG and Maintenance Manual for the removal and
indication and signal No. 1 is used as the alternate installation of the NG (N1) pickup.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-47. NG Scale Indication Versus Input Signal

5 893 0.6
10 1785 1.2
20 3670 2.4
30 5355 3.6
50 8925 6.0
60 10,710 7.2
63 11,246 7.6
70 12,495 8.4
80 14,280 9.6
90 16,065 10.8
100 17,850 12.0
105 18,743 12.6
105.6 18,850 12.6
106 18,921 12.7
107 19,099 13.0
110 19,635 13.2
120 21,420 14.4
130 23,205 15.6
95-402. PSI — GAS PRODUCER (NG) —

NOTE
OPERATIONAL CHECK
Due to the complexity of the FADEC
system, it is considered normal if the ALTN
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED message is displayed during the following
checks and for FADEC to revert to MAN.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 1. Disconnect the (NG) GAS PROD MAG PICKUP

in the engine compartment. Connect the audio
oscillator; positive to pins A and C, negative to pins B
Oscillator
and D of Rolls-Royce provided connector.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, 16. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the
PF, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, ADC, and FAN/ green arc between the 10 and 11 o'clock positions.
17. Erase the NG exceedance displayed on the
NOTE
95-358).
prevent the battery from being drained of its 18. Verify that the NG EXCEED caution is
stored electrical power. extinguished from the CAS window.

19. Open the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC circuit
4. Check that the gas producer rotation speed (NG)
digital readout reads 0% RPM.
20. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is
visible in the PSI section.
5. Set wave form on the audio oscillator to sine,
amplitude to 12.0 V, peak to peak, and frequency to 21. Check that the NG changes to NGA and the
17,850 Hz. digital readout displays the selected 100 ±0.6% NG
and that the legend remains boxed.
6. Check that the gas producer rotation speed
indicator (NG) reads 100 ±0.6% RPM. 22. Set the wave form on the audio oscillator to sine
and the frequency to 18,921 Hz.
7. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the
green arc between 10 and 11 o'clock position and that 23. Check that the gas producer rotation speed
the NG label is outlined to show that this is the most indicator (NGA) reads 106 ±0.6% RPM.
significant parameter.
24. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the
8. Set wave form on the audio oscillator to sine and red arc past the 12 o'clock position.
the frequency to 18,921 Hz.
25. Maintain the frequency for 10 seconds.
9. Check that the gas producer rotation speed
indicator (NG) reads 106 ±0.6% RPM.
26. Verify that the amber NG EXCEED caution
message is displayed in the CAS window after the
10. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the 10 seconds have elapsed.
red arc past the 12 o'clock position.
27. Decrease the amplitude 12.0 V, peak to peak,
11. Maintain the frequency for 10 seconds. and frequency to 17,850 Hz.
12. Verify that the amber NG EXCEED caution 28. Verify that the NG exceedance was recorded on
message is displayed in the CAS window after the the Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
10 seconds have elapsed. 95-353).
13. Decrease the amplitude 12.0 V, peak to peak, 29. Check that the gas producer rotation speed
and frequency to 17,850 Hz. indicator (NGA) reads 100 ±0.6% RPM.
14. Verify that the NG exceedance was recorded on 30. Verify that the power indicator needle is on the
the Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph green arc between the 10 and 11 o'clock positions.
95-353).
31. Erase the NG exceedance displayed on the
15. Check that the gas producer rotation speed Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
indicator (NG) reads 100 ±0.6% RPM. 95-358).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
32. Verify that the NG EXCEED caution is 95-403. PSI — POWER TURBINE (NP)
extinguished from the CAS window. Verify that the DATA INPUTS AND EXCEEDANCE
power indicator needle is on the green arc between the MONITORING (S/N 54300 AND
10 and 11 o’clock positions. SUBSEQUENT)
33. Disconnect the audio oscillator from pins C and D The engine power turbine (NP) indication on the Power
of the Rolls-Royce provided connector while leaving it Situation Indicator (PSI) (Figure 95-149) is displayed
connected to pins A and B. via a NP indicator pointer. A digital readout of NP
speed is not provided.
visible in the PSI section and the white ALTN DATA An NP monopole speed sensor (Figure 95-156) is
FAIL advisory is displayed on the CAS window. mounted on the engine gearbox and provides two
separate signals to the FADEC ECU. One signal is
35. Disconnect the audio oscillator and reconnect the used as the primary NP data source input and the
(NG) GAS PROD MAG PICKUP in the engine second signal is used as the alternate data source
compartment. Make sure that all connections are tight input. The primary NP signal will be passed through the
and secure. FADEC ECU, even when the ECU is not powered.
36. Erase any NG exceedances displayed on the The two NP signals from the monopole speed sensor
Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph 95-358). are provided from the FADEC ECU via two separate
paths.
The primary NP data source input signal is provided
Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication CSP
from the FADEC ECU to both integrated avionics units
21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear any
No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an Arinc 429 data bus.
Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No .2
(GIA 63H) then feed their respective Primary Flight
Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) via a
38. Remove the external DC power from the High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) to display the PSI
helicopter. indication.
39. Return the helicopter to the standard The alternate NP data source input signal is provided
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After from the FADEC ECU to the engine signal conditioner
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). (GSC 46), which then provides the signal to the
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H). The
NG signal is then fed to integrated avionics units No. 1
and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an RS 485 data bus. The
integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
(GIA 63H),then feed their respective PFD and MFD via
a high speed data bus (HSDB).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
1A50 POWER TURBINE N2 (NP)
1A50P2 1A50P1 MONOPOLE SENSOR
69 (–) ARINC 429 TRANSMIT (+) 32 A

1 1 1
68 (+) (PRIMARY DATA SOURCE) (–) 33 B
SPEED PICKUP
(+) 24 D
2 2
(–) 25 E

7730A1
1A50P2 7730A1P1 (GSC 46) 7730A1P1
(ALTERNATE N2 (NP) SPEED LO 75 33
2 32
DATA SOURCE) N2 (NP) SPEED HI 74 16 VFC
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT
3160S1 PUSH ON AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR
PUSH OFF
7320A1
ACTION
SWITCH 7320A1P1 (GEA 71H)
5 RS-485 1A
PFD (R-DU) 6 RS-485 1B
3160DS2
7 RS-485 2A
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS2P1 8 RS-485 2B
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 76 DIGITAL IN 2A (NP) (ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE) 2

ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) 1 PRIMARY DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR NP IS PROVIDED FROM FADEC/ECU (1A50) TO
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A 2 ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR NP IS PROVIDED TO INTEGRATED AVIONICS
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B UNIT NO. 1 (3140A1) AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 (3140A2) VIA FADEC ECU
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A (1A50), ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER (7730A1) AND AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B PROCESSOR (7320A1).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0119_c01
Figure 95-156. PSI — NP Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
unless exceedance data is erased by authorized

NOTE maintenance personnel, a summary of the
As the NP exceedance recording exceedances is displayed upon subsequent power-up
parameters shown in Table 95-48 differ to indicate that maintenance action is required). For
from the Rolls-Royce NP exceedance each exceedance event, the following parameters
parameters recorded by the FADEC ECU, shall be recorded in NVM by the display unit and the
operators are to use the FADEC ECU FADEC ECU:
recorded values for maintenance actions.
• Peak value
NP exceedance recording (Table 95-48) is based on
data from either the FADEC ECU Arinc 429 data • Duration
(primary data) or from local analog input data (i.e.,
alternate data in the event ECU Arinc 429 primary data
fails). A summary of the exceedances shall be • Time
displayed on the MFD upon subsequent power-up as
long as exceedance data remains in the NVM (i.e., • Date
Table 95-48. Power Turbine (NP) Exceedance Monitoring
NP% INDICATION EXCEEDANCE

NP EXCEED (amber text) CAS
message displayed and NP
unit and FADEC ECU.

NP EXCEED (amber text) CAS
message displayed and NP
unit and FADEC ECU.
95-404. NP (N2) SPEED PICKUP — DESCRIPTION will be passed through the FADEC ECU, even when
the ECU is not powered.
The NP (N2) speed pickup is a magnetic sensor
mounted in the engine gearbox near the power turbine The coil between pins A and B (signal No. 1) provides
shaft spanner nut. As the slots in the nut pass by the the primary input for use by the FADEC/ECU.
sensor, a change in the magnetic field is converted
into alternating voltage. The frequency of the The NP indication in relation to the input signal from
alternating voltage increases as the RPM of the nut the NP (N2) pickup is shown in Table 95-49.
increases.
95-405. NP (N2) MAGNETIC PICKUP — REMOVAL/
The pickup has two coils that each provide a separate INSTALLATION
output signal. The coil between pins C and pin D
(signal No. 2) is used as the primary NP data source Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Series Operation
input for the NP indication and signal No. 1 is used as and Maintenance Manual for the removal and
the alternate data source input. The primary NP signal installation of the NP (N2) pickup.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-49. NP Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input

0 0 0.0
20 2146 2.4
40 4292 4.8
60 6437 7.2
80 8583 9.6
99 10,622 11.9
100 10,729 12.0
120 12,875 14.4
140 15,021 16.8

160 17,166 19.2
95-406. PSI — POWER TURBINE RPM NP (N2) — 4. Check that the power turbine speed (NP) digital
OPERATIONAL CHECK readout reads 0% RPM on the dual tachometer.
5. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is not

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED visible in the PSI section.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 6. Set the wave form on the audio oscillator to sine,
with a frequency of 2146 Hz.
Oscillator 7. Check that the power turbine speed (NP)
indication needle is on the yellow arc at a 0° angle on
1. Disconnect NP (N2) – POWER TURBINE the scale.
PICKUP in the engine compartment. Connect the
audio oscillator; positive to pins A and D and negative 8. Increase the frequency to 9443 Hz.
to pins B and E of the Rolls-Royce provided connector.
9. Check that the power turbine speed (NP)
2. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, indication needle is on the green arc at a 60° angle
PFD, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, ADC, and FAN/ (past the first red tick mark).
10. Increase the frequency to 10,729 Hz.
NOTE
11. Check that the power turbine speed (NP)
indication needle is on the green arc at a 90° angle (on
the white tick mark).
3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter. 12. Increase the frequency to 10,955 Hz.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
13. Check that the power turbine speed (NP) 28. Verify that the power turbine speed (NP)
indication needle is on the green arc at an indication needle is on the yellow arc at a 30° angle.
approximately 95° angle (on the lower red tick mark).
29. Decrease the frequency to 7,339 ±107 Hz.
14. Increase the frequency to 11,481 Hz and hold for
at least 15 seconds. 30. Verify that the power turbine speed (NP)
indication needle is at the yellow tick mark on the dual
15. Check that the power turbine speed (NP) tachometer section.
indication needle is at a 115° angle (on the upper red
tick mark). 31. Decrease the frequency to zero on the audio
oscillator.
16. Verify that the amber NP EXCEED caution
message is displayed in the CAS window after 32. Verify the power turbine speed (NP) indication
15 seconds have elapsed since applying the needle is displayed at a 0° angle on the dual
frequency. tachometer scale.
17. Verify that the NP exceedance was recorded on 33. Erase any exceedances displayed on the
the Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph Exceedances & Chip History page (paragraph
95-353). 95-358).
18. Reduce the frequency to 10,729 Hz and verify 34. With reference to the Rolls-Royce 250-C47B
that the power turbine speed (NP) indication needle is Operation and Maintenance Manual, Publication CSP
on the green arc at a 90° angle (on the white tick 21001, install the maintenance terminal and clear any
mark) and the NP EXCEED caution is extinguished on Last Engine Run faults, Accumulated faults, and all
the CAS window. Engine History from the FADEC ECU.
19. Increase the frequency to 12,875 Hz. 35. Remove the external DC power from the
helicopter.
20. Verify that the amber NP EXCEED caution
message is immediately displayed in the CAS window. 36. Disconnect the audio oscillators and reconnect
NP (N2) – ENG 1 PICKUP in the engine compartment.
21. Check that the power turbine speed (NP) Make sure that all connections are tight and secure.
indication needle is in the red arc at full scale.
22. Decrease the frequency to zero on the audio configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
oscillator. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
23. Verify that the NP exceedance was recorded on 95-407. PSI — MAIN ROTOR (NR) DATA
the Exceedances & Chip History page. INPUTS AND EXCEEDANCE
MONITORING (S/N 54300 AND
24. Open the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC circuit SUBSEQUENT)
The main rotor (NR) indication is provided within the
dual tachometer section of the Power Situation
Indicator (PSI) (Figure 95-149). The NR digital readout
displays NR speed in percentage of rated RPM.
26. Check that the power turbine speed (NP) An NR monopole speed sensor (Figure 95-157) is
indication needle is on the yellow arc at a 0° angle on mounted on the main transmission and provides two
the scale. separate signals. One signal is provided to the FADEC
ECU and is used as the primary NR data source. The
27. Increase the frequency to 10,729 ±107 Hz. second signal is provided to the engine signal
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
conditioner (GSC 46) and is used as the alternate data 95-408. NR MONOPOLE SENSOR —
source. DESCRIPTION
The primary NR data source input signal is provided

from the FADEC ECU to both integrated avionics units The NR speed pickup is a magnetic sensor mounted
No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H), via an Arinc 429 data bus. on the transmission lower case. As the gear teeth of
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 the spiral bevel gear pass by the sensor, the change in
(GIA 63H) then feed their respective Primary Flight the magnetic field is converted into alternating voltage.
Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) via a The frequency of the alternating voltage increases as
High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) to display the PSI the gear RPM increases.
indication.
The alternate NR data source input signal is provided The pickup has three coils that output the same signal.
from the engine signal conditioner (GSC 46) to the The coil between pins 1 and 2 provides the alternate
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H). data source input for the NR indication. The coil
The NR signal is then fed to integrated avionics units between pins 3 and 4 provides the primary input to the
No. 1 and No. 2 (GIA 63H) via an RS 485 data bus. FADEC/ECU. The coil between pins 5 and 6 is not
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 used.
(GIA 63H) then feed their respective PFD and MFD via
an HSDB.
The NR indication is in proportion to the frequency
In regards to exceedance monitoring, NR input from the NR monopole sensor as shown in
exceedances are not recorded by the display units. Table 95-50.
Table 95-50. NR Scale Indication Versus Frequency Input

(% RPM) (HZ) (PEAK TO PEAK)
0 0 0.0
20 400 3.0
40 800 6.0
60 1200 9.0
80 1600 12.0
85 1700 12.8
100 2000 15.0
107 2140 16.1
120 2400 18.0
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
1A50
1A50P2
NR MONOPOLE SENSOR
69 (–) 1B8
ARINC 429 TRANSMIT 1B8P1
68 (+)
29 (–) 6 ROTOR SPEED LOW
ROTOR SPEED (PRIMARY DATA SOURCE) 1
30 (+)
5 ROTOR SPEED HIGH
3 ROTOR SPEED HIGH

1
4 ROTOR SPEED LOW
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR 2 ROTOR SPEED LOW

7320A1 2
REVERSIONARY 1 ROTOR SPEED HIGH
MODE SELECT 7320A1P1 (GEA 71H)
3160S1 PUSH ON
PUSH OFF 5 RS-485 1A
ACTION ENGINE SIGNAL CONDITIONER
6 RS-485 1B
SWITCH 7730A1
7730A1P1 (GSC 46) 7730A1P1
10
PFD (R-DU) 26
7 RS-485 2A 27 VFC
3160DS2
8 RS-485 2B
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS2P1
74 (ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE) DIGITAL IN 1A (NR) 2
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) 1 PRIMARY DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR NR IS PROVIDED FROM FADEC/ECU (1A50) TO
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A 2 ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE INPUT FOR NR IS PROVIDED TO INTEGRATED AVIONICS
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B UNIT NO. 1 (3140A1) AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 (3140A2) VIA ENGINE
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A SIGNAL CONDITIONER (7730A1) AND AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B (7320A1).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0114_c01
Figure 95-157. PSI — NR Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-409. NR MONOPOLE SENSOR — REMOVAL

CAUTION
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. ON ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR (1B8P1)
AND ON THE NR MONOPOLE SENSOR
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
(1B8).
6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the electrical
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs connector (1B8P1) (3) and to the NR monopole sensor
(1B8) (2).
WARNING
CAUTION

ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE
TRANSMISSION TO PREVENT FOREIGN
OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE
TRANSMISSION.
NOTE
of the main transmission (4).
maintenance.
95-410. NR MONOPOLE SENSOR —
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power INSTALLATION
2. Remove the fairing to gain access to the NR MATERIALS REQUIRED

monopole sensor (1B8) in the transmission
compartment. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Figure 95-158) from the NR monopole sensor (1B8) C-052 Contact Enhancer
(2).
C-405 Lockwire
4. Remove the lockwire from the NR monopole
sensor (1B8) (2).
WARNING
5. Remove the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2) and
the packing (1) from the main transmission (4).


95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1. Packing
2. NR monopole sensor (1B8)
4 4. Main transmission
3
LOCKWIRE (C-405)
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
VIEW B (8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-158. NR Monopole Sensor — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2. Gain access to the transmission compartment.

NOTE
On the aft right side of the transmission, locate the
transmission port for the NR monopole sensor. A headset is required to be connected at
the pilot jack for this test
plugs. 1. Disconnect the NR monopole sensor (1B8) in the
transmission compartment. Connect the audio
oscillator; positive to pins 1 and 3, and negative to pins
4. Install the packing (1, Figure 95-158) on the NR
2 and 4 on electrical connector (1B8P1).
monopole sensor (1B8) (2).

5. Install the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2) into the
PFD, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, ADC, and FAN/
transmission port. Torque the NR monopole
AVNCS circuit breakers on the overhead CB panel.
sensor T .
6. Safety the NR monopole sensor with lockwire NOTE

(C-405).
NOTE stored electrical power.
It is recommended to apply contact 3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
4. Check that the rotor RPM indication needle is at
7. Connect the electrical connector (1B8P1) (3) to 0% NR.
the NR monopole sensor (1B8) (2).
5. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is not
CAUTION 6. Set the audio oscillator to sine wave form and

amplitude 12.0 V, peak to peak, and a frequency of
1900 Hz. In normal operation, the NR needle will be
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE just below the 9 o'clock position, the NR will show
HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE 95 ±1.0% NR on the EIS dual tachometer section and
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. the RPM audio will sound. Cancel the audio warning
and decrease the frequency to 420 +5 Hz on the audio
oscillator, 21 ±1.0% NR on the EIS dual tachometer
and make sure the NR/NP indication is operational
section, and the NR needle is at the 6 o'clock position.
and within limits and that there are no oil leaks.
7. Increase frequency in normal operation until the
RPM warning light extinguishes and the aural warning
ceases; verify that the frequency reads 1,900 +5 Hz on
the audio oscillator, and 95 ±1.0% NR on the EIS dual
tachometer section.
95-411. PSI — ROTOR RPM (NR) —
OPERATIONAL CHECK
8. Decrease frequency slowly until RPM pushbutton
annunciator illuminates; verify that the frequency
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED reads 1,900 Hz +5 Hz on the audio oscillator, and
95 +1.0% NR on the EIS dual tachometer section.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 9. Verify the aural warning sounds with the RPM
pushbutton annunciator. Press the RPM pushbutton
annunciator (PUSH TO MUTE) and verify that the
Oscillator
aural warning ceases.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
10. Decrease frequency below 400 Hz on the audio 21. Verify that the boxed amber ALTN message is
oscillator until the RPM warning light extinguishes. visible in the PSI section.
11. Set the audio oscillator to 420 Hz. Check that the 22. Check that the rotor RPM needle indicates 0%
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 21 ±1.0% NR, the NRA.
indication needle is on the yellow arc at a 0° angle on
the scale, and the RPM warning pushbutton
annunciator is illuminated. 23. In normal operation, increase frequency and
verify that the RPM PBA illuminates at 21 ±1.0% NRA.
12. Increase the frequency and verify that the audio
warning sounds at 80 +1.0% NR on the EIS dual 24. Continue to increase the frequency and verify
tachometer section. that when the audio warning starts, the frequency
reads 1610 +5 Hz on the audio oscillator and
13. Increase frequency to 1760 Hz. Check that the 80 ±1.0% NRA is shown on the EIS dual tachometer
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 88 ±1.0% NR, the section.
indication needle is on the green arc at a 60° angle
(past the first red tick mark), and the RPM warning 25. Increase frequency and note when the RPM
pushbutton annunciator is extinguished and that the pushbutton annunciator extinguishes and the audio
aural warnings cease. warning ceases; verify that the frequency reads 1,900
+5 Hz on the audio oscillator and that 95 ±1.0% NRA is
14. Increase frequency to 2000 Hz. Check that the shown on EIS dual tachometer section.
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 100 ±1.0% NR, the
indication needle is on the green arc at a 90° angle (on 26. Decrease frequency slowly and note when the
the white tick mark), and the RPM warning PBA is RPM pushbutton annunciator illuminates; verify that
extinguished. the frequency reads 1900 Hz +5 Hz on the audio
oscillator, 95 +1.0% NRA on the EIS dual tachometer
15. Increase frequency to 2045 Hz. Check that the page.
indication needle is on the green arc at an
27. Verify the aural warning sounds. Press the RPM
approximately 95° angle, and the RPM warning PBA is
pushbutton annunciator (PUSH TO MUTE) to silence
extinguished.
the aural alert.
16. Increase frequency to 2140 Hz. Check that the

rotor RPM digital readout indicates 107 ±1.0% NR, the 28. Decrease frequency below 400 Hz on the audio
indication needle is on the green/gray arc at a 115° oscillator until the RPM warning light extinguishes.
angle (on the upper red tick mark), and the RPM
warning pushbutton annunciator is extinguished. 29. Set the audio oscillator to 420 Hz. Check that the
17. Increase frequency to 2400 Hz. Check that the indication needle is on the yellow arc at a 0° angle on
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 120 ±1.0% NR, the the scale, and the RPM warning pushbutton
indication needle is in the red arc at full scale, and that annunciator is illuminated.
the RPM warning pushbutton annunciator is
illuminated. 30. Increase the frequency and verify that the audio
warning sounds at 80 +1.0% NR on the EIS dual
18. Decrease the frequency slowly to zero on the tachometer section.
audio oscillator.
19. Verify the RPM audio alert is audible between 95 rotor RPM digital readout indicates 88 ±1.0% NR, the
and 68%. indication needle is on the green arc at a 60° angle
(past the first red tick mark), and the RPM warning
20. Open the ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC circuit pushbutton annunciator is extinguished and the aural
breaker on the overhead CB panel. warnings cease.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
32. Increase frequency to 2000 Hz. Check that the Indicating System (EIS) strip of the Multi-Function
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 100 ±1.0% NR, the Display (MFD) in normal mode.
indication needle is on the green arc at a 90° angle (on
the white tick mark), and the RPM warning pushbutton
The engine oil pressure and temperature indication is
annunciator is extinguished.
displayed using vertical scales with an accompanying
digital readout.
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 102 ±1.0% NR, the Engine oil pressure is displayed on the left side in PSI
indication needle is on the green arc at an and engine oil temperature is displayed on the right
approximately 95° angle, and the RPM warning
side in degrees Celsius (°C).
pushbutton annunciator is extinguished.
Each vertical scale is indicated by a white, un-filled

34. Increase frequency to 2140 Hz. Check that the rectangle. A pointer bar within the vertical scale
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 107 ±1.0% NR, the extends from the base of the vertical scale to the
indication needle is on the green/gray arc at a 115° parameter value indication. The pointer bar is topped
angle (on the upper red tick mark), and the RPM with a trapezoidal pointer such that the flat top of the
warning pushbutton annunciator is extinguished.
trapezoid indicates the parameter value. The pointer
bar is shown in a single color (red, yellow, green, or
35. Increase frequency to 2400 Hz. Check that the gray) based on the parameter indication in relation to
rotor RPM digital readout indicates 120 ±1.0% NR, the the specified operating limitations. When "pegged" at
indication needle is in the red arc at full scale, and that the bottom of the scale, the trapezoid pointer will
the RPM warning pushbutton annunciator is remain visible. The pointer bar will be suppressed
illuminated. when the parameter data is missing or invalid.
36. Decrease the frequency slowly to zero on the Thin horizontal reference lines are also provided and
audio oscillator. also coincide with the limitations for the parameter.
During normal operation, the pointer bar will be within
the range of the horizontal reference lines.
37. Verify the RPM audio alert is audible between 95
and 68%.
A digital readout is also provided at the bottom of each
vertical scale. The color of the digital readout will
38. Remove the external DC power from the match the color of the pointer bar. For example, when
helicopter. a parameter is in the green portion of the scale, the
pointer bar and digital readout are both shown in
39. Disconnect the audio oscillators and reconnect green.
the NR (1B8P1) monopole sensor connector in the
transmission compartment. Make sure that all The engine oil temperature and pressure indications
connections are tight and secure. are also displayed as a digital readout on the EIS
display of the MFD or Primary Flight Display (PFD) in
reversionary mode.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). The engine oil pressure signal is provided by a
transducer mounted on the forward engine firewall
(Figure 95-160). The engine oil temperature input
95-412. EIS — ENGINE OIL PRESSURE AND
signal is provided by a thermobulb installed on the
TEMPERATURE INDICATION engine oil tank. These signals are sent to the airframe
and engine system processor (GEA 71H), which
The engine oil pressure and temperature indications provides the information to both integrated avionics
(Figure 95-159) are displayed via the Engine units (GIA 63H) and then to the MFD and PFD.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIGITAL
READOUT
MFD EIS STRIP MFD OR PFD IN

INDICATION REVERSIONARY
MODE
TRANSIENT
REFERENCE VERTICAL
TRIANGLE SCALE
HORIZONTAL
REFERENCE
LINES
POINTER
BAR
DIGITAL
READOUT
407gc_MM_95_0149
Figure 95-159. EIS — Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication — Description (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
58 24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
MODE SELECT 1
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1)
SIGNAL GROUND 38
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 7320A1 ENGINE OIL TEMP BULB (EOT)
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 1RT1
7320A1P1 (GEA 71H) 7320A1P1
5 RS-485 1A ANALOG IN 8 HI (EOT) 66 A
6 RS-485 1B ANALOG IN 7 HI (EOT) 64
ANALOG IN 7 LO (EOT) 65 B
ANALOG IN 8 LO (EOT) 67
TRANSDUCER LO (GND) 11
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER (EOP)
1G5
1G5P1
+5 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER 15 A 5 VDC EXCITATION
TRANSDUCER LO (GROUND) 12 D EXCITATION GROUND
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT ANALOG IN 10 HI (EOP) 74 B PRESS SIGNAL HI
3160S1 ANALOG IN 10 LO (EOP) 75 C PRESS SIGNAL LO
PUSH ON
ACTION 8 RS-485 2B
SWITCH
PFD (R-DU)
3160DS2
(GDU 1040H) 3160DS2P1
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER (EOP)
REVERSIONARY
58 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 1G5
MODE SELECT 1 1G5P1
3140A2 RESTRICTOR
HI
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H) B
GROUND
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1) D
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) LO R R'
C
10 VDC R R'
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B TRANSMISSION
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A ENGINE
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B FIREWALL
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0112_c01
Figure 95-160. Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-413. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE AND

TEMPERATURE INDICATION SYSTEM —
RANGE MARKINGS
The range marking for the engine oil pressure

indication is shown in Table 95-51. The range marking
for the engine oil temperature is shown in Table 95-52.
Table 95-51. Engine Oil Pressure PSI Indication — Range Marking
Red 50 Minimum
Yellow 50 to 90 Operation below 79% NG RPM
Green 90 to 115 Continuous Operation, NG RPM

between 79 and 94%
Green 115 to 130 Continuous Operation NG RPM

greater than 94%
Red 130 Maximum
Red Triangle 200 Maximum Cold Start
Table 95-52. Engine Oil Temperature °C Indication — Range Marking
Yellow Less than 0°C
Green 0 to 107 Continuous Operation
Red 107 Maximum
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-414. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER — excitation voltage of 5 VDC from the airframe and
DESCRIPTION engine system processor (GEA 71H). The engine oil
pressure port on the engine gearbox outputs a specific
The engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) is mounted oil pressure that changes the strain gauge bridge in
in the transmission compartment on the right side of the transducer. This in turn changes the signal sent to
the forward firewall. The transducer has a pressure the airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H).
diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge.
The engine oil pressure indicator shows the oil
The strain gauge circuit of the engine oil pressure pressure in PSI in relation to the input signal from the
transducer (1G5) (Figure 95-160) receives an transducer as shown in Table 95-53.
Table 95-53. ENG OIL PSI Indication Versus Input Signal
INPUT SIGNAL FROM

INDICATION INDICATION TOLERANCE
TRANSDUCER
(PSI) (PSI)
(MV X EXCITATION V)
0 0.00 ±12.5
25 1.00 ±5.0
50 2.00 ±5.0
60 2.40 ±5.0
70 2.80 ±5.0
80 3.20 ±5.0
90 3.60 ±5.0
100 4.00 ±5.0
110 4.40 ±5.0
115 4.60 ±5.0
120 4.80 ±5.0
130 5.20 ±5.0
140 5.60 ±5.0
150 6.00 ±5.0
175 7.00 ±5.0
200 8.00 ±5.0
225 9.00 ±5.0
250 10.00 ±12.5
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-415. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BULB — The resistive type temperature bulb gives a specific
DESCRIPTION resistance value to the airframe and engine system
processor (GEA 71H). As the temperature of the oil in
the engine oil tank changes, the resistance of the
The engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) is installed on temperature bulb changes. The engine oil temperature
the engine oil tank. The temperature bulb is in contact indication displays the temperature in relation to the
with the oil in the tank. The temperature bulb is a resistance value of the temperature bulb, as shown in
resistive bulb. Table 95-54.
Table 95-54. Engine Oil Temperature Versus Resistance
INDICATION RESISTANCE INDICATION TOLERANCE

(°C) (OHMS) (°C)
0 90.38 ±3
10 93.80 ±3
20 97.31 ±3
30 100.91 ±3
40 104.60 ±3
50 108.39 ±3
60 112.28 ±3
70 116.27 ±3
80 120.36 ±3
90 124.55 ±3
100 128.85 ±3
107 131.94 ±3
110 133.26 ±3
120 137.78 ±3
130 142.40 ±3
140 147.11 ±3
150 151.91 ±3
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-416. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BULB — O I L T A N K TO P R E V E N T F O R E I G N

REMOVAL OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE.

MATERIALS REQUIRED of the engine oil tank (4) and the engine oil
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 8. Remove the packing (1) from the engine oil
C-428 Caps and/or Plugs temperature bulb (1RT1) (2). Discard the packing.
95-417. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BULB —

WARNING INSTALLATION
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MATERIALS REQUIRED

NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NOTE
C-405 Lockwire
maintenance.
WARNING
2. Remove the cowling to gain access to the oil
tank.
3. Open the drain valve and drain the oil from the oil
tank. Put a suitable container under the drain line.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT1P1) (3, from the helicopter.
Figure 95-161) from the engine oil temperature bulb
(1RT1) (2).
5. Remove the lockwire from the engine oil CAUTION

temperature bulb.
6. Remove the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) USE THE SAME OIL AS THE OIL IN THE
(2) from the engine oil tank (4). E N G I N E T O L U B R I C AT E THE
OBEY THIS PRECAUTION MAY RESULT
CAUTION
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428) 2. Lubricate the packing (1, Figure 95-161) with
ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE ENGINE engine oil.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1 1. Packing
2. Engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1)
4. Engine oil tank
30 TO 40 IN-LBS
(3.4 TO 4.5 Nm)
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407_MM_95_0058_c01+
Figure 95-161. Engine Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Remove the previously installed caps and/or 2. Place the temperature bulb in a Dri-Block
plugs. calibrator or equivalent.
4. Install the packing (1) on the engine oil 3. Attach the digital voltmeter to the temperature
temperature bulb (1RT1) (2). bulb. Set the voltmeter to read the resistance value in
a range as set out in Table 95-54.
5. Install the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) (2)
in the port on the aft left side of the engine oil tank (4). 4. Adjust the temperature of the Dri-Block calibrator
Make sure that the temperature bulb is correctly to a value per Table 95-54.
installed and torqued T .
5. Make sure the voltmeter display reads the
6. Safety the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) (2) matching resistance, as shown in Table 95-54, for the
with lockwire (C-405). temperature value that was set.
7. Connect the electrical connector (1RT1P1) (3) to 6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for the other values in
the engine oil temperature bulb (1RT1) (2). Make sure Table 95-54.
that the electrical connector is correctly installed and
tightened.
7. Remove the temperature bulb from the Dri-Block
calibrator.
8. Safety the electrical connector (1RT1P1) (3) with
lockwire (C-405).
8. Install the oil temperature bulb (paragraph
95-417).
CAUTION 95-419. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE —

OPERATIONAL CHECK
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE 1. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS,
HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE PFD, ADC, and FAN/AVNCS circuit breakers.
9. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2, Section 2) NOTE

and make sure the engine oil temperature indication is
operational and within limits and that there are no oil Use an external power unit, if available, to
leaks. prevent the battery from being drained of its
3. Select the Engine page on the Multi-Function
Display (MFD).
95-418. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE BULB —
FUNCTIONAL CHECK
4. Make sure that the ENG T engine oil temperature
pointer bar indicates approximately the ambient
temperature.
5. Make sure that the ENG T digital readout shows

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE the same temperature as the indicated OAT
temperature within ±4°.
TK-3531 or Equivalent Dri-Block Calibrator
6. Make sure that the indication and value does not
1. Remove the oil temperature bulb (paragraph differ between the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
95-416). MFD when the DU BACKUP switch is pressed.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

helicopter.
CAUTION
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428)
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER AND TEE
95-420. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER — FITTING TO PREVENT FOREIGN
REMOVAL OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE.
7. Install caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the open

l
MATERIALS REQUIRED fittings of the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) (2)
and the tee fitting (4).
95-421. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER —
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
INSTALLATION
MATERIALS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR C-405 Lockwire
WARNING
NOTE
necessary to perform the required OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
maintenance. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
2. Gain access to the forward right side of the from the helicopter.
firewall at FS 150.00.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1G5P1)

(1, Figure 95-162) from the engine oil pressure CAUTION
4. Remove the lockwire from the engine oil pressure E N G I N E T O L U B R I C AT E THE
transducer (1G5) (2). PREFORMED PACKING. FAILURE TO
F O L L O W T H I S P R E C A U T I O N M AY
5. Remove the oil pressure transducer (1G5) (2) RESULT IN THE CONTAMINATION OF
from the tee fitting (4). THE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
6. Remove the packing (3) from the oil pressure 2. Lubricate the packing (3, Figure 95-162) with
transducer (1G5) (2). engine oil.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
1. Electrical connector (1G5P1)

5 2. Engine oil pressure transducer (1G5)
3. Packing
4. Tee fitting
4 5. Cap
LOCKWIRE (C-405)
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
FIREWALL
1
FS 150.00
DETAIL A
Figure 95-162. Engine Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Remove the previously installed caps and/or 1. Disconnect the engine oil pressure line at the
plugs. engine gearbox.
4. Install the packing (3) on the engine oil pressure

CAUTION
5. Install the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5)
(2) on the tee fitting (4). Make sure that the engine oil
pressure transducer is correctly installed and MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE
tightened. TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME
6. Safety the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF YOU DO NOT
(2) to the tee fitting (4) with lockwire (C-405). USE THE SAME TYPE OF OIL, YOU WILL
7. Connect the electrical connector (1G5P1) (1) to SYSTEM.
the engine oil pressure transducer (1G5) (2).
2. Attach the pressure tester to the engine oil
8. Bleed the engine oil pressure transducer pressure line.
(paragraph 95-422).
3. Loosen the tee fitting cap (5, Figure 95-162)
installed on the forward firewall aft of the engine oil
CAUTION pressure transducer (1G5) (2).
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE 4. Apply pressure slowly to fill the line with oil.
HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE Continue to force oil into the line until a steady flow
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. without air bubbles comes out the tee fitting (4) cap
port.
and make sure the engine oil pressure indication is
operational and within limits and that there are no oil 5. When a steady flow without air bubbles comes
leaks. out the tee fitting (4) cap port, tighten the tee fitting
cap (5).
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After 6. Release the pressure in the pressure tester.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). Disconnect the pressure tester from the engine oil
pressure line.
95-422. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER —
BLEEDING
NOTE
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED Keep the engine oil pressure line elevated
while you attach it to the engine gearbox to
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
gearbox. Tighten the oil pressure line at the engine
gearbox.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-423. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE — 5. Check that the engine oil pressure scale is at the
OPERATIONAL CHECK bottom of the EIS vertical scale indicator. The digital
indicator should read 0 +3 PSIG.
6. Increase pressure and check that the ENG P

indication changes in the EIS window from red to
yellow at an increasing pressure of 50 PSIG minimum.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
7. Decrease the pressure on the engine oil pressure
2311F or Equivalent Barfield Pressure switch.
8. Verify the ENG P indication changes in the EIS
window from yellow to red at a decreasing pressure of
48.5 ±1 PSIG.
CAUTION
9. Verify that all aircraft displays show consistent
indication of ENG P in the EIS window.
MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE
TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME
TYPE OF OIL THAT IS USED IN THE 10. Slowly increase the hand gun pressure until the
ENG P engine oil pressure pointer bar indicates full
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM. IF YOU DO NOT
scale.
USE THE SAME TYPE OF OIL, YOU WILL
11. Verify that the indications and values do not differ
SYSTEM.
between the PFD and MFD when the DU BACKUP
switch is pressed.
NOTE
12. With the hand gun, apply a pressure of 250
±13 PSIG. (Do not exceed 263 PSIG.)
13. Verify that when the digital readout on the EIS
exceeds 250 PSIG, the indication changes to a red X
1. Disconnect the engine oil pressure line at the across the pressure pointer bar.
engine. Connect a hand pressure gun to the line
leading to the EICAS oil pressure indication
14. Decrease the applied pressure to 0 PSIG.
(connected to engine oil pressure transducer (1G5)).
15. Verify that on the EIS window, no X appears

2. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, across the ENG P pointer bar and the digital readout
PFD, and FAN/AVNCS circuit breakers. indicates 0 ±3 PSIG on all EIS display pages.

NOTE helicopter.
prevent the battery from being drained of its 17. Disconnect the pressure source and reconnect
stored electrical power. the engine oil pressure line at the firewall. Make sure
that the engine oil line connections are tight and
secure.

4. Select the Engine page on the Multi-Function configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Display (MFD). Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-424. EIS — TRANSMISSION OIL The transmission oil pressure signal is provided by a
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE transducer mounted on the transmission oil manifold
INDICATION (S/N 54300 AND (Figure 95-164). The engine oil temperature input
SUBSEQUENT) signal is provided by a thermobulb installed on the
transmission filter manifold. These signals are sent to
The transmission oil pressure and temperature the airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H),
indications (Figure 95-163) are displayed via the which provides the information to both integrated
Engine Indicating System (EIS) strip of the avionics units (GIA 63H) and then to the MFD and
Multi-Function Display (MFD) in normal mode. PFD.
The transmission oil pressure and temperature 95-425. EIS — TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
indication is displayed using vertical scales with an AND TEMPERATURE INDICATION
accompanying digital readout. SYSTEM — RANGE MARKINGS
Transmission oil pressure is displayed on the left side The range marking for the transmission oil pressure
in PSI and engine oil temperature is displayed on the scale is shown in Table 95-55. The range marking for
right side in degrees Celsius (°C). the transmission oil temperature scale is shown in
Table 95-56.
Each vertical scale is indicated by a white, un-filled
rectangle. A pointer bar within the vertical scale
extends from the base of the vertical scale to the
parameter value indication. The pointer bar is topped Table 95-55. Transmission Oil Pressure PSI
with a trapezoidal pointer such that the flat top of the Indication — Range Marking
trapezoid indicates the parameter value. The pointer
bar is shown in a single color (red, yellow, green, or MARKING RANGE (PSI) DEFINITION
gray) based on the parameter indication in relation to
the specified operating limitations. When "pegged" at Red 30 Minimum
the bottom of the scale, the trapezoid pointer will Yellow 30 to 40 Idle Operation
remain visible. The pointer bar will be suppressed only
when the parameter data is missing or invalid.
Green 40 to 70 Continuous
Thin horizontal reference lines are also provided and Operation
which also coincide with the limitations for the
parameter. During normal operation, the pointer bar Red 70 Maximum
will be within the range of the horizontal reference
lines.
Table 95-56. Transmission Oil Temperature °C
A digital readout is also provided at the bottom of each
Indication — Range Marking
vertical scale. The color of the digital readout will
match the color of the pointer bar. For example, when
a parameter is in the green portion of the scale, the
pointer bar and digital readout are both shown in Yellow Less than
green. 15°C
The transmission oil temperature and pressure Green 15 to 110 Continuous

indications are also displayed as a digital readout on Operation
the EIS display of the MFD or Primary Flight Display
(PFD) in reversionary mode. Red 110 Maximum
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIGITAL
READOUT

MODE
VERTICAL
SCALE
HORIZONTAL
REFERENCE
LINES
POINTER
BAR
DIGITAL
READOUT
407gc_MM_95_0154
Figure 95-163. EIS — Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication — Description (S/N 54300
and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160A1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
58 24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
MODE SELECT 1
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1)
SIGNAL GROUND 38
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 7320A1 XMSN OIL TEMP BULB (XOT)
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 1RT2
7320A1P1 (GEA 71H) 7320A1P1
5 RS-485 1A ANALOG IN 4 HI (XOT) 33 A
6 RS-485 1B ANALOG IN 1 HI (XOT) 26
ANALOG IN 1 LO (XOT) 27 B
ANALOG IN 4 LO (XOT) 34
SIGNAL GROUND (XOT) 4
XMSN OIL PRESSURE

TRANDUCER
7320A1P2 1G6
1G6P1
ANALOG IN 3A HI (XMSN OIL PRESS) 56 B PRESS SIGNAL HI
ANALOG IN 3A LO (XMSN OIL PRESS) 57 C PRESS SIGNAL LO
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER A 15 A +10 VDC EXCITATION
3160S1 TRANSDUCER LO (GND) 12 D EXCITATION GROUND
PUSH ON
ACTION 8 RS-485 2B
SWITCH
PFD (R-DU)
3160DS2
(GDU 1040H) 3160A2P1
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 XMSN OIL PRESSURE
TRANDUCER
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38 1G6
1G6P1
REVERSIONARY HI
58 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 B
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2 GROUND
D
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H) LO R R'
C
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1) 10 VDC R R'
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) A

407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0113
Figure 95-164. EIS — Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-426. TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE excitation voltage of 10 VDC from the airframe and
INDICATION SYSTEM — OPERATION engine system processor (GEA 71H). The
transmission oil pressure port on the transmission oil
The transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6) is manifold provides a specific oil pressure output that
mounted on the transmission oil manifold. The changes the strain gauge bridge in the transducer. This
manifold is on the transmission deck under the main in turn changes the signal sent to the airframe and
driveshaft. The transducer has a pressure diaphragm engine system processor (GEA 71H).
and a strain gauge bridge.
The transmission oil pressure indicator shows the oil
The strain gauge circuit of the transmission oil pressure in PSI in relation to the input signal from the
pressure transducer (1G6) (Figure 95-164) receives an transducer as shown in Table 95-57.
Table 95-57. Transmission Oil Pressure Indication Versus Input Signal
INPUT SIGNAL FROM

PRESSURE INDICATION TOLERANCE
TRANSDUCER
(PSI) (PSI)
(MV X EXCITATION VOLTAGE)
0 0.00 ±6.0
10 0.80 ±2.4
20 1.60 ±2.4
30 2.40 ±2.4
40 3.20 ±2.4
50 4.00 ±2.4
60 4.80 ±2.4
70 5.60 ±2.4
80 6.40 ±2.4
90 7.20 ±2.4
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-427. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE The resistive type temperature bulb (1RT2) provides a
INDICATION SYSTEM — OPERATION specific resistance value to the airframe and engine
system processor (GEA 71H). As the temperature of
the oil in the transmission filter manifold changes, the
The transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2) is resistance of the temperature bulb changes. The
installed on the transmission oil filter manifold. The oil transmission oil temperature indicator shows the
temperature bulb is in contact with the oil of the temperature in relation with the resistance value of the
transmission. temperature bulb as shown in Table 95-58.
Table 95-58. Transmission Oil Temperature Indication Versus Input Signal
INDICATION RESISTANCE INDICATION TOLERANCE

(°C) (OHMS) (°C)
0 90.38 ±3
10 93.80 ±3
20 97.31 ±3
30 100.91 ±3
40 104.60 ±3
50 108.39 ±3
60 112.28 ±3
70 116.27 ±3
80 120.36 ±3
90 124.55 ±3
100 128.85 ±3
107 131.94 ±3
110 133.26 ±3
120 137.78 ±3
130 142.40 ±3
140 147.11 ±3
150 151.91 ±3
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-428. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE T R A N S M I S S I O N O I L F I LT E R T O

BULB — REMOVAL PREVENT FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE
MATERIALS REQUIRED 6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-428) on the open port
of the transmission oil filter.
95-429. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE BULB — INSTALLATION
MATERIALS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-405 Lockwire
WARNING
NOTE
necessary to perform the required OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
maintenance. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
2. Gain access to the left side of the transmission
compartment. Find the transmission oil temperature
bulb (1RT2) that is installed on the transmission oil
filter (4, Figure 95-165). CAUTION
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1RT2P1) (3)

from the transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2) (2). USE THE SAME OIL AS THE OIL IN THE
4. Remove the lockwire from the transmission oil OBEY THIS PRECAUTION WILL RESULT
temperature bulb (1RT2) (2). I N T H E C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM.
5. Remove the transmission oil temperature bulb
(1RT2) (2) and the packing (1). Discard the packing. 2. Lubricate the packing (1, Figure 95-165) with
transmission oil.

CAUTION
plugs.
INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428) 4. Install the packing (1) on the transmission oil
ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE temperature bulb (1RT2) (2).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
DETAIL A
3
1
4
1. Packing
2. Transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2)
4. Transmission oil filter
DETAIL B
LOCKWIRE (C-405)
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-165. Transmission Oil Temperature Bulb — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Install the transmission oil temperature bulb 5. Adjust the temperature of the Dri-Block calibrator
(1RT2) (2) in the port on the left side of the to a value, as shown in Table 95-58.
transmission. Tighten the transmission oil temperature
bulb. 6. Make sure the voltmeter display shows the
matching resistance for the temperature value set.
6. Safety the transmission oil temperature bulb
(1RT2) (2) with lockwire (C-405). 7. Repeat step 5 and step 6 for the other values in
Table 95-58.
7. Connect the electrical connector (1RT2P1) (3) to
the transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT2) (2). 8. Remove the oil temperature bulb from the
Dri-Block calibrator or equivalent.
9. Install the oil temperature bulb per paragraph

CAUTION 95-429.
A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE 95-431. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE —

HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE OPERATIONAL CHECK
8. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2, Section 2) PFD, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, ADC, and FAN/
and make sure the transmission oil temperature AVNCS circuit breakers.
indication is operational and within limits and that there
are no oil leaks.
NOTE
9. Return the helicopter to the standard Use an external power unit, if available, to
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After prevent the battery from being drained of its
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). stored electrical power.

95-430. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
BULB — FUNCTIONAL CHECK
3. Check that the XMSN T transmission oil
temperature pointer bar indicates approximately the
ambient temperature.
4. Check that the XMSN T digital readout displays
the same temperature as the indicated OAT
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
temperature within ±4°.
TK-3541 or Equivalent Dri-Block Calibrator
5. In the transmission compartment, disconnect the
oil temperature bulb connector (1RT2P1).
1. Remove the oil temperature bulb (paragraph
95-428).
6. Verify that on EIS the XMSN T transmission oil
temperature displays a red X across its pointer bar.
2. Place the temperature bulb in a Dri-Block
calibrator or equivalent.
7. Verify that the XMSN T indications and values do
not differ between the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
3. Attach the digital voltmeter to the temperature and Multi-Function Display (MFD) when the DU
bulb. BACKUP switch is pressed.
4. Set the voltmeter to show the resistance value in 8. Reconnect the oil temperature bulb connector
a range, as shown in Table 95-58. and ensure that it is tight and secure.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. Verify that the XMSN T digital readout displays

the indicated OAT temperature ±4°.
CAUTION
helicopter. HANDLE THE CONNECTORS OF THE
TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
11. Return the helicopter to the standard TRANSDUCER IN ACCORDANCE WITH
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After S TA N D A R D PRACTICES FOR
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT. THE TRANSMISSION OIL
95-432. TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
TRANSDUCER — REMOVAL (1M3) IS SENSITIVE TO
MATERIALS REQUIRED RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE XMSN OIL
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. (1M3).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs CAUTION

ON THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR.
WARNING COVER ON THE ELECTRICAL
THESE PRECAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DAMAGE TO THE XMSN OIL
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR PRESSURE/ TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC (1M3).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1G6P1) (3)
NOTE from the transmission oil pressure transducer
(1G6) (2).
maintenance. 4. Remove the transmission oil pressure transducer
(1G6) (2) from the transmission oil manifold (4).
2. Remove the engine air inlet cowling (Chapter 53) CAUTION

to access the transmission oil manifold (4,
Figure 95-166).
ON THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR OF
THE TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER (1G6).
5. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the electrical

connector (1G6P1) (3) and on the transmission oil
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
2
1. Packing
2. Transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6)
3 3. Electrical connector (1G6P1)
4. Transmission oil manifold
5. Cap
75 TO 125 IN-LBS
(8.47 TO 14.12 Nm)
Figure 95-166. Transmission Oil Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Install the transmission oil pressure transducer

(1G6) (2) on the transmission oil manifold (4). Torque
CAUTION
the transmission oil pressure transducer T .
INSTALL CAPS AND/OR PLUGS (C-428) 6. Connect the electrical connector (1G6P1) (3) to
ON THE OPEN PORT OF THE the transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6) (2).
TRA NSMIS SIO N OIL MANIF O LD TO Make sure that the electrical connector is tight and
PREVENT FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE secure.
7. Bleed the transmission oil pressure transducer
6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-428) in the open port line (paragraph 95-434).
of the transmission oil manifold (4) and on the oil
pressure inlet of the transmission oil pressure 8. Install the engine air inlet cowling (Chapter 53).
7. Remove the packing (1) from the transmission oil

pressure transducer (1G6) (2). Discard the packing. CAUTION
95-433. TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER — INSTALLATION
WARNING 9. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2, Section 2)

and make sure the transmission oil pressure indication
is operational and within limits and that there are no oil
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS leaks.
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 10. Return the helicopter to the standard
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
from the helicopter. 95-434. TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER LINE — BLEEDING
CAUTION

TRANSMISSION TO LUBRICATE THE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM.
1. Locate the oil pressure line that travels from the
2. Lubricate the packing (1, Figure 95-166) with the transmission to the transmission oil manifold (4,
oil used in the transmission oil system. Figure 95-166). Disconnect the oil pressure line at the
transmission.
plugs. 2. Locate the pressure line that travels from the
transmission oil manifold (4) to the freewheel.
pressure transducer (1G6) (2). 3. Remove the oil line from the freewheel.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4. Install a plug that is capable of taking at least 12. Connect the freewheel oil pressure line to the
100 PSI on the line removed from the freewheel. freewheel. Tighten the oil pressure line
95-435. TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE —

OPERATIONAL CHECK
CAUTION

MAK E S URE T HAT THE OIL IN THE
AS THE TRANSMISSION OIL. FAILURE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
TO FOLLOW THIS PRECAUTION MAY
RESULT IN THE CONTAMINATION OF 2311F or Equivalent Barfield Pressure
THE TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM. Tester, 0 to 300 PSI
5. Attach the pressure tester to the line that travels

from the transmission to the transmission oil
manifold (4). CAUTION
6. Loosen the cap (5) on the top of the transmission

oil manifold (4). MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE
TESTER IS FILLED WITH THE SAME
7. Apply pressure slowly so the line will fill with oil. TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM. IF YOU
Continue to force oil into the line until a steady flow DO NOT USE THE SAME TYPE OF OIL,
without air bubbles comes out at the cap (5). Y O U W I L L C O N TA M I N AT E T H E
TRANSMISSION OIL SYSTEM.
8. When steady flow comes out at the cap (5),
tighten the cap. NOTE
Disconnect the pressure tester from the oil pressure
line.
PFD, ENGINE CONTROLS/FADEC, and FAN/AVNCS
NOTE
circuit breakers on the overhead CB panel.
Keep the transmission oil pressure line
transmission. This minimizes the oil loss NOTE
from the line. Use an external power unit, if available, to
10. Connect the transmission oil pressure line to the stored electrical power.
transmission. Tighten the oil pressure line.
NOTE 3. Check that the red XMSN OIL PRESS warning is

Keep the freewheel oil pressure line displayed on the CAS window.
freewheel. This minimizes the oil loss from 4. The transmission oil pressure transducer (1G6)
the line. and the pressure switch (1S4) are connected to a
manifold. Disconnect the transmission oil pressure line
11. Remove the cap (5) from the freewheel pressure at the manifold and connect a hand pressure gun to
line. the same port (connected to transmission oil pressure
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
transducer (1G6)). Make sure that the manifold 16. Slowly increase the hand gun pressure until the
connection is sealed. XMSN P transmission oil pressure pointer bar
indicates full scale. (Outside valid range of inputs, a
5. Gradually increase pressure until the red XMSN red X will be displayed across the pointer bar.)
OIL PRESS warning is extinguished on the CAS
window. 17. Check that the hand gun applied pressure is
120 ±6.5 PSIG. (Do not exceed 126.5 PSIG.)
6. Check that the XMSN OIL PRESS warning
message extinguishes at a maximum increasing 18. Decrease the applied pressure to 0 PSIG.
pressure of 38 PSIG.
19. Verify that in the EIS window, no X appears

7. Decrease pressure on the transducer until the
across the XMSN P pointer bar and the digital readout
XMSN OIL PRESS warning message is displayed in
indicates 0 +3 on all EIS display pages.
the CAS window.
8. Check that the warning message is displayed at a 20. Remove the external DC power from the
decreasing pressure of 30 ±2 PSIG. helicopter.
9. Reduce pressure to 0 PSIG. 21. Disconnect hand pressure gun, and reconnect
the helicopter transmission lines at the manifold and
10. Check that the red XMSN OIL PRESS warning ensure that the transmission line connections are tight
message is displayed in the CAS window. and secure.
11. Apply a pressure of 65 PSIG to the transducer 22. Return the helicopter to the standard
input line. configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
12. Verify that XMSN P reads 65 ±2 PSIG on the EIS
window. 95-436. EIS — AMPERAGE INDICATION
13. Verify on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
Multi-Function Display (MFD) that the XMSN P The amperage indication (Figure 95-167) is provided
transmission oil pressure value does not differ by more via the Engine Indicating System (EIS) strip and
than 1 PSIG. displayed on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) in
normal mode.
14. Verify that the transmission oil pressure pointer
bar is shown in the appropriate color (green between The amperage indication is displayed as a digital
40 PSIG and 70 PSIG, yellow between 30 PSIG and readout. The digital readout is shown in green when
40 PSIG, and red for less than 30 PSIG and more than the indication is within the allowable operating
70 PSIG) in the EIS window. limitations. When the digital readout is outside of the
operating limitations, it will be displayed as white
15. Verify that the indication and value does not differ numbers on a red background. The digital readout will
between the PFD and MFD when the DU BACKUP be suppressed when the parameter data is missing or
switch is pressed. invalid.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIGITAL
READOUT

MODE
DIGITAL
READOUT
407gc_MM_95_0162
Figure 95-167. EIS — Amperage and Voltage Indications — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The amperage input signal is provided from the 28

Table 95-59. Ammeter Indication Versus Input
VDC shunt (2R1) (Figure 95-168), which is installed in
Voltage
line with the output of the generator (2MG1). The load
current is measured across the shunt resistor. The
INDICATION INPUT VOLTAGE
signal is sent from the shunt to the airframe and engine
(AMPS) (MV)
system processor (GEA 71H), which then provides the
information to both integrated avionics units (GIA 63H) 0 0
and then to the MFD and the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The airframe and engine processor (GEA 71H 20 10
is protected against a current overload from the input
signal by two circuit breakers. The circuit breakers are 40 20
installed in line with the two wires from the shunt 60 30
resistor.
80 40
The amperage indication is also displayed as a digital
100 50
readout on the EIS display of the MFD or PFD in
reversionary mode. 120 60
95-437. SHUNT RESISTOR — DESCRIPTION 140 70
160 80
NOTE
180 90
For data on the shunt resistor, refer to
Chapter 96. 200 100
The shunt resistor has a very low resistance. It is 300 150

connected in series between the output of the starter
400 200
generator and the helicopter 28 VDC bus. The voltage
drop across the shunt is calibrated so that it gives a
specific millivolt drop for a given current flow. The 95-438. SHUNT RESISTOR — REMOVAL
voltage supplied to the ammeter is designed to indicate
a specific amperage as shown in Table 95-59, given a
difference between the HI input from the shunt and the WARNING
LO input. Circuit breakers are installed on both outputs
from the shunt to the airframe and engine system
processor (GEA 71H) for its protection. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NOTE
maintenance.

2. Get access to the DC equipment panel at

FS 155.00.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160A1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
58 24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
MODE SELECT 1
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1)
SIGNAL GROUND 38
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 7320A1 GEA
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
7320A1P1 (GEA 71H) 7320A1P2 7320CB1
5 RS-485 1A ANALOG IN 2A HI (BUS MON) 54 3A 28 VDC

6 RS-485 1B BUS
ANALOG IN 2A LO (BUS MON) 55
AMMETER
ANALOG CURRENT MON IN 2A HI 46 2CB1
ANALOG CURRENT MON IN 1A HI 44 5A
REVERSIONARY SHUNT
MODE SELECT AMMETER 2R1
3160S1 PUSH ON 2CB2
ACTION 8 RS-485 2B ANALOG CURRENT MON IN 1A LO 45 5A – +
SWITCH
ANALOG CURRENT MON IN 3A HI 48
GENERATOR STARTER
PFD (R-DU) RELAY GENERATOR
3160DS2 2K3 2MG1
(GDU 1040H) 3160A2P1 +C
A1 A2
BUS BUS
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6 +B
13
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
12
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 GEN
11
SIGNAL GROUND 38 ON
23 –E
REVERSIONARY 22
MODE SELECT 1 21
3140A2 X1
D
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H)
X2
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) A

407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0123
Figure 95-168. EIS — Amperage and Voltage Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
3. Remove the screws (1, Figure 95-169) and the 7. Install the bus bar (11) to the terminal on the
washers (2 and 3). shunt (2R1) (19) with the bolt (9) and washer (10).
4. Remove the cover (4) from the DC equipment 8. Attach the bus bar (11) to the DC power panel
panel. with the nut (7) and washer (8).
5. Remove the bolts (9 and 12), screw (16), 9. Install the cover (4) on the DC equipment panel.
washers (10, 13, 15, and 18), and lugs (14 and 17)
from the shunt (2R1) (19).
95-440. AMMETER INDICATION SYSTEM —
OPERATIONAL CHECK
6. Remove the nut (7) and washer (8) from the bus
bar (11).
1. Set the battery switch to OFF and remove the
7. Remove the bus bar (11) from the terminal of the
shunt (2R1) (19).
2. Close both ammeter circuit breakers (2CB1 and
2CB2), located on the DC power panel in the aft
8. Remove the screws (5 and 16) and washers (6 fuselage.
and 18) from the shunt (2R1) (19).
9. Remove the shunt (2R1) (19) from the DC

equipment panel. CAUTION
95-439. SHUNT RESISTOR — INSTALLATION

WARNING
and turn the GEN switch to ON.
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 4. Make sure the amperage indication is displayed
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC with an initial spike and that the indication then
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). decreases to a stabilized level.

from the helicopter. NOTE
Allow the amperage indication to stabilize
2. Get access to the DC equipment panel at prior to initiating the next step.
FS 155.00.
5. On the OVHD panel, turn the defogging blower
3. Install the shunt resistor (2R1) (19, switch circuit breaker to "DEFOG", the position lights
Figure 95-169) on the DC equipment panel. switch circuit breaker to "POS LT", and the pitot/static
heater switch circuit breaker to "PITOT HEATER".
4. Install the screws (5) and washers (6) that attach
the shunt (2R1) (19) to the DC equipment panel. 6. Make sure that the ammeter momentarily
increases by approximately 20 amps.
5. Install the lug (14) on the shunt (2R1) (19) with
the bolt (12) and washers (13 and 15). 7. Turn the defogging blower switch circuit breaker
to "OFF", the position lights switch circuit breaker to
6. Install the lug (17) on the shunt (2R1) (19) with "OFF" and the pitot/static heater switch circuit breaker
the screw (16) and washer (18). to "OFF".
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
2
3
SEE DETAIL A
2
3
9 7
8
10
1. Screw 11
2. Washer
3. Washer 12
4. Cover
5. Screw 6 13 5
6. Washer
5
7. Nut
8. Washer 6
9. Bolt 14
10. Washer
11. Bus bar 15
12. Bolt
13. Washer 19
18
14. Lug
15. Washer 16
16. Screw
17. Lug 20 17
18. Washer
19. Shunt (2R1)
20. DC power panel DETAIL A
Figure 95-169. Shunt Resistor — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
8. Shut down the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2, a yellow background (Table 95-60). The digital readout
Section 2). will be suppressed when the parameter data is
missing or invalid.
95-441. EIS — VOLTAGE INDICATION
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) The voltage input signal is provided from the 28 VDC
bus via the GEA (7320CB1) circuit breaker
The voltage indication (Figure 95-167) is provided via (Figure 95-168). The voltage signal is sent from the
the Engine Indicating System (EIS) strip and displayed circuit breaker to the airframe and engine system
on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) in normal mode. processor (GEA 71H), which then provides the
information to both integrated avionics units (GIA 63H)
The voltage indication is displayed as a digital readout. and then to the MFD and the Primary Flight Display
The digital readout is shown in green when the (PFD).
indication is within the allowable operating limitations.
When the digital readout is outside of the normal The voltage indication is also displayed as a digital
operating limitations, it will be displayed as white readout on the EIS display of the MFD or PFD in
numbers on a red background or as black numbers on reversionary mode.
Table 95-60. Voltage Indication — Range Marking
Yellow 22 Less than 22 VDC
Green 22 to 32 Continuous Operation
Red 32 Greater than 32 VDC
95-442. VOLTAGE INDICATION — OPERATIONAL 4. Set the battery switch to BATT.

CHECK
5. After the Multi-Function Display (MFD) powers up
NOTE and the accept button has been pressed to access the
MFD functions, verify that the battery voltage
The following tests of the DC power (approximately 24 VDC) is displayed and that the
circuitry shall be performed using the voltage present on 28 VDC bus in the overhead
installed 24 volt battery as a power source, console is within +/- 0.5 VDC of the displayed value.
or alternatively an external 24 volt DC
power source connected to the battery
6. Set the battery switch to OFF.
connections.
1. Make sure that an open circuit is present between 7. Make sure that the MFD blanks and that there is
the positive lead of the battery connector and ground. no voltage present on the 28 VDC bus.
2. Connect battery, or external power source, to 8. If applicable, disconnect the external DC power
power cables at the quick-disconnect at the battery source from the battery connector.
location.
3. Close the MFD, GIA 1/SYS, and GEA circuit configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
breakers. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-443. EIS — FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION 869 pounds for full scale JP-5/JP-8 fuel and
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) 831 pounds for JP-4 fuel. When the Auxiliary Fuel Kit
(BHT-407-II-6) is installed, the scaling of the vertical
The fuel quantity indication (Figure 95-170) is bar will be 955 pounds for full scale for JP-4 fuel and
displayed via the Engine Indicating System (EIS) strip 999 pounds for JP-5/JP-8 fuel.
of the Multi-Function Display (MFD) in normal mode.
If the fuel quantity data is either missing or invalid,
The fuel quantity indication is displayed using a then the display of the indicator bar will be
vertical scale with an accompanying digital readout. suppressed, a red "X" will appear across the bar scale
The digital indication provides the usable fuel weight in and the associated digital readout.
pounds.
The fuel quantity indication is also displayed as a
The vertical scale is indicated by a cyan, un-filled digital readout on the EIS display of the MFD or
rectangle. A varying height indicator bar within the Primary Flight Display (PFD) in reversionary mode.
vertical scale extends from the base of the vertical
scale to the fuel quantity value indication. The flat top The fuel quantity indication, is provided from the Fuel
of the indicator bar indicates the fuel quantity value. Quantity Gauging System (FQGS), which measures
The indicator bar is shown in a single color (cyan or the quantity of fuel in the two main fuel tanks
yellow) based on the fuel quantity indication. During (Figure 95-171). The FQGS also accounts for the
low fuel conditions (100 ±10 pounds or less), the quantity of fuel in the auxiliary fuel tank (BHT-407-II-6)
indicator bar is shown in yellow. when it is installed.
Thin horizontal reference lines are also provided for The fuel quantity is measured by three capacitance
half tank and full tank reference points. type probes in the fuel tanks. The signals from the
probes are used by the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) to
The digital readout associated with the fuel quantity is calculate the fuel quantity. The signal conditioner
displayed above the vertical bar as a cyan digital provides a signal to the airframe and engine system
readout in a white, un-filled rectangular field, except processor (GEA 71H), which provides the information
when in the yellow low fuel range. During low fuel to both integrated avionics units (GIA 63H) and then to
conditions (100 ±10 pounds or less), the readout is the MFD and PFD. There is no additional probe
displayed as black digits within a yellow filled installed in the auxiliary fuel tank. On installation of the
rectangle. When the FUEL QTY FWD TANK button is auxiliary fuel tank in the helicopter, a microswitch is
pressed, the term "FWD" will be displayed in white, in engaged, which tells the signal conditioner to use a
place of the standard "TOTAL" label, which is different set of values to calculate the fuel quantity.
displayed in cyan.
The fuel quantity indication is in relation to the input
When the Auxiliary Fuel Kit (BHT-407-II-6) is not signal from the signal conditioner as shown in
installed, the scaling of the vertical bar will be Table 95-61.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
DIGITAL
READOUT

MODE
DIGITAL
VERTICAL READOUT
BAR
INDICATOR
BAR
407gc_MM_95_0157
Figure 95-170. EIS — Fuel Indications — Description (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
FUEL QTY 1Z2
(GDU 1040H) 3160A1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H) 1Z2P1
1CB8
28 VDC 3A 14 +28 VDC POWER INPUT
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B BUS
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
REVERSIONARY
58 23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1)
MODE SELECT 1
SIGNAL GROUND 38 3 FUEL QTY OUTPUT HI

ETHERNET OUT 2A 6 15 FUEL QTY OUTPUT LO
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 7320A1
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 CLOSED WHEN AUX
7320A1P2 (GEA 71H) TANK IS INSTALLED
53 ANALOG IN 1A LO (FUEL QTY) 5 AUX TANK SELECT
52 ANALOG IN 1A HI (FUEL QTY)
7320A1P1
13 POWER GROUND
5 RS-485 1A
6 RS-485 1B
7 RS-485 2A
8 RS-485 2B IF FAULT DETECT
SWITCH TO CLOSE
16 BIT FAULT OUTPUT
FWD/TOTAL
FUEL QTY SWITCH PROBE NO. 3 TD
4
1S20 LOW LEVEL 155 ±2 SEC
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT
3160S1 PUSH ON
PUSH OFF
ACTION INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 CPU
SWITCH 3140A2
17 FWD TANK QTY SELECT
3140A2P5 (GIA 63H)
<1% FULL
PFD (R-DU) DISCRETE IN 11
38 FWD FUEL TANK
(FUEL QUANTITY INVALID) DIGITAL
3160DS2 FUEL TANK ANALOG
(GDU 1040H) 3160A2P1 PROBE NO. 3 PROBES DISC CONVERTER
3140A2P4
1A3 1J6 1P6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7 DISCRETE IN 11 1A3P1
21 AD
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6 (FUEL QUANTITY INVALID) POWER INPUT A 1 9 POWER
CONVERTER
ETHERNET IN 2B 9 RETURN B 2 20 RETURN PROBE NO. 3
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 SIGNAL OUTPUT C 3 22 SIGNAL INPUT
3140A2P3
SIGNAL GROUND 38
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
REVERSIONARY
58 23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) MAIN FUEL TANK
MODE SELECT 1
PROBE NO. 2
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 76 ETHERNET IN 1A 1A2
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 77 ETHERNET IN 1B 1A2P1
ETHERNET IN 1A 4 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A POWER INPUT A 4 19 POWER
ETHERNET IN 1B 5 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B RETURN B 5 12 RETURN PROBE NO. 2
SIGNAL OUTPUT C 6 7 SIGNAL INPUT
PROBE NO. 1
1A1
1A1P1
POWER INPUT A 7 10 POWER
RETURN B 8 21 RETURN PROBE NO. 1
SIGNAL OUTPUT C 9 18 SIGNAL INPUT
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0122
Figure 95-171. EIS — Fuel Quantity Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-61. Quantity Indication Versus Input Signal From the Signal Conditioner
INPUT SIGNAL FROM SIGNAL

FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION TOLERANCE
CONDITIONER
(LBS) (LBS)
(VDC)
0 0.50 ±6
100 0.92 ±6
200 1.33 ±6
300 1.75 ±6
400 2.17 ±6
500 2.58 ±6
600 3.00 ±6
700 3.42 ±6
800 3.83 ±6
900 4.25 ±6
1000 4.67 ±6
1100 5.08 ±6
1200 5.50 ±6
95-444. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM 95-445. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) COMPONENT REPLACEMENT (S/N 54300
AND SUBSEQUENT)
The Fuel Quantity Gauging System (FQGS) measures
the quantity of fuel in the two main fuel tanks
(Figure 95-171). The FQGS also accounts for the
quantity of fuel in the auxiliary fuel tank (BHT-407-II-6) CAUTION
when it is installed.
The fuel quantity is measured by three capacitance DO A FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING

type probes in the fuel tanks (paragraph 95-446). The SYSTEM CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
signals from the probes are used by the fuel signal ANYTIME AN EXISTING, REPAIRED, OR
conditioner (1Z2) to calculate the fuel quantity NEW COMPONENT OF THE FUEL
(paragraph 95-447). QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM IS
PROCEDURE IS NOT COMPLETED, THE
FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING INDICATION
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
For the removal and installation procedures of fuel 95-447. FUEL SIGNAL CONDITIONER —
quantity gauging system components not provided in DESCRIPTION (S/N 54300 AND
this chapter, refer to Chapter 28. SUBSEQUENT)
The fuel signal conditioner (Figure 95-171) is a

95-446. FUEL PROBES — DESCRIPTION separate unit that is located on the aft electrical
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) equipment shelf adjacent to the DC controller. The
electronic interface circuits for the fuel low level
detection system and the fuel gauging system signal
The Fuel Quantity Gauging System (FQGS) has three
conditioner circuits are located in the same unit. Both
capacitance-type fuel probes (Figure 95-171). The fuel systems are physically and electrically separate within
probes are identified as follows: the unit. In addition, the two low level detection circuits
are physically and electrically separate from each
• Main tank aft fuel probe (1A1), probe No. 1 other. The fuel probe in the forward tank (probe No. 3)
(1A3) also acts as a low level switch.
• Main tank forward fuel probe (1A2), probe The signal conditioner is connected to the helicopter
No. 2 electrical harness through three electrical connectors.
There are three Light Emitting Diodes (LED) located
on the aft side of the unit. They show the Fuel Quantity
• Forward tank fuel probe (1A3), probe No. 3
Gauging System (FQGS) status for troubleshooting
purposes.
The probes are designed to give a signal between 0.5
to 5.0 mA to the signal conditioner. When the probe is The descriptions of the fault codes are shown in
dry, the signal is 0.5 mA. When the probe is fully Table 95-62. The faults are listed in order of
immersed in fuel, the signal is 5.0 mA. The actual decreasing priority. As the table indicates, all internal
faults in the fuel signal conditioner have priority over
probe signal, when immersed in fuel, depends upon
any other fault display status.
the fuel dielectric constant. The fuel signal conditioner
makes calculations to adjust for the different dielectric If there are multiple faults, the LED will only display the
constants. highest priority fault.
Table 95-62. Fuel Signal Conditioner Fault Codes — Description
SYSTEM CONDITION FAULT OUTPUT PROVIDED LED LED LED

DESCRIPTION TO INDICATOR AT PIN 19 0 1 2
No Fault Open, No Ground ON ON ON
Internal Fault Ground OFF OFF OFF
Probe No. 1 Ground ON OFF OFF
Probe No. 2 Ground OFF ON OFF
Probe No. 3 Ground OFF OFF ON
Fuel Detect Fault 1 Open ON OFF ON
NOTE:
1 A fuel detect fault indicates a fault in the circuitry that outputs the forward tank empty discrete signal
(pin 4 on the fuel signal conditioner), which controls the right transfer pump relay.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
95-448. Fuel Signal Conditioner, Fuel Low Level by probe No. 3 is greater than 1% of the total reading
Circuits — Operation for this probe, the same timing circuit is activated.
After 360 seconds, the signal conditioner will provide a
The fuel signal conditioner (IZ2) contains the Low ground connection through pin 4 on the signal
Level Detector (LLD) electronic circuitry that operates conditioner that energizes the XFR pump relay and
with two fuel low level switches mounted in the fuel enables the pump.
tanks (LLD No. 1 in the main fuel tank and LLD No. 2
in the forward fuel tank). The only functions of these Power to the signal conditioner is provided by the
circuits is to provide timing for the circuits and to FUEL QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker. When no power is
remove any erratic switch activation and supplied to the signal conditioner, pin 4 will not be
corresponding light flickering that may be caused as grounded. When power is supplied to the signal
the switches move from one position to another. conditioner, pin 4 will be set open or closed to agree
Software is not used in these circuits. with the results of the calculation of probe No. 3 at the
time of power-up. The setting of pin 4 may only be
Power input to the low level circuits is from separate delayed by the completion of the power-up BIT.
circuit breakers. The power for the LLD No. 1 circuit
comes from the MISC (3310CB1) circuit breaker. Refer to Chapter 96 for a description of the use of the
When no power is supplied to the LLD No. 1 circuit, low level feature of probe No. 3. Refer to Chapter 28
the low level circuit will be open between pin 3 and for a complete description of the operation of the low
pin 5. When power is supplied to the LLD No. 1 circuit, level feature of probe No. 3 in the operation of the fuel
the low level circuit will be set to open or closed within system.
2 seconds, to agree with the LLD No. 1 position at the
time of power-up. The power for the LLD No. 2 circuit 95-451. Fuel Signal Conditioner Quantity Circuits,
comes from the FUEL BOOST/XFER LH (1CB6) Built-in Test (BIT) — Operation
circuit breaker. When no power is supplied to the LLD
No. 2 circuit, the low level circuit will be open between The fuel signal conditioner does a power-up Built-in
pin 3 and pin 5. When power is supplied to LLD No. 2 Test (BIT) when the unit is first given power by the
circuit, the low level circuit will be set to open or closed FUEL QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker. The power-up BIT
within 2 seconds, to agree with the LLD No. 2 position must be completed before the fuel signal conditioner
at the time of power-up. can take any readings of fuel quantity. The fuel signal
conditioner should complete a power-up BIT check
For a description of the operation of the low level within approximately 4 seconds after application of
switches, refer to Chapter 96. For a complete power. There is no connection between the BIT
description of the operation of the fuel low level feature of the fuel quantity indicator and the fuel signal
switches and the fuel system, refer to Chapter 28. conditioner.
95-449. Low Level Detection Power-up Built-in The power-up BIT examines the following:
Test (BIT)
The low level circuit does not have a Built-in Test (BIT)
feature to check the system for the integrity of the • Validity of each probe signal received
components of the system.
• Power source for probe input
95-450. Low Level Detection Forward Fuel Probe
(1A3) — Operation • Indicator output
When the signal conditioner calculates that the fuel If a failure is detected during the power-up BIT, the fuel
level sensed by probe No. 3 is less than 1% of the signal conditioner will provide a ground to pin 21 of
total reading for this probe, a timing circuit is activated. integrated avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2).
After 360 seconds, the signal conditioner will break the The ground at pin 21 causes the fuel quantity
ground through pin 4 on the signal conditioner, which indication display to be suppressed. If an error is found
will remove the electrical power from the XFR pump in the probe signal received or in the power source for
relay and disable the XFR pump. Similarly when the the probe input, the indicator output will be set to zero
signal conditioner calculates that the fuel level sensed for that probe or probes. In addition, the failures
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
detected will be displayed on three LEDs on the back

NOTE
of the fuel signal conditioner (Table 95-62).
The continuous BIT examines the following: necessary to perform the required
maintenance.
• Microprocessor operation 1. Disconnect the battery or the external DC power

• Validity of each probe signal received
2. Get access to the aft electrical equipment shelf.
• Power source for probe input
• Indicator output CAUTION
If a failure is detected during the continuous BIT, the

HANDLE THE CONNECTORS OF THE
fuel signal conditioner will provide a ground to pin 21
of integrated avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2).
The ground at pin 21 causes the indicator display to be
suppressed. If an error is found in the probe signal
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. THE FUEL
received or in the power source for the probe input, the
SIGNAL CONDITIONER AND THE FUEL
indicator output will be set to zero for that probe or
QUANTITY INDICATOR ARE SENSITIVE
probes. In addition, the failures detected will be
displayed on three LEDs on the back of the fuel signal
conditioner.
COMPONENTS.
95-452. Fuel Signal Conditioner Unit — Removal
CAUTION
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. DO NOT TOUCH THE ELECTRICAL PINS

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE INSTALL AN ANTISTATIC CONNECTOR
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs C O N N E C T O R . FA I L U R E T O O B E Y
WARNING COMPONENTS.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1Z2P1,

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1Z2P2, 1Z2P3) (1, Figure 95-172) from the fuel
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR quantity signal conditioner (1Z2) (4).
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 4. Remove the screws (2) and the washers (3).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
4
3
DETAIL A 2. Screw
3. Washer
4. Fuel quantity signal conditioner (1Z2)
Figure 95-172. Fuel Signal Conditioner — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
5. Remove the fuel quantity signal conditioner (1Z2) INSTALL AN ANTISTATIC CONNECTOR
(4). COVER ON THE ELECTRICAL
6. Install caps and/or plugs (C-156) on the electrical THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY
connectors (1Z2P1, 1Z2P2, 1Z2P3) (1) and on the fuel R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E S E
quantity signal conditioner (1Z2) (4). E L E C T R O S TAT I C SENSITIVE
COMPONENTS.
95-453. Fuel Signal Conditioner — Installation 5. Connect the electrical connectors (1Z2P1,
1Z2P2, 1Z2P3) (1) to the fuel quantity signal
conditioner (1Z2) (4).
WARNING
6. Do a calibration check of the fuel quantity
gauging system (paragraph 95-171).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 95-454. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM —
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC OPERATION (S/N 54300 AND
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). SUBSEQUENT)

95-455. Fuel Probes — Operation
The fuel probes in the Fuel Quantity Gauging System
2. Get access to the aft electrical equipment shelf. (FQGS) are capacitance-type probes. Capacitance
probes vary the current returned to the signal
3. Install the fuel quantity signal conditioner (1Z2) conditioner as the capacitance of the probe varies.
(4, Figure 95-172). Make sure that the electrical The capacitance of the probe increases as it is
receptacles point forward of the helicopter. covered with fuel, since the dielectric constant of fuel
is greater than that of air. Therefore, as the probe is
4. Install the screws (2) and the washers (3). covered with fuel, the current output will increase. The
probes in this system are designed to provide 0.5 mA
of current when dry and increase the current linearly to
5.0 mA when the probe is completely covered in fuel.
CAUTION All three probe input signals are continuously sampled
by the signal conditioner.
HANDLE THE CONNECTORS OF THE 95-456. Fuel Signal Conditioner — Operation

A C C O R D A N C E W I T H S TA N D A R D The Analog to Digital (A/D) converter changes the
P RA C T I CE S F O R E L E C T R O S TAT I C milliampere input current from the three probes to
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. THE FUEL digital format. The microprocessor uses the digital
SIGNAL CONDITIONER AND THE FUEL data to compute the weight of the fuel as described in
QUANTITY INDICATOR ARE SENSITIVE the steps that follow:
THESE STANDARD PRACTICES MAY 1. The microprocessor finds if the main tank forward
R E S U LT I N D A M A G E T O T H E S E fuel probe (1A2), probe No. 2, input signal is a valid
COMPONENTS. signal or if a default value should be used for the
reference signal. It chooses either the probe No. 2
value or a default value. It uses the value of probe
CAUTION No. 2 to calculate the density of the fuel or uses the
default density value of 6.6594 pounds per gallon.
DO NOT TOUCH THE ELECTRICAL PINS 2. The microprocessor calculates the height of the
ON THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS. fuel for each of the three probes. The calculation uses
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
the value from step 1 for correcting different densities No. 3, to the integrated avionics unit No .2 (GIA 63H)
of fuel. (3140A2).
3. The calculated height on each probe is used to 95-459. Auxiliary Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation
look up a volume of fuel in gallons in a database
contained in the Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) of the When the auxiliary fuel tank is installed, a ground
signal conditioner. signal is provided to pin 5 on the signal conditioner.
When the microprocessor receives the ground signal,
4. The weight of the fuel is then calculated by it is programmed to use a different table to get the
multiplying the volume by the density. A calculation is volume versus the calculated height on the main tank
done for all three probes to calculate the total system aft fuel probe (1A1), probe No. 1. The volume is used
weight of fuel. A calculation is also done for only the to calculate the weight as previously described. The
forward tank fuel probe (1A3), probe No. 3. The digital microprocessor sends the signal to the integrated
data on the weight of fuel data is changed to analog avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2).
data by an A/D converter. The analog signal is
transmitted from the signal conditioner to the 95-460. Fuel Quantity Gauging System —
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (GIA 63H) (3140A2) in Calibration Procedure
the form of millivolts. The fuel quantity indication
shows the fuel quantity, in pounds, in agreement with
the input signal shown in Table 95-61. CAUTION
95-457. Fuel Density Compensation — Operation

The dielectric value of the fuel changes as a result of WHEN FUELING OR DEFUELING THE
the type of fuel and the temperature of the fuel. The HELICOPTER (CHAPTER 12).
Fuel Quantity Gauging System (FQGS) calculates the
change in dielectric value with the use of a reference
input signal from the main tank forward fuel probe CAUTION
(1A2), probe No. 2. In most conditions, the main tank
forward fuel probe (1A2) is completely immersed in
fuel (when there is a significant amount of fuel in the DO A FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING
tank). With the probe completely immersed in a SYSTEM CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
standard density fuel, the reference input signal from ANYTIME AN EXISTING, REPAIRED, OR
the probe is known precisely. NEW COMPONENT OF THE FUEL
QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM IS
The FQGS also receives a signal from the completely INSTALLED OR IF ASSOCIATED WIRING
immersed main tank aft fuel probe (1A1). It compares OR ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS ARE
this signal with the reference input signal from the REPAIRE D O R REP LA CE D. IF T HIS
main tank forward fuel probe (1A2) (dielectric value PROCEDURE IS NOT COMPLETED, THE
signal when the probe No. 2 is completely immersed in FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING INDICATION
a standard density fuel). The microprocessor then MAY NOT BE ACCURATE.
calculates the actual density of the fuel currently being
used. This density value is used to correct all probe 1. Place the helicopter at a safe distance from fire
data for density, when calculating the height of the fuel hazards (Chapter 12).
on the probe.
2. Set the battery switch to the OFF position.
95-458. Forward Fuel Tank Quantity — Operation
3. Electrically ground the helicopter.
When the FUEL QTY FWD TANL button is pushed, a
ground signal is provided to pin 17 of the fuel signal
conditioner. When the microprocessor receives the 4. Position helicopter 0.5° nose up (Chapter 8).
ground signal, it is programmed to only output the
weight of the forward tank fuel probe (1A3), probe 5. Defuel the fuel cells (Chapter 12).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
6. Add 18 pounds (approximately 2.8 U.S. gallons) 14. Add fuel until the fuel cell is full. The fuel level
of fuel to the aft fuel tank. should be at the bottom of the filler port.
NOTE
CAUTION
stored electrical power. DO NOT ADJUST THE FULL FUEL
QUANTITY ADJUSTMENT. THE FULL
7. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter. FUEL QUANTITY IS DETERMINED BY
THE SOFTWARE IN THE FUEL SIGNAL
8. On the overhead panel, close the FUEL QTY CONDITIONER.
(1CB8) circuit breaker.
15. On the fuel quantity indication, make sure that the
digital display and indicator bar read as shown in
9. On the fuel quantity indication, make sure the
Table 95-63, or Table 95-64 if the auxiliary fuel tank is
digital display reads between 0 and 6 pounds. If
installed.
necessary, adjust the EMPTY ADJUST nut located on
the back side of the signal conditioner until the
indication shows 5 pounds. 16. Push and hold the FUEL QTY FWD TANK switch
10. On the instrument panel, push and hold the FUEL

QTY FWD TANK switch.
digital display and indicator bar read as per
Table 95-63 or Table 95-64.
digital display shows between 0 and 6 pounds. 18. On the overhead panel, open the FUEL QTY
(1CB8) circuit breaker.
12. Add 110 ±10 pounds (approximately 16 U.S.
gallons) of fuel to the aft fuel tank. 19. Remove the external DC power from the
helicopter.
13. Make sure that the FUEL LOW Crew Alerting
System (CAS) message goes off. If the CAS message 20. Return the helicopter to the standard
does not go off, refer to FUEL LOW annunciator circuit configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
(Chapter 96). Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-63. Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds
FULL FUEL WEIGHT-POUNDS (125.5 U.S. GAL/475 L)

FUEL
TEMPERATURE
JP4, JET B FUEL JET A, JET A1, JP5, JP8 FUEL
°F °C TOTAL FORWARD TOTAL FORWARD
-40 -40.0 844 ±25 259 ±8 898 ±27 276 ±8
-20 -28.9 836 ±25 256 ±8 889 ±27 273 ±8
0 -17.8 826 ±25 253 ±8 881 ±26 270 ±8
20 -6.7 818 ±25 251 ±8 874 ±26 268 ±8

40 4.4 809 ±24 248 ±7 864 ±26 265 ±8
60 15.6 799 ±24 245 ±7 857 ±26 263 ±8
80 26.7 791 ±24 243 ±7 848 ±25 260 ±8
100 37.8 781 ±23 239 ±7 840 ±25 258 ±8
120 48.9 773 ±23 237 ±7 833 ±25 256 ±8
Table 95-64. Fuel Temperature Versus Fuel Weight-pounds (Including Auxiliary Fuel Tank)
TEMPERATURE FULL FUEL WEIGHT-POUNDS (146.9 U.S. GAL/556.1 L)
°F °C JP4, JET B FUEL JET A, JET A1, JP5, JP8 FUEL
-40 -40.0 976 ±29 1037 ±31
-20 -28.9 966 ±29 1028 ±31
0 -17.8 955 ±29 1018 ±31
20 -6.7 945 ±28 1010 ±30
40 4.4 935 ±28 999 ±30
60 15.6 924 ±28 990 ±30
80 26.7 914 ±27 981 ±29
100 37.8 903 ±27 971 ±29
120 48.9 893 ±27 962 ±29
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

95-461. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION — helicopter.
FUNCTIONAL CHECK
11. Disconnect the DC power supply.

NOTE
The following checks are to be performed 12. Reconnect the connector (1Z2P1) on the signal
with a dry, empty tank. conditioner. Make sure that all connections are tight
and secure.
1. Disconnect the connector (1Z2PI) from the signal
conditioner above the baggage compartment. Set up 13. Return the helicopter to the standard
the Hewlett-Packard DC power supply; ground to pin configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
15 and +0.5 VDC to pin 3. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
2. Close the FAN/AVNCS, ENGINE CONTROLS/ 95-462. FUEL QUANTITY (EMPTY TANK) —
FADEC, MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, PFD, FUNCTIONAL CHECK
and FUEL/QTY circuit breakers on the overhead
circuit breaker panel.
NOTE
NOTE The following checks are to be performed

with a dry, empty tank.
1. Close the FAN/AVNCS, ENGINE CONTROLS/
FADEC, MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, PFD,
and FUEL/QTY circuit breakers on the overhead
3. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter. circuit breaker panel.
4. Check that the fuel quantity digital readout

displays 0 ±5 pounds of fuel and the cyan analog NOTE
vertical bar does not display the yellow fuel level on Use an external power unit, if available, to
the EIS window. prevent the battery from being drained of its
5. Increase the power supply voltage (pin 3) until the
digital readout displays 1200 pounds on total fuel on 2. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
the EIS window.
3. Check that the fuel quantity digital readout
6. Verify that the fuel analog vertical bar is shown displays 0 ±5 pounds of fuel and the cyan analog
full on the cyan bar of the EIS window. vertical bar does not display the yellow fuel level on
the EIS window.
7. Using a multimeter, verify that the input voltage is

5.50 +0.03 VDC on the power supply. 4. Verify that all LEDs on the BIT STATUS
WINDOW on the signal conditioner are illuminated.
8. Decrease power supply voltage to 0 volts.

NOTE
9. Open the FAN/AVNCS, ENGINE CONTROLS/ If any LEDs are not illuminated on the BIT
FADEC, MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, PFD, status display on the signal conditioner,
and FUEL/QTY circuit breakers on the overhead then proceed to troubleshoot the system
circuit breaker panel. using the error code Table 95-65.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
Table 95-65. Fuel Signal Conditioner BIT Status Window
FAULT LED LED LED

CONDITION DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT 0 1 2
No faults Open On On On
Internal FQSC fault GND Off Off Off
Probe 1 fault GND On Off Off

Probe 2 fault GND Off On Off
Probe 3 fault GND Off Off On
Fuel detect fault Open On Off On
11. Place the battery switch to OFF and toggle the

NOTE
fuel BOOST/XFR RIGHT and BOOST/XFR LEFT
Do not run pumps dry for more than switch circuit breakers to OFF. Open the FUEL/QTY
1 minute or damage could result. circuit breaker.
5. Press the FUEL QTY/FWD TANK button (1S20), 95-463. LOW LEVEL FUNCTION OF FORWARD
located on the instrument panel, to display the fuel FUEL CELL PROBE NO. 3 —
quantity in the forward tank. OPERATIONAL CHECK (S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT)
6. Observe that the FUEL QTY indicator is between
0 and 5 pounds. For the operational check of the left and right fuel
transfer pump annunciator circuit, refer to Chapter 96.
7. Remove the external DC power from the The purpose of this section is to describe the specific
helicopter. functions of fuel probe No. 3 as a fuel low level switch.
8. Place the battery switch (2S1) to BATT and place NOTE

the fuel BOOST/XFR RIGHT (1CB5) switch circuit Use an external power unit, if available, to
breaker and fuel BOOST/XFR LEFT (1CB6) switch prevent the battery from being drained of its
circuit breaker to RIGHT and LEFT respectively. stored electrical power.
9. Verify that the L/FUEL BOOST and R/FUEL 1. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
BOOST cautions remain illuminated in the CAS
window and that the R/FUEL XFR and L/FUEL XFR 2. Close the FUEL QTY (1CB8) circuit breaker.
cautions remain extinguished.
RESULT:
10. Verify that both boost pumps are operating and
both transfer pumps are not operating. • Signal conditioner LEDs are all on.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
the fuel quantity indicator (1M1) should be recorded at

CORRECTIVE ACTION: empty, low fuel, and full fuel conditions to coincide with
the fuel quantity gauging system calibration procedure
• If the LEDs on the signal conditioner are not (paragraph 95-460).
all on, refer to Trouble No. 1 (Figure 95-174).
3. Return the helicopter to the standard WARNING

95-464. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING SYSTEM — WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
TEST SET (S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC

CAUTION
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Model 77 or Equivalent Fluke Digital
WHEN FUELING OR DEFUELING THE
Multimeter
HELICOPTER (CHAPTER 12).
1. Drain the fuel system (Chapter 12).

NOTE
The information provided in Figure 95-173
may used by operators to build the fuel NOTE
quantity gauging system test set. The test
Refer to paragraph 95-460 for the
set may be built using standard electrical/
procedures to drain and fill the fuel cells to
electronic supplies.
reflect empty, low fuel, and full fuel
conditions.
The fuel quantity gauging system test set
(Figure 95-173) may be used as an aid for
troubleshooting problems associated with the fuel 2. Add a measured amount of fuel to the fuel cells.
quantity gauging system. Record the specification and amount of measured fuel
that has been added to the fuel cells from an initial
drained condition.
Specifically, the fuel quantity gauging system test set
may be used to measure any of the three fuel quantity
probe (1A1, 1A2, and 1A3) input signals to the fuel 3. Install the fuel quantity gauging system test set as
signal conditioner (1Z2) as well as the output signals follows:
from the fuel signal conditioner to the fuel quantity
indicator (1M1).
a. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
Unless the actual quantity of fuel in the fuel cells is
known, it is recommended that the fuel be drained
from the fuel cells and a measured amount added
(1Z2) and disconnect the electrical connector (1Z2P1).
prior to taking readings from the probes (1A1, 1A2,
and 1A3) and from the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2).
For initial troubleshooting, measurements of the three c. Connect the test set connector (D38999/
fuel quantity probe (1A1, 1A2, and 1A3) input signals 20WC35PN) to electrical connector (1Z2P1) and
to the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) as well as the connect test set connector (D38999/26WC35SN) to
output signals from the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) to the fuel signal conditioner (1Z2).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
FUEL QUANTITY GAUGING

SYSTEM TEST SET
1Z2P1
+

OUTPUT SIGNAL
+ -
PROBE NO. 1
+ -
PROBE NO. 2
+ -
PROBE NO. 3
TO SIGNAL
CONDITIONER (1Z2)
TO HELICOPTER
(D38999/26WC35SN)
CONNECTOR (1Z2P1)
(D38999/20WC35PN)
NOTES
1 Resistor 100 ohm
1/8 watt 1/2% or better.
2 Minimum 22 gauge wires.
407_MM_95_0076
Figure 95-173. Fuel Quantity Gauging System Test Set (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
TROUBLE NO. 1
LOW LEVEL FUNCTION OF FORWARD FUEL CELL PROBE NO. 3
CAUTION

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE LOW LEVEL FUNCTION OF FORWARD FUEL CELL PROBE NO. 3.
NOTE
SIGNAL CONDITIONER LEDS

PROBE 2 FAULT?
ARE NOT ALL ON.
YES NO

SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
IS WIRING BETWEEN PROBE 2 AND
YES NO
LEDS ARE WORKING?
YES NO
BETWEEN PROBE 2 AND
SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
REFER TO THE BIT REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
STATUS LEDs TABLE.
PROBE 3 FAULT ?
INTERNAL FQSC FAULT? YES NO
YES NO
IS WIRING BETWEEN PROB 3 AND

FUEL DETECT FAULT.
REPLACE SIGNAL CONDITIONER. PROBE 1 FAULT? YES NO
YES NO
INSTALL BREAKOUT TEST

SET (FIGURE 95-77).
BETWEEN PROBE 3 AND
IS WIRING BETWEEN PROBE 1 AND SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
YES NO
0.5 mA AND 5.0 mA?
YES NO

BETWEEN PROBE 1 AND
SIGNAL CONDITIONER.
407_MM_95_0077
Figure 95-174. Low Level Function of Forward Fuel Cell Probe No. 3 — Trouble No. 1 (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
4. Take readings of the fuel quantity probe (1A1, i. Record the millivolt reading for probe No. 3
1A2, and 1A3) input signals to the fuel signal (1A3).
conditioner (1Z2) as follows;
j. Remove the positive and negative multimeter
probes from the test set.
NOTE
Make sure the electrical connectors at the k. Divide the millivolt readings recorded for
fuel quantity probes are connected. probe No. 1 (1A1), probe No. 2 (1A2) and probe No. 3
(1A3) by 100 to obtain millivolt values.
a. Set the multimeter selector to read millivolts.
5. Record the voltage reading of the fuel signal
b. Place the positive and negative multimeter
conditioner (1Z2) output signal to the fuel quantity
probes into the applicable ports of the test set for
indicator (1M1) as follows:
probe No. 1 (1A1).
NOTE NOTE
Use an external power unit, if available, to Set the multimeter selector to volts prior to
prevent the battery from being drained of its taking the reading of the fuel signal
stored electrical power. conditioner (1Z2) output signal to the fuel
quantity indicator (1M1).
external DC power to the helicopter. a. Set the multimeter selector to volts.
d. Close the FUEL INSTR QTY circuit breaker. b. Place the positive and negative multimeter
probes into the applicable ports of the test set for the
fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) output signal.
NOTE
Divide the millivolt reading by 100 to obtain c. Record the voltage reading of the fuel signal
milliamps. conditioner (1Z2) output signal to the fuel quantity
indicator (1M1).
e. Record the millivolt reading for probe No. 1
(1A1).
6. Refer to Table 95-61 to compare the voltage
value recorded in step c against the fuel quantity
f. Place the positive and negative multimeter
indication on the fuel quantity indicator (1M1) and the
probes into the applicable ports of the test set for
actual amount of fuel in the fuel cells.
probe No. 2 (1A2).
7. Repeat step 2 through step 6 for conditions of low

NOTE fuel and full fuel as specified in paragraph 95-460 or
Divide the millivolt reading by 100 to obtain other fuel quantities as required.
milliamps.
8. Remove the fuel quantity gauging system test set
g. Record the millivolt reading for probe No. 2 as follows:
(1A2).
h. Place the positive and negative multimeter a. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the
probes into the applicable ports of the test set for external DC power from the helicopter.
probe No. 3 (1A3).
(1Z2) and disconnect the test set connectors.
NOTE
Divide the millivolt reading by 100 to obtain c. Connect electrical connector (1Z2P1) to the
milliamps. fuel signal conditioner (1Z2).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
9. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the from the transducer is sent to the airframe and engine
external DC power to the helicopter and make sure the system processor (GEA 71H), which then provides the
fuel quantity indication reflects the amount of fuel in information to both integrated avionics units (GIA 63H)
the fuel cells. and then to the MFD and the PFD.
10. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the The fuel pressure indicator shows the fuel pressure in
external DC power from the helicopter. PSI in relation to the input signal from the transducer
11. Contact Product Support Engineering for
assistance with interpretation of the fuel quantity probe 95-466. FUEL PRESSURE INDICATION — RANGE
(1A1, 1A2, and 1A3) and fuel signal conditioner (1Z2) MARKINGS
recorded readings as required.
The range marking on the PSI scale is shown in
12. Return the helicopter to the standard Table 95-66.
Table 95-66. Fuel Pressure PSI Indication —
95-465. EIS — FUEL PRESSURE INDICATION Range Marking
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT) MARKING RANGE (PSI) DEFINITION
The fuel pressure indication (Figure 95-175) is Red 8 Minimum

displayed via the Engine Indicating System (EIS) strip
on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) in normal mode. Green 8 to 25 Continuous
Operation
The fuel pressure indication is displayed as a digital
Red 25 Maximum
readout. The digital readout is shown in green when
the indication is within the allowable operating
limitations. When the digital readout is outside of the 95-467. FUEL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER —
normal operating limitations, it will be displayed as DESCRIPTION
white numbers on a red background (Figure 95-170).
The digital readout will be suppressed when the The fuel pressure transducer (1B6) is mounted along
parameter data is missing or invalid. with the fuel shutoff valve in a compartment on the
right side of the aft electrical equipment shelf. The
The fuel pressure indication is also displayed as a transducer is mounted on a fitting in the pressure line
digital readout on the EIS display of the MFD or between the aft fuel boost pumps and the fuel shutoff
Primary Flight Display (PFD) in reversionary mode. valve. The transducer has a pressure diaphragm and
a strain gauge bridge.
The fuel pressure indication displays the pressure
output from the two aft fuel boost pumps located in the Either one of the two aft fuel boost pumps gives fuel
main fuel cell in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI). The pressure output through a common fuel pressure line
fuel pressure input signal is provided by a fuel to the fuel shutoff valve. The fuel pressure transducer
pressure transducer (1B6) (Figure 95-176) mounted is mounted on the pressure line before the shutoff
on the inlet side of the fuel shutoff valve. The signal valve (Chapter 28).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10

3160DS1 3140A1
(GDU 1040H) 3160A1P1 3140A1P3 (GIA 63H)

REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 1
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1)
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
FADEC/ECU
1A50
1A50P2
69 (–)
ARINC 429 TRANSMIT - (FUEL FLOW (PPH) (WF ACTUAL))
68 (+)
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE SYSTEM PROCESSOR

7320A1 FUEL PRESSURE XDCR
7320A1P1 (GEA 71H) 7320A1P2 1B6
1B6P1
REVERSIONARY
MODE SELECT 5 RS-485 1A +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER A 15 A +10 VDC EXCITATION IN HI
6 RS-485 1B TRANSDUCER LO (GND) 13 D EXCITATION IN LO (GND)
3160S1 PUSH ON
PUSH OFF ANALOG IN 4A HI (FUEL PRESS) 58 B PRESS SIGNAL - HI
ACTION ANALOG IN 4A LO (FUEL PRESS) 59 C PRESS SIGNAL - LO
SWITCH
PFD (R-DU) 7 RS-485 2A

3160DS2 8 RS-485 2B
(GDU 1040H) 3160A2P1
ETHERNET OUT 2B 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 6
ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN 2A 8
SIGNAL GROUND 38 FUEL PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
REVERSIONARY 1B6
58 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 1B6P1
MODE SELECT 1
3140A2 HI
B
3140A2P3 (GIA 63H) GROUND
D
24 RS-485 1B (GEA 1) LO R R'
23 RS-485 1A (GEA 1) C
17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7B FADEC 10 VDC R R'
16 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7A FADEC A

407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_95_0110
Figure 95-175. EIS — Fuel Pressure and Fuel Flow Indication System — Simplified Schematic (S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
DETAIL A
3

2. Fuel pressure transducer (1B6)
3. Packing
DETAIL B
Figure 95-176. Fuel Pressure Transducer — Removal and Installation (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
The strain gauge circuit of the fuel pressure transducer

receives an excitation voltage of 10 VDC from the
CAUTION
airframe and engine system processor (GEA 71H).
One or both of the aft fuel boost pumps gives a
specific fuel pressure output, which changes the strain INSTALL A PLUG ON THE OPEN PORT
gauge bridge in the transducer. This changes the OF THE ADAPTER TO PREVENT
signal sent to the airframe and engine system FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE TO THE
processor (GEA 71H), which provides the information FUEL SYSTEM.
to both integrated avionics units (GIA 63H).
4. Remove the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) (2)
95-468. FUEL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER — from the adapter.
REMOVAL
5. Remove the packing (3) from the fuel pressure
transducer (1B6) (2).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
95-469. FUEL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER —
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. INSTALLATION
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
MATERIALS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-024 Assembly Fluid

WARNING
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING

EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NOTE EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
maintenance.
2. Lubricate the packing (3, Figure 95-176) with

assembly fluid (C-024).
3. Install the packing (3) on the fuel pressure

2. Remove the interior and gain access to the panel transducer (1B6) (2).
to get to the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) installed
on the right side of the fuselage. 4. Install the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) (2) on
the adapter. Tighten the fuel pressure transducer.
Figure 95-176) from the fuel pressure transducer 5. Connect the electrical connector (1B6P1) (1) to
(1B6) (2). the fuel pressure transducer (1B6) (2).
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
NOTE
CAUTION
Make sure there is a minimum of
70 pounds or more fuel in the main fuel cell.
INSTALL A PLUG ON THE OPEN PORT
NOTE OF THE ADAPTER TO PREVENT
U N WA N T E D M AT E R I A L
Use an external power unit, if available, to C O N TA M I N AT I O N O F T H E F U E L
prevent the battery from being drained of its SYSTEM.
1. Disconnect the fuel transducer (1B6) located in
6. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the the left side aft fuselage from the pressure line. Attach
external DC power to the helicopter. a source of regulated air pressure to the transducer.
7. Set the fuel valve switch to ON. NOTE

8. Set the BOOST/XFR switches to LEFT and prevent the battery from being drained of its
RIGHT. Make sure that the fuel pressure indication is stored electrical power.
acceptable and within limits (BHT-407-FM-2,
Section 1). 2. Connect the external DC power to the helicopter.
9. Make sure there are no leaks at the fuel pressure 3. Close the FAN/AVNCS, ENGINE CONTROLS/
pressure transducer (1B6) (2). FADEC, MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, PFD,
and FUEL/QTY circuit breakers on the overhead CB
panel.
10. Set the left and right BOOST/XFR switches to
OFF.
4. Verify that the fuel pressure digital readout
displays 0 ±1 PSI in red digits on the EIS window.
11. Set the fuel valve switch to OFF.
5. Gradually increase the air pressure until FUEL/
12. Set the battery switch to OFF, or remove the PRESS reads 10 PSI in cyan digits.
6. Check that the applied pressure is 10 ±2 PSIG.
13. Install the access cover and the interior.
14. Return the helicopter to the standard CAUTION

THE PRESSURE REGULATOR TO MORE
95-470. FUEL PRESSURE INDICATION SYSTEM T H A N 6 0 . 0 P S I . Y O U M AY C A U S E
— FUNCTIONAL CHECK DAMAGE TO THE FUEL PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 7. Increase the air pressure until FUEL/PRESS

reads 30 PSI in red digits (do not exceed 33 PSIG).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 8. Check that the applied pressure is 30 +0/-2 PSIG.
Commercial Air Pressure Regulator

9. Decrease air pressure to 0 PSIG.
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
10. As required, repeat the above steps for each 13. Disconnect the regulated air pressure source.
value shown in Table 95-67 and make sure the
indication is accurate. 14. Reconnect the fuel pressure line to the
transducer. Make sure that all connections are tight
11. Open the FAN/AVNC, ENGINE CONTROLS/ and secure.
FADEC, MFD, GIA 1/SYS, GEA, GIA 2/SYS, PFD,
and FUEL/QTY circuit breakers on the overhead 15. Return the helicopter to the standard
circuit breaker panel. configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
helicopter.
Table 95-67. Test Points for Fuel Pressure Indication
INPUT SIGNAL FROM

FUEL PRESSURE INDICATION TOLERANCE
TRANSDUCER
(PSI) (PSI)
(MV X EXCITATION V)
0 0.00 ±0.6
3 0.50 ±0.6
6 1.00 ±0.6
9 1.50 ±0.6
12 2.00 ±0.6
15 2.50 ±0.6
18 3.00 ±0.6
21 3.50 ±0.6
24 4.00 ±0.6
27 4.50 ±0.6
30 5.00 ±0.6
95-00-00
BHT-407-MM-10
maintenance terminal and navigate to the

95-471. EIS — FUEL FLOW INDICATION
Wf Actual parameter.
2. Install the FADEC system maintenance terminal
The fuel flow indication (Figure 95-175) is displayed and access the Wf Actual parameter readout.
via the Engine Indicating System (EIS) strip on the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) in normal mode.
NOTE
The fuel flow indication is displayed in Pounds Per The resolution of the Engine Indication
Hour (PPH) using a digital readout. The resolution of System (EIS) fuel flow readout is displayed
the readout is displayed in 10 PPH increments. in 10 PPH increments.
The fuel flow indication is also displayed as a digital 3. The fuel flow digital readout on the EIS strip
readout on the EIS display of the MFD or Primary should match the maintenance terminal Wf Actual
Flight Display (PFD) in reversionary mode. parameter readout.
The fuel flow signal (Figure 95-175) is provided from

the Wf Actual output of the FADEC ECU (1A50) via the
CAUTION
Arinc 429 databus to both integrated avionics units
(GIA 63H) and then to the MFD and PFD. The Wf
Actual calculation within the FADEC ECU is directly A QUALIFIED PERSON MUST BE AT THE
related to the position of the fuel flow metering valve HELICOPTER CONTROLS DURING THE
within the Hydromechanical Unit (HMU). FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
95-472. FUEL FLOW INDICATION — 4. Start the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2, Section 2).
OPERATIONAL CHECK
NOTE
NOTE
The resolution of the EIS fuel flow readout
Use an external power unit, if available, to is displayed in 10 PPH increments.
stored electrical power. 5. Make sure the fuel flow digital readout on the EIS
strip matches the Wf Actual value shown on the
1. Set the battery switch to BATT, or connect the maintenance terminal with the throttle positioned at
external DC power to the helicopter. IDLE and FLY.
6. Shut down the helicopter (BHT-407-FM-2,

NOTE Section 2).
Refer to the FADEC Maintenance Terminal
User’s Guide, located within the 7. Return the helicopter to the standard
Rolls-Royce 250-C47B Operation and configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Maintenance Manual to install the Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
95-00-00

407 MM CH95 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

407 MM CH95 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BHT-407-MM-10

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

INSTRUMENT SYSTEM AND INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM

95-1 Instrument System and Integrated Avionics System

SECTION I: INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

95-2 Instrument System (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................... 95-00-00 25

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

95-15 Flight Instrument System — Description

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-34 Encoding Altimeter (ATC Transponder Kit) — Description

NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

95-41 Navigation Instruments (S/N 53000 Through 54299) .................... 95-00-00 79

PROPULSION INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-64 Propulsion Instruments — Procedure to View

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-96 NG Indication System — Range Markings ....................... 95-00-00 144

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-131 XMSN Oil Temperature/Pressure Indication System

FUEL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-160 Fuel Signal Conditioner Quantity Circuits, Built-in

MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

95-174 Miscellaneous Instruments (S/N 53000 Through 54299)............... 95-00-00 231

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-194 Clock/OAT/Volts Indicator — Installation .......................... 95-00-00 248

95-199 Garmin G1000H Integrated Avionic System — Operational and

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-227 Master Warning/Caution Pushbutton Assembly (3150S1)

PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

STANDBY INSTRUMENTS (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

95-285 Standby Instruments (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-289 Standby Airspeed Indicator — Inspection................................. 95-00-00 336

95-299 Flight Instrument System — Integrated Displays

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-322 Integrated Avionics and Display System

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-353 EXCEEDANCES & CHIP HISTORY

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-413 Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Indication System

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-452 Fuel Signal Conditioner Unit — Removal ......................... 95-00-00 522

95-1 Instrument Panel — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........................... 26

95-52 Dual Tachometer Indication System — Trouble No. 2

95-56 Engine Oil Temperature/Pressure Indicator — Description

95-80 Ammeter Indication System — Simplified Schematic